proprietary and contents section - miteledocs.mitel.com/ug/aastra/techdocs/pointspan/251204.pdf ·...

M M

Proprietary and Contents Section

ii Aastra– 2512-004

MM

Pointspan Station Database Administration

Aastra – 2512-004 iii

4th Edition (April 19, 2006) © Copyright 2006 Aastra Intecom Inc. All rights reserved.

Information in this manual may change with product revisions. Aastra Intercom Inc. may add features or enhancements to the product(s) and/or program(s) described in this manual at any time.

Technical Publications freezes the information in this manual based on the specified software and hardware releases. Publications writers incorporate such changes into newly released publication editions. PUBS writers will incorporate any modifications provided to them after the publication release date into the next scheduled release of the document.

Aastra Intecom Inc. furnishes the application described in this manual under a license agreement and customers may use or copy information in the manuals only in accordance with the terms of the agreement.

Contact Information Address any reader comments to:

Aastra Intecom Inc. Customer Information Group Manager, M/S 1N 2811 Internet Boulevard Frisco, TX 75034-1851

You may also send email to [email protected].

What to Expect when Contacting Company Technical Publications will email responses to customers within seven business days of the contact. Note that product support is not available through this email address. For product support, contact the Aastra Intecom Inc. Customer Service Center (CSC) at 1-800-729-1872. Aastra Intecom Inc. may use or distribute review comments and information without incurring obligation.

Trademarks and Acknowledgements Product registered trademarks and copyrights of the products included in this publication include Pointspan®, Centergy®, Centergy Remote®, Centergy Reporting®, and Centergy 5® as registered trademarks of Aastra Intecom Inc.

Product trademarks and copyrights of the products included in this publication include Nexspan™, Unified Communication Platform™, Integrated Conference Manager™, and Movacs™ as trademarks of Aastra Intecom Inc.

This document identifies all other products or services mentioned herein by the trademarks, service marks, or product names designated by the companies that market

mailto:[email protected]

M M


iv Aastra– 2512-004

those products. The companies producing these trademarks and registered trademarks control ownership of them. Make all inquiries concerning such trademarks directly to those companies.

Revision History The following represents the revision history of this document:

Revision Number

Date Completed

Point of Contact

Description

004 05.15.2006 Aastra Intecom Technical Publications

Re-branded, reformatted for Aastra Intecom, some sections re-written.

003 01.30.03 EADS TELECOM North America Technical Publications

Re-branded to EADS TELECOM North America format. Added features for PointSpan release 3.0


Update to E System release 12.2


Initial release of this publication.

MM


Aastra – 2512-004 v

Table of Contents

4th Edition (April 19, 2006)................................................................................................ iii

Contact Information........................................................................................................... iii

What to Expect when Contacting Company...................................................................... iii

Trademarks and Acknowledgements ................................................................................. iii

About This Publication ...................................................................................................... xxix

Overview........................................................................................................................ xxix

Audience ........................................................................................................................ xxix

Publication Organization ............................................................................................... xxix

Conventions Used In This Publication ........................................................................... xxx

Terms and Acronyms .............................................................................................. xxxi

Command Examples.............................................................................................xxxvii

References ...........................................................................................................xxxviii

Chapter 1 Getting Started ...................................................................................................... 1

Introduction......................................................................................................................... 1

PointSpan Software............................................................................................................. 1

Station Database ................................................................................................................. 1

Planning........................................................................................................................ 2

Use the Administrative Software Package.......................................................................... 2

Basic Assumptions ....................................................................................................... 2

ASP Prompts and Queries ............................................................................................ 3

ASP (Man/Machine) Messages .................................................................................... 3

User Responses ............................................................................................................ 3

Commands .......................................................................................................................... 4

Special Response Characters ............................................................................................ 10

Command Modes.............................................................................................................. 11

ASP Sign-On and Sign-Off............................................................................................... 12

Logging Function.............................................................................................................. 12

M M


vi Aastra– 2512-004

LOG Command Modes .............................................................................................. 12

Use Log Data.............................................................................................................. 13

Use LOG Monitor ...................................................................................................... 14

View Log Data..................................................................................................... 14

Multiple Response Entries - The Type-Ahead Feature..................................................... 15

Command Nesting...................................................................................................... 16

Nesting Characters ............................................................................................... 16

Nesting Level Limit ............................................................................................. 16

Exit a Nested Command ...................................................................................... 17

Use Nesting.......................................................................................................... 17

Chapter 2 Station Devices..................................................................................................... 19

Overview........................................................................................................................... 19

Integrated Terminal Equipment (ITE) .............................................................................. 19

PC Attendant Console....................................................................................................... 23

Station Self-Test ............................................................................................................... 24

Standard Telephone Equipment (STE)....................................................................... 27

Chapter 3 Station Database Commands ............................................................................. 29

Overview........................................................................................................................... 29

CLOS Command ........................................................................................................ 29

BTNS Command ........................................................................................................ 29

DIRN Command ........................................................................................................ 30

FONE Command........................................................................................................ 30

STE ...................................................................................................................... 30

ITE ....................................................................................................................... 31

LINE Command ......................................................................................................... 31

Chapter 4 Class of Service .................................................................................................... 33

CLOS Command ........................................................................................................ 33

Use the CLOS Command ........................................................................................... 34

Default Values ..................................................................................................... 34

MM


Aastra – 2512-004 vii

Display a Class of Service.......................................................................................... 46

Print a Class of Service .............................................................................................. 47

Search for a Class of Service...................................................................................... 47

Modify a Class of Service .......................................................................................... 48

Chapter 5 Button Templates ................................................................................................ 51

Overview........................................................................................................................... 51

Buttons ....................................................................................................................... 51

ITE and ATDC Feature Button Options ........................................................................... 51

Additional BTNS Fields............................................................................................. 54

View a Button Template............................................................................................. 55

Create and Modify Button Templates ........................................................................ 56

View the Button Template Index ............................................................................... 56

View the Details of a Specific Button Template ........................................................ 57

View Button Template Titles ..................................................................................... 58

Modify a Button Template ......................................................................................... 58

Create a Button Template........................................................................................... 60

Chapter 6 Groups.................................................................................................................. 65

Overview........................................................................................................................... 65

Satellite Directory Groups and Numbers .......................................................................... 65

Create Satellite Directory Numbers ........................................................................... 66

Call Park ........................................................................................................................... 66

Database Requirements for Call Park ........................................................................ 67

Display Assigned Call Park Groups........................................................................... 67

Create a Call Park Group............................................................................................ 68

Assign a Call Park Group to the User Group ............................................................. 69

Assign a Line to a Call Park Group............................................................................ 70

Assign Call Handling Parameters for Call Park ......................................................... 70

Call Pickup........................................................................................................................ 71

M M


viii Aastra– 2512-004

Call Pickup Group Member Types............................................................................. 72

Database Requirements for Call Pickup..................................................................... 72

View Call Pickup Fields in CLOS ............................................................................. 73

Search CLOS Parameters for Call Pickup.................................................................. 73

Add the Call Pickup Feature Button to the Template................................................. 74

Assign the Call Pickup Group and Type .................................................................... 75

Assign Call Pickup Group Members.......................................................................... 76

Display Call Pickup Group Members ........................................................................ 77

Hunt Groups...................................................................................................................... 77

Database Requirements for Hunt Groups................................................................... 78

Meet-Me Conference Group ............................................................................................. 79

Database Requirements for Meet-Me Conference Groups ........................................ 79

MMC Command ........................................................................................................ 80

Display Meet-Me Conference Fields ................................................................... 80

Activate Meet-Me Conference ................................................................................... 81

Display Assigned Meet-Me Conference Groups........................................................ 82

Display Assigned Groups .................................................................................... 82

Create a Meet-Me Conference Group ........................................................................ 82

Create the Conference Bridge Group ......................................................................... 83

Create a Meet-Me Conference Directory Number ..................................................... 84

Display the Meet-Me Directory Assignment ............................................................. 85

Add a Meet-Me Conference Feature Button .............................................................. 85

Assign MMC Capabilities for Attendants .................................................................. 86

Intercom Groups ............................................................................................................... 87

Database Requirements for Intercom Groups ............................................................ 87

Build an Intercom Group............................................................................................ 88

Assign a Station to an Intercom Group ...................................................................... 89

Display an Intercom Group ........................................................................................ 91

MM


Aastra – 2512-004 ix

Modify an Intercom Group......................................................................................... 92

Chapter 7 Find Available Ports and Directory Numbers .................................................. 95

Overview........................................................................................................................... 95

Directory Number Display................................................................................................ 95

Display Unassigned Directory Numbers .................................................................... 95

Display Specific Directory Number Information ....................................................... 96

Phone Port Display..................................................................................................... 97

CARD Command................................................................................................. 98

Choose an Available Port .................................................................................... 99

Identify Port and Directory Numbers from a Phone .................................................. 99

Chapter 8 Build an STE Station......................................................................................... 101

Overview......................................................................................................................... 101

The STE Station.............................................................................................................. 101

Build an STE Station ...................................................................................................... 101

Prerequisites ............................................................................................................. 101

Determine the User Group .............................................................................................. 102

Determine Class of Service ...................................................................................... 102

STE Station Port Determination............................................................................... 102

STE Card Types................................................................................................. 102

Find the Available STE Port with the Card Command ............................................ 103

FONE Command ............................................................................................................ 104

FONE Parameters..................................................................................................... 104

Build an STE Station................................................................................................ 106

LINE Command.............................................................................................................. 116

LINE Parameters ...................................................................................................... 116

Chapter 9 Build an ITE Station ......................................................................................... 121

Overview......................................................................................................................... 121

ITE Station...................................................................................................................... 121

Prerequisites ............................................................................................................. 121

M M


x Aastra– 2512-004

ITE Station Port Determination................................................................................ 122

ITE Card Types.................................................................................................. 122

FONE Command...................................................................................................... 122

FONE Parameters .............................................................................................. 122

Pre-selection Setting for an ITE......................................................................... 125

Build an ITE Station................................................................................................. 125

Line Command......................................................................................................... 140

Chapter 10 Build an Attendant Console ........................................................................... 145

Overview......................................................................................................................... 145

PC Attendant Console .............................................................................................. 145

Configuration ........................................................................................................... 145

Button Templates for Attendant Consoles ............................................................... 146

Database Requirements for GRPS ........................................................................... 147

Attendant Group Assignment................................................................................... 148

Create an Attendant Console.................................................................................... 148

Build Attendant Groups............................................................................................ 149

Assign Attendants to an Attendant Group................................................................ 154

Attendant Priority Groups ........................................................................................ 155

Create an Attendant Listed Directory Number......................................................... 156

Assign an Attendant Priority Group......................................................................... 156

Chapter 11 Line Types........................................................................................................ 157

Overview......................................................................................................................... 157

Standard Voice Lines...................................................................................................... 157

Hotline ............................................................................................................................ 157

Database Requirements for Hotline ......................................................................... 158

Create a Hotline........................................................................................................ 159

Create a Phone and Add the Hotline ........................................................................ 160

Dedicated Central Office Lines ...................................................................................... 161

MM


Aastra – 2512-004 xi

Create and Assign Dedicated CO Lines ................................................................... 161

Database Requirements for a Dedicated CO Line ............................................. 161

Display the DDCO Trunk Group ............................................................................. 162

Assign a Dedicated CO Line to a Station................................................................. 163

Buzz/Station Status Lines ............................................................................................... 165

Database Requirements for Buzz/Station Status ...................................................... 165

Build the Base Station .............................................................................................. 166

Build a Status Station ............................................................................................... 168

Intercom Lines ................................................................................................................ 170

Data Lines ....................................................................................................................... 170

Database Requirements for a Data Line................................................................... 171

Data Terminal Types ................................................................................................ 172

Create a Terminal Type............................................................................................ 172

Add a Data Line to a Port......................................................................................... 177

Restricted Access Direct Inward Dial (DID) Lines ........................................................ 182

Time of Day (TOD) Restrictions.............................................................................. 182

Day of Week (DOW) Restrictions ........................................................................... 182

Day of Year (DOY) Restrictions.............................................................................. 182

Database Requirements for Restricted Lines ........................................................... 182

Create a Time of Day (TOD) Table ......................................................................... 183

Create a Day of Week (DOW) Table ....................................................................... 185

Create a Day of Year (DOY) Table.......................................................................... 186

Create Restricted Access in CLOS........................................................................... 188

Add Time Restriction for the DID Trunk Group...................................................... 189

Modify the DID Trunk Group ........................................................................... 189

Activate Call Restriction .......................................................................................... 190

Chapter 12 Default Command ........................................................................................... 193

Overview......................................................................................................................... 193

M M


xii Aastra– 2512-004

View Default Template Titles .................................................................................. 193

Default Values Display Example ............................................................................. 194

Create a Default Template for an ITE or STE Station ............................................. 195

Modify a Default Template ...................................................................................... 197

STE Default (DFLT) Parameters ............................................................................. 198

Off-Premise Extension (OPX) Default (DFLT) Parameters .................................... 198

ITE Default (DFLT) Parameters .............................................................................. 199

ITE-4 Default (DFLT) Parameters ........................................................................... 200

ITE-S Default (DFLT) Parameters........................................................................... 201

Chapter 13 Move Stations .................................................................................................. 203

Overview......................................................................................................................... 203

Station Move................................................................................................................... 203

Chapter 14 Delete Stations and Lines................................................................................ 205

Overview......................................................................................................................... 205

Delete a Station Port ....................................................................................................... 205

Use Maintenance Out-of-Service (MOS)................................................................. 205

Service States..................................................................................................... 206

Service Status Display with the MOS Command .............................................. 206

Place the Station Port Out-of-Service ................................................................ 207

View Detailed Display of Group by Status........................................................ 208

View Detailed Status Display of the Group....................................................... 209

View Summary Display of Port Status .............................................................. 210

Use the FONE Command to Delete the Station ....................................................... 211

Delete the Line................................................................................................................ 212

Use DIRN/Search .............................................................................................. 212

Chapter 15 Telephone Features ......................................................................................... 215

Overview......................................................................................................................... 215

Abbreviated Dial............................................................................................................. 216

Database Requirements for Abbreviated Dial ................................................... 216

MM


Aastra – 2512-004 xiii

Add the ABVD Button to a Template ...................................................................... 216

Activate 100-Number Abbreviated Dial .................................................................. 217

ABVD Command..................................................................................................... 218

Display Assigned ABVD Numbers.......................................................................... 219

Use Abbreviated Dial ............................................................................................... 219

Answer/Release .............................................................................................................. 220

Database Requirements for Answer/Release ..................................................... 220

User Answer Release................................................................................................ 220

Automatic Dial................................................................................................................ 221

Database Requirements for Auto Dial ............................................................... 221

Assign a Number to an Auto Dial Feature Button ................................................... 221

Display the Auto Dial Number................................................................................. 221

Use Auto Dial........................................................................................................... 222

Busy Override ................................................................................................................. 222

Busy Override Fields in CLOS ................................................................................ 222

Database Requirements for Busy Override........................................................ 222

Use Busy Override ................................................................................................... 223

Busy Recall (Callback-Busy) ................................................................................... 223

Use Busy Recall ....................................................................................................... 223

Callback .......................................................................................................................... 224

Database Requirements for Callback................................................................. 224

Date/Time Stamp...................................................................................................... 225

Callback - Cancel ..................................................................................................... 225

Callback - Display .................................................................................................... 225

Callback - Message Waiting Indicator ..................................................................... 225

Callback - No Answer .............................................................................................. 225

Use Callback ............................................................................................................ 226

Call Forward ................................................................................................................... 226

M M


xiv Aastra– 2512-004

Call Forward - All .................................................................................................... 227

Database Requirements for Call Forward - All ................................................. 227

Call Forward – Busy/No Answer ............................................................................. 228

Database Requirements for Call Forward – No Answer/Busy. ......................... 228

Configure Call Forward - Busy/No Answer............................................................. 230

Database Requirements for Internal/External Call Forward .................................... 232

Configure Internal/External Handling...................................................................... 232

Call Forward Display ............................................................................................... 235

Use Call Forward ..................................................................................................... 235

Call Mark ........................................................................................................................ 236

Database Requirement for Call Mark....................................................................... 236

Call Mark Alarm on System Console....................................................................... 236

Use Call Mark .......................................................................................................... 237

Call Park ......................................................................................................................... 237

Database Requirements for Call Park ...................................................................... 237

Use Call Park............................................................................................................ 238

Call Pickup...................................................................................................................... 238

Database Parameters for Call Pick-up...................................................................... 238

Use Call Pickup........................................................................................................ 239

Call Recording ................................................................................................................ 239

Database Requirements for Call Recording....................................................... 239

Call Waiting.................................................................................................................... 240

Database Requirements for Call Waiting ................................................................. 240

Enable Call Forward-Busy Feature for Call Waiting ............................................... 241

Set Call-Forward Busy Wait Time........................................................................... 242

Cancel ............................................................................................................................. 243

Database Requirement for Cancel ..................................................................... 243

Conference ...................................................................................................................... 244

MM


Aastra – 2512-004 xv

Use Conference ........................................................................................................ 244

Do Not Disturb................................................................................................................ 245

Database Requirements for Do Not Disturb ...................................................... 245

Set Do Not Disturb Call Handling Parameters......................................................... 246

Assign the Do Not Disturb Feature .......................................................................... 247

Do Not Disturb – Distinctive .......................................................................................... 249

Database Requirements for Distinctive Do Not Disturb.................................... 249

Use Do Not Disturb.................................................................................................. 249

Event Timer .................................................................................................................... 249

Database Requirements for Event Timer ................................................................. 250

Group Listen ................................................................................................................... 250

Database Requirements for Group Listen ................................................................ 250

Use Group Listen ..................................................................................................... 250

Hands-Free Auto Answer ............................................................................................... 250

Database Requirements for Hands-Free Auto Answer ............................................ 251

Use Hands-Free Auto Answer.................................................................................. 251

Hold ................................................................................................................................ 252

Database Requirements for Hold ....................................................................... 252

Hold Feature Button ................................................................................................. 253

Add a Hold Button and Create the Hold Type ......................................................... 254

Configure Timed Hold ............................................................................................. 255

Assign Normal Hold to an ITE Port ......................................................................... 256

Assign Automatic Hold to an ITE Port .................................................................... 256

Use Hold................................................................................................................... 257

Exclusive Hold Feature Button ................................................................................ 258

Database Requirements for Exclusive Hold ...................................................... 258

Last Number Redial ........................................................................................................ 260

Database Requirements for Last Number Redial............................................... 260

M M


xvi Aastra– 2512-004

Use Last Number Redial .......................................................................................... 260

Offhook Alert.................................................................................................................. 261

Database Requirements for Offhook Alert............................................................... 261

Privacy and Privacy Release........................................................................................... 262

Database Requirements for Privacy Release and Privacy ........................................ 263

Privacy Release............................................................................................................... 263

Modify Auto or Normal Privacy Release .......................................................... 264

Queuing - Callback ......................................................................................................... 265

Callback Queue Functionality .................................................................................. 265

Database Requirements for Callback Queueing....................................................... 265

Assign UGRP/CHP Parameters................................................................................ 266

Add the Callback Queue Step to the Route Guide ................................................... 267

Cancel a Callback..................................................................................................... 268

Queuing – Short Term .................................................................................................... 269

Short Term Queue Functionality .............................................................................. 269

Database Requirements for Short Term Queue........................................................ 269

Add the Short Term Queue Step to the Route Guide ............................................... 270

Satellite Directory Numbers ........................................................................................... 271

Silent Monitor Any Line................................................................................................. 271

Silent Monitor/Remote Silent Monitor ........................................................................... 271

Monitor Operation.................................................................................................... 271

Monitor Types .......................................................................................................... 271

Configure the Monitor Feature................................................................................. 272

Database Requirements for Monitor.................................................................. 272

Configure Remote Silent Monitor............................................................................ 273

Database Requirements for Remote Silent Monitor .......................................... 273

Numeric Feature Interpret Table (NFIT) Command ................................................ 273

Update a Numeric Feature Code........................................................................ 274

MM


Aastra – 2512-004 xvii

Station Hold Return ........................................................................................................ 275

Database Requirements for Station Hold Return ..................................................... 275

Transfer Camp-On .......................................................................................................... 275

Transfer/3-Way Conference............................................................................................ 275

Database Requirements for Transfer and Camp-on ................................................. 275

Voicemail........................................................................................................................ 276

Database Requirements for Voicemail..................................................................... 277

Assign Voicemail on the Phone ............................................................................... 278

Assign Voicemail Lamp Indicator ........................................................................... 279

Assign a Voicemail ID ............................................................................................. 281

Assign Voicemail Features in the User Group ......................................................... 282

Assign Voicemail Call Handling Parameters ........................................................... 283

Use Voicemail .......................................................................................................... 285

Chapter 16 Other Station Features.................................................................................... 287

Overview......................................................................................................................... 287

Analog Caller ID............................................................................................................. 287

FONE Command ............................................................................................... 287

Direct Trunk Termination ............................................................................................... 288

Display ............................................................................................................................ 288

Date and Time Display............................................................................................. 288

Internal Call Display ................................................................................................ 289

External Call Display ............................................................................................... 289

Incoming Message (IMSG) ...................................................................................... 289

Call Cost Display in Route Guide ............................................................................ 289

Feature Display ........................................................................................................ 290

Emergency Call Handling............................................................................................... 290

E911 Physical Address Resolution........................................................................... 290

Enable and Manage E911 Physical Address Resolution .......................................... 291

Assign an Emergency Associated Calling Party Number to a Station ..................... 291

M M


xviii Aastra– 2512-004

Facility Announcement Message.................................................................................... 293

Annunciator Message Assignment ........................................................................... 293

DIRN Modifications................................................................................................. 293

Leveling Command......................................................................................................... 294

Display Levels.......................................................................................................... 295

Define LEVL Access Levels .................................................................................... 296

Change Password Levels.......................................................................................... 298

Line Preselect.................................................................................................................. 298

Malicious Call Trace....................................................................................................... 299

Multiple Appearance Directory Numbers....................................................................... 299

Machine/Keyboard Dialing and Mnemonic Dialing....................................................... 299

Set Up Machine/Keyboard Dialing Passwords ........................................................ 300

SPAR Updatable System Parameters................................................................. 300

Class of Service Field ........................................................................................ 300

Numeric Feature Interpretation Table (NFIT) Command............................................... 301

Update a Numeric Feature Code .............................................................................. 301

Chapter 17 Directory System ............................................................................................. 303

Overview......................................................................................................................... 303

Name/Number Directory ................................................................................................ 303

Name/Number Directory Options ............................................................................ 303

Basic .................................................................................................................. 304

Deluxe................................................................................................................ 304

ASP Commands Used .............................................................................................. 304

ASP Access .............................................................................................................. 304

Typical Fields........................................................................................................... 304

Basic Name/Number Directory Format.................................................................... 305

Deluxe Name/Number Directory Format................................................................. 306

Create the Basic Name/Number Directory............................................................... 306

Define the Format..................................................................................................... 307

MM


Aastra – 2512-004 xix

Assign Field Titles ............................................................................................. 307

Create Formats................................................................................................... 308

Display and Print Formats ................................................................................. 310

Delete an Existing Format ................................................................................. 312

Field Access Levels.................................................................................................. 312

Authorization Code Directory......................................................................................... 312

Valid C Entries (Field 3).................................................................................... 314

Valid Class Extension Entries (Field 4)............................................................. 315

Authorization Code Administration ......................................................................... 315

Create the Authorization Code Directory................................................................. 316

Search the Auth Code Directory .............................................................................. 316

ASP Commands Referencing Auth Code Directory Data........................................ 317

Wiring Directory............................................................................................................. 318

Field Titles................................................................................................................ 319

Type of Information Stored...................................................................................... 319

Create the Wiring Directory ..................................................................................... 320

Search the Wiring Directory..................................................................................... 321

Spares Directory ............................................................................................................. 321

Fixed Field Titles in the Spares Directory................................................................ 321

Type of Information Stored...................................................................................... 322

Create the Spares Directory...................................................................................... 322

Search the Spares Directory ..................................................................................... 323

TTUP — Title Update .................................................................................................... 323

Functions .................................................................................................................. 323

VAUP Command............................................................................................................ 324

Chapter 18 Class Services................................................................................................... 325

Anonymous Call Rejection - CLASS Services............................................................... 325

Anonymous Call Rejection Feature Operation......................................................... 325

M M


xx Aastra– 2512-004

Activate Anonymous Call Rejection ........................................................................ 325

De-activate Anonymous Call Rejection ................................................................... 325

Anonymous Call Rejection Database Configuration ............................................... 326

Enable Anonymous Call Rejection in CLOS..................................................... 326

Display Anonymous Call Rejection Feature Availability.................................. 327

Display Anonymous Call Rejection Feature Status........................................... 327

Automatic Recall - CLASS Services .............................................................................. 328

Automatic Recall...................................................................................................... 328

Automatic Recall with Confirmation................................................................. 328

Automatic Recall without Confirmation............................................................ 328

Activate Automatic Recall with No IVS.................................................................. 329

Activate Automatic Recall with IVS........................................................................ 329

Activate Automatic Recall with No Confirmation................................................... 330

Automatic Recall Database Configuration............................................................... 330

Enable CLASS Service Automatic Recall in CLOS ................................................ 331

Enable Auth Codes for Automatic Recall in CLOS................................................. 331

Caller ID Suppression (Block/Unblock) – Class Services.............................................. 332

Calling Party ID (CPID) Operation.......................................................................... 332

CPID Feature Control............................................................................................... 332

Activate Caller ID Block ................................................................................... 333

Unblock Caller ID.............................................................................................. 333

Caller ID Block/Unblock Database Configuration................................................... 334

Establish Calling Party Number Defaults for Off-Net Calls in CLOS .................... 334

Establish Calling Party Number Presentation Defaults for On-Net Calls in CLOS. 335

Enable CPID Presentation Defaults to be Overridden on Call-by-Call Basis .......... 336

Call Forward - CLASS Services ..................................................................................... 337

Call Forward Operation............................................................................................ 337

Activate CLASS Service Call Forward.................................................................... 337

MM


Aastra – 2512-004 xxi

Deactivate CLASS Service Call Forward ................................................................ 337

Remote Feature Access - CLASS Services..................................................................... 338

Remote Feature Access Operation ........................................................................... 338

Activate Remote Feature Access with No IVS ........................................................ 338

Activate Remote Feature Access with IVS .............................................................. 339

Remote Feature Access Database Configuration ..................................................... 339

Enable CLASS Service Remote Feature Access in CLOS....................................... 340

Create Feature Directory Number for CLASS Service Remote Feature Access...... 340

Display Remote Feature Access Availability........................................................... 341

Define PIN Length for CLASS Service Remote Access ...................................... 342

Assign Personal Identification Numbers (PIN) for Lines ........................................ 342

Selective Call Forward - CLASS Services ..................................................................... 343

Selective Call Forward Feature Operation ............................................................... 344

Receive a Call with SCF Active............................................................................... 344

Access Selective Call Forward................................................................................. 344

Change Your Forward-to Number ........................................................................... 345

Hear the Entries on Your List................................................................................... 345

Activate Selective Call Forward............................................................................... 346

Deactivate Selective Call Forward ........................................................................... 347

Add an Entry on Your List ....................................................................................... 347

Remove an Entry from Your List............................................................................. 348

Selective Call Forward Database Configuration ...................................................... 350

Enable Service Selective Call Forward in CLOS..................................................... 350

Display SCF Availability for a Partition .................................................................. 351

Appendix I Feature Codes .................................................................................................. 353

ITE4 Feature Codes ........................................................................................................ 353

With Access Button.................................................................................................. 353

Without Access Button............................................................................................. 353

M M


xxii Aastra– 2512-004

STE Feature Codes ......................................................................................................... 354

With Switchhook or Tap Button .............................................................................. 354

From Dial Tone ........................................................................................................ 354

MM


Aastra – 2512-004 xxiii

List of Tables

Table 1. Man/Machine (ASP) Messages ............................................................................ 3

Table 2. Man/Machine (ASP) Commands.......................................................................... 4

Table 3. Man/Machine (ASP) Special Characters ............................................................ 10

Table 4. Man/Machine (ASP) Command Modes ............................................................. 11

Table 5. Log Command Modes ........................................................................................ 12

Table 6. Station Self-Test ................................................................................................. 25

Table 7. Class of Service Categories ................................................................................ 33

Table 8. CLOS Fields ....................................................................................................... 35

Table 9. Feature Buttons ................................................................................................... 51

Table 10. BTNS Fields ..................................................................................................... 54

Table 11. Database Requirements for Call Park ............................................................... 67

Table 12. Database Requirements for Call Pickup ........................................................... 72

Table 13. Database Requirements for Hunt Groups ......................................................... 78

Table 14. Database Requirements for Meet-Me Conference............................................ 79

Table 15. Database Requirement for Intercom Groups .................................................... 87

Table 16. FONE Parameters ........................................................................................... 104

Table 17. LINE Parameters............................................................................................. 116

Table 18. ITE Card Types............................................................................................... 122

Table 19. Required FONE Command Fields .................................................................. 122

Table 20. ITE Pre-select Types....................................................................................... 125

Table 21. Line Command Parameters............................................................................. 140

Table 22. Commands Required to Build an ATDC ........................................................ 146

Table 23. Attendant Console Buttons ............................................................................. 146

Table 24. GRPS Database Requirements for ATDC ...................................................... 147

Table 25. UGRP/UGP Database Requirements for ATDC ............................................ 148

M M


xxiv Aastra– 2512-004

Table 26. CARD Requirements for ATDC..................................................................... 148

Table 27. Call Types for ATDC Calls ............................................................................ 155

Table 28. Database Requirements for Hotline ................................................................ 158

Table 29. Database Requirements for Buzz/Station Status............................................. 165

Table 30. STE Default (DFLT) Parameters .................................................................... 198

Table 31. STE Off-Premise Extension (OPX) Default Parameters ................................ 198

Table 32. ITE Default Parameters .................................................................................. 199

Table 33. ITE4 Default Parameters ................................................................................ 200

Table 34 ITE-S Default Paramters.................................................................................. 201

Table 35. MOS Service States ........................................................................................ 206

Table 36. MOS Port Status States................................................................................... 206

Table 37. Telephone Features ......................................................................................... 215

Table 38. Database Requirements for Abbreviated Dial ................................................ 216

Table 39. Use Abbreviated Dial...................................................................................... 219

Table 40. Database Requirements for Answer/Release .................................................. 220

Table 41. Use Answer Release ....................................................................................... 220

Table 42. Database Requirements for Auto Dial ............................................................ 221

Table 43. Use Auto Dial ................................................................................................. 222

Table 44. Database Requirements for Busy Override..................................................... 222

Table 45. Use Busy Override.......................................................................................... 223

Table 46. Parameter Requirements for Busy Recall (Callback-Busy)............................ 223

Table 47. Use Busy Recall/Callback Busy ..................................................................... 223

Table 48. Database Requirements for Callback.............................................................. 224

Table 49. Use Callback ................................................................................................... 226

Table 50. Database Parameters for Call Forward - All................................................... 227

Table 51. Database Requirements for Call Forward – No Answer/Busy. ...................... 228

Table 52. Database Requirements for Internal/External Call Forward........................... 232

MM


Aastra – 2512-004 xxv

Table 53. Use Call Forward ............................................................................................ 235

Table 54. Database Requirements for Call Mark............................................................ 236

Table 55. Use Call Mark................................................................................................. 237

Table 56. Database Requirements for Call Park ............................................................. 237

Table 57. Use Call Park .................................................................................................. 238

Table 58. Database Parameters for Call Pick-up ............................................................ 238

Table 59. Use Call Pickup .............................................................................................. 239

Table 60. Database Requirements for Call Recording.................................................... 239

Table 61. Database Requirements for Call Waiting ....................................................... 240

Table 62. Database Requirement for Cancel .................................................................. 243

Table 63. Class of Service Parameters - Conference/Group Listen................................ 244

Table 64. Use Conference............................................................................................... 244

Table 65. Database Requirements for Do Not Disturb ................................................... 245

Table 66. Database Requirements for Distinctive Do Not Disturb................................. 249

Table 67. Use Do Not Disturb ........................................................................................ 249

Table 68. Database Requirements for Event Timer........................................................ 250

Table 69. Database Requirements for Group Listen....................................................... 250

Table 70. Use Group Listen ............................................................................................ 250

Table 71. Database Requirements for Hands-Free Auto Answer ................................... 251

Table 72. Use Hands-Free Auto Answer ........................................................................ 251

Table 73. Database Requirements for Hold .................................................................... 252

Table 74. Use Hold ......................................................................................................... 257

Table 75. Database Requirements for Exclusive Hold ................................................... 258

Table 76. Database Requirements for Last Number Redial............................................ 260

Table 77. Use Last Number Redial................................................................................. 260

Table 78. Database Requirements for Offhook Alert ..................................................... 261

Table 79.Database Requirements for Privacy Release and Privacy ............................... 263

M M


xxvi Aastra– 2512-004

Table 81. Call Back Queue Functionality....................................................................... 265

Table 82. Database Requirements for Callback Queueing ............................................. 265

Table 83.Short Term Queue Functionality ..................................................................... 269

Table 84. Short Term Queuing Parameters in CLOS ..................................................... 269

Table 85. Database Requirements for Monitor............................................................... 272

Table 86. Additional Database Requirements for Remote Silent Monitor ..................... 273

Table 87. Database Requirements for Station Hold Return............................................ 275

Table 88. Database Requirements for Transfer and Camp-on........................................ 275

Table 89. Database Requirements for Voicemail ........................................................... 277

Table 90. Use Voicemail................................................................................................. 285

Table 91. ITE Date and Time Display Feature ............................................................... 288

Table 92. ITE Incoming Message (IMSG) Display Feature ........................................... 289

Table 93. ITE Call Cost Display Feature........................................................................ 290

Table 94. Facility Announcement Message Parameters ................................................. 293

Table 95. FONE Preselect Settings................................................................................. 299

Table 96. Setting Up Machine/Keyboard Dialing Passwords......................................... 300

Table 97. Typical Fields for a Name/Number Directory ................................................ 304

Table 98. Steps to Create the Basic Name/Number Directory........................................ 306

Table 99. Authorization Code Directory Fixed Fields.................................................... 313

Table 100. Valid C (Class) Entries ................................................................................. 314

Table 101. Valid EXT (Class Extension) Entries ........................................................... 315

Table 102. Commands Using Auth Code Data............................................................... 317

Table 103. Wiring Fixed Fields ...................................................................................... 319

Table 104. Wiring Directory Field Descriptions ............................................................ 319

Table 105. Spares Fixed Fields....................................................................................... 321

Table 106. Spares Directory Field Descriptions ............................................................. 322

Table 107. Display Vacant Directory Number Information ........................................... 324

MM


Aastra – 2512-004 xxvii

List of Figures

Figure 1. ITE Phones ........................................................................................................ 20

Figure 2 . PC Attendant Console Screen .......................................................................... 24

Figure 3. STE Phone......................................................................................................... 27

Figure 4. ASP Commands for Station Database ............................................................... 29

Figure 5. Typical Data Configuration............................................................................. 171

M M


xxviii Aastra– 2512-004

MM


Aastra – 2512-004 xxix

About This Publication

Overview This manual contains procedures for setting up and maintaining the station database portion of an Aastra Intecom switching system.

Audience This manual is designed for:

• System administrators • Phone technicians • Network managers • Other personnel responsible for assisting with the set up and maintenance of an

PointSpan switching system

A basic knowledge of switches, data communications, and telephony is required to understand switch setup and maintenance operations. You may need additional documentation or assistance to complete procedures described in this manual. Contact your Aastra Intecom Account Manager or call the Aastra Intecom Customer Service Center for additional information on procedures.

Publication Organization This publication contains the following chapters.

Chapter Topic Description

Chapter 1 Getting Started Describes the PointSpan database and how to use the Man/Machine interface (ASP). Includes procedures, commands, and message conventions.

Chapter 2 Station Devices Describes station voice devices. Chapter 3 Station Database

Commands Describes the commands used to build the database for a station.

Chapter 4 Class of Service Describes the Class of Service Command. Chapter 5 Buttons Provides procedures for building button

templates. Chapter 6 Groups Provides procedures for creating the groups

involved with stations. Chapter 7 Find Available Ports

and Directory Numbers

Describes how to find available ports and directory numbers in the database.

M M


xxx Aastra– 2512-004

Chapter Topic Description

Chapter 8 Build an STE Station Provides procedures for building an STE station.

Chapter 9 Build an ITE Station Provides procedures for building an ITE station. Chapter 10 Build an Attendant

Console Provides procedures for building an Attendant Console.

Chapter 11 Line Types Describes the different line types, i.e. voice, data, etc. and provides procedures for creating them.

Chapter 12 Default Command Describes the ASP Default Command and procedures for creating default phone sets.

Chapter 13 Move Stations Provides procedures for moving a station from one location to another.

Chapter 14 Delete Stations and Lines

Provides procedures for deleting stations and lines.

Chapter 15 Telephone Features Describes phone features associated with a feature button and provides procedures on setup and use of the features.

Chapter 16 Other Station Features Describes other station-related features that are not associated with a feature button.

Chapter 17 Directory System Describes the Pointspan directory system and provides procedures for directory setup.

Chapter 18 Class Services Describes Class Services and provides procedure for setup and use.

Conventions Used In This Publication This manual uses the following document conventions to help you identify different types of information.

Convention Description Example

Bold text Characters to enter when referenced in a procedure

In the example, enter DTMF as the group type.

(Italics) Explanatory text within a command sample Also references chapter and sub titles

Enter type of port (Building Ports) Refer to the section Terms and Acronyms in Chapter 1

Courier Example of output that a system displays

Enter Password (and Username)

Horizontal Ellipses Horizontal line omissions in a command sequence

...

Vertical Ellipses Vertical line omissions in a . .

MM


Aastra – 2512-004 xxxi

Convention Description Example command sequence .

Provides supplemental information.

The prompt may not display if …

Provides information to help you avoid possible damage to hardware or a system crash (without data loss).

Use case sensitive commands to keep from destroying…

Provides information to ensure that you avoid danger, death, or permanent damage to a system.

DO NOT touch exposed wires.

Action column In a step/action/result table, contains an instruction.

Type SPAR.

Result column In a step/action/result table, contains anything important that the action causes to happen.

The console displays the new parameter values.

Display Column Same as the step/action/result table. The display column shows the Man/Machine display.

Terms and Acronyms The following terms apply to related information contained in this publication.

Term Acronym Definition

Four-wire trunk 4WT Supports transmission in two directions but isolates the signals by frequency division, time division, space division, and other techniques that enable reflections without causing the signals to commingle. (Also refer to UAT.)

A/B Switch ABSW A/B selector switch setting used in a CM.

Application Programming Interface

API Application Programming Interface.

Automatic Call Distribution

ACD A software component of the switching platform that supports one or more

M M


xxxii Aastra– 2512-004

Term Acronym Definition inbound or outbound call centers. The ACD software configuration consists of one or more Call Centers. Call Centers consist of one or more Call Types. Calls are delivered to the Call Types that, in turn, deliver the calls to one or more Agent Groups.

Administrative Council for Terminal Attachments

ACTA An open organization designed to:

(1) Adopt technical criteria and act as the clearing-house, publishing technical criteria for terminal equipment developed by ANSI-accredited standards development organizations.

(2) Establish and maintain a registration database of equipment approved as compliant with the technical criteria. The Administrative Council will not make substantive decisions regarding the development of technical criteria.

Alarm Information Processing

AIP A component in the primary ECS that gives an alarm definition.

Average Queue Time AQT The prediction of the expected wait time for an ACD call before being answered.

Application Request Call

ARC Calls to the switch for another application.

Basic Rate Interface BRI ISDN service at 128 kbps. Provides conversion between the company’s proprietary 9-bit communications protocol and the ISDN basic rate interface (BRI) standard telephony interface connectivity protocol.

Central Office CO or Telco The local telephone company allows the connection of subscribers for making local and long distance calls. The CO interfaces to an on-premise phone system through wired paths commonly known as trunks. These trunks provide access to callers calling into the phone system, as well as outgoing calls from the phone system.

Circuit Switching CS Circuit switching is used in digital telephone systems and is based on

MM


Aastra – 2512-004 xxxiii

Term Acronym Definition establishing a connection between two end points for the duration of the transmission. This connected and dedicated circuit switched systems feature makes high quality conversations possible in modern telephony.

Class of Service CLOS Sets of privileges and features assigned to phones within existing telephone systems.

Console Monitor CM The console interface to the Pointspan switch.

Calling Party Identification

CPID Refers to the ability of a telephone to obtain the name and/or number of the party calling into it.

Demarcation Point Demarc The demarcation point is the dividing line between the Telco network trunks and the customers on site telephony equipment, cabling, and connections. This interface point is commonly known as a Main Distribution Frame (MDF). The trunks can be either analog or digital or a combination of both with each trunk type requiring its own demarcation point.

Directory number DIRN All digits associated with the name of a subscriber in a telephone directory. Your phone number.

Direct Inward Dialing DID The ability to dial inside an organization directly without having to go through an attendant. (Also refer to UAT

Distributed Pointspan Node

DPN This is similar to the IPN except that it supports the VoIP connectivity and must contain a DPG with DIPG along with the following services: • CDR Service • Directory Service • Auth Code Service The DPN also contains the Nexspan Communications Server software.

Distributed IP Gateway DIPG Provides relevant DIOM functionality through the DIPG (Distributed IP Gateway) service and acts as a communications pass-through for the Pointspan and Nexspan. It facilitates IP phone capabilities on a Pointspan system.

M M


xxxiv Aastra– 2512-004


Distributed Pointspan Gateway

DPG Resides between the Pointspan and Nexspan systems and allows the Distributed Pointspan Node (DPN) to be viewed as a Pointspan partition and to be controlled in a similar fashion as a Pointspan IPN.

Enterprise Control Server

ECS Pointspan Server supporting initial IPN location may be collocated or separated.

Fiber Extended Card FXC Pointspan communications element comprised of a circuit card connected via fiber to a Pointspan node for connection to Aastra ITE digital telephone stations. Allows single pair digital ITE instruments to be located up to 10K feet from an IPN, RTN, or FXN Node. FXCs support up to 36 ports and 72 timeslots.

Fiber Extended Nodes FXN Pointspan distributed node comprised of circuit switched cards from connection to telephone stations and trunks. FXN nodes are always connected to IPN or RTN nodes via fiber optic cables.

File Copy FC Copy a file to another location.

Gain trunk transmission level

Increase in signal power in a trunk that occurs when an electronic device boosts the signal. Measured in decibels (dB).

Integrated Telephone Equipment

ITE Digital telephone equipment designed specifically for use with the Pointspan switch.

Integrated Voice Controller

IVC Uses the Integrated Voice Services (IVS) feature and a flexible scripted call guide to control the playing of announcements and prompts.

Intermediate Distribution Frame

IDF The interface point between the Main Distribution Frame (MDF) and the individual telephone wiring. Usually found on each floor of a multi-story building or in different areas of a building within a campus environment.

Internet Packet Interface

IPI The interface for the internet packet controller that is a data controller circuit that provides format and protocol conversion.

Interprocessor Link IPLK The Ethernet high-speed communications inter-processor link (IPLK1) and the

MM


Aastra – 2512-004 xxxv

Term Acronym Definition inter-processor link interface (IPLK0).

Interprocessor Link 0 IPLK0 The inter-processor link interface.

Interprocessor Link 1 IPLK1 The Ethernet high-speed communications inter-processor link 1.

Integrated Services Digital Network

ISDN Integrated Services Digital Network. Digital telecommunications lines that can transmit both voice and digital network services up to 128K. These lines are much faster and more reliable than high-speed analog modems.

IP-Enabled Voice Communication

VoIP The company’s IP-Enabled Voice Communication enters it into the telecommunication industry’s voice communication through packet switching technology. Architecture represents “convergence” of varied communication types including voice, data, fax, image, and video over a single network as opposed to two separate/unique networks existing today. Before, the necessity for technologically and physically separate networks was based on incompatibility of the underlying network transmission schemes and their suitability for voice and data transmission.

IP Node IPN Pointspan communications node comprised of a circuit-switched matrix and line cards for connection to telephone stations and the Public Switched Telephone Network (PSTN). IPNs are controlled by the ECS and are always connected to the ECS over the IP network. IP nodes can be deployed anywhere in the enterprise where the IP network extends.

ITE Series 2000 Telephones

ITE-S2K The ITE 760 and ITE 780 digital phones that have been adapted for use with the Pointspan M6880 product.

Light Emitting Diode LED A semiconductor diode that emits visible or infrared light when current passes through it. Visible LEDs are used as indicator lights; for example, the light that shows on the phone when a call comes into a station.

M M


xxxvi Aastra– 2512-004


Main Distribution Frame

MDF The wiring location connects the telephone trunks from the Central Office (CO) on one side of the frame to the internal lines from the connected phone system on the other side of the frame. The two then connect by cross-connecting (jumpering) between the two. The MDF resides in the same switch room as the on-site telephone switching equipment.

Message Response Message

MRM The response message sent by the switch in response to the command sent by the OAI application.

Node Control Server NCS Pointspan server supporting the survivability of an IPN other than the initial IPN.

Open Application Interface

OAI A Computer Telephony Integration (CTI) link that allows the switch to interface to applications developed by vendors, such as the Centergy Reporting application, Call Accounting Applications, Integrated Voice Response (IVR), Reader Board Applications, Recorders, Predictive Dialers, and Voice Mail Applications.

Remote Telephony Nodes

RTN Pointspan communication nodes comprised of circuit switched matrix and line cards for connection to telephone stations and the PSTN. RTNs are connected to the IPN through the PSTN, using common T1/IXL connections.

Ringer Equivalency Number

REN Part of the FCC certification number approving a telephone terminal product for direct sale to the end user as doing NO harm to the network. Consists of a number and letter that indicate the frequency response of the telephone ringer.

Secure Shell SSH Transmissions between the users PC and the M6880 Server are encrypted to protect the username and password information from being transferred during the M6880 Server log-on. It also protects potentially sensitive database information transmitted during the session.

SMM A/B Switch Setting

SMM_ABSW – A/B

A/B selector switch setting for the SMM connected to a specific MCU

MM


Aastra – 2512-004 xxxvii


Standard Telephone Equipment

STE Any telephone equipment that can be used on an analog telephone line.

System Maintenance Module

SMM The SMM sits above the Servers in the 19-inch Server Rack of the multi matrix Pointspan IPN and below the Servers in the 30-inch Rack of the single matrix Pointspan IPN. It supports audible alarms and visual indications for some of the system functions including Primary Processor in Service, Major and Minor Alarms, and Remote Maintenance Administration On-Line Status.

T1 Extended Card TXC Pointspan communication element comprised of circuit card connected via a DS1 span for connection to Aastra ITE digital telephone stations or SDAA Analog Adapters. TXCs are always connected to a Pointspan Node (IPN, RTN, FXN) and have 23 ports and 23 timeslots. Used for remote sites requiring a small number of ports and can be located any distance from an IPN/RTN Node.

SDAA only supports an analog station from this card and not both an analog and digital station. This is due to the single time slot configuration of the card.

Command Examples The commands provided in this document are examples. Command prompts and results for your switch may not be identical to the examples. Configuration, software version, or other system differences result in different displays and results.

Many prompts include a default value which is automatically applied if you press the Enter key without typing a response. The default value is shown to the left of the response arrow at the end of a prompt, as in the following example: UNIT IN SECONDS FOR PAUSE (1-7 SECONDS)...........3 =>

M M


xxxviii Aastra– 2512-004

References The following publications provide related information.

Publication Number Title Description 2512-004 Aastra Intecom Technical

Publications Re-branded and re-written for Aastra Intecom

003 01.30.03 EADS TELECOM North America - Technical Publications

Re-branded to EADS TELECOM North America format. Added features for PointSpan release 3.0


Update to E System release 12. EADS TELECOM


Initial release of this publication.

MM


Aastra – 2512-004 1

Chapter 1 Getting Started

Introduction This chapter includes a general description of the PointSpan Database and detailed descriptions of Administrative Software Package (ASP) prompts, queries, and messages; user responses and special response characters; and command modes. Procedures included in this chapter include:

• Administrative Software Package (ASP) Access. How to sign-on and sign-off using a password. Password protection prevents unauthorized users from accessing the system and station databases.

• Using the LOG Command and Monitor. The logging function is an administrative aid for recording commands entered or monitoring the command activity

• Using the Nesting Feature. Nesting (also known as "telescoping") allows you to temporarily suspend processing of the current command to work in another command.

PointSpan Software PointSpan software resides on a hard drive in the Server. The software contains the database which allows the system to function. This includes making calls and system control. The database is typically divided into three parts.

• System Database - Defines system-wide resources and features, such as card setup, call routing, and directory numbers. Directory numbers are assigned for station ports, trunk lines, functions of the Multi-Service Function (MSF) card (such as DTMF tones and ringing), conference numbers, and any other function required for system operation.

• Station Database - Defines the features and locations of the phones and data lines. Features are defined by button templates (ITE phones only) and Class of Service (CLOS). When stations are created in the database, they are assigned user directory numbers and groups.

• ACD Database - Automatic Call Distribution (ACD) is designed for use in a call center environment. It receives calls and routes them to agents based on factors such as the type of call, the incoming line, and the agent’s area of expertise.

Station Database The station database is a collection of tables that define station devices and control their operational capabilities. Classes of Service (CLOS) tables and button templates (ITE phones) define station features and access to services. Button templates and CLOS tables can be shared by several stations.

A voice or data line is defined by the resources assigned to it in a LINE table. These resources include a CLOS table, User Group (UGRP), and Directory Number (DIRN).

M M

Chapter 1, Getting Started

2 Aastra– 2512-004

Voice and data lines are assigned to physical ports on the switch by FONE tables. Telephones and data devices are connected to the switch at the ports. The FONE table also assigns a button template to the port if the station is an ITE phone.

Planning The most important step of setting up your station database is planning. The system you have is designed around a particular number of lines/ports/circuits (phones and data devices), trunks, and features. You should know your system’s capacities:

The terms line, port, and circuit (and sometimes time slots) are used almost interchangeably in describing your system. An interface card may be referred to as a “24-port” card; however, the card’s front panel has indicators for 24 circuits. A voice line can appear on multiple stations and ports. The interface signals are interfaced to a time slot within the switching matrix.

• Port Type and Quantity - Identify how many ports and which types are available on the switch. For example, the Integrated Terminal Equipment (ITE) line interface card may support 36 one-pair or two-pair ports (technically time slots). A telephone port is a physical switch location that supports voice and data lines for ITE ports. Use the CARD command in Display Mode to identify phone ports of the appropriate type (ITE or STE).

• Class of Service (CLOS) - Identify any CLOS pre-programmed on your switch by their configuration. The Class of Service table defines the feature offerings and restrictions for voice or data line its assigned to. Display and research the universal, voice line, and data line classes of service previously built on the switch.

• Button Templates (BTNS) - Identify button templates pre-programmed on your switch. There should be a template available for every ITE telephone. A Button Template defines the buttons on multiple-line ITE phones and Attendant Consoles. The template identifies the number of buttons on the telephone and the configuration of each button as a line select, feature, or unassigned button. Hold type and call termination for each voice line on a phone is also defined with BTNS. The BTNS command is not required to build STE phones.

• Directory Numbers (DIRN) - Identify the allocated directory numbers for assignment to the stations to be installed.

Use the Administrative Software Package This manual contains procedures for using the Administrative Software Package (ASP) to build and maintain the station database. The ASP supports communication with the system control unit and is used during system and station installation, maintenance, and diagnostics. The system and diagnostic procedures are described in other Aastra Intecom manuals.

Basic Assumptions In most cases, a team of your company's technical professionals work with Aastra Intecom personnel to install and set up a new switching system. Be sure to check the configuration sheets provided with your equipment before proceeding with any ASP commands. You may need to obtain passwords and other information from an installation team member before you can perform administration tasks described in this manual.

MM


Aastra – 2512-004 3

ASP Prompts and Queries The ASP displays prompts or queries to request additional information. Queries often consist of a simple request that may include a description of the type of response you should enter. Many queries list valid responses that the system expects in response. Every Query ends with => to indicate that you must type a response and press Enter. The SELECT COMMAND => query is always displayed immediately after you enter a valid password at an administrative console.

ASP (Man/Machine) Messages The ASP displays messages that provide information about the status of your requests. You may encounter these message types:

Table 1. Man/Machine (ASP) Messages

Message Description

Mnemonic Error Characters the ASP does not recognize. For example, if you make a typing error and enter "MRNU" instead of MENU to display the menu of commands, the system displays a Mnemonic Error.

Parameter Error Inappropriate query response including entry of an inappropriate type or a number that is out of the range for the database. For example, if you enter "256" in response to a prompt for a Class of Service number and only 255 classes of service exist, the ASP displays a parameter error.

Trap Error Processing error caused by configuration restrictions or software inconsistencies.

Information System conditions or potential warnings of a locked terminal, lengthy display, or data corruption.

Alarm Indicates specific problems that may require immediate maintenance or contact the Aastra Intecom Customer Service Center for assistance. Alarms are normally printed automatically to ensure that they are not overlooked. The Pointspan Alarms Online Help provides detailed instruction on interpreting and handling alarms.

User Responses Your response to a system query can be a command, subcommand, field, or code that tells the system how to proceed. Commands are processed only after you press Enter. You can type responses in upper-case or lower-case letters. Some system queries include among the choices an option to press Enter to accept a default entry, so it is important to read each query carefully before responding.

On most terminal keyboards, the Enter key must be pressed to process an entry. Although the word "enter" is used in this document, remember that to enter a response, you must type it, then press the Enter key on the keyboard (not the Enter key on the numeric keypad).

M M


4 Aastra– 2512-004

If you are not sure which command to use for a task you need to perform, enter the Menu command to list the descriptions of all available commands in alphabetic order. The commands available in a typical PointSpan switch are listed in the following table

Commands Table 2. Man/Machine (ASP) Commands

Command Name Description

ABVD Abbreviated Dial Lists and modifies the abbreviated dial numbers for a directory number.

ACD Automatic Call Distribution

Displays, prints, or updates ACD groups. (The ACD command does not assign agent directory numbers to groups or pilots; see the LINE command.)

ACDC Automatic Call Distribution Call Guide

Displays and defines ACD call guides and digit collection templates. ACD call guides define, in steps, call flow for incoming ACD calls.

ACDR Automatic Call Distribution Report

Displays, clears, and prints ACD group statistics such as total number of calls processed and call duration.

ACLK Authorization Code Lookup

Authorization Code Lookup displays the auth codes stored in the Authorization Code directory.

ACUP Authorization Code Update

Authorization Code Update creates, prints, and modifies auth codes.

AGID Agent ID Creates and modifies Automatic Call Distribution (ACD) Agent Identification numbers.

AIDD ANI Info Digits Disposition

Sets up digits for equal access and collects Automatic Number Identification (ANI) digits.

AIP Alarm Information Processor

Displays system alarm totals for the Control Unit(CU), Switching Unit (SU), line cards, and Bus Exchange Interface (BXI) cards.

ALRM Alarm Indicators Manipulation

Clears alarm indicators at the CU control panel. (ALRM does not clear the alarms on the console monitor.)

AMD Alarm Message Display Displays and prints alarms from the primary console based on a particular time and date.

AMSG Annunciator Messages Manipulate variable annunciator messages for queuing, ACD messages, attendant messages, etc. Annunciator groups cannot

MM


Aastra – 2512-004 5

Command Name Description be accidentally deleted if they are assigned and being used by a Call Handling Parameter or Call Guide.

APRG Attendant Priority Group Establishes the priority of call types queued to an attendant console.

ARCT Agent Reason Code Creates ACD agent unavailable reason code tables.

ASRP Attendant Console Statistics Report

Displays and prints statistics for attendant console call activity.

ATTR Authorization/trunk Time Restriction

Limits trunk originations or trunk access by authorization codes for incoming trunks. Determines whether a call is allowed for Direct Inward System Access (DISA) applications and schedules automatic events (Auto Events).

AVNT Auto Event Schedules automatic print time for Station Utilization (SUTL) and Trunk Utilization (TUTL) reports.

BTNS Button Template Defines the function of each ITE button. Also defines the hold, line select, line retrieval and reselect options.

CARD Card Assembly Configuration

Creates, modifies, displays, and prints card data.

CCNM Country Name Defines country names for country codes. CCRT Country Code Routing Creates routing parameters based on

international city codes. CDT Collect Digit Table Creates digit collection sequences for use

with Integrated Voice Response (IVR) units.

CFG Configure Devices Switches to redundant circuits of the switch so that maintenance can be performed. CFG also shows equipment status, Out-of-Service data, and other card state information.

CHI Call History Interrogation Displays the Call Detail Record file for a call.

CLCN Call Center Creates, modifies, and displays call centers.

CLOS Class of Service Allows handling of attributes (such as types of calls allowed, features accessible, etc.) for voice, data, and trunk Classes of Service.

CONV Conversion Routines Shows the software status of station, group

M M


6 Aastra– 2512-004

Command Name Description facility, time slot, and physical hardware locations. CONV should be run only with the approval of the Aastra Intecom Customer Service Center.

CPUG Call Pickup Group Prints and displays members in a specified call pickup group. (Use the LINE command to modify a call pickup group.)

DBCK Delayed Backup Schedules automatic or manual daily backups to Tape.

DBUG Dynamic Debugging Tool

Traces messages between the Master Control Unit (MCU) and the system cards.

DFLT Default Creates and modifies default sets of parameter settings for stations. Using sets of default values can simplify and speed up phone creation.

DGN Diagnostics Package Performs diagnostic testing on specified stations and trunks.

DIRN Directory Number Displays or prints assigned or unassigned directory numbers. Creates, modifies, or deletes directory numbers that have not been assigned to voice lines.

DRLK Directory Lookup Displays user name and number data entered previously into the Name/Number directory portion of the Directory Lookup System (DLS).

DRUP Directory Update Creates tables of user name and number data to build the Name/Number directory. Also prints and modifies Name/Number data.

FONE Phone Creates and modifies phones in the database. Is also used to delete phones from the database. It is port based and assigns a CLOS, DIRN, and button template (ITE only) to a specific port. FONE cannot modify the assignment of directory number to a line. See the LINE command.

GRPS Groups Assignments Prints, displays, and updates various types of groups such as Trunk, Data, Annunciator, Call Park, etc. To build Paging, ACD, Intercom, and Satellite Directory groups, use the command of the same name (PAGE, ACD, or ICNM, SDGP).

IMSG Incoming Call Messages Defines messages that display on an

MM


Aastra – 2512-004 7

Command Name Description Attendant Console or on ITE display phones as incoming calls are received.

INCM Intercom Group Creates intercom groups. INCM data is updated when intercom group numbers and dial numbers are assigned to ports via the FONE command.

ISDN Integrated Services Digital Network.

Integrated Services Digital Network.

ITMR Voicemail Report Displays and prints statistics on voicemail system performance.

IVS Integrated Voice Services Creates and modifies integrated voice service phrase groups.

LEVL Level Limits the prompts displayed for the CLOS, FONE, GRPS, LINE, and SPAR commands. The prompts can be limited by command mode (Create, Modify, or Display) and by user access level (1-3).

LINE Line Creates and modifies the assignment of a directory number to a voice line. (FONE also assigns directory numbers to lines.)

LOG Log Prints or monitors the command activity that occurs at a specified ASP terminal.

MENU Menu Lists the commands available at the ASP terminal. Allowed commands are affected by password configuration.

MMC Meet Me Conference Displays and reserves Meet-Me-Conference directory numbers.

MOS Maintenance-out-of-service

Status of Ports - Removes ports from service so that maintenance can be performed. This command also restores service to a port and prints or displays MOS status of ports.

MNTR Monitor Displays and updates the permissions and restrictions associated with the capability to monitor calls to individual ACD Agents, Agent Groups, Teams, Pilots, DNIS numbers and lines, and attendant consoles

NAIL Nailed Connections Updates, refreshes, displays, or prints nailed connection data. Nail creates a permanent software connection between two data ports.

NETW Network Prints, displays, and updates the switching system network configuration to implement facility restriction levels and a

M M


8 Aastra– 2512-004

Command Name Description network-wide Class of Service.

NFIT Numeric Feature Table Creates feature codes that users can dial to activate features from rotary dial phones.

NNX Network Numbering Exchange

Updates, prints, or displays NNX Exclusion (exchange code) group routing. Defines the database for Direct Distance Dial (DDD) to Network Numbering Plan (NNP) conversion.

OAI Open Application Interface

Defines up to 32 OAI functions for use system wide. OAI functions are used to assign OAI features in the system.

ORES Origination Restriction Defines the allowed or excluded Numbering Plan Area (NPA), Network Numbering Plan (NNP), or NNX (1st three digits of a North American local telephone) in a restriction group. A restriction group number can be assigned in a Class of Service.

PADS Loss Plan Customizes the loss plan for trunks and station interfaces.

PAGE Paging Trunk Group Defines a previously define group as a paging trunk group.

PDT Prefix Digit Table Defines the PDTs controlling digits outpulsed by the switch. PDTs are referenced in route tables to define the specific digits outpulsed to complete a call.

PPRL Physical Partition Routing Link

Defines the link path choices between any two Remote Satellite Partition (RSP) groups. PPRL also defines the order in which the paths should be searched for an available link.

PPRU Physical Partition Routing Utilization

Displays the statistics maintained for each RSP group link path. The statistics indicate the number of times a link path was attempted and failed.

ROUT Route Table Defines the route tables which specify terminating (such as trunk groups, NNP inserts, queuing, overflow tones, etc.)

RTNG Diagnostic Routining Displays results of diagnostics run at previously set times on various types of equipment.

SDGP Satellite Directory Group Displays, prints, and updates Satellite Directory groups. (The Satellite Directory group numbers are created with the DIRN

MM


Aastra – 2512-004 9

Command Name Description command.)

SHCM Enhanced LMS Allows selection of either 6MHz or 12MHz LMS.

SPAR System Parameters Displays system parameters, features, and resources. Displays and updates physical partition definitions and enables some system-wide parameters such as the optional overflow tone, type-ahead character, and date format.

SPLK Spare Parts Inventory Lookup

Displays the spare parts entries in the Spare Parts directory.\

SPUP Spare Parts Inventory Update

Used to enter and update spare parts data in the Spare Parts directory

SRCH Search Searches for specific data such as the users assigned to a particular button template or Class of Service.

STAT Communications Statistics Report

Search for connection statistics by type and time of day.

SUTL Station Utilization Reports statistics on station use, such as the number of stations that are off-hook.

TEAM Agent Team Displays and updates groups of agents (DIRNs or Agent IDs).

TIME System Time Control Sets Call Processing time in accordance with database time. TIME also sets daylight savings time schedules.

TONE Tone Table Defines non-standard dialing tones for incoming dialed trunks.

TPAT Table Patch Displays and updates any area of the database based on the raw table name and offsets into a table in the event the appropriate ASP command does not provide the required access.

TTUP Title Update Displays titles for tables in the database. Title entry is optional.

TTYP Terminal Types Defines baud rate, parity, encoding, and other parameters for a terminal.

TUTL Trunk Utilization Reports information on system trunk use and performance. For example, average call durations and number of failures is reported for a single trunk group (detail) or for all trunk groups (summary).

UGRP User Group Creates and modifies tables of user group data such as First Digit Disposition, Call

M M


10 Aastra– 2512-004

Command Name Description Handling Parameters, Network Numbering Plan, Speed Numbers, etc.

UTIL Utility Functions Runs utilities for performing routine or corrective maintenance. Included are subcommands for loading software and validating tables. UTIL should be run only if with approval of Aastra Intecom Customer Service Center.

VAUP Vacant Number Update Stores information related to directory numbers that are no longer available because of phone number or personnel changes or both. Also forwards calls for a vacant number to another number or to a voice message.

WILK Wiring Database Lookup Displays entries in the Wiring Directory. WIUP Wiring Database Update Used to enter and modify wiring data.

Special Response Characters Special characters are used to navigate the database and use special software features. The function of each special character is described in the following table:

Table 3. Man/Machine (ASP) Special Characters

Character Description

? Enter the information inquiry request character (?) to display help text, an explanation of the format, or types of responses the system will accept for a particular query. The ASP accepts the entry of the "?" character only when it is shown in the query as a valid response.

- Enter a hyphen (-) for a display of database information for all devices, groups, etc. affected by a command. The ASP accepts the “-” character only when it is shown in the command query as a valid response.

@ Enter the abort character (@) to cancel the current ASP operation. Entering "@" deletes all information you have entered for the current command to that point and returns the ASP to the SELECT COMMAND query or the ENTER PASSWORD prompt.

* Enter the restart character (*) to back up to a previous system query for an ASP command. Depending on the command and the point at which the restart is invoked, you may lose some entries and be taken several queries back.

# The pound (#) key is a prompt abbreviation character. Entering "#" causes prompts to be displayed in a shortened format, allowing experienced ASP users to conserve screen space.

[ The nesting character ([) permits you to temporarily break from the current

MM


Aastra – 2512-004 11

Character Description command's prompt sequence to investigate information by entering another command. To exit nesting levels, enter the abort character "@" repeatedly until no nested level numbering "[1]" appears and the prompt at which nesting was invoked is displayed.

Command Modes Several command modes let you perform different types of database administration tasks.

Table 4. Man/Machine (ASP) Command Modes

Mode Description

Update Allows you to create and modify the system database. Information you create or change while in update mode is not written to the database immediately. After you respond to each command prompt, the ASP displays changes and the DOES UPDATE VERIFY query. If you enter Y for yes, the new or modified data is written to the database. If you enter N for no, the database remains as it was before you issued the command.

Parameters indicated by three stars (***) after a VERIFY query update may reflect data related to the current command but not defined by it. For example, if you use the SPAR command in Update mode to define a partition of a switch configured for Diagnostic Testing, the message ***DIAGNOSTIC INTERFACE GROUP... is displayed. This is a reminder of the logical relationship between the group and the partition that contains it.

Create Creates new database information. Modify Change or delete data that is currently stored in the database. Modify mode is

accessed through the Update mode. Before changing or deleting data, consider that the database can be configured to allow several User Groups to share data in tables. Determine which groups use the data, and verify that the change will work for all affected users.

Display Displays the requested database information. Print Print table data on a system printer. Search Search for the occurrence of a particular field setting. Titles View the titles associated with a table. Some commands include additional

modes for performing key functions. For example, the ABVD command for storing Abbreviated Dial number information includes a Copy Mode. Some command modes are not for general administrative use. Experienced administrators can use the LEVL and PSWD commands to restrict access to command modes.

M M


12 Aastra– 2512-004

ASP Sign-On and Sign-Off The ASP permits various levels of access to the switch database. Password protection is provided. When the ASP is on-line and not in use, the following prompt is displayed:

ENTER PASSWORD (AND USERNAME):. . . . . . . =>

You must sign-on by entering your pre-assigned password. A user name can optionally be specified and associated with a password. Your access to certain ASP commands, operating modes, and capabilities is may be limited. Passwords may also restrict your access to particular ASP terminals. Additional passwords can be created by your network administrator using the Password (PSWD) command.

The system can be configured to automatically sign off if there is no activity at a terminal for a certain amount of time. To sign-off, enter the abort character @ repeatedly until the sign-on prompt appears.

Logging Function The logging function records commands entered at the ASP monitor. After you enter the LOG command, the logging modes are displayed at the next prompt. Type the first letter of a mode to perform the action of your choice:

SELECT COMMAND => LOG

SELECT MODE: BEGIN, PRINT, END, STATUS, CANCEL, MONITOR, RESTART =>

LOG Command Modes Table 5. Log Command Modes

Mode Description

BEGIN Turns on logging. Saves command and response text in a file. PRINT Prints the contents of the spool file. END Ends logging. STATUS Displays the status (Inactive or Active) of logging. CANCEL Cancels logging without printing or saving file contents. MONITOR Checks activity status of terminals. Monitor is performed at T0 only. RESTART Stops logging and restarts with it a new spool file.

The LOG command is an administrative aid that stores the ensuing activity on the ASP Console. Print key commands before making changes to the database to ensure that you have a dated, time-stamped record of the parameters to be modified. This can serve as reference if necessary. LOG it to print a record of each command performed when you make major adjustments to the switching system such as change Class of Service Parameters, User Group tables, or Updatable System Parameters in SPAR.

MM


Aastra – 2512-004 13

When you activate logging, all subsequent activity on that ASP terminal is recorded in a file on disk until you choose to Cancel, Print, or End logging. Selecting LOG (L) or Print (P) sends a file of all text displayed on the screen since logging started to a connected printer. Because LOG text is held in a RAM buffer until the end of the logging session, your logged data is overwritten if not canceled or printed. LOG includes a Status Mode that allows you to check the status of logging.

The LOG command has no relationship to the Logging Mode provided for other commands, such as DIRN and LINE; those Logging modes work with the Call Detail Recording feature.

Use Log Data Use the following procedure to log data:

Step Action Display

1. Type LOG and press Enter.


2. Type B and press Enter.

All text displayed on the screen after logging is activated is stored in the log file until you choose to Print, End, Restart, or Cancel.

SELECT MODE:BEGIN,PRINT,END,STATUS,CANCEL,MONITOR,RESTART=>B

3. Type the commands and responses to be saved.

• When you print, the

LOG command ends automatically.

• During a restart, logging remains active and a new set of commands and responses are stored.

• When LOG is cancelled, the previously captured commands and responses are no longer available for printing.

LOGGING ACTIVE

SELECT COMMAND => SPAR

4. End logging. • Type P and press


M M


14 Aastra– 2512-004

Step Action Display Enter to print the log file.

• Type E and press Enter to end logging without printing.

• Type R and press Enter to abandon the text in the log file and restart the LOG command.

• Type S and press Enter to check the current status of LOG.

• Type C and press Enter to cancel the LOG file.

SELECT MODE:BEGIN,PRINT,END,STATUS,CANCEL,MONITOR,RESTART=>

LOGGING INACTIVE

Use LOG Monitor The LOG command’s Monitor Mode lets you track and review details of changes made to the database by a specific terminal. Information such as the time, date, user password, and terminal number associated with a change are stored in a log file and can be displayed.

You can search the log for a specific terminal ID, password, user ID, ASP command update, or entity identification. You can print or display the details from the log file.

View Log Data

Use the following procedure to view log data:

Step Action Display

1. Type LOG and press Enter. SELECT COMMAND => LOG

2. Type M and press Enter. SELECT MODE: BEGIN, PRINT, END, STATUS, CANCEL, MONITOR, RESTART => M

3. Type D and press Enter. SELECT MONITOR FUNCTION:

(B)egin; (E)nd; (D)isplay; (P)rint; (S)tatus. => D

4. Specify the terminal: • Type T and the terminal

identification number and press Enter to display details for a specific ASP.

• Type “-” and press Enter to display details for all ASP terminals in terminal number order.

• Type MIX and press Enter to

SPECIFY TERMINAL ID or ?..................... => ?

Specify an individual M/M Terminal: Tx or Txx or "-" for all M/M Terminals (ordered) or "MIX" for all M/M Terminals (intermixed)

SPECIFY TERMINAL ID or ?..................... => -

MM


Aastra – 2512-004 15

Step Action Display display details for all ASP terminals in logged data order.

5. • Enter the date and time period in the format shown and press Enter.

• Type “-” and press Enter for a display of all recorded activity.

Start Date/Time: mm/dd/yy,hh:mm or "-" = all. => -

6. Review the display.

Multiple Response Entries - The Type-Ahead Feature When the ASP displays the Select Command prompt, you can enter any command for which you have access privileges on the system. You can answer each ASP query as it is displayed, or if you are familiar with the sequence of prompts for a command, you can to the system queries for a command. This saves time and screen space because the system queries that you answer in advance are not displayed.

Use the following rules to create type-ahead strings:

• Respond to each query in a command in the proper order. • Separate each response with a semicolon (;). • Enter two semi-colons (;;) in a row to create the same affect as pressing Enter.

In the following example, the DIRN (directory number) command is entered using single responses (first screen below):

SELECT COMMAND => DIRN

SELECT MODE:DISPLAY,UPDATE,LOGGING,SEARCH..=> U

UDIRECTORY NUMBER. . . . . . . . . . . . . => 5540

PDT MODE:C-CREATE,M-MODIFY,D-DELETE,P-COPY=> M

Specify DATA LINE Field to Modify or ? . . => ITT

INSIDE TERMINAL TYPE. . . . . . . . . . . 1 => 4

Specify DATA LINE Field to Modify or ?. . . =>

In the following example, commands are entered using a type-ahead string:

SELECT COMMAND => DIRN;U;M;5540;ITT;4;;

SELECT Specify DATA LINE Field to Modify or ? =>

If a type-ahead string contains an error, only the responses before the error are processed. The remaining portion is discarded. The ASP displays a message to indicate the source of the error.

M M


16 Aastra– 2512-004

The semi-colon is the default separator (delimiter) for the type-ahead feature. You can use the SPAR command to specify another character you want to use to separate the responses in a type-ahead string.

Command Nesting Nesting permits you to suspend processing of the current command prompt sequence and access other commands when there is prerequisite database to be built or when additional information is necessary for you to complete the process in the current command.

Nesting Characters

Enter the Nesting character ([) after any prompt to invoke the feature. After you enter "[", processing of the current command ceases. The *[1]* SELECT COMMAND => prompt is displayed to allow you to enter another command. The "one" in brackets, *[1]*, indicates that you are in nesting level one (1).

Nesting Level Limit

You can nest up to three levels from your base level (your original command). The number of nested levels allowed for access may be limited to less than three depending on your switching system's available resources. The system limit can be displayed using the SPAR command. The following error message is displayed when nesting levels are exceeded.

*** NESTING LEVEL LIMIT EXCEEDED ***

Nested prompts are preceded by a nesting level number. No nesting level number is displayed while in the base level. For example, if you have entered the nesting character twice, the ASP displays:

*[2]* SELECT COMMAND =>

• Command Nesting cannot be used when you are building an Auto-Event. • Command Nesting cannot be used in response to the ENTER PASSWORD =>

prompt. • The Log command (LOG) may only be invoked at the base (top) command level;

LOG cannot be invoked during nesting.

MM


Aastra – 2512-004 17

Exit a Nested Command

To exit from a nesting level or cancel a command, enter the abort character (@). The nested level continues until the abort character (@) is entered in response to a *[1]* SELECT COMMAND => prompt. The abort character causes the current command to exit only. If you are on level 3 when you enter the abort character, you will exit only to level 2. You must sequentially exit the nest levels. When you exit all nesting levels, the ASP returns to the prompt where the nesting was started.

Avoid modifying a system resource such as a port or card in both your nested commands and the original command sequence you telescoped from. Modifying in both command sequences may create the affect of two Administrative Consoles executing the same update activity simultaneously and cause a system error.

Use Nesting

Step Action Display

1. Type DIRN and press Enter. SELECT COMMAND => DIRN

2. Type U and press Enter. SELECT MODE:PRINT, DISPLAY,UPDATE,LOGGING,SEARCH=> U

3. Type C and press Enter.

In this example, an error is displayed because the number entered has not been allocated.

UPDT MODE: C-Create M-Modify D-Delete P-Copy. => C

4. Type the directory number you want to create in the database and press Enter.

The nesting level indication ("*[1]*") displays in all prompts to indicate you have "telescoped" to another level to enter commands.

DIRECTORY NUMBER or ?............... => 4089

** MMP ERROR: DIRECTORY NUMBER NOT ALLOCATED ** MMP ERROR: PLEASE REPEAT RESPONSE

5. Type the nesting character ([) to suspend processing of the DIRN command and press Enter. You can now issue a command to display the allocated numbers.

DIRECTORY NUMBER or ?............ => [

6. Type UGRP/DNA and press Enter to review the blocks of directory numbers. Enter the appropriate responses at each prompt to create, modify, or view

*[1]* SELECT COMMAND => UGRP/DNA

*[1]* SELECT MODE:PRINT,DISPLAY,UPDATE,TITLES => D *[1]* USER GROUP NUMBER (1- 63) OR ?..... => 1 *[1]* SELECT SUBCOMMAND or ? => DNA

M M


18 Aastra– 2512-004

Step Action Display the data you need for the previous (suspended) command prompt.

** USER GROUP #:1 DIRN DESCRIPTION 12/12/00 9:21:24

The following directory numbers are allocated:

42300-42599 46000-46099 5000-5099 5200-5599 . . END OF DISPLAY

7. After you accomplish your objective, enter @ several times to exit the nested level.

*[1]* SELECT SUBCOMMAND or ? => @ *[1]* SELECT COMMAND => @

8. When the *[1]* is no longer displayed, the ASP has returned to the prompt at which you suspended processing. In this example, the research done with the DIRN command is used to identify a valid directory number.

DIRECTORY NUMBER or ?............ => 5089

ENTER DIRECTORY TYPE: OR ?............. =>

MM


Aastra – 2512-004 19

Chapter 2 Station Devices

Overview Before you install a phone, you must identify the phone model and determine the features it supports. Aastra Intecom offers several different phone models to serve user needs.

The digital design of the Aastra Intecom Integrated Terminal Equipment (ITE) phones allows use with modular data devices for integration of voice and data. Some ITE models can be configured for operation as Attendant Consoles (ATDC). ITEs can also be configured to support the PC-based version of the attendant console, Personal Computer Attendant Console (PCATDC). ITEs use either programmable feature buttons or the keypad to activate PointSpan features.

Integrated Terminal Equipment (ITE) Aastra Intecom proprietary digital Integrated Terminal Equipment (ITE) telephones are available in five models and are listed and described in the following table.

All ITE telephone models:

• Have user programmable feature buttons on the keypad to activate features, except the ITE 4.

• Support, the telephones are used in conjunction with modular data devices to integrate both voice and data over twisted-pair wire.

• Except the ITE-4, support multiple lines with the same directory number appearing on a maximum of 32 stations.

M M

Chapter 2, Station Devices

20 Aastra– 2512-004

Figure 1. ITE Phones

Integrated Terminal Equipment Description

The ITE-4: • Is the most basic ITE digital telephone. • Is a single-line instrument that auto-senses between

single-pair and two-pair operation. • Uses a standard 12-button keypad. • Has four predefined feature buttons: Hold, Transfer,

Callback, and Access (TAP). • Has an LED that indicates Line In Use, Voicemail

Messages, and Callback messages. • Has an adjustable ringer tone and volume control.

The ITE-12+: • Is a digital multi-line telephone that auto senses between

single and two-pair operation. • Has 12 fully programmable line/feature buttons each

with an associated LED indicator. • Has a listen-only monitor speaker with adjustable

volume control. The monitor speaker can be used for on-hook dialing, to listen to voicemail messages and to monitor a call while the ITE user is on hold.

• Has an adjustable ringer tone and volume control.

MM


Aastra – 2512-004 21


The ITE 12S: • Is a digital multi-line telephone that auto senses between

single and two-pair operation. • Has 12 fully programmable line/feature buttons, each

with an associated LED indicator. • Has a full-featured, integrated two-way speaker phone,

with a built-in microphone, an on/off button, and a microphone mute switch.

• Has an adjustable ringer tone and volume control.

The ITE-12SD: • Is a digital multi-line telephone that auto senses between

single and two-pair operation. • Has 12 fully programmable line/feature buttons, each

with an associated LED indicator. • Has a full-featured, integrated two-way speaker phone,


• Has a 40-character LCD alphanumeric display that provides information regarding calling party, feature status, and called party.

The ITE-30SD: • Is a digital multi-line telephone that auto senses between

single and two-pair operation. • Has 30 line/feature buttons:

− 25 programmable line/feature buttons. − 4 fixed features buttons: Hold, Transfer, Display,

and Redial. • Has a full-featured, integrated two-way speaker phone


• Has Up/Down arrow keys for headset/handset volume control.

• Has a handset amplifier that can be adjusted by the user on each call.

M M


22 Aastra– 2512-004

Integrated Terminal Equipment Description • Has a 40-character LCD alphanumeric display that

provides information regarding calling party, feature status, and called party.

The ITE Agent Telephone: • Is a digital multi-line telephone that auto senses between

single and two-pair operation. • Has two headset jacks and one handset jack, allowing

for supervisor training and assistance at the station. • Supports most popular headset models. • Has a jack for interfacing to recording devices. • Has 30 line/feature buttons:

− 25 programmable line/feature buttons − 4 fixed features buttons: Hold, Transfer, Display,

and Redial • Has a full-featured, integrated two-way speaker phone


• Has Up/Down arrow keys for headset/handset volume control.

• Has a handset amplifier that can be adjusted by the user on each call.

• Has a 40-character LCD alphanumeric display that provides information regarding calling party, feature status, and called party.

The ITE-760 Telephone: • Alphabetic Keypad for Directory Search • Hands-Free Operation • Interactive Display • 5 Softkeys Provide access to a menu of specific

functions that change according to the state of the phone • 20 Feature Keys and LED status lamps provide access

to features, auto dial numbers, etc. • A Private Directory provides a personal directory of 100

numbers that can be categorized into 4 different lists • Navigator Keys provide access to call handling and

phone administrative functions • An Incoming Calls Log provides recorded details of the

last 50 incoming calls to the phone • An Outgoing Calls Log provides recorded details of the

last 10 numbers dialed from the phone • Speaker Key • Mute Key

MM


Aastra – 2512-004 23


The ITE-780 Telephone: • The Tactile Screen Display provides access to the

following using a separate stylus to point to items on the screen: − Caller ID − Feature keys − Private Directory − Incoming Calls Log − Alphabetic and Numeric Keypads − Phone configuration − Key labeling − Calculator − Memo − Phone Lock

• 5 Softkeys Provide access to a menu of specific functions that change according to the state of the phone

• 60 Feature Keys and LED status lamps provide access to features, auto dial numbers, etc.

• A Private Directory provides a personal directory of 100 numbers that can be categorized into 4 different lists

• Navigator Keys provide access to call handling and phone administrative functions

• An Incoming Calls Log provides recorded details of the last 50 incoming calls to the phone

• An Outgoing Calls Log provides recorded details of the last 10 numbers dialed from the phone

• Speaker Key • Mute Key

PC Attendant Console The Personal Computer Attendant Console (PCATDC) is a Computer Telephony Integration (CTI) application for use with ITE phones. The PCATDC allows the user to perform all call handling functions, capabilities, and features from the PC. A phone (or headset) is used for voice communication while the PC with PC Attendant Console installed supports phone features and functionality.

The application software operates in a Microsoft Windows environment and communicates with the switch through a PDI-1000S programmable data interface.

A phone (or headset) is used for voice communication while the PC, with PC Attendant Console installed, supports phone features and functionality. Function buttons, feature buttons, dial pads, and displays associated with the hardware version are shown on a PC screen. Figure 2 . PC Attendant Console Screen shows the PC Attendant Console main window.

M M


24 Aastra– 2512-004

Buttons are selected on screen using a mouse or with keystrokes. The keystrokes are shown next to each button on the screen. Button labels can be configured using the PC software. Dialing can be performed either with the mouse or with a reconfigured number pad on the PC keyboard. Some function selections and dialing can also be entered from an ITE phone. Refer to the PC Attendant Console User Guide (590-2424-nnn) for additional information.

Figure 2 . PC Attendant Console Screen

Station Self-Test The station Self-Test commands are a collection of dialed codes that can be used with the following telephones:

• Standard Telephony Equipment (STE) • Integrated Terminal Equipment (ITE) • Attendant Console (ATDC)

These codes determine operational information such as the:

MM


Aastra – 2512-004 25

• Directory number assigned to the station or line button. • Class of service associated with a directory number. • Button template assigned to an ITE or ATDC phone.

The table below contains a list of the available station maintenance codes and what information can be obtained using each code including available tests, the phone type (application), procedure (action), and response. Each code must be entered from dial tone on the station, line, or loop being tested or queried.

Table 6. Station Self-Test

Test Name Application Action Response

Class of Service All Press # * 110 Hear Class of Service Number Button Template ATDC, ITE Press # * 111 Hear Button Template Number

Press # * 112 All Lamps Off (Self Test) Press Each Button 5 times

Yellow Lamp (ITE Only)

Red Lamp

1st Time On On 2nd Time On Slow Blink 3rd Time On Fast Blink 4th Time On Flutter 5th On On Press Keypads 1 thru 0, *, #

Hear Zip Tone

Press Any Key Except 1

Hear Reorder Tone

Button Lamps ATDC, ITE

Go on/off-hook (ATDC remove & insert headset)

Station Rings/Ringing Stops

Directory Number All Press # * 113 Hear Directory Number Time Slot Number PointSpan Press # * 114 Hear Time Slot Number Terminal Type ALL Press # * 115 Hear Inside Terminal Type,

Outside Terminal Type, and Current Terminal Type

User Group ALL Press # * 116 Hear User Group Number Data Directory Number

ALL Press # * 117 Hear Data Directory Number

Trunk Port Number ALL During Trunk Call, Press XFER, #*118

Hear Trunk Port Number

PointSpan Location ALL Press # * 119 Hear Rack/Shelf/Slot/Circuit Press # * 5 Hear Port Number of a DTMF

Generator Port DTMF Ports STE Only

Press In Order Hear DTMF Tones (Anything other

M M


26 Aastra– 2512-004

Test Name Application Action Response 1 thru 0, #, * than DTMF indicates bad port.) Press # * 2 Hear Zip Tone Press 00 Hear Silence Press 01 Hear Inside Dial Tone Press 02 Hear Outside Dial Tone Press 03 Hear Modem Answer Tone Press 04 Hear Milliwatt Tone Press 05 Hear Busy Tone Press 06 Hear Reorder Tone Press 07 Hear Ringback Tone Press 08 Hear Call Wait Ringback Tone Press 09 Hear Zip Tone Press 10 Hear Zip Zip Tone Press 11 Hear Inside Call Wait Tone Press 12 Hear Outside Call Wait Tone Press 13 Hear Override Warning Tone Press 14 Hear “Held” Press 15 Hear “Enter” Press 16 Hear “Private” Press 17 Hear “Forward” Press 18 Hear “Message”

VRU ALL

Press 19 Hear “Voice Message”

MM


Aastra – 2512-004 27

Standard Telephone Equipment (STE) The Aastra Intecom Standard Telephone Equipment (STE) analog phone, described in the following table, is a single-line analog phone. An STE uses feature codes dialed on the telephone keypad to access Pointspan phone features.

Figure 3. STE Phone

Standard Telephone Equipment Description The STE: • Is a standard single-pair, fully modular

2500-type analog telephone. • Has features that are accessed by

pressing either a switch hook or an optional TAP button followed by dialing the appropriate feature code on the STE keypad.

• The faceplate is stenciled with the feature access codes and directions.

• A 12-button digital keypad. • A data port.

M M


28 Aastra– 2512-004

MM


Aastra – 2512-004 29

Chapter 3 Station Database Commands

Overview Before you install a phone, you must know the phone model and the features that will we assigned. Several ASP commands are required for building an STE or ITE telephone device. The following drawing depicts the commands and their relationship to the devices.

Figure 4. ASP Commands for Station Database

FONESTE Telephone

(Station)

FONEITE Telephone

(Station)

CLOSClass of Service

UGRPUser Group

DIRNDirectory Number

BTNSButton Template

LINE – Voice Line/Directory Number



CLOSUGRPDIRNLINE Parameters

CLOS Command The CLOS (Class of Service) command assigns permissions for feature use.

BTNS Command The BTNS (Buttons) command builds templates that define button assignments for the ITE phones. STE stations do not have feature buttons and do not require button templates.

The button template defines each feature and line select button. A button template defines other parameters that control:

M M

Chapter 3, Station Database Commands

30 Aastra– 2512-004

• Hold Type • Use of numeric keypad or feature buttons • Other parameters that apply to each station using the template

These parameters are stored in the button template and apply only to ITE stations. The button template is linked to the ITE station device using the FONE command.

DIRN Command Use the DIRN (Directory Number) command to find an available directory number from the list of directory numbers defined in User Group, Directory Number Allocation (UGRP/DNA). Directory number assignments and availability are displayed using the DIRN command.

There are various types of directory numbers on the system including:

• VLIN – voice Line • DLIN – Data Line • SDGP – Satellite Directory Group numbers • HUNT – Hunt Group Number • ACDP – ACD Pilot Number • QNBR – Quick Number • PKCH – Park Channel Number • MMCF – Meet-Me Conference • ATDC – Attendant Console • AGRP – Attendant Group • And others.

FONE Command The FONE command assigns parameters that affect the physical phone such as:

STE

• Links directory number to the station. • Ring • DTMF or PULSE dialing • Hook-flash recognition (for feature access) • Do Not Disturb • Other parameters associated with the physical device.

An STE can only have one directory number assigned. Several STE phones can have the same directory number.

MM


Aastra – 2512-004 31

ITE

The FONE command assigns parameters such as the following for an ITE device:

• Button Template Assignment • Display • Do Not Disturb • Multiple line handling • Other parameters associated with the physical station

The ITE can have multiple lines and multiple features assigned to the buttons. The number of assigned features and lines is limited to the type of ITE.

LINE Command The LINE command assigns parameters pertaining to the specific directory number or line. Some of the parameters assigned with the LINE command are:

• Call forward numbers • Voicemail ID number • Call pick-up group number • Other line parameters

A LINE is a directory number or voice line. The LINE parameters apply to all appearances of the directory number. If a line is set to forward to voicemail when not answered, it forwards no matter what stations has that line assigned.

The LINE command also uses CLOS, UGRP, and FONE. Whether a directory number actually rings is defined in FONE, not in LINE.

M M

Chapter 3, Station Database Commands

32 Aastra– 2512-004

MM


Aastra – 2512-004 33

Chapter 4 Class of Service

CLOS Command A class of service defines feature use/permissions for voice lines, data lines, trunks, etc. The class of service is maintained using the CLOS command and is assigned to the individual line/trunk in other commands such as the LINE command. Up to 254 classes of service can exist on the switch; however, only 10 to 12 classes of service are usually required. A class of service does not apply to a station device.

There are five CLOS types:

• VLN - Voice Line • VTK - Voice Trunk • DLN - Data Line • DTK - Data Trunk • UNV - Universal

When you build a class of service type, the prompts appear for only those parameters that apply to the type being built. For example, when building a voice line class of service, prompts that apply only to data lines or trunks do not appear. A voice line-type class of service cannot be assigned to a trunk or data line. A Universal class of service can be assigned to any of the voice or data lines or trunks.

Class of service is a global system resource that can be shared by any entity that requires a class of service assignment.

Class of service parameters define capabilities and allowances that fall into the following five general categories of information:

Table 7. Class of Service Categories

Category Description

Call Feature Availability Features such as Call Forward, Call Waiting, Hold, Transfer types, etc., are allowed or disallowed in the class of service.

Call Types Allowed Several class of service parameters specify the call types allowed or disallowed, such as long distance, international, and internal station-to-station calls. Because CLOS applies only to voice lines, on an ITE device with multiple lines, one directory number could be allowed to place toll calls, and another directory number on the same phone could not be allowed to place toll calls.

Account Codes/Authorization Codes

Several classes of service parameters define account code collection. For account codes, CLOS is the only setup required. CLOS parameters also define how the system

M M

Chapter 4, Class of Service

34 Aastra– 2512-004

Category Description collects authorization codes.

For authorization codes, the class of service only specifies how the codes are collected, not when they are collected. The User Group First Digit Distribution table defines when the authorization codes are collected.

Routing Characteristics A CLOS has several parameters controlling how calls can be routed. See 591-2513-nnn Pointspan System Database Administration for more information about these parameters.

ACD Features Some CLOS parameters relate to agent monitoring, agent recording, and agent setup. See 591-2542-nnn ACD Administration Procedures for more information about these parameters.

Use the CLOS Command The CLOS command maintains each class of service. The Display mode of the class of service command can determine what classes exist on the switch and which are unassigned and available.

The Update mode of the CLOS command can:

• Create a new class of service • Copy an existing class of service • Modify an existing class of service • Delete a class of service

Default Values

All class of service parameters have a default value. Press the Enter key at any prompt to accept the default value. Be very careful when accepting defaults to ensure you understand what you are setting up in the class of service.

Data Trunk (DTK) and Line Trunk (LTK) CLOS types are used in the system database. Refer to Pointspan System Database Administration (590-2513-XXX) for more information.

When you choose any CLOS type other than UNV, the Administrative Software Package (ASP) displays only prompts that relate to the function of the specified CLOS type.

Class of Service Fields In the CLOS command, a three-character acronym identifies the field within the class of service that represents available features. You can step through all of the prompts for your CLOS type or modify specific feature prompts directly. The three-letter acronym is

MM


Aastra – 2512-004 35

used to directly access a desired feature. The following table shows these acronyms and the field descriptions:

Table 8. CLOS Fields

Acronym Field Description Function

AAR Authorization Code Validation With Automatic Recall

If set to Yes, users must enter an authorization code to return a call using the Automatic Recall feature.

ABD Abbreviated Dial If set to Yes, users have access to the Abbreviated Dial feature.

ABM Monitored Priority Indicates the rank of directory numbers in this CLOS among all other lines that can use the Monitor feature.

AC1 Post Account Code With N11 If set to Yes, users must dial an account code after dialing a special NPA like 411 or 911.

AC5 Post Account Code With Information

If set to Yes, users must dial an account code after dialing an information call.

AC8 Post Account Code With 1+800 If set to Yes users must dial an account code after dialing a toll free number.

ACD Post Account Code With Direct Distance Dial

If set to Yes, users must dial an account code after dialing a Direct Distance Dial (DDD) call.

ACI Post Account Code With International Direct Distance Dial

If set to Yes, users must dial an account code after placing an International Direct Distance Dial (IDDD) call.

ACL Post Account Code With Local If set to Yes, users must dial an account code after dialing a local call.

ACN Post Account Code With On-Net If set to Yes, users must dial an account code after dialing an on-net call.

ACQ Post Account Code With Quick Number

If set to Yes, users must dial an account code after dialing a quick number.

ACR Access Code Routing Allowed If set to Yes, the Access Code Routing feature can be used. The ACR feature lets users dial an access code to select a specific type of trunk.

ACS Post Account Code With Speed Numbers

If set to Yes, users must dial an account code after dialing a speed number.

If ARQ is set to Yes, this prompt displays.

ALG Account Code Length Specifies the length of account codes. ALT Post Account Code With Local

Toll If set to Yes, users must dial an account code after dialing a local toll call.

AMR Automatic Recall If set to Yes, users can automatically redial the last incoming number without knowing the number or the calling party, by dialing *69.

AQP ACD Queuing Priority Level Selects priority level for queueing incoming Automatic Call

M M


36 Aastra– 2512-004

Acronym Field Description Function Distribution calls. The highest priority (7) calls are answered first by agents of a pilot when all agents are busy. A level of 0 means no priority is assigned.

ARC OAI Application Requested Calls

If set to Yes, users can make Open Application Interface-supported calls.

ARJ Anonymous Call Rejection If set to Yes, users may reject calls that do not present a CPID. The activation code for this feature is *77; the deactivation code is *87.

ARQ Prefix Account Code Required If set to Yes, users must dial an account code before dialing an outside call.

ATC All Trunk Conference If set to Yes, users can set up a conference using trunk facilities.

ATM Monitoring Priority Indicates the directory number's rank in the monitor priority scheme for all stations on the switch that use the feature.

AUL Authorization Code Length Selects the length of authorization codes (1 to 14 digits).

If OPA is set to Yes, this prompt displays.

AUR Authorization Code Restriction If set to Yes for Voice Trunk CLOSs that need to restrict authorization codes on incoming trunks.

AUT Authorization Code Placement Specifies if users must dial an authorization code before dialing outside calls. Selections are: • PRE - Prefix Auth Code • PST - Unconditional Postfix Auth Code • PAP - All 9 Conditional Postfix Options To select Prefix or Unconditional Postfix or Conditional Postfix with all options set, enter only the field and press Enter. Example: ->PST To select individual conditional postfix options, enter the field, a comma, Y or N, and press Enter. Example: ->PAS,Y. The individual selections are: • PAS - Postfix With Speed Numbers • PAD - Postfix With DDD...Direct Distance • PA8 - Postfix With 1+800 • PAL - Postfix With Local • PAN - Postfix With NNP • PAT - Postfix With Local Toll • PAI - Postfix With IDDD..011+ • PA5 - Postfix With Information...555- • PA1 - Postfix With N11

MM


Aastra – 2512-004 37


If OVA is set to Yes, this prompt displays.

BOP Busy Override Priority Indicates the directory numbers' rank in the Busy Override priority. Busy Override lets a user interrupt a call only if all users in conversation have a lower Override priority.

BRC Busy Recall If set to Yes, users can leave a Callback after calling an internal busy line.

BRD Busy Recall Destination If set to Yes, other users can leave a Call Back message when the line is busy.

BSO Busy Override Allowed Indicates whether the Busy Override feature is allowed which lets the user press a feature button to interrupt a call on another line.

CBQ Call Back Queue Bypass If set to Yes, calls can skip Call Back Queue steps in a route guide.

CCR Continuous Call Recording Selects Continuous Call Recording feature: • N - No Continuous Call Recording • A - Continuous Record ALL Calls • D - Continuous Record ACD Calls Only

CDL Allow Carrier Selected Direct Local

If set to Yes, users can dial a carrier code before dialing a local call.

CDO Customer Dialed Operator Supervised

If set to Yes, users can place Customer Dialed Operator Supervised International calls

CDR Call Detail Recording If set to Yes, details of calling activity are collected. CDT Carrier Selected Direct Toll If set to Yes, users can dial a carrier code before dialing a

long distance number. CFA Call Forward - All If set to Yes, the Call Forwarding feature is enabled. CFD Call Forward Destination If set to Yes, a forwarded call can terminate at any directory

number with this CLOS assigned. CIB Caller ID Block/Unblock If set to Yes, users can block their name and number to a

called party. The activation code for this feature is *67; the deactivation code is *82.

CID Carrier Selected International If set to Yes, users can dial a carrier code before dialing an international call.

CIO Carrier Selected International Operator

If set to Yes, users can dial a carrier code before dialing an operator for international call assistance

CLP Call Pickup Origination Selects Call Pickup origination feature. Selections are: • N - Using Call Pickup is not allowed. • D - Allow Directed Call Pickup of incoming calls. • G - Allow Group Call Pickup of incoming calls.

M M


38 Aastra– 2512-004


• B - Allow Both Group and Directed pickup of incoming calls.

CMP Transfer Camp-On If set to Yes, calls transferred to directory numbers in this CLOS can camp-on when the line is busy.

CNF Conference And Group Listen If set to Yes, users can access the Conference Group and Listen Feature.

COA Carrier Selected Operator Assisted

If set to Yes, users can dial a carrier code before dialing an operator assisted call.

CPH Call Pickup On Held Calls If set to No, users cannot use the Call Pickup feature to answer calls that are holding for other directory numbers.

This prompt displays only if D or B was the response for the CLP field.

CPI Call Pickup Termination If set to Yes, incoming calls can be picked up at other stations via Call Pickup.

CRA Calling Party Number/Automatic Number Identification Routing

If set to Yes, Calling Party Number/Automatic Number Identification (CPN/ANI) routing is allowed.

CRD Call Recording Allowed When set to Yes, calls made to and from this directory number can be recorded by internal users who can invoke the Call Recording feature.

CRI Invoke Call Recording If set to Yes, users can press the Call Recording feature button to record a call.

CRO Call Restriction Option Indicates whether incoming calls and calls from an attendant are affected by Time of Day tables defined with the ATTR command.

CRT Call Restriction Table Treatment The Call Restriction Table prompt displays when TOR is set to Yes. Specifies the type of trunk origination call restriction treatment is used. Treatments include: • Valid - Always restricted • Invalid - Never restricted • Time of Day (TOD) - Restricted during certain hours. • Day of Week (DOW) - Weeks assembled from TOD,

valid, and invalid treatments. • Day of Year (DOY) - Special treatment for holidays and

other special days. A Call Restriction Table (CRT) entry number is required when DOY, DOW, or TOD are selected.

CSO Carrier Selected Operator If set to Yes, users can dial a carrier code before dialing an operator.

CTS Callback Date/Time Stamp If set to Yes, ITEs with displays can list the date and time of Callbacks when the Display button is pressed.

MM


Aastra – 2512-004 39


CWO Call Waiting Origination If set to Yes, users can wait for a busy internal extension to become free (if the called line allows Call Waiting Termination.)

CWT Call Waiting Termination Determines how users access the Call Waiting feature. Selections are: • NA - Not Available. Users are not notified of waiting

calls when a call is in progress. • TN - Tone Notice. Tone announces a call is waiting. • NT - No Tone. The ITE Line Select LED flashes when a

call is waiting. DAS Dynamic Agent Sign-On Selects Dynamic Agent Sign-On feature. Selections are:

• N - Not Allowed • C - Allowed Conditionally By Agent ID • U - Allowed Unconditionally

DFL Call Forward All - Local Indicates how local calls should be forwarded. DFO Call Forward All - Direct

Distance Dialed Indicates how direct distance dialed (DDD) calls are forwarded.

DRG Data Origination Configures the access to data features from this directory number.

DXL Transfer/Conference - Local If set to Yes, users can transfer calls to and set up conferences with local numbers.

DXO Transfer/Conference – Direct Distance Dialed

If set to Yes, users can transfer calls to and set up conferences with long distance numbers.

FAR Collect FRL Authorization Code If set to Yes, collects Facilities Restriction Level auth code. FRL Facilities Restriction Level Selects Facilities Restriction Level. A level number in the

range 0 to 7 determines how far the user is able to progress through a route guide.

HFA Hands Free Auto Answer If set to Yes, users can use the Hands Free Auto Answer feature. This feature is for use with ITE-12S speakers or ITE phones with headsets.

HLD Hold Type Selects the hold type. Selections are: • N - Using Hold is not allowed. • High-N-Dry or A - Holding party hears silence. • M - Holding party hears music from the holding line's

music source. • I - Holding party hears music from the hold initiator's

music source. IAS Voicemail Auto Sign-on Indicates whether Voicemail can be accessed without dialing

a mailbox number. ICA Incoming Call Announcement If set to Yes, users can hear incoming call announcements

sent over trunks.

M M


40 Aastra– 2512-004


ILC Inter-LATA Carrier Dialing Determines whether users can dial inter-LATA carrier codes identifying the long distance carrier to be used for a call.

ILO Inter-LATA Operator Calls If set to Yes, user dials 00 to speak with a long distance operator.

IMA Voicemail Call Allowed Indicates whether the directory number is permitted to call the Voicemail Message Desk.

IUD Inter User Group Dialing If set to Yes, users can access the Inter User Group dialing feature by dialing an access level and a 1 to 3 digit group number. User group access levels are defined in UGRP/FDD.

LNR Last Number Redial If set to Yes, users can access the Last Number Redial feature.

MAC Monitor Authorization Code Required

If set to Yes, users must enter auth code for monitor feature.

MDT Monitor Disconnect Tone Selects the Monitor Disconnect Tone to play. Selections are: • N - Do Not Play • U - Unconditionally • C - Play Only If Monitored Party Disconnects First

MIT Monitor Initiated Tone If set to Yes, a tone is played every 10 seconds during the first minute that a call is monitored from directory number in this CLOS.

MMC Meet Me Conference If set to Yes, allows the use of the Meet Me Conference feature.

MMT Trunk Silent Monitor Toggle Permits toggling between monitor modes. Selections are: • SA - Silent to Conference • PA - Split to Conference • SP - Silent to Split

If set to No, users cannot press star (*) to switch between Monitor Modes. Other settings configure the operation of the Monitor feature.

MOD OAI Monitor: Play Monitored Selects the Play Monitor feature. Selections are: • D - Directory Number • E - Agent ID If Available Else Directory number • I - Agent ID If Available Else Nothing • N - None

MSH CSTA Make Call Station Handling

Selects the type of "originator" station handling to apply for CSTA "Make Call" operations. Selections are: • R - Normal Ring Type • H - Headset Type • S - Speakerphone Type

MM


Aastra – 2512-004 41


MSW Message Waiting - Allow a Call Back To Be Placed

If set to Yes, the user can leave a Call Back message for an unanswered internal line.

MUS Music On Hold If set to Yes, users can hear music while being transferred by an internal party.

MUT Music On Transfer If set to Yes, users hear music when being transferred by another internal user.

MWD Call Back To Be Received If set to Yes, the line permits internal callers to leave a Call Back message when a call is unanswered.

N11 Special Numbering Plan Area – 3-Digit Telephone Number

If set to Yes, users can place calls to special Numbering Plan Area - NPA (area code), such as 911 and 411.

OD Direct Trunk Group Select. If set to Yes, users can directly access a trunk group by dialing an access code.

OHT Home Numbering Plan Area Toll

If set to Yes, users can place toll calls within the local area code (home Numbering Plan Area - NPA).

OID International Direct Distance Dial Calls

Determines whether a user can place International Direct Distance Dial (IDDD) calls.

OIN Station Call Origination If set to Yes, users can place calls to internal numbers. OLO Local Call Origination If set to Yes, users can place local calls. OND On-Net Call Overflow To Direct

Distance Dial If set to Yes, calls can overflow in a route guide.

Calls that would have gone out on trunks referenced in the specified route guide go out on Direct Distance Dial (DDD) trunks.

ONF Information Calls Determines whether users can place directory assistance calls (555-1212).

ONI Operator Number Intercept If set to Yes, the outgoing calls are intercepted by an attendant.

ONP On-Net Call Originations If set to Yes, users can access the Network Numbering Plan feature and place calls on the private network.

OPA Predefined Authorization Code Level

If set to Yes, users can access dialing levels (as specified in UGRP/FDD) that do not require an authorization code for access.

ORG Originating Restriction Group Identifies the ORES table (1 to 127) that implements call origination restrictions for directory numbers in the CLOS.

ORES groups block calls to area codes (NPAs) or to specific exchanges (NYX) in up to four area codes.

OSP Speed Number Access If set to Yes, users can dial Speed Numbers. OVA Variable Authorization Code

Level If set to Yes, users can access dialing levels that require an authorization code for access

M M


42 Aastra– 2512-004


OVF Overflow If set to Yes, a tone plays to indicate when a call is overflowing to higher cost trunk facilities.

OZM Intra-LATA Operator Calls If set to Yes, user dials 0 to speak with a local operator. OZP Operator Assistance Origination If set to Yes, users can reach a public operator to place Zero

Plus calls (0+NPA-NYXXXXX) that require special billing. PA1 Conditional Post Authorization

N11 Number If set to Yes, users must dial an authorization code after dialing a Special NPA (411, 911, etc.) number.

If OVA is set to Yes, and AUT selects Postfix Options, this prompt displays.

PA5 Conditional Post Authorization Info 555 Number

If set to Yes, users must dial an authorization code after dialing an information (type 555- 1212) number.


PA8 Conditional Post Authorization 1+800 Number

If set to Yes, users must dial an authorization code after dialing a 1+800 number.


PAD Conditional Post Authorization Direct Distance Dial Number

If set to Yes, users must dial an authorization code after dialing a Direct Distance Dial (DDD) number.


PAG Paging If set to Yes, users can access the Paging feature. PAI Conditional Post Authorization

International Direct Distance Dial Number

If set to Yes, users must dial an authorization code after dialing an International Direct Distance Dial (IDDD) number.


PAL Conditional Post Authorization Local Number

If set to Yes, users must dial an authorization code after dialing a local number.


MM


Aastra – 2512-004 43


PAN Conditional Post Authorization Network Numbering Plan Number

If set to Yes, users must dial an authorization code after dialing an on-net Network Numbering Plan (NNP) number.


PAP All Conditional Post Authorization Codes

If set to Yes, users must dial an authorization code after dialing the following number types: • Speed • DDD - Direct Distance Dialed • Local • NNP - Network Numbering Plan • Local Toll • IDDD - International Direct Distance Dialed • Information 555- • N11 outside calls.


PAQ Quick Number Authorization Treatment

If set to Yes, users must dial an auth code after dialing a Quick Number. Select C to have users dial the code only if the destination of the Quick Number is a call type that requires an auth code.


PAS Conditional Post Authorization Speed Number

If set to Yes, users must dial an auth code after dialing a Speed Number.


PAT Conditional Post Authorization Local Toll Number

If set to Yes, users must dial an auth code after dialing a local toll number.


PRE Prefix Authorization Code If set to Yes, users must dial an auth code before dialing a call.

M M


44 Aastra– 2512-004


If OVA is set to Yes, this prompt displays. PRK Call Park If set to Yes, users can access the Call Park feature. PST Unconditional Post Fix

Authorization Code If set to Yes, users must dial an auth code after dialing outside calls.


PTD Pass Thru Dialing If set to Yes, an ITE user can dial through the switch (send DTMF signals) after a call connects.

QCT Quick Number Destination Number Screening

If set to Yes, a Quick Number can be used to place a call only if its destination number is an allowed call type.

QNA Quick Number Access If set to Yes, users can dial Quick Numbers. RAD Record Access Code Routing

Dialed Calls If set to Yes, the digits dialed to make Access Code Routing (ACR) calls will show up in the Call Detail Recording report.

RAM Line Remove By Roaming Agent

If set to Yes, activates the Line Remove By Roaming Agent feature.

RCP Record Pass through Digits If set to Yes, digits dialed when users access the Pass Through Dialing feature are in the Call Detail Recording report.

RMF Remote Feature Access If set to Yes, users may access certain CLASS Services features remotely from another phone, by dialing a feature directory number.

ROM Roaming Agent If set to Yes, activates the Roaming Agent feature. SCA Record Station Call Attempts If set to Yes, the number dialed for failed call attempts is in

the Call Detail Recording report. Failed calls may be the result of a user's lack of access, time restrictions on trunks, or database errors.

SCF Selective Call Forward If set to Yes, allows the user to set up the forwarding of calls to a designated destination number. The activation code for this feature is 72#; the deactivation code is 73#.

SNF Off-Net Calling Number Presentation

Selects how Off-Net Calling Party Number (CPN) data is sent. Selections are: • N - CPN data is not sent. • R - Sent with CPN presentation restricted. • A - Sent with CPN presentation allowed.

SNN On-Net Calling Number Presentation

Selects how On-Net CPN data is sent. Selections are: • N - CPN data is not sent. • R - Sent with CPN presentation restricted. • A - Sent with CPN presentation allowed.

SQP Queue Priority Selects priority level for queueing outgoing calls when all trunks are busy. The highest priority (3) calls are processed

MM


Aastra – 2512-004 45

Acronym Field Description Function first. A level of 0 means no priority is assigned.

SRS Sequence Reset Allowed If set to Yes, users can press pound (#) to reset (clear), and then redial that portion of the number.

STQ On Line Queue Bypass If set to Yes, calls can skip On-Line Queue steps in a route guide.

TCP Transferred Party CPN On Emergency Call

Send calling party number of party being transferred instead of the calling party number of the transferring party when the call being transferred is an Emergency call. Selections are: • Y - Send calling party number of transferred party • N - Send calling party number of transferring party

TID Direct Inward Dial Calls If set to Yes, users can accept Direct Inward Dial (DID) calls (no operator intercept).

TIN Incoming Calls If set to Yes, lines can accept calls from incoming trunks. TOL Toll Calls Indicates whether long distance calls can be made. TOR Trunk Origination Restriction Allows implementation of time restriction entries defined

with the ATTR command. If set to Yes, restricts the use of incoming trunks (such as those used with DISA).

TRS Total Reset Allowed If set to Yes, users can press pound (#) for total reset (clear all numbers).

TSM Silent Monitor Option Allows or prohibits the use of the Silent Monitor feature. TST Station Call Termination If set to Yes, users can receive calls from internal numbers. TTT Trunk-to-Trunk Transfer Allows Trunk-to-Trunk Transfer features:

• If set to Yes, users can perform trunk-to-trunk transfer then hang up.

• If this field is set to No for all CLOSs, unsupervised trunk-to-trunk transfers are not allowed.

• If all CLOSs have this field set to No, a user trying to perform a trunk-to-trunk transfer without an attendant's help is rung back and the line is dropped.

TYP Class of Service Type Indicates whether the COS is: • Data Trunk • Voice Line • Data Line • Voice Trunk • Universal

UAL User Access Level A level number in the range 0 to 7 determines how far the user is able to progress through a route guide.

• The access level can restrict access to costlier trunks

M M


46 Aastra– 2512-004

Acronym Field Description Function referenced in later steps of a route guide.

• This command can be activated in the system table. Function is identical to FRL command.

UGR User Group Call Restriction If set to Yes, calls to internal numbers can be placed only if the called station is in the same user group as the caller.

UTV Time Allowed For Agent Unavailable

Allows the agent unavailable option while in the work state. Allows from 5 to 600 seconds or None.

WTV Time Allowed For Agent Work Allows the agent work option. Allows from 5 to 600 seconds or None.

XFA Transfer Type Determines how transfers are handled: • N - No access to the Transfer feature. • A - Transfer without music. • M - Transfer with music from the transferred party's

music source. • I - Transfer with music from the transfer initiator's music

source.

Display a Class of Service

Step Action ASP Display

1. At the ASP Select Command prompt: Type CLOS and press Enter.

SELECT COMMAND => CLOS

2. Type D and press Enter.

If you enter D, all assigned or unassigned CLOS by number appear. You can also enter T (for title). The title display does not show unnumbered CLOS. When CLOS are created, a number is not required.

SELECT MODE: PRINT, DISPLAY, UPDATE, SEARCH, TITLES => D

3. Type the number of the desired CLOS or type “-” to display all CLOS and press Enter.

SPECIFY CLASS OF SERVICE # or - ............ =>100

** CLASS OF SERVICE # 20 06/15/01 17:06:40

TYP...CLASS OF SERVICE TYPE..............UNIVERSAL ACR...ACCESS CODE ROUTING ALLOWED........YES TOL...TOLL CALLS.........................YES . . . END OF DISPLAY

MM


Aastra – 2512-004 47

Print a Class of Service




2. Type P and press Enter. SELECT MODE: PRINT, DISPLAY, UPDATE, SEARCH, TITLES => D

3. Type the number of a specific CLOS and press Enter. The CLOS parameters are printed.

Search for a Class of Service You can search for classes of service that have a specific field set to a specific value.




2. Type S and press Enter. SELECT MODE: DISPLAY, UPDATE, SEARCH, TITLES => S

3. Type F and press Enter. Specify U=User or F=Field search:....... => F

4. Type the field acronym and press Enter.

Specify CLOS Field to Search or ?....... => ABD

5. Select a search parameter for the field. • Type Y and press Enter to

display of all Class of Service (CLOS) with the parameter enabled.

• Type N and press Enter to display of all CLOS with the parameter disabled.

• Type ? to display valid entries.

Specify SEARCH parameter or ?........... => ?

Y = YES, N = NO

Specify SEARCH parameter or ?........... => Y

6. The appropriate CLOS are displayed.

SEARCH CLOS FIELD ABD FOR Y 06/15/00 16:46:34

1 2 3 4 10 20

END OF DISPLAY

M M


48 Aastra– 2512-004

Modify a Class of Service There are two methods for modifying a Class of Service (CLOS). You can step through all of the prompts for your CLOS type, or modify specific feature prompts directly by selecting only the field acronym to directly access the field.

When modifying a CLOS, the displayed parameters apply to all Directory Numbers assigned to that CLOS.




2. Type U and press Enter. SELECT MODE:PRINT,DISPLAY,UPDATE,SEARCH,TITLES => U

3. Type M and press Enter. UPDT MODE: C-Create, M-Modify, D-Delete, P-Copy => M

4. Type the number of the CLOS being modified and press Enter.

• If you are going to modify

specific fields and are not sure of the code, view your options with the ? entry. After viewing the options, press Enter to return to the “SPECIFY” prompt.

• If you enter a specific field to modify, the following prompt reappears until your modifications are complete.

SPECIFY CLASS OF SERVICE #:................. =>

5. Select your method of CLOS modification. • Type the three letter code for

the field you want to modify and press Enter.

• Type “-” and press Enter to step through all of the prompts.

• Type ? and press Enter to see a listing of all fields

The following steps describe completion of the code specific procedure.

SPECIFY CLOS Field To Modify or - or ?...... =>

6. Continue to modify CLOS fields SPECIFY CLOS Field To Modify or - or ?...... =>

MM


Aastra – 2512-004 49

Step Action ASP Display by entering three letter codes, followed by the new field value and pressing Enter.

7. When you have finished your modifications, press Enter twice to proceed to the update verify prompt.

If you enter N (No) in the following step, all of your entries are lost.


8. Verify the CLOS entries. • Type Y and press Enter to

save CLOS information in the database.

• Type N and press Enter to abandon all responses.

DOES UPDATE VERIFY? =>

M M


50 Aastra– 2512-004

MM


Aastra – 2512-004 51

Chapter 5 Button Templates

Overview Button Templates define the location of each line select and feature button on an Integrated Telephone Equipment (ITE) telephone. Standard Telephone Equipment (STE) stations do not have feature buttons and do not require button templates. A button template, Class of Service (CLOS), and voice line is assigned to each ITE station when it is built.

The switch database can contain up to 255 templates. Because button templates are shared resources, multiple ITEs can be assigned to the same button template. Although button templates are shared, voice lines are unique because they are assigned when the station database is built using the FONE or LINE command.

Buttons Each button can be configured as one of three types:

• Line select button • Feature button • Unassigned button.

ITE and ATDC Feature Button Options

Feature buttons that can be assigned to a button template are listed in the following table.

Table 9. Feature Buttons

Acronym Name Description

AAAN ATDC-Auto Answer Silences any audible ring and puts the attendant console into automatic answer mode. The attendant is alerted to a call by a zip tone (one beep) through the handset/headset. When heard, the call is automatically connected to an available loop.

AADL ATDC-Auto Dial Automatically redials an extension number after a busy signal or no answer.

AANS ATDC-Auto Answer Connects the attendant to a ringing switchloop. ABVD Abbreviated Dial Lists and modifies the abbreviated dial numbers for a directory

number. ACCS Access Provides access to station features. ACJN ATDC-Join Allows the attendant to join two loops together in conversation

(internal or external). ACMP ATDC-Camp On Allows the attendant to place a calling party in queue on a busy

extension, provided the busy extension has the Call Waiting

M M

Chapter 5, Button Templates

52 Aastra– 2512-004

Acronym Name Description feature. When the busy extension becomes free, the caller is automatically connected to the extension without further attendant assistance.

ADIL ATDC-Dial Splits the attendant from the calling party and provides the attendant with a dial tone to take dialing action (e.g., extend the incoming call to another party).

AGUN ACD-Agent Unavailable Allows agent to be unavailable to receive calls. AMMC Meet Me Conference Allows the attendant to reserve a number (or extension) for a

“Meet Me” conference for up to 12 participants. Once the number is reserved, the attendant notifies the conference coordinator of what the number is. As parties dial-in, they are automatically added to the conference. The conference bridge is maintained as long as any two parties remain connected.

ANRL Answer/Release Removes a call from the console. The attendant must click Release to connect the calling party to the called party and remove a call from the console.

AOFL ATDC-Offline Allows the attendant to temporarily prevent the console from receiving calls.

ARLS ATDC-Release Removes a call from the console. The attendant must select Release to connect the calling party to the called party and remove a call from the console.

ASCL ATDC-Serial Call Allows the attendant to extend an incoming trunk call to a series of extensions. After each call is completed, the calling party automatically returns to the first idle console.

ASPL ATDC-Split Allows the attendant to alternate between private conversations with the calling and called parties.

ASTS ACD-Agent Statistics Allows the display of statistical averages for agents, including number of ACD calls received, number of internal calls, number of outgoing calls etc.

ATHD ATDC-Timed Hold Places the call in a hold state and removes it from the loop. After a time delay, the call rings to the first idle console.

AUTD Automatic Dial Allows user to program a button to dial a number. BSOV Busy Override Allows the user to override a conversation on the dialed

extension. Attendant and called party hear a 1-second tone. The called party has 15 seconds to complete the call before being disconnected. When the called party completes his or her call, the attendant is then online with called party.

CFWD Call Forward Allows the user to program a directory number to forward all calls to an internal or external destination.

CLBK Call Back Allows users to wait for available trunks when all trunks are busy. Also used for Callback Busy, and Callback No-Answer features.

CLPK Call Park Allows the user to park a call for retrieval from another

MM


Aastra – 2512-004 53

Acronym Name Description extension.

CLPU Call Pickup Allows users to answer incoming calls that ring at other stations. CNCL Cancel Aborts any dialing sequence. Selecting Cancel releases the

called party but retains the calling party on the loop. CNFR Conference Allows the user to set up conference calls with a number of

parties, plus attendant. A number of the parties may be external. CREC Call Recording Allows calls made to and from a directory number to be

recorded by internal users who can invoke the Call Recording feature.

DATA Data Configures the station data protocol parameters for access to data terminal features.

DNTD Do Not Disturb Allows users to block all incoming calls. When enabled, callers will hear ringing, a busy signal, or a "please call back later" message (depending on database configuration).

DORG Data Origination Configures the access to data features from this directory number.

DSPL Display Displays alphanumeric information for the calling extension or trunk. Useful for viewing call waiting caller information.

EVTM Event Timer Replaces the time-of-day display with a stopwatch display, showing the minutes and seconds of an event. (Press once to start; press again to stop; press a third time to cancel.)

EXHL Exclusive Hold Places the ATDC call in a hold state and removes it from the loop.

FRCE ACD-Call Force Allows the supervisor to force all agents in their group to Idle condition from the Wrap-Up and Work states.

GRPL Group Listen Adds listeners to a conference call as listen only stations. HFAA Hands Free Answer Allows user to answer a station call without using the handset.

(for use with ITE-12S speakers or ITE or ATDC phones with headsets.)

HOLD Hold Places a call on hold. LNRD Last Number Redial Allows user to dial the last "outside" number dialed. MARK Call Mark Marks the bad trunk on an outside call. Generates an alarm on

the primary console that reports the bad trunk. MNNC Monitor Next Call Allows a supervisor to progress to the next call when Call

Monitoring is invoked. MNRS MNTR Re-Selection Allows a supervisor to re-select a new monitor type from the

Silent Monitor voice prompts. MNTR Monitor Control Displays and updates the permissions and restrictions associated

with the capability to monitor calls to individual ACD Agents, Agent Groups, Teams, Pilots, DNIS numbers and lines, and attendant consoles.

M M


54 Aastra– 2512-004

Acronym Name Description

NITE Night Service Allows calls, normally directed to the attendant to be routed to a pre-selected internal telephone number (e.g., to a night service number).

OFFL Offline Causes the ACD agent to go offline. OVFL Overflow Allows the supervisor to override the Wait steps in a call guide,

as well as any dynamic parameters for overflow, and force the callers presently waiting in queue, to be serviced by the first available overflow agent.

PAGE Paging Access Allows the operator to establish a hotline voice interface to Public Announcement (PA) systems.

PRVY Privacy Controls When voice lines appear on more than one station, permits all users to participate in conversations on the shared line.

PVRL Privacy Release Allows up to six parties with the same extension to join the initial party on an existing call.

QUEU ACD Queue Depth Provides a lamp to indicate to the ACD agent that calls are in queue and will display the number of agents on-line and the number of calls in queue on telephones equipped with an alphanumeric display.

RERT Reroute Allows ACD calls to be sent to an alternate destination. RMUT Ringer Mute Allows the attendant to deactivate any ringing signals on the

console. SNDM Send To Me Allows the user to have an ACD call sent to a specified station. TRSF Call Transfer Allows the user to transfer calls. VMXD Voicemail Direct Access Access provides access to a voicemail system allowing users to

receive voice messages when they are unable to answer the phone.

VMXM Voicemail Message Desk Allows access to a voicemail system for message retrieval. WRAP Wrap-up Automatically places the ACD agent in the Wrap-up state.

Wrap-up is a predetermined amount of time after completion of a call that allows the agent to complete paper work or other agent duties prior to being available to take additional calls.

Additional BTNS Fields The following fields can be accessed directly in update/modify mode:

Table 10. BTNS Fields

Field Description Function

BTN Button Feature, Line Assignment or unassigned

Assigns a feature or a voice line to a button. All buttons are initially unassigned.

MM


Aastra – 2512-004 55

Field Description Function

CTO Call Termination Determines call termination: how a user gets to dial tone after a call ends. If the hold type is call hold, two call termination options are supported: • Reorganization – Dial tone is returned (after a call ends) on the line on

from which the last call was placed. • Pre-select – Returns dial tone to the Prime Line regardless of the line

on which the last call was placed. HTP Hold Type Configures the hold type to be applied to a voice line. The applied Hold

Type determines: • What a user hears after placing a call on hold. • Steps a user must take to place another call. • With the Call Hold type, the user hears dial tone after placing a call on

hold and may place another call by simply dialing the number. • With the Normal Hold type, a user hears silence after placing a call on

hold and must press a line select button to place a call. IRS Line Re-selection Determines how a call in progress is affected when the user presses

another line select button. • Set Reselect to Yes to have a call in progress remain connected after

the user presses another line select button. • Set Reselect to No to automatically disconnect the current call when

another line select button is pressed. MSC Manual Station Control Determines if the keypad and feature buttons work. Options include:

• E - Keypad and feature buttons enabled. • D - Keypad and feature buttons disabled. • B - Keypad disabled, feature buttons and switch hook enabled. • K - Feature buttons and switch hook disabled, keypad enabled.

TTL Template Title The title is assigned when you create or modify a button template. The Titles Mode of BTNS are used to view button template titles. Assign titles that help you identify templates quickly.

View a Button Template Button templates are viewed using the ASP. The display includes fields defining the following information for each ITE instrument to which it is assigned:

• Total number of buttons on the ITE • Number of line select buttons • Number of feature buttons • Features associated with each button • Number of unassigned buttons • Hold type • Call termination selection

M M


56 Aastra– 2512-004

• Buzz/station status • Dedicated CO line • Hot line • Hunt line

Create and Modify Button Templates When assigning a template, review those available before creating a new one. Consider all of the line-select and station feature needs of the users before creating a button template. If you need to modify a button template after creation, exercise caution. Use the following guidelines when modifying templates.

• If possible, modify a button template before it is assigned to any port. This simplifies modification and ensures that changes are in place after template assignment.

• If you must modify a button template that is in use (already assigned to a port), make only the following types of changes during normal working hours. – Reassign a feature button with a new feature (Feature to Feature). – Assign a feature to an unassigned button (Unassigned to Feature). – Reassign a feature button as an unassigned button (Feature to Unassigned).

• For best results, make the following types of modification during off-peak hours. These changes may take several hours to complete. – Reassign a feature button as a line-select button (Feature to Select). – Reassign a line-select button as a feature button (Select to Feature)

• Be sure to re-label any modified buttons on all effected phones.

View the Button Template Index The button template index is a skeleton view of all templates that currently exist. Use it to identify templates with a certain number of lines or features.


1. At the ASP Select Command prompt: Type BTNS and press Enter.

SELECT COMMAND => BTNS

2. Type D and press Enter. SELECT MODE: PRINT, DISPLAY, UPDATE, SEARCH, TITLES => d

3. Type 0 and press Enter. SPECIFY TEMPLATE NUMBER or - or 0=INDEX...... => 0

4. The template index is displayed.

**

* ITE BUTTON TEMPLATE INDEX 08/14/01 10:31:21

**

TEMPLATE 4.. 4 BUTTONS . 0 SELECT . 4 FEATURE . 0 UNASSIGNED TEMPLATE 9.. 12 BUTTONS . 2 SELECT . 10 FEATURE . 0 UNASSIGNED TEMPLATE 20.. 30 BUTTONS . 3 SELECT . 26 FEATURE . 1 UNASSIGNED TEMPLATE 30.. 30 BUTTONS . 6 SELECT . 23 FEATURE . 1 UNASSIGNED TEMPLATE 40.. 30 BUTTONS . 6 SELECT . 24 FEATURE . 0 UNASSIGNED TEMPLATE 100.B 13 BUTTONS . 1 SELECT . 11 FEATURE . 0 UNASSIGNED

MM


Aastra – 2512-004 57

Step Action ASP Display TEMPLATE 124.. 24 BUTTONS . 4 SELECT . 20 FEATURE . 0 UNASSIGNED TEMPLATE 125.. 23 BUTTONS . 3 SELECT . 15 FEATURE . 5 UNASSIGNED TEMPLATE 127.. 127 BUTTONS . 0 SELECT . 0 FEATURE .127 UNASSIGNEDTEMPLATE 133.. 30 BUTTONS . 3 SELECT . 27 FEATURE . 0 UNASSIGNED TEMPLATE 150.. 12 BUTTONS . 1 SELECT . 10 FEATURE . 1 UNASSIGNED TEMPLATE 210.. 30 BUTTONS . 3 SELECT . 24 FEATURE . 3 UNASSIGNED TEMPLATE 211.. 30 BUTTONS . 3 SELECT . 25 FEATURE . 2 UNASSIGNED TEMPLATE 212.. 30 BUTTONS . 3 SELECT . 25 FEATURE . 2 UNASSIGNED TEMPLATE 213.. 30 BUTTONS . 3 SELECT . 26 FEATURE . 1 UNASSIGNED

END OF DISPLAY

View the Details of a Specific Button Template




2. Type D and press Enter. SELECT MODE: PRINT, DISPLAY, UPDATE, SEARCH, TITLES => d

3. Type the template number and press Enter.

SPECIFY TEMPLATE NUMBER or - or 0=INDEX...... => 4

4. The template features are displayed.

ITE4 BTP4

** ITE BUTTON TEMPLATE # 4 TYPE: NORMAL 08/14/01 10:31:03

BTN....1.....FEATURE..........HOLD BTN....2.....FEATURE..........CALL TRANSFER BTN....3.....FEATURE..........CALLBACK BTN....4.....FEATURE..........ACCESS HTP...HOLD TYPE..........................CALL ***...HOLD RETRIEVE......................ORIGINATE CTO...CALL TERMINATION...................PRESELECT MSC...MANUAL STATION CONTROL.............ALL ENABLED DEF...ITE-4 DEFAULT TEMPLATE.............NO

END OF DISPLAY

M M


58 Aastra– 2512-004

View Button Template Titles




2. Type T and press Enter. SELECT MODE: PRINT, DISPLAY, UPDATE, SEARCH, TITLES => T

3. The template numbers and titles are displayed.

***

* TITLES FOR BUTTON TEMPLATES 08/14/01 10:31:53

***

BTP0004.....ITE4 BTP4 BTP0009.....WALL FONES BTP0020.....30btn/3-sel/norm/sel/h&d/yes/acd BTP0030.....ATDC-1.2.13.26/norm/sel/h&d/yes BTP0040.....CLOSS ATDC/norm/sel/h&d/yes BTP0100.....BRI 1-SEL/1 CALL APPEAR BTP0124.....24BTN/4SEL/CALL/ORIG/REORIG/YES//ACD BTP0125.....iaeap/3sel BTP0127.....BLFDSS BTP0133.....30btn/3sel/nrom/sel/acd BTP0150.....FONEWISE BTP0210.....CLOSS A & C DO NOT CHANGE BTP0211.....CLOSS A & C DO NOT CHANGE BTP0212.....CLOSS A & C DO NOT CHANGE BTP0213.....CLOSS A & C DO NOT CHANGE

Modify a Button Template




2. Type U and press Enter. SELECT MODE: DISPLAY, UPDATE, SEARCH, TITLES => U

3. Type M and press Enter. SELECT MODE: C-Create; M-Modify or D-Delete.. => M

4. Type the number of the button template to be modified, and press Enter.

SPECIFY TEMPLATE NUMBER:.................... => 1

5. Type BTN and press Enter. Specify BTNS Field to Modify or - or ?.... => ?

- ...ALL BTN...BUTTON CTO...CALL TERMINATION HTP...HOLD TYPE IRS...RE-SELECT TTL...TITLE IDENTIFIER FOR TEMPLATE

Specify BTNS Field to Modify or - or ?.... => BTN

6. Type the number of the button to be designated for the feature, and press Enter.

BUTTON NUMBER TO MODIFY: Return=END...... =>

MM


Aastra – 2512-004 59


7. Type the feature acronym to associate this feature with this button template, and press Enter.

The ASP repeats the prompts from steps 10 and 11 until the Enter key is pressed twice. The button template then displays the feature selections.

BTN-5 TYPE:S=Sel; U=Unas; Feature or ?..U =>

8. Repeat steps 10 and 11 until modifications are complete.

BUTTON NUMBER TO MODIFY: Return=END......... =>

Specify BTNS Field to Modify or - or ?....... =>

9. Press Enter twice to end the modification process.

BUTTON NUMBER TO MODIFY: Return=END......... =>


10. Review the display. *** VERIFY/DISPLAY ***

** ITE BUTTON TEMPLATE # 1 06/16/00 13:56:20

BTN....1.....FEATURE.....LAST NUMBER REDIAL BTN....2.....FEATURE.....CALL TRANSFER BTN....3.....FEATURE.....CONFERENCE BTN....4.....FEATURE.....CALLBACK BTN....5.....FEATURE.....ABBREVIATED DIAL BTN....6.....FEATURE.....DATA BTN....7.....FEATURE.....HOLD BTN....8.....SELECT...... BTN....9.....FEATURE.....InteMail - MESSAGE DESK BTN...10.....UNASSIGNED.. BTN...11.....FEATURE.....CALL FORWARD BTN...12.....UNASSIGNED.. HTP...HOLD TYPE............................NORMAL ***...HOLD RETRIEVE.....................ORIGINATE CTO...CALL TERMINATION................REORIGINATE IRS...RE-SELECT................................NO

DOES UPDATE VERIFY ? =>

11. Verify the BTNS entries. • Type Y, and press Enter to save

BTNS information in the database. • Type N and press Enter to

abandon all responses.


M M


60 Aastra– 2512-004

Create a Button Template Determine which template numbers are available before creating a new one. It is also a good idea to know the parameters of all existing templates before creating a template to avoid duplication.




2. View the existing templates. • Type D and press Enter to display

templates by number. • Type T and press Enter to display

templates by title.

SELECT MODE: PRINT,DISPLAY,UPDATE,SEARCH, TITLES => D

3. Type U and press Enter to view the unused template numbers.

4. Type @, and press Enter to return to the SELECT MODE prompt.

5. Type U and press Enter to create, update, or delete a template.

SELECT MODE: PRINT,DISPLAY,UPDATE,SEARCH, TITLES => U

6. Type C and press Enter to create a new template.

Valid button template numbers are 1 to 255.

SELECT MODE: C-Create; M-Modify or D-Delete..... => C

7. Type a new number for a template being created, and press Enter.

Basic Rate Interface (BRI) telephones are no longer supported.

SPECIFY TEMPLATE NUMBER:......................... =>

8. Press Enter to accept the default (normal).

SPECIFY TEMPLATE TYPE: N=NORMAL; B=BRI.....N => N

9. Type the number of buttons the ITE has and press Enter.

• To identify the ITE-4 default button

template, display the system parameters under the SPAR command. Using the BTNS command in Modify mode is the only way to change an ITE-4 Button Template feature button.

TEMPLATE SIZE: 4,12,23,24,30,47,87,127 or ?.. =>

MM


Aastra – 2512-004 61


• A warning message, "OLD ITE-4 DEFAULT BTN TEMPLATE IS BEING REPLACED," is displayed if a default template has been created.

10. This query appears if the Template Size is 4. Select the ITE-4 template (if applicable). • Type Y and press Enter if this

button template is the default template.

• Accept the default (N) and press Enter if this is an ordinary template.

The title is for identification purposes only. Be sure you can identify the template by name. Ensure titles for new templates are clear and concise.

ITE-4 DEFAULT TEMPLATE: Y=YES; N=NO.......N => (DEF)

11. Type a title of up to 40 ASCII characters to be associated with this button template, and press Enter.

The following prompt repeats for each button (BTN-#) in the template, allowing you to assign a function for all of the buttons in the template.

ENTER TITLE:..=>____________________________________

12. Select the button function for each button on the template. • Type S and press Enter if this button

is a directory number, hotline, intercom, buzz/station status, or dedicated C.O. line.

• Type U and press Enter if this button is an unassigned feature.

• Type the code of feature you want to assign to the button, and press Enter.

• Accept the default (UNAS) for an unassigned button.

• Type ? and press Enter for a list feature codes.

BTN-1 TYPE: S=Sel; U=Unas; Feature or ?.UNAS => (BTN)

M M


62 Aastra– 2512-004


When the default (N) is selected as the hold type, High-N-Dry (quiet) call termination is automatically selected. The user must select another line to place a call.

13. Select a hold type for the station. • Accept the default (N) by pressing

Enter for quiet termination after placing a call on hold.

• Type C and press Enter to hear dial tone after placing a call on hold and is be able to place another call from the same line.

• The following prompt is displayed

only when HOLD TYPE in the previous prompt is set to Call Hold (C).

• Upon call termination, Preselect (P) returns a dial tone on the prime line, even if the call was placed on a line other than the prime line.

• Upon call termination, Re-origination (R) returns a dial tone on the same line the original call was placed.

HOLD TYPE: N=NORMAL; C=CALL................N => (HTP)

14. Select a call termination type. • Type P and press Enter to terminate

calls with a dial tone. • Accept the default (H) and press

Enter to terminate calls silently (no dial tone).

• Type R and press Enter to terminate calls by returning a dial tone on the same line the original call was placed.

CALL TERMINATION: P=PRESELECT; H=HIGH-N-DRY

R=REORIGINATION..........H => (HRO)

15. Select call-in-progress termination. • Type Y and press Enter if the call-

in-progress remains connected when an additional line select button is pressed.

• Accept the default (N) by pressing Enter if the call in progress disconnects when the line select

RE-SELECT: Y=YES; N=NO....................N => (CTO)

MM


Aastra – 2512-004 63

Step Action ASP Display button is pressed.

• A data line is assigned as a DATA

feature button. When the station database is created, the data line option is then assigned. Also, an Intercom line is assigned as a line select button using the FONE command.

• If the user types N in the following step, all entries from this procedure are lost.

16. Verify the template entries. • Type Y and press Enter to approve

the template entries. • Type N and press Enter to

disapprove the template entries.


M M


64 Aastra– 2512-004

MM


Aastra – 2512-004 65

Chapter 6 Groups

Overview You must build the groups you will use when creating the Station database.

This chapter provides instructions for creating and modifying station-specific groups (not user groups). The following groups are covered:

• Satellite Directory Groups and Numbers • Call Park Group • Call Pickup Group • Hunt Group • Conference Groups (Conference, and Meet-Me Conference) • Intercom Group

Satellite Directory Groups and Numbers Satellite Directory Groups (SDGP) numbers enable a switch to communicate with another switch or application when a directory number is dialed. Users benefit from this arrangement because they can access two or more switches as if they were one large switch. Satellite Directory Groups can be used with a variety of including data, voicemail and paging.

The following ASP commands are used the build a Satellite Directory Group:

• GRPS - Creates the trunk group needed to reach the destination switch or application. Normally a tie-line trunk group is used for voicemail; a Four-Wire E&M group is required for Paging, and IVRs.

• PDT – Prefix Digit Table - Controls the digits outpulsed over a trunk. The PDT number is associated with the trunk group in the GRP step of the Route Guide.

• ROUT – Route Guide - The sequence of events that must occur for the user to access the remote switch. The trunk group and Prefix Digit Table are one step in the route guide.

• SDGP – Creates the Satellite Directory Group. • DIRN – Creates the Satellite Directory number used to dial the destination.

See Pointspan System Database Administration (591-2513-nnn) for more information.

M M

Chapter 6, Groups

66 Aastra– 2512-004

Create Satellite Directory Numbers


1. At the ASP Select Command prompt: Type DIRN and press Enter.


2. Type U and press Enter. SELECT MODE: DISPLAY, UPDATE, LOGGING, SEARCH => U

3. Type C and press Enter. UPDATE MODE: C-Create M-Modify D-Delete P-Copy...=> C

4. Type the directory number and press Enter.

DIRECTORY NUMBER:............................=> 4300

5. Type the user group number and press Enter.

USER GROUP NUMBER:..............................=> 1

6. Type SDRN and press Enter. ENTER DIRECTORY TYPE: OR ?................=> SDRN

7. Type the satellite directory number and press Enter.

SATELLITE DIRECTORY GROUP NUMBER..........=> 5

8. Review the display. ***VERIFY/DISPLAY ***

***....DIRECTORY NUMBER.........................4300 ***....USER GROUP..................................1 ***....SATELLITE DIRECTORY GROUP NUMBER.........=>5

DOES UPDATE VERIFY?

9. Verify the DIRN entries. • Type Y and press Enter to save

DIRN information in the database. • Type N and press Enter to



Call Park A Call Park Group provides numbered locations for users to temporarily store or “park” calls for retrieval from any telephone on the system. Parked calls are placed in a state very similar to Hold.

When a user parks a call, an Annunciator speaks the 1-digit to 5-digit park number. The user dials the Park Number to retrieve the parked call. If the parked call is not retrieved within a predefined period of time, it rings back to the telephone from which it was originally parked (or rings the attendant, depending on the system design).

A Call Park Group must be created, available directory numbers assigned, and the Call Park group identified for each user group requiring the Call Park feature.

The number of call park channels required is based on how many calls are to be in a parked state simultaneously. If all park channels are in use and another user attempts to park a call, that user receives “Reorder” tone. The following table lists the commands which are used to create a Call Park group.

MM


Aastra – 2512-004 67

Database Requirements for Call Park Table 11. Database Requirements for Call Park

Parameter Option Description

GRPS

Group Number Group Number Identifies this Call Park Group Group Type PKGP Defines the group type. UGP - User Group User Group Number Identifies the User Group of this Call Park Group. SLC - Channel Selection

• L=Longest Idle • T=Top Down • B=Bottom Up

Defines how a Park Channel is selected from the available Park Channel Numbers when a user activates this feature.

UGRP/UGP

PCG – Park Channel Group

Group Number Identifies which Call Park Group to use for stations within this User Group when using the Call Park Feature.

DIRN

Park Channel Number

DIRN The directory number to create as a Call Park number.

User Group Number User Group Identifies the User Group for this Directory number. Directory Number Type

PKCH Identifies the directory number type.

PTG - Call Park Access Trunk Group Number

Call Park Group Number

The Call Park Group number created with the GRPS command. This group must exist before directory numbers can be assigned against it.

IQP - Park Channel Idle Queue Priority

1-7 Identifies this directory number priority when in queue to be answered by an attendant console. This can only occur if the user group is configured to route parked calls that have been in a parked state too long to an attendant console. Otherwise this setting has no effect.

Display Assigned Call Park Groups


1. At the ASP Select Command prompt: Type GRPS and press Enter.

SELECT COMMAND => GRPS

2. Type D and press Enter. SELECT MODE: DISPLAY, UPDATE, SEARCH, TITLES => D

3. Type the group number or - (for all groups), and press Enter.

SPECIFY GROUP NUMBER or - ................ => -

4. Type A and press Enter to see the assigned A=Assigned; U=Unassigned GROUPS..........A => A

M M

Chapter 6, Groups

68 Aastra– 2512-004

Step Action ASP Display groups. GROUP NO ASSIGNMENT REPT *** 07/02/00 11:13:16

GROUP ASSIGNMENT GROUP ASSIGNMNT GROUP ASSIGNMENT 1 TRUNK UGP:1 2 TRUNK UGP:1 3 TRUNK UGP:1 4 TRUNK UGP:1 5 TRUNK UGP:1 6 RSP LINK 7 TRUNK UGP:1 8 RSP LINK 9 RSP LINK 10 TRUNK UGP:1 11 TRUNK UGP:1 12 TRUNK UGP:1 13 TRUNK UGP:1 14 CALL PARK . . .

Create a Call Park Group Create Call Park Numbers that are easy to remember. For example, use directory numbers that end with repeating digits, such as 2311, 2411, 2511 etc. (If the switch uses a five-digit directory number, make the last three digits the same.) Call Park numbers should be easy to distinguish from the directory numbers assigned to users. Use a separate block of numbers to avoid conflicts.

If users have numbers in the 8000 range, use the 9000 range for Call Park numbers. To create a Call Park Group:





3. Type C and press Enter. UPDT:C-Create,M-Modify,D-Delete,P-Copy.. => C

4. Type the new group number and press Enter.

SPECIFY GROUP NUMBER:.................. => 14

5. Type PKGP and press Enter. ENTER GROUPS TYPE or ?................. => PKGP

ENTER TITLE:. => CALL PARK___________________

***...CALL PARK GROUP....................14

6. Type the user group number associated (UGP) with this Call Park group, and press Enter.

USER GROUP NUMBER......................... => 1

7. Select a basis by which call park channels are assigned. (SLC). • Press Enter to accept the default of

Longest Idle (L). • Type T and press <Enter> to use the

lowest-numbered available port. • Type B and press Enter to use the

highest-numbered available port.

CHANNEL SELECTION: L=LONGEST;

T=TOP DOWN; B=BOTTOM UP................L => L

8. Verify the parameters. *** VERIFY/DISPLAY ***

CALL PARK

MM


Aastra – 2512-004 69

Step Action ASP Display ***...CALL PARK GROUP...................14

UGP...USER GROUP NUMBER.................1 SLC CHANNEL SELECTION.................LONGEST

9. • Type Y and press Enter to save GRPS information in the database.



Assign a Call Park Group to the User Group





3. Type M and press Enter. UPDT:C-Create,M-Modify,D-Delete,P-Copy.. => M

4. Type the User Group number and press Enter.

USER GROUP NUMBER (1- 128) OR ? . . . . => 1

5. Type UGP and press Enter. SELECT SUBCOMMAND or ? . . . . . . . . . => UGP

6. Type PCG and press <Enter>. SPECIFY FIELD TO MODIFY or "ALL" or ?. . => PCG

7. Type the Call Park Channel Group number that this User Group will access when the Call Park feature is used, and press Enter.

CALL PARK CHANNEL GROUP #: N=None. . NONE => 14

SPECIFY FIELD TO MODIFY or "ALL" or ? . . =>


** USER GROUP PARAMETERS USER GROUP #1 11/22/00

MOH. . MUSIC ON HOLD PORT NUMBER. . . . . .NONE HUG. . HOME USER GROUP NUMBER . . . . . . .NONE IMD. . InteMail DIRECT CALL SDGP NUMBER . .250 IMC. . InteMail MESSAGE CENTER SDGP NUMBER NONE AGN. . ATTENDANT GROUP NUMBER. . . . . . . .120 IAG. . INTERCEPT ATTENDANT GROUP . . . . . .120 PCG. . PARK CHANNEL GROUP NUMBER. . . . . . .14 HNP. . HOME NPA NUMBER . . . . . . . . . . .214 HNC. .HOME NNP NUMBER. . . . . . . . . . . .233 LOC. .LOCAL/LOCAL-TOLL ROUTING. . . . . .NORMAL ILC. .INTER-LATA CARRIER CODE . . . . . .NONE CRD. .CALL RECORDING DIRECTORY NUMBER. . .NONE . . .

9. • Type Y and press Enter to save GRPS information in the database.



M M

Chapter 6, Groups

70 Aastra– 2512-004

Assign a Line to a Call Park Group




2. Type U and press Enter. SELECT MODE:DISPLAY, UPDATE,LOGGING, SEARCH=> U

3. Type C and press Enter. UPDT MODE:C-Create M-Modify D-Delete P-Copy=> C

4. Type an unassigned directory number, and press Enter.

DIRECTORY NUMBER or ? . . . . . . . . . => 4610

5. Type PKCH and press Enter. ENTER DIRECTORY TYPE: OR ? . . . . . . => PKCH

6. Type the Call Park Channel Group Number (PTG), and press Enter.

CALL PARK ACCESS TRUNK GROUP NUMBER.. .0 => 14

7. Type the idle queue priority (0-7) for this park channel number, and press Enter. (IQP) There are two prioritization methods: • Top/down (seven is highest priority) • Bottom/up (zero is highest priority).

PARK CHANNEL IDLE QUEUE PRIORITY (0-7)..0 => 1


***. . .DIRECTORY NUMBER. . . . . . . . . .4610 PTG. . .CALL PARK GROUP NUMBER. . . . . . . .14 IQP. . .PARK CHANNEL IDLE QUEUE PRIORITY . . .1

9. • Type Y and press Enter to save CLOS information in the database.



Assign Call Handling Parameters for Call Park


1. At the ASP Select Command prompt: Type UGRP and press Enter.

SELECT COMMAND => UGRP

2. Type U and press Enter. SELECT MODE: PRINT, DISPLAY, UPDATE, TITLES=> U

3. Type M and press Enter. UPDT MODE: C-Create,M-Modify,D-Delete. . . => M

4. Type the User Group number to be modified, and press Enter.

USER GROUP NUMBER (1- 128) OR ? . . . . . => 1

5. Type CHP and press Enter. SELECT SUBCOMMAND or ? . . . . . . . . . => CHP

6. Type CPT and press Enter. SPECIFY FIELD TO MODIFY or "-" or ?. . . => CPT

MM


Aastra – 2512-004 71


The Call Park Reversion Time is the number of minutes the switch will wait before sending a parked call to the return destination specified in step 9.

7. Type the reversion time in minutes (1 to 250), and press Enter.

CALL PARK REVERSION TIME (1-250 minutes).2 => 3

8. Type PRD and press Enter. SPECIFY FIELD TO MODIFY or "-" or ?. . . => PRD

9. Select the destination for parked calls after the Call Park Reversion time. • Accept the default (L) by pressing

Enter for a line. • Type A and press Enter for an

Attendant.

CALL PARK RETURN DEST.: A=ATDC, L=Line. .L => L

10. Verify the changes. SPECIFY FIELD TO MODIFY or "-" or ? . . . =>

*** VERIFY/DISPLAY ***

** CALL HANDLING PARAMETERS USER GROUP #1 2/22/00 DIG. . .STATION DIAGNOSTICS ALLOWED. . . . . .YES DND. . .DO NOT DISTURB TREATMENT . . . . . . .BUSY NIT. . .NORMAL INTERDIGIT TIMEOUT (seconds). .10 FIT. . .FAST INTERDIGIT TIMEOUT (seconds). . .5 CPT. . .CALL PARK REVERSION TIME (minutes) . .3 PRD. . .CALL PARK RETURN DESTINATION . . . . .LINE

11. • Type Y and press Enter to save CHP information in the database.



Call Pickup The Call Pickup feature allows any station user to answer a call ringing at another extension including parked calls. Three types of Call Pickup are supported:

• Directed - The user can answer any ringing telephone by first pressing the Pickup feature button and then keying in the extension number of the ringing telephone.

• Group - Users are assigned to pickup groups of up to 32 members. Group members can answer any ringing extension in the group by pressing the Pickup feature button.

• Both - This type includes features of both the Directed and Group types: – A user presses a Call Pickup feature button or dials a Numeric Feature code,

followed by the directory number to use Directed Call Pickup to answer any ringing station.

– A user presses the Call Pickup feature button to access Group Call Pickup. Only directory numbers in the assigned pickup group can be picked up in this manner.

M M

Chapter 6, Groups

72 Aastra– 2512-004

Call Pickup Group Member Types Three group member types are supported for use with the Call Pickup feature. The member type controls Call Pickup operation for a station:

• Both - The station user can pick up calls and be picked up by other group members. This is the most common member type.

• Pickup - A station user can pick up calls that ring at other stations, but other Call Pickup users cannot pick up calls at this station (often used for a secretary).

• Guest - The station user cannot pick up calls ringing at other stations, but calls to this station can be picked up by Call Pickup users at other stations. A Guest can be a member of more than one group.

Database Requirements for Call Pickup Table 12. Database Requirements for Call Pickup


CLOS

CPI.- Call Pickup Termination

Yes/No Call Pickup Termination

CLP – Call Pickup Origination

• N = Not Allowed • D = Directed • G = Group • B = Both Directed and

Group

Call Pickup Origination

CPH - Call Pick-up on Held Calls.

Yes/No Allows held calls to be picked up by other lines in the group.

BTNS

BTN CLPU Adds the Call Pickup Button to the template.

CPUG or LINE

CPG – Call Pick-up Group

Group Number Adds the line to the Call Pickup Group.

TYP - Type B or U • B = Both – Line can pick up calls and be picked up. • U = Pickup – Line can only pick up calls.

MM


Aastra – 2512-004 73

View Call Pickup Fields in CLOS Display the Class of Service (CLOS) currently assigned to the directory number. Review the parameters to determine if the Call Pickup feature is allowed.





3. Type the number of the CLOS you want to review, and press Enter.

The following are most important parameters for call pickup: • Call Pickup Termination allows other

users to pick up incoming calls that ring at the station.

• Call Pickup Origination allows call pickup by directed, group, or both methods.

• Call Pickup on Held Calls allows users to pick up calls that are holding at another station.

SPECIFY CLASS OF SERVICE # or - ......... => 20

4. Review the displayed CLOS parameters. SPECIFY CLASS OF SERVICE # or - ......... => 20

** CLASS OF SERVICE # 20 06/15/00 17:06:40 TYP...CLASS OF SERVICE TYPE.......UNIVERSAL ACR...ACCESS CODE ROUTING ALLOWED.....YES TOL...TOLL CALLS......................YES BSO...BUSY OVERRIDE ALLOWED...........YES BOP...BUSY OVERRIDE PRIORITY..........0| CRO...CALL RESTRICTION OPTION.........NONE CPI...CALL PICKUP TERMINATION.........YES| CLP...CALL PICKUP ORIGINATION.........DIRECTED CPH...CALL PICKUP ON HELD CALLS.......YES END OF DISPLAY

Search CLOS Parameters for Call Pickup




2. Type S and press Enter. SELECT MODE: DISPLAY, UPDATE, SEARCH, TITLES => S

3. Type F and press Enter. Specify U=User or F=Field search:....... => F

M M

Chapter 6, Groups

74 Aastra– 2512-004


4. Type CPI and press Enter to search for the Call Pickup Termination field.

Specify CLOS Field to Search or ?....... => CPI

5. Select the search parameter. • Type Y and press Enter to search for

all classes of service with CPI set to yes.

• Type N and press Enter to search for all classes of service with CPI set to no.

• Type ? and press Enter for a display of valid entries for the CPI field.

Specify SEARCH parameter or ?........... => ?

Y = YES, N = NO


SEARCH CLOS FIELD CPI FOR Y 06/15/00 16:46:34

1 2 20

END OF DISPLAY

6. The system displays a list of CLOS numbers that contain that field.


SEARCH CLOS FIELD CPI FOR Y 06/15/00 16:46:34

1 2 20

END OF DISPLAY

7. Repeat steps 5 and 6 for each search parameter.

Add the Call Pickup Feature Button to the Template






4. Type the number of the template to modify, and press Enter.


5. Type BTN and press Enter. Specify BTNS Field to Modify or - or ?.... => BTN

6. Type the number of the button to modify, and press Enter.

BUTTON NUMBER TO MODIFY: Return=END...... => 10

7. Type CLPU to assign the Call Pickup feature, and press Enter.

In the following example, BTN 10 provides access to the Call Pickup feature.

BTN-10 TYPE:S=Sel; U=Unas; Feature or ?.U => CLPU

BUTTON NUMBER TO MODIFY: Return=END..... =>

8. Review the button template parameters. Specify BTNS Field to Modify or - or ?... =>



MM


Aastra – 2512-004 75

Step Action ASP Display BTN....1.....FEATURE.....LAST NUMBER REDIAL BTN....2.....FEATURE.....CALL TRANSFER BTN....3.....FEATURE.....CONFERENCE BTN....4.....FEATURE.....CALLBACK BTN....5.....FEATURE.....ABBREVIATED DIAL BTN....6.....FEATURE.....DATA BTN....7.....FEATURE.....HOLD BTN....8.....SELECT...... BTN....9.....FEATURE.....InteMail - MESSAGE DESK BTN...10.....FEATURE.....CALL PICKUP BTN...11.....FEATURE.....CALL FORWARD BTN...12.....UNASSIGNED.. HTP...HOLD TYPE.......................NORMAL ***...HOLD RETRIEVE...................ORIGINATE CTO...CALL TERMINATION.............REORIGINATE IRS...RE-SELECT.......................NO


9. • Type Y and press Enter to save BTNS information in the database.



Assign the Call Pickup Group and Type


1. At the ASP Select Command prompt: Type LINE and press Enter.

SELECT COMMAND=> LINE

2. Type U and press Enter. SELECT MODE: PRINT, DISPLAY, UPDATE, LOGGING => U

3. Type M and press Enter. UPDT MODE:C-Create M-Modify D-Delete P-Copy. => M

4. Type the directory number to modify, and press Enter.

DIRECTORY NUMBER or ?.................... => 5018

5. Type the User Group number of the directory number and press Enter.

USER GROUP............................... => 1

DIRECTORY TYPE................VOICE LINE

6. Type CPG and press Enter. Specify VLIN Field to Modify or - or ?..... => CPG

7. Type the Call Pickup Group number you want the directory number to access when the feature is used, and press Enter.

The station user can pick up calls and is not picked up at other extensions.

CALL PICKUP GROUP #: 0=NONE..............0 => 1

8. Type P for line call pickup method, and press Enter.

CALL PICKUP TYPE: B, P, or ?............P => P

9. Press Enter to end prompts. Specify VLIN Field to Modify or - or ?....... =>


M M

Chapter 6, Groups

76 Aastra– 2512-004

Step Action ASP Display DRN...DIRECTORY NUMBER...................5018 UGP...USER GROUP NUMBER..................1 CLOS...CLASS OF SERVICE...................1 CPG...CALL PICKUP GROUP NUMBER...........1 HNC...HOME NNP NUMBER....................NONE TYP...CALL PICKUP TYPE...................P ACD...ACD PILOT NUMBER...................NONE HUN...HUNT PILOT NUMBER..................NONE OAM...OAI ASSOCIATED MEMBER..............NO APR...AUTOMATIC PRIVACY RELEASE..........NO CAD...100 NUM ABBREVIATED DIALING........YES DIA...STATION DIAGNOSTIC ALLOWED.........NO FIE...CALL FORWARD - INTERNAL/EXTERNAL...NO CFN...CALL FORWARD - NO ANSWER...........INACTIVE CFB...CALL FORWARD - BUSY................INACTIVE CFA...CALL FORWARD - ALL.................INACTIVE HOT...HOT LINE DIRECTORY NUMBER..........INACTIVE OHA...OFFHOOK ALERT DESTINATION NUMBER...INACTIVE TOD...TIME OF DAY RESTRICTIONS...........NO VID...InteMail ID FOR VOICE LINE.........NONE CNC...NATIONAL CALLING PARTY # CONTENTS..NONE

STATION TYPE BUTTON RING OPTION

11. • Type Y and press Enter to save LINE information in the database.



Assign Call Pickup Group Members


1. At the ASP Select Command prompt: Type CPUG and press Enter.

SELECT COMMAND => CPUG

2. Type U and press Enter. SELECT MODE: PRINT, DISPLAY, UPDATE, TITLES => U

3. Type A and press Enter. SELECT MODE: A-Add or R-Remove or T=Title.. => A

4. Type the directory number to be added to a Call Pickup Group, and press Enter.

DIRECTORY NUMBER or ?.................... =>

5. Type the user group number for the line, and press Enter.

USER GROUP............................... => 1

6. Type the number of the Call Pickup Group to which you want to add the directory number as a member and press Enter.

• Full Member configuration allows call

pickup by station users at any Call Pickup station.

• A Guest Member can pick up calls that ring at his/her call pickup station, not calls that ring at other stations.

SPECIFY GROUP NUMBER:.................... => 1

MM


Aastra – 2512-004 77


7. Select a Call Pickup Type: • Type B (Both) and press Enter for Full

Member pickup type. • Type U (Guest) and press Enter for

Guest Member pickup type.

CALL PICKUP TYPE: B, U, OR ?............U => B


8. • Type Y and press Enter to save CPUG information in the database.



Display Call Pickup Group Members


1. At the ASP Select Command prompt: Type CPUG and press Enter.

SELECT COMMAND => CPUG


The 5018 directory number is followed by U. This indicates that the line is a Guest Member.

SELECT MODE: DISPLAY, UPDATE, SEARCH, TITLES => D

3. Type the Call Pickup Group Number, and press Enter.

SPECIFY GROUP NUMBER or -................... => 1

** CALL PICKUP GROUP 1 07/07/00 10:33:56

***...USER GROUP.........................1

6024 -B 6033 -B 6049 -B 6052 -B 6034 –B 6290 -U 6282 -U 6212 -U 6329 -U 6528 –U 6532 -U 6100 -B 6101 -U 6026 -B 6103 –U 6041 -U 6550 -U 6001 -B 6613 -U 5018 -U

Hunt Groups Hunt Groups allow you to assign several voice lines to a specific directory number. When a call is placed to the hunt number, the switch "hunts" for a line that is not busy among those in the specified group.

Calls can be routed “Longest-idle” method or an “Ordered” method, where calls route based on the order the lines are assigned in the hunt group.

A hunt group directory number can designate separate “No-Answer” treatments if the call originated within or outside the switch (Internal/External handling).

Though this feature appears to resemble an ACD pilot and routing to agents, it is much different. Outside of “selection method”, there is no other routing of calls to member

M M

Chapter 6, Groups

78 Aastra– 2512-004

directory numbers and there are no unique statistics collected on calls to the group (duration, time-on-hold, etc.).

Database Requirements for Hunt Groups Table 13. Database Requirements for Hunt Groups


SPAR

HUN – Number of Hunt Groups

Not updateable The maximum number of hunt groups allowed in this system.

HUL – Lines per Hunt Group

Not updateable The maximum number of lines per hunt group.

GRPS

Hunt Pilot Number Directory number The directory number that routes to the group member stations is created when creating the hunt group, so it must display as Unassigned with the DIRN command.

User Group Number User Group Number

The Hunt Group User Group number.

Call Distribution Method • O=Ordered • L=Longest Idle

Specifies how calls route to available lines in the group. “Ordered” routes calls based on the order the lines were assigned to the group. “Longest Idle” routes calls to the line that has been idle the longest time.

Call Forward - Internal/External

Yes/No Allows non-answered calls and calls to busy extensions to forward distinctly depending on if the call being received is an internal or external call. If “No” is selected, call forwarding is handled by the LINE tables of the individual agent lines. If set to “Yes”, the command prompts for two forwarding numbers used for internal no-answer, internal-busy, external no-answer, and external busy calls.

Call Forward - Busy Action

• N=Inactive • M=Immediate

Defines if calls to busy extensions should be forwarded per the line’s call forward busy destination. This prompt will is requested only if Internal/External handling is set to “No”.

Call Forward – Busy Number

Directory number The directory number to forward calls to when all agent lines are busy. This prompt only appears if Call Forward – Busy action is set to “Immediate”.

LINE

Hunt Group Number DIRN This directory number is the number dialed when routing to group members. The Hunt Group number must already exist in order so that lines can be assigned to the group.

Idle Queue Priority 1-7 Defines the priority for this line within the Hunt Group. When “Ordered” is defined as the line selection method, this priority selects an idle line from the group.

MM


Aastra – 2512-004 79

Meet-Me Conference Group Meet-Me Conference allows 3, 7, or 11 party conferences to be associated with a specific directory number. That directory number is then dialed to join a conference.

Meet-Me Conference numbers can be temporarily reserved or permanently reserved. When not permanently reserved, once a conference is established and terminated for a specific conference number, the number becomes unavailable for another conference until it is again reserved. Permanently reserved conference numbers can be used multiple times with no intervention; however, permanently reserving a Meet-Me Conference number takes a switch conference bridge out of the pool of available bridges (which can prevent the use of the normal Transfer and Conference features).

The reserved status of a Meet-me Conference number can be managed through the MMC command at an ASP terminal and can also be managed through the PC Attendant Console.

Non-PC Attendant Consoles cannot reserve Meet-Me Conference numbers. The creation of Meet-Me Conference numbers can only be accomplished from an ASP terminal

Database Requirements for Meet-Me Conference Groups Table 14. Database Requirements for Meet-Me Conference

Field Option Description

SPAR

Under Feature Availbility: HOTLINE/MEET ME CONFERENCE must be set to Yes.

GRPS – Meet Me Conference Group

Specify Group Number Group Number Group Type MMCG Assigns MMCG as the type. GRP – User Group User Group Number Identifies the user group that uses this Meet-Me

Group. COS - Class Of Service Class of Service number The Meet-Me Conference group COS takes priority

over the line or trunk class of service.

GRPS – Conference Bridge Group

CB12 CB8P or CB4P

Conference Bridge Type Defines the type of conference bridge.

TNE - Tone • N=None • Z=Zip • ZZ=Zip-Zip • B=Break-in Tone

Defines what is heard when someone enters the conference.

DIRN

Directory Number DIRN Creates a Meet-Me Conference directory number.

M M

Chapter 6, Groups

80 Aastra– 2512-004


UGP - User Group Number

User Group Identifies the User Group for this Directory number.

Directory Number Type MMCF Identifies the directory number type. COS - Class Of Service Class of Service Number GRP - Meet Me Group Number

Meet-Me Conference Group Number

Identifies the Meet-me Conference Group to which this number is assigned to.

CBG - Conference Bridge Group

Conference Bridge Group Number

Conference bridges on the switch are grouped under the GRPS by size (4/8/12 port Conference Bridges). This prompt identifies the bridge group used for this directory number which specifies the maximum number of parties allowed within this conference number (3/7/11).

RXV - Permanently Reserved Directory Number

Yes/No Always displays “No” when creating a Meet-Me Conference number and can only be altered using DIRN/UPDATE for this Meet-Me Conference number.

MMC Command The MMC command displays a Meet-Me Conference group as well as reserves and releases existing Meet-me Conference numbers. The MMC command only requests the Meet-Me Conference group number and the Meet-me Conference directory number when reserving or canceling a reservation.

Display Meet-Me Conference Fields

Display the Class of Service (CLOS) assigned to a directory number to determine if the Meet-Me Conference feature is allowed. If the currently assigned CLOS does not allow the feature, modify that CLOS to include it only if the feature is appropriate for all other users with that CLOS assigned.





When the Meet-Me Conference field is set to Yes, the feature is allowed for directory numbers with this Class of Service assigned.

SELECT MODE: DISPLAY, UPDATE, SEARCH, TITLES => D

3. Type the CLOS number and press Enter. SPECIFY CLASS OF SERVICE # or - ............ => 20

4. All CLOS parameters display. ** CLASS OF SERVICE # 20 06/15/00 17:06:40

TYP...CLASS OF SERVICE TYPE..............UNIVERSAL ACR...ACCESS CODE ROUTING ALLOWED........YES

MM


Aastra – 2512-004 81

Step Action ASP Display TOL...TOLL CALLS.........................YES BSO...BUSY OVERRIDE ALLOWED..............YES BOP...BUSY OVERRIDE PRIORITY.............0 CRO...CALL RESTRICTION OPTION............NONE . . . MMC...MEET-ME CONFERENCE...............NO . . . END OF DISPLAY

Activate Meet-Me Conference





3. Type M and press Enter. UPDT MODE: C-Create,M-Modify,D-Delete,P-Copy. => M

4. Type the Class of Service number to be changed, and press Enter.

SPECIFY CLASS OF SERVICE #:................. => 20

5. Type MMC and press Enter. Specify CLOS Field To Modify or - or ?..... => MMC

6. Type Y and press Enter to enable the Meet-Me Conference feature.

MEET-ME CONFERENCE: Y=Yes; N=No........N => Y

7. Press Enter. Specify CLOS Field To Modify or - or ?....... =>

8. Review the CLOS parameters. *** VERIFY/DISPLAY ***

** CLASS OF SERVICE # 20 06/24/00 10:29:16

TYP...CLASS OF SERVICE TYPE..............UNIVERSAL ACR...ACCESS CODE ROUTING ALLOWED........YES TOL...TOLL CALLS.........................YES BSO...BUSY OVERRIDE ALLOWED..............YES . . . MMC...MEET-ME CONFERENCE...............YES . . .

9. • Type Y and press Enter to save the information in the database.



M M

Chapter 6, Groups

82 Aastra– 2512-004

Display Assigned Meet-Me Conference Groups Display the groups in the system to determine if a Meet-Me Conference Group is available to support use of the feature.

Display Assigned Groups




2. Type D and press Enter. SELECT MODE:DISPLAY, UPDATE, TITLES, SEARCH => D

3. Type “-” and press Enter. SPECIFY GROUP NUMBER or - ................. => -

4. Type A to view assigned group numbers, and press Enter.

Group 14 in the following example is a Meet-Me Conference Group.

A=Assigned; U=Unassigned GROUPS...........A =>

5. The Group Assignment Report is displayed.

GROUP NUMBER ASSIGNMENT REPORT 07/02/00 11:13:16

GROUP ASSIGNMENT GROUP ASSIGNMENT GROUP ASSIGNMENT 1 TRUNK UGP:1 2 TRUNK UGP:1 3 TRUNK UGP:1 4 4 PORT CBRG 5 TRUNK UGP:1 6 RSP LINK 7 8 PORT CBRG 8 RSP LINK 9 RSP LINK 10 12 PORT CBRG 11 TRUNK UGP:1 12 TRUNK UGP:1 13 TRUNK UGP:1 14 MEET-ME

Create a Meet-Me Conference Group




7. Type U and press Enter. SELECT MODE:DISPLAY, UPDATE, TITLES, SEARCH => U

8. Type C and press Enter. UPDT: C-Create,M-Modify,D-Delete,P-Copy... => C

9. Type a number that has not been assigned to any group and press Enter.

SPECIFY GROUP NUMBER:................... => 15

10. Type MMCG and press Enter. ENTER GROUPS TYPE or ?.................. => MMCG

11. Type a title for the group and press Enter. ENTER TITLE:. => MEET-ME CONFERENCE GROUP__

12. Review the Meet-Me Conference Group parameters.

***...MEET-ME CONFERENCE GROUP NUMBER......14

USER GROUP NUMBER.......................... => 1 CLASS OF SERVICE........................... => 1

MM


Aastra – 2512-004 83

Step Action ASP Display *** VERIFY/DISPLAY ***

MEET-ME CONFERENCE GROUP ***...MEET-ME CONFERENCE GROUP NUMBER......15 UGP...USER GROUP NUMBER..................1 CLOS...CLASS OF SERVICE.........................1


13. • Type Y and press Enter to save group information in the database.



Create the Conference Bridge Group




2. Type U and press Enter. SELECT MODE:DISPLAY, UPDATE, TITLES, SEARCH => U

3. Type C and press Enter. UPDT: C-Create,M-Modify,D-Delete,P-Copy... => C

4. Type a number that has not been assigned to any group and press Enter.

SPECIFY GROUP NUMBER:................... => 15

5. Type CB12 and press Enter. ENTER GROUPS TYPE or ?.................. => CB12

6. Type a title for the group and press Enter. ENTER TITLE:. => CBRG for Meet=Me

7. Review the Conference Bridge Group parameters.


CBRG for Meet-Me

***...12 PORT CONFERENCE GROUP............ ...92 *** CONFERENCE BRIDGE SIZE.............. ..12 TNE CONFERENCE CONFIRMATION TONE BREAK IN TONE

DOES UPDATE VERIFY?

8. • Type Y and press Enter to save group information in the database.


DOES UPDATE VERIFY? =>Y

M M

Chapter 6, Groups

84 Aastra– 2512-004

Create a Meet-Me Conference Directory Number

The Meet-Me Conference group and the Conference Bridge group must already exist.




2. Type U and press Enter. SELECT MODE:DISPLAY,UPDATE,LOGGING,SEARCH => U

3. Type C and press Enter. UPDT MODE:C-Create M-Modify D-Delete P-Copy=> C

4. Type an unassigned directory number and press Enter.

DIRECTORY NUMBER or ?.................. => 4610

5. Type MMCF and press Enter. ENTER DIRECTORY TYPE: OR ? ............ => MMCF

6. Type the number of the Class of Service to be associated with this directory number, and press Enter.

CLASS OF SERVICE......................... => 20

7. Type the Meet-Me Conference Group Number assigned under the GRPS command, and press Enter.

MEET-ME GROUP NUMBER:.................... => 15

8. Type the number of the Conference Bridge Group that is used for Meet-Me Conferences, and press Enter.

CONFERENCE BRIDGE GROUP #:............... => 54

9. Review the parameters. *** VERIFY/DISPLAY ***

***...DIRECTORY NUMBER.....................4610 CLOS...CLASS OF SERVICE.......................20 RSV...PERMANENTLY RESERVED DIR #.............NO MMC...MEET-ME CONFERENCE GROUP #.............15 CBG...CONFERENCE BRIDGE GROUP #..............54

10. Verify the settings: • Type Y and press Enter to save group

information in the database. • Type N and press Enter to abandon all

responses.


11. Select a permanent or temporary Meet-Me Conferencing directory number. • Type Y and press Enter to permanently

reserve (activate) the number for any user having a CLOS allowing MMC.

• Accept the default (N) by pressing Enter to allow attendants only to reserve a conference using the number.

PERMANENTLY RESERVED DIR #: Y=Yes; N=No..N => N

MM


Aastra – 2512-004 85

Display the Meet-Me Directory Assignment

Step Action Display

1. Type GRPS and press Enter. SELECT COMMAND => GRPS


3. Type the number of a Meet-Me Conference Group, and press Enter.

SPECIFY GROUP NUMBER or - ............... => 15

4. Meet-Me Conference Group parameters are displayed.

** MEET-ME CONFERENCE.......07/24/00..15:54:44

***...MEET-ME CONFERENCE GROUP NUMBER....15

UGP...USER GROUP NUMBER..................1 CLOS...CLASS OF SERVICE...................20

***MEET-ME DIRECTORY ASSIGNMENTS***

*** MEET-ME GROUP 15 ***

DIRN PARTIES STATE DIRN PARTIES STATE

4610 4 AVAIL 4611 7 P-RSVD

END OF DISPLAY

Add a Meet-Me Conference Feature Button






4. Type BTN and press Enter. Specify BTNS Field to Modify or - or ?...... => BTN

5. Type the number of the button to be modified, and press Enter.

BUTTON NUMBER TO MODIFY: Return=END......... => 10

6. Type AMMC to assign the Attendant Meet-Me Conference feature to the button, and press Enter.

BTN-10 TYPE: S=Sel; U=Unas; Feature or ?.U => AMMC

7. Press Enter to end button modification. BUTTON NUMBER TO MODIFY: Return=END......... =>

8. Press Enter to proceed to the parameter display.


9. Review the button template parameters. *** VERIFY/DISPLAY ***


BTN....1.....FEATURE.....LAST NUMBER REDIAL BTN....2.....FEATURE.....CALL TRANSFER BTN....3.....FEATURE.....CONFERENCE BTN....4.....FEATURE.....CALLBACK BTN....5.....FEATURE.....ABBREVIATED DIAL

M M

Chapter 6, Groups

86 Aastra– 2512-004

Step Action ASP Display BTN....6.....FEATURE.....DATA BTN....7.....FEATURE.....HOLD BTN....8.....SELECT...... BTN....9.....FEATURE.....InteMail - MESSAGE DESK BTN...10....FEATURE.....MEET ME CONFERENCE BTN...11.....FEATURE.....CALL FORWARD BTN...12.....UNASSIGNED.. HTP...HOLD TYPE.........................NORMAL ***...HOLD RETRIEVE.....................ORIGINATE CTO...CALL TERMINATION..................REORIGINATE IRS...RE-SELECT.........................NO


10. Verify the BTNS settings. • Type Y and press Enter to save

BTNS information in the database. • Type N and press Enter to abandon

all responses.


Assign MMC Capabilities for Attendants Assigning a Meet-Me Conference Group to an Attendant Group gives operators in the group the ability to reserve Meet Me Conferences. Operators can then use any temporary MMC directory number for an assigned MMC group to set up conferences.





3. Type M and press Enter. UPDT: C-Create,M-Modify,D-Delete,P-Copy...... => M

4. Type the number of the Attendant Group to be modified, and press Enter.

SPECIFY GROUP NUMBER:....................... => 20

GROUP TYPE.......ATTENDANT

5. Type MMG and press Enter. Specify AGRP Field to Modify or - or ?..... => MMG

6. Type the number of the Meet-Me Conference Group to be associated with this attendant group, and press Enter.

MEET-ME CONFERENCE GROUP #: N=NONE........N => 15

7. Press Enter to proceed to the parameter display.

Specify AGRP Field to Modify or - or ?....... =>

8. Review the group parameters. *** VERIFY/DISPLAY ***

ATTENDANT CONSOLE GROUP

***...ATTENDANT GROUP...............20 ***...USER GROUP....................1 CLOS...CLASS OF SERVICE..............1 OAM...OAI ASSOCIATED MEMBER.........NO ACQ...CALL QUEUE HANDLING...........FIFO LSH...LOOP SELECTION HANDLING.......LONGEST ARP...ATTENDANT RING PING OPTION....NO RING PING

MM


Aastra – 2512-004 87

Step Action ASP Display CSN...COLD START NIGHT ANSWER.........YES CWT...CALL WAITING THRESHOLD..........3 NDN...NIGHT ANSWER DIRECTION.......VOICE LINE 6612 DRN...ATTENDANT GROUP DIRECTORY.......NONE MMG...MEET-ME CONFERENCE GRP #........15 OHT...OUTSIDE HANDLING FOR TRUNK CALLS...NO ANC...ANNOUNCEMENT OR ANNUNCIATOR GRP #..NONE ECP...SOURCE OF EXTENDED CALLING PARTY #.ATTENDANT

PORT ASSIGNMENT REPORT

2077 2078


9. Verify the group settings. • Type Y and press Enter to save

information in the database. • Type N and press Enter to abandon

all responses.


Intercom Groups Intercom Groups allow users within the same Intercom group to call other users in the group by selecting the intercom line and dialing a one or two-digit number. Intercom Groups can be created as 10-member or 100-member groups. When dialing members 1 through 9 in a 100-number group, users must prefix the number with a zero (0).

You can convert a 10-number group to a 100-number group, but must remove existing lines from the 10-number group and re-add them to the 100-number group because of the 2-digit number requirement for the 100-number group.

An Intercom Group cannot be deleted, but all members of a group can be removed from the group.

An Intercom line can only be assigned to an ITE Line Select button, and cannot be assigned to STE devices. Intercom lines cannot be placed on hold and cannot be transferred.

Database Requirements for Intercom Groups Table 15. Database Requirement for Intercom Groups


INCM

Specify Group Number Intercom Group Number

Assigns the Intercom Group number.

Group Size 10-Number or 100-Number Group

Specifies the number of lines allowed in this group.

Group Ring Option N=Normal, D=Distinct

• Normal - Intercom calls ring the station the same as other internal calls.

M M

Chapter 6, Groups

88 Aastra– 2512-004


• Distinct - Distinguishes an intercom call from an internal call by ringing with the triple-ring system ring.

Override Do Not Disturb Option

Yes/No Allows intercom calls to override the station Do Not Disturb status.

FONE

BTN – Line Select Button I + Number Assign the Line Select to “I” and give it an Intercom number (1-9) or (00-99)

Build an Intercom Group


1. At the ASP Select Command prompt: Type INCM and press Enter.

SELECT COMMAND => INCM


3. Type C and press Enter. SELECT MODE: C-Create or M-Modify............ => C

4. Type the number to be assigned to the new intercom group, and press Enter.

SPECIFY GROUP NUMBER......................... =>

5. Type a title of up to 40 ASCII characters, to be associated with this intercom group, and press Enter.

ENTER TITLE: => _________________________________

6. Select the group size • Accept the default (T) by pressing

Enter if the group has 10 or less members.

• Type H and press Enter if the group has 11 or more members.

D is often chosen to help users distinguish Intercom calls from other internal calls.

GROUP SIZE: T=10 NUMBERS; H=100 NUMBERS.....T =>

7. Select the ring option. • Accept the default (N) by pressing

Enter if intercom calls are indicated by a series of single rings.

• Type D and press Enter if intercom calls are indicated by a series of triple rings (three ring priority call).

GROUP RING OPTION: N=NORMAL; D=DISTINCT.....N =>

8. Select the Override Do Not Disturb option:

OVERRIDE DISTURB: Y=YES; N=NO..N =>

MM


Aastra – 2512-004 89


• Type Y and press Enter if an intercom line can ring when the Do Not Disturb feature is activated on a station.

• Accept the default (N) by pressing Enter if the intercom line does not ring when the station is in Do Not Disturb.

9. Verify the Intercom Group selections. *** VERIFY/DISPLAY ***

***...GROUP SIZE......................... 10 NUMBERS ***...GROUP RING OPTION..................DISTINCT ***...OVERRIDE DON'T DISTURB OPTION......YES


10. Verify the group entries. • Type Y and press Enter to save

Intercom Group information in the database.



Assign a Station to an Intercom Group


1. At the ASP Select Command prompt: Type FONE and press Enter.

SELECT COMMAND => FONE

2. Type U and press Enter. SELECT MODE: PRINT, DISPLAY, UPDATE => U

3. Type M and press Enter to create a port. UPDT MODE: C-Create M-Modify D-Delete........ => M

4. Select the switch location where the station is attached. • Type the port number in the format

shown at right, and press Enter. • Type the location number in the

format shown at right, and press Enter.

• Type ? and press Enter to display the help menu.

ENTER PORT NUMBER, LOCATION, or ?............ => ?

Enter a port number:

..=> ww.x.yy.zz Specify port, where

ww = Cabinet x = Shelf yy = Card zz = Circuit

or a location:

..=> L,aaa.....aaa Specify LOCATION, where

aaa.....aaa = Location name

5.

When a port number or location is entered, the port type is displayed

PORT TYPE...........................ITES

M M

Chapter 6, Groups

90 Aastra– 2512-004


6. Type BTN and press Enter. Specify ITE /STE Field to Modify or - or ?.. => btn

7. Select an unassigned line select button for the hot line.

LINE SELECT (Button #-Type-Number/Group):

8-VLIN- 2297/50 9-SSTS 10-SEL

8. Type the selected number, and press Enter.

LINE SELECT BUTTON NUMBER: Return=END........ => 10

9.

The displayed text at right shows the type of lines that can be assigned.

ENTER LINE TYPE OR ?........................V => ?

(V): STANDARD VOICE LINE (A): ACD LINE (T): TOD RESTRICTED (H): HOT LINE (C): CO LINE-DEDICATED (U): HUNT LINE (I): INTERCOM (S): STATION STATUS

10. Type I and press Enter. ENTER LINE TYPE OR ?...................V => I

11. Type the Intercom Group (XXX) and the station number in the group (YY), and press Enter.

INTERCOM GROUP (XXX) AND NUMBER (YY): XXX,YY. => 1, 1

12. Press Enter. LINE SELECT (Button #-Type-Number/Group):

8-VLIN- 2297/50 9-SSTS 10-ILIN-1 /1

LINE SELECT BUTTON NUMBER: Return=END........ =>

13. Press Enter to go to the verify display. Specify ITE /STE Field to Modify or - or ?... =>

14. Select the display format. • Type N and press Enter if a display

is not required. • Type D and press Enter to display a

detailed description of station features including a list of features and assigned buttons.

• Type P and press Enter to display a picture of assigned buttons.

• Accept the default (B) by pressing Enter to display the list and the picture.

VERIFY DISPLAY FORMAT: N, D, P, B or ?......B => d

15. Review the display. *** VERIFY DISPLAY ***

***...STATION.......................PORT

01.3.07.19

***...STATION EQUIPMENT TYPE.............ITES BTP...BUTTON TEMPLATE NUMBER.............10 DND...DO NOT DISTURB ALLOWED.............YES DNS...DO NOT DISTURB STATUS..............INACTIVE VMC...InteMail MESSAGE DESK OPERATOR.....NO AND...ALPHANUMERIC DISPLAY...............YES ADP...DESTINATION DISPLAY PREFERRED......YES AHL...AUTOMATIC HOLD.....................NO HRC...SWITCHHOOK RINGER CUTOFF...........NO

MM


Aastra – 2512-004 91

Step Action ASP Display DPT...DTMF PASSTHROUGH TIMING INDEX......NONE ADD...ADT ANALOG SIDE DTMF DIALING.......NO LPR...LINE PRESELECT TYPE................PRIME &RING PLB...PRIME LINE PRESELECT BUTTON #......8

BUTTON TYPE LINE/FEATURE ID

1.........FEATURE........CALL TRANSFER 2.........FEATURE........CONFERENCE 3.........FEATURE........CALLBACK 4.........FEATURE........ABBREVIATED DIAL 5.........FEATURE........CALL PARK 6.........FEATURE........DISPLAY 7.........FEATURE........HOLD 8.PL......VOICE LINE.....DRN:2297 - UGP:50..RING

PRESEL DISP 9.........STATION STATUS.BASE.... RING

MEMBER..PORT # 01.3.07.20

RING BUTTON 9

10.........INTERCOM.......GROUP 1 # 1 ..... 11.........FEATURE........CALL PICKUP 12.........FEATURE........CANCEL


16. Verify the FONE entries. • Type Y and press Enter to save

FONE information in the database. • Type N and press Enter to abandon

all responses.


Display an Intercom Group




2. Type the group number and press Enter. SELECT MODE: PRINT, DISPLAY, UPDATE, TITLES => D

3. Type the group number, and press Enter. SPECIFY GROUP NUMBER......................... =>

4. The Intercom Group details are displayed.

** INTERCOM GROUP 1 06/

04/00 07:33:08

SIZE................ 10 NUMBER GROUP RING..........DISTINCT OVERRIDE DISTURB....YES PORT DIAL# BTN PORT DIAL# BTN PORT DIAL# BTN PORT DIAL# BTN

1.3.07.19 1 10 1.3.07.20 2 10

SPECIFY GROUP NUMBER or -.................... =>

5. • Type the next group number, and press Enter.


M M

Chapter 6, Groups

92 Aastra– 2512-004


Or • Type the abort (@) character to

return to the Select Command prompt.

Modify an Intercom Group An Intercom Group can be modified by:

• Changing the group characteristics and • Reassigning (removing or adding) the lines of a group





3. Type C and press Enter. SELECT MODE: C-Create or M-Modify............ => M

4. Type the number to be group number to modify, and press Enter.


5. Type the new title of up to 40 ASCII characters, and press Enter.

ENTER TITLE:.....INTERCOM 10 MEMBER =>

INTERCOM 100 MEMBER

6. Select the new group size. • Accept the default (T), and press

Enter if the group has 10 or less members.

• Type H and press Enter if the group has 11 or more members.

GROUP SIZE: T=10 NUMBERS; H=100 NUMBERS.....T =>

7. Select the ring option. • Accept the default (N) by pressing

Enter if intercom calls are indicated by a series of single rings.

• Type D and press Enter if intercom calls are indicated by a series of triple rings (three ring priority call).

GROUP RING OPTION: N=NORMAL; D=DISTINCT.....N =>

8. Select the override don’t disturb option. • Type Y and press Enter if an

intercom line can ring when the Do Not Disturb feature is activated on a station.

• Accept the default (N) by pressing Enter if the intercom line will not ring when the station is in Do Not

OVERRIDE DON'T DISTURB OPTION: Y=YES; N=NO..N =>

MM


Aastra – 2512-004 93

Step Action ASP Display Disturb.

9. Verify the Intercom Group selections. *** VERIFY/DISPLAY ***

***...GROUP SIZE......................... 10 NUMBERS ***...GROUP RING OPTION..................DISTINCT ***...OVERRIDE DON'T DISTURB OPTION......YES


10. • Type Y and press Enter to save Intercom Group information in the database.



M M

Chapter 6, Groups

94 Aastra– 2512-004

MM


Aastra – 2512-004 95

Chapter 7 Find Available Ports and Directory Numbers

Overview This chapter describes how to find available ports and directory numbers.

Directory Number Display Use the DIRN command to locate available directory numbers when building an STE or ITE station. The DIRN command displays directory number information in several formats including:

• Data for an individual directory number. • Summary list data for a range of assigned directory numbers with station ports. For

this type of display, you can also specify the type of directory number. Several types can be specified, but for station setup you will use only Voice Line (VLIN) and Data Line (DLIN).

• Detailed data for a range of assigned directory numbers with station ports. For this type of display, you can specify VLIN and DLIN types.

• A list of assigned directory numbers without station ports. • A list of unassigned directory numbers.

All directory numbers are based on the User Group Directory Number Allocation table (UGRP/DNA).

Select an unassigned number from those that have been allocated for use.

Display Unassigned Directory Numbers To display individual unassigned directory numbers or a range of directory numbers:




2. Type D and press Enter. SELECT MODE: PRINT, DISPLAY, UPDATE, LOGGING,

SEARCH, VACANT => D

3. Type “-” and press Enter.

An individual directory number or a range of directory numbers may be selected.

DIRECTORY NUMBER or - or ?................... => ?

To display individual directory number

details, enter ..=> xxxxx

A range may be entered to display all Assigned or

Unassigned directory numbers:

M M

Chapter 7, Available Ports and Directory Numbers

96 Aastra– 2512-004

Step Action ASP Display ..=> xxxxx-xxxxx

..=> xxxxx-

..=> -xxxxx

..=> -


USER GROUP................................... => 1

5. Type U and press Enter. SELECT DIRECTORY # STATUS: A, W, U, D or ?.A => ?

Entry syntax: A<,DIRN type> D<,DIRN type> W<,DIRN type> U

where:

A = Assigned DIRNs (summary list) D = Assigned DIRNs (detailed display) W = Assigned DIRNs Without Station Ports U = Unassigned DIRNs

If a "DIRN type" is specified, only directory numbers of the requested type will appear in the report.

Valid DIRN types for "A/D/W" response:

VLIN..Voice Line DLIN..Data Line SDRN..Satellite Dir # TAAL..Answ Any Line HUNP..Hunt Pilot ACDP..ACD Pilot DTRK..Data Trunk QNBR..Quick Number TTST..Test Tone PKCH..Park Channel ALDN..Listed Dir # HOTC..Hotline Conf ATDC..Attndt Console AGRP..Attendant Grp MMCF..Meet-me Conf FDRN..Feature DIRN # TCR...T_Call Regulator BDLN..BRI Data Line RETURN CONTINUES DISPLAY..... =>

Valid DIRN types for the "W" response:

VLIN..Voice Line DLIN..Data Line

6. Unassigned directory numbers are displayed.

*** DIRECTORY NUMBER ASSIGNMENT REPORT *** 02/21/

00 08:24:30

UNASSIGNED DIRECTORY NUMBERS:

2000-2099 2201-2289 2291-2299 2316-2323 2325-2350 2355-2399 3301-3309 3311-3319 3321-3329 3331-3339 3341-3799 4000-4199

TOTAL NUMBER OF UNASSIGNED DIRECTORY NUMBERS: 972

END OF DISPLAY

Display Specific Directory Number Information To find specific directory number information, use the DIRN command as follows:

Step Action Display

1. Log on to the ASP with an approved password.


MM


Aastra – 2512-004 97

Step Action Display

3. Type D and press Enter. SELECT MODE: PRINT, DISPLAY, UPDATE, LOGGING, SEARCH, VACANT => D

4. Type a specific directory number and press Enter.

DIRECTORY NUMBER or - or ?................... => 2010

5. Type a user group number and press Enter.

USER GROUP................................... => 1

6. Directory information is displayed.

** VOICE LINE DEFINITION 10/10/01 05:10:44

DRN... DIRECTORY NUMBER...................2010 UGP... USER GROUP NUMBER..................1 CLOS...CLASS OF SERVICE...................1 CPG... CALL PICKUP GROUP NUMBER...........0 HNC... HOME NNP NUMBER....................(NONE) AAL... ACD AGENT LINE.....................YES ACD... HOME ACD PILOT NUMBER..............2000 /1 ***...CURRENT ACD PILOT................. 2000 /1 WUP... WRAP-UP ALLOWED....................YES AIP... AGENT IDLE QUEUE PRIORITY..........1 ASO... AGENT AUTO-SIGNON..................2010 HUN... HUNT PILOT NUMBER..................NONE OAM... OAI ASSOCIATED MEMBER..............NO APR... AUTOMATIC PRIVACY RELEASE..........NO CAD... 100 NUM ABBREVIATED DIALING........NO DIA... STATION DIAGNOSTIC ALLOWED.........YES FIE... CALL FORWARD - INTERNAL/EXTERNAL...NO CFN... CALL FORWARD - NO ANSWER...........INACTIVE CFB...CALL FORWARD - BUSY................INACTIVE CFA...CALL FORWARD - ALL.................INACTIVE HOT...HOT LINE DIRECTORY NUMBER..........INACTIVE OHA...OFFHOOK ALERT DESTINATION NUMBER...INACTIVE TOD...TIME OF DAY RESTRICTIONS...........NO VID...InteMail ID FOR VOICE LINE.........NONE CNC...NATIONAL CALLING PARTY # CONTENTS..NONE STATION TYPE BUTTON RING OPTION 01.2.11.34 ITES 4 RING AGENT-ACD

Team Membership:

20

END OF DISPLA

Phone Port Display A port is located on a line card in the switch. It is how everything gets into and out of the switch. Each piece of hardware including ITE and STE station devices (voice lines), data devices (data lines), trunks, and overhead circuits must be assigned to a port.

When you create a station, it is important to know which ports and which port types are available (unassigned). Use the CARD command to locate available station ports. The CARD command provides several types of Port Assignment Reports, both detailed and brief. The reports can be sorted by:

• Assigned ports with and without Directory Numbers (DIRNs) sorted by location (cabinet, shelf, or card/slot)

• Unassigned ports by card type and location • Location sort by cabinet, shelf, or card/slot with port type and User Group (UGP)

When you set up a station, the primary concern is locating an unassigned port. You must also be certain the interface (port) type is correct for the type of station you are creating and that the station is wired to the correct port:

M M


98 Aastra– 2512-004

• ITE, Attendant Console stations, and data interfaces to an ITE card port. • STE stations to a STE card port.

This information is also valuable when you physically connect a station (when you run the wire).

CARD Command

Before creating a phone port, it is important to review the configuration parameters for ports of that type in the switching system. The CARD command lets you display the information for assigned and unassigned ports.

Choose from the CARD command display options to view the port information that relates to the stations you plan to build. It allows you to:

• Display all cards in a cabinet. • Display cards by shelf. • Display ports in a specific card slot or at a particular port location.

You can include port type (ITE, STE, etc.) or port assignment state (assigned – in use or unassigned – available for assignment) information to narrow the scope of the data that displays. When you display assigned ports, the CARD display can include the:

• Port location – Cabinet/Shelf/Card Slot/Circuit • Port type • Directory number and user group assignment.

If you need to create a particular port type, for example an ITE, use CARD to display all unassigned ports of that type.

• The format for entering a port location for is Cab.shelf.slot.ckt. If the port location name feature is used, the format is L,portname, where portname is the name assigned to identify a port.

• When creating station database for ITEs, use FONE instead of CARD to create an ITE. If you attempt to create a single port in the CARD command, the system displays a message that the FONE command should be used and switches you to that command.

The following abbreviations are used in card and port information displays:

• CKT - A decimal number of the ITE circuit being displayed. • TYPE - The type of ITE equipment connected to this port. • BTP - The button template assigned to this port. • PRIME LINE - Identifies the button number of the primary voice line. • DISPLAY - Identifies a display phone. • USER GROUP - The primary line's user group assignment. • VLIN DIRN - The Primary line or first line assigned to the telephone. • DATA DIRN - The data line directory number if one is assigned.

MM


Aastra – 2512-004 99

Choose an Available Port


1. At the ASP Select Command prompt: Type CARD and press Enter.

SELECT COMMAND => CARD

2. Type D and press Enter to update.

• If your switch has station

interfaces on one shelf only, save time by specifying the location in the next step. If you do not know where your interfaces are, type “-” to go to the help (?) text.

• If you view the help (?) text, press Enter a second time to specify your location.

SELECT MODE: PRINT, DISPLAY, UPDATE, MOVE => D

3. Select a physical port location. • Type “-” and press Enter to view

all ports. • Type a location number in the

form shown at right, and press Enter.

• Type ? and press Enter to see the formatting information.

ENTER LOCATION OR ?............... => ?

Enter the Location in the following way:

.. => x Any specific location

.. => x-y Any range of locations

.. => - All

where a Location is:

.. => ww Specific Cabinet

.. => ww.xx Specific Shelf

.. => ww.xx.y Specific Slot

.. => ww.xx.y.zz Specific location

4. Type U and press Enter. DISPLAY TYPE OR ?................A => ?

SYNTAX:WHERE:

A<,PORT type>A = Assigned Ports W<,PORT type>W = Assigned Ports W/O DIRNs DW<,PORT type>DW = Detail Assigned Ports W/O DIRNs U<,CARD type>U = Unassigned Ports D<,PORT type>D = Detail Report CO<,PORT type>CO = Count CA CA = Display by Cabinet S S = Display by Shelf CS CS = Display by Card/Slot

5. Choose a port.

Identify Port and Directory Numbers from a Phone You can also identify Port numbers for any station you wish to modify. The easiest way to determine these numbers is with station feature codes at the station to be modified. To find these numbers from a telephone set:

• Press #*113 to listen to the directory number of the line you are on. • Press #*119 to listen to the port number.

M M


100 Aastra– 2512-004

MM


Aastra – 2512-004 101

Chapter 8 Build an STE Station

Overview This chapter describes how to build a Standard Telephone Equipment (STE) station.

The STE Station A Standard Telephone Equipment (STE) station is a single-line analog telephone. The features for each STE are defined using the FONE command. The FONE command also assigns the LINE table to the station device. Line types include the following:

• Standard Voice Lines (the default type). • Hot Lines - Direct connection to a single destination number without dialing. • Dedicated Central Office (CO) Lines - Private connection over a CO line, bypassing

the local switch. • Station Status Lines - Private communication path between two to five phones. • Data Lines - Synchronous or asynchronous data transfer. • Restricted Access DID Lines - Direct Inward Dial (DID) lines are restricted

depending on the time of day, day of week, or day of year.

Each LINE has the following assigned:

• Class of Service (CLOS) • Directory Number (DIRN) • User Group (UGRP)

Build an STE Station The STE station device is an analog two-wire telephone device functionally equivalent to the common home phone.

Prerequisites Several database items must exist before you can create a station.

• User Group – See Pointspan System Database Administration (591-2513-nnn). • Class of Service See Chapter 4. • Available Directory Number – See Chapter 7. • Available STE Port – See Chapter 7.

M M

Chapter 8, Build an STE Station

102 Aastra– 2512-004

Determine the User Group Unlike the class of service, a user group defines how calls route within and outside of the switch. Various methods can determine the user group for a new STE station. These methods are based on how the system database is administered on your switch and where the station is installed. For the specifics and details for User Groups, to the Pointspan System Database document (591-2513-nnn).

Determine Class of Service When researching information, first determine the class of service used for the line. The class of service defines several groups of operating characteristics and allowances that are applicable to the directory number. For a directory number, the following categories of information need to be determined:

• Call Types Allowed – Determine the class of service by determining the types of calls the user is allowed to make. For example, will the user make only local calls or both local and long distance calls.

• Call Features Allowed – Determine the features this user will be allowed to use. For example, can the user place calls on Hold, transfer calls, or participate in conference calls. With the exception of the Do Not Disturb feature, all call features are allowed or disallowed within the Class of Service table.

• Account Code/Authorization Code Collection – Determine if the user is required to use an account code or authorization code. Account and Authorization codes can be collected before all calls or be configured so that they are only collected based on the type of call being made. How Account and Authorization codes will be collected are defined within the class of service. Additional database setup is required for Auth Codes to function correctly and be validated by the system.

Using the CLOS command, existing classes of services on the switch should be displayed and examined to determine which class may meet the requirements. Te process of examining the parameters in the CLOS table is not an easy or quick process, but doing so helps reduce the number of CLOS tables on the switch. On systems where CLOS tables are closely administered, it is possible to determine the class of service to use based on standards defined by your switch administrator.

STE Station Port Determination Before the database can be installed to support a new STE device, an available STE port must be identified in the switch. In addition to determining an available switch port you must insure that the STE station is physically wired to the port selected. Some customers may install (wire) the STE station prior to any database modifications. In that case, the station port number is determined based on where the station is wired on the Main Distribution Frame (MDF).

Use the CARD command to identify an available STE port. See Chapter 7.

STE Card Types

• ST24 - Supports up to 24 two-wire analog STE devices. This card does not support a Message Waiting Indicator (MWI) and requires a Ring Generator interface card to support ringing the STE stations.

MM


Aastra – 2512-004 103

• ST36 - Supports up to 36 two-wire analog STE devices. This card supports a Message Waiting Indicator on STE devices and requires a Ring Generator interface card equipped to support ringing the STE stations

• OPX - The Off Premises Extension line card is used to interface a rotary or DTMF dial analog phone to the switch.

• SASI - Supports up to 36 two-wire analog STE devices. The SASI card supports a Message Waiting Indicator and does not require an external Ring Generator card. The SASI card also supports standard caller ID for STE station devices.

Find the Available STE Port with the Card Command The following example demonstrates the use of the CARD command to identify available STE station ports on the switch.


1. At the ASP Select Command prompt: Type CARD, and press Enter.

SELECT COMMAND => CARD

2. Type D and press Enter. SELECT MODE: DISPLAY, FUNCTION => D

3. Type “-”, to search all available port status options and press Enter.

ENTER LOCATION, or ?......................... => -

4. Type ? to display the port status options and press Enter.

DISPLAY TYPE or ?...........................A => ?

5. Review the display. SYNTAX: WHERE:

A<,PORT type> A = Assigned Ports W<,PORT type> W = Assigned Ports W/O DIRNs DW<,PORT type> DW = Detail Assigned Ports W/O DIRNs U<,CARD type> U = Unassigned Ports D<,PORT type> D = Detail Report CO<,PORT type> CO = Count CA CA = Display by Cabinet S S = Display by Shelf CS CS = Display by Card/Slot TO SHOW VALID CARD AND PORT TYPES ENTER "?" AGAIN

6. Type the card and port type, and press Enter.

DISPLAY TYPE or ?...........................A => u,st24

7. Review the display. *** PORT ASSIGNMENT REPORT *** 09:16:46

01/07/02

UNASSIGNED PORTS IU NUMBER: 1 ASSIGNED TIME SLOTS IN HIB: 1 = 478 FREE TIME SLOTS IN HIB: 1 = 674

CARD TYPE LOCATION

--------- -------------------------

ST24 01.2.14.03 - 01.2.14.10

ST24 01.2.14.13 - 01.2.14.24

M M


104 Aastra– 2512-004

Step Action ASP Display NUMBER OF PORTS FOR IU 1 DISPLAYED: 20

TOTAL NUMBER OF PORTS DISPLAYED: 20

8. Type @ and press Enter. ENTER LOCATION, or ?......................... => @

FONE Command The FONE command is used to Create, Modify, Display and Delete a phone. The FONE command stores parameters applicable to a specific station device into the system database such as how an assigned directory number behaves on that particular station.

The FONE command can create and delete a line (directory number), but cannot modify the individual parameters of the line. Directory number parameters are assigned using the LINE command.

When displaying a station under the FONE command, the system displays the line parameters indented on the display to indicate that those parameters were not assigned in the FONE command.

The following describes the parameters associated with the FONE command. Line parameters (which may be prompted for under FONE/Update/Create are presented under the LINE command section of this document.

FONE Parameters Table 16. FONE Parameters

FONE Parameter Option Description

Location (Wiring Directory)

Text Allows input of text describing the physical location of the station wiring for location purposes. This entry is optional and is only prompted for if the Wiring Directory option is purchased with the switch.

Port Cabinet, Shelf, Slot, Circuit

Specifies the port where the station will be connected.

Phone Type Default Set ID

Default set name, “LIKE P, port”, “XACT P, port”

Allows specifying a default FONE setup (created under the DFLT command) and allows creation of stations with a default setup. This entry is optional. You can additionally use the LIKE and XACT formats for this parameter to copy the setup of other existing stations. “LIKE” copies only the FONE table, and “XACT” copies the FONE and LINE tables for the new station device.

Port Type STE Defines the type of station being created. For an STE port, the default entry for this parameter is set to “STE”.

SUG – Station User User group number Defines the User Group number associated with this station

MM


Aastra – 2512-004 105

FONE Parameter Option Description Group Number device. This parameter is used only under the Virtual Telephony

Environment. OAM – OAI Associated Member

Yes/No Specifies if this station is an OAI member.

DDP – Analog Data Device

Yes/No Is this an analog data device such as an ADI?

EAC – Emergency Associated CPN

10 Digit CPN Number, None

Allows input of a 10-digit phone number for this device which is used as the “Caller ID” for emergency calls. A response is required for this prompt, but “None” is allowed where no CPN number is associated with this device.

DND – Do Not Disturb Allowed

Yes/No Specifies if the station has the ability to use the “Do Not Disturb” feature.

DNS – Do Not Disturb Status

Active/Inactive Appears only in the Display or Modify modes and allows the current “Do Not Disturb” status of a station to be displayed or modified via an ASP terminal.

ANS – Answer Machine Attached

Yes/No Changes the incoming ring pattern for STE analog lines that are terminated by phone answering machines (as required) and provides supervisory disconnect to the answering machine.

DLT – Dial Type Pulse,

DTMF DTMF Specifies how the STE device communicates with the switch.

HKF – Hook Flash Enabled

Yes/No This parameter specifies if the system recognizes a Hook Flash from the STE device. A Hook Flash is required by the system for use of any Call Features not initiated from dial tone. Setting this to “NO” disables many call features.

VMC – Voicemail Message Desk Operator

Yes/No Specifies if this STE station is allowed to use the Message Desk Operator feature (forwarding a call to the mailbox of the Original number dialed).

DPT – DTMF Pass-through Timing Index

1-7, None

Specifies if a timing table should be used when out-pulsing DTMF tones from the switch once the call has been established. DTMF timing tables are built under the SPAR command this prompt is not seen if no tables have been previously defined in the switch.

Assign Voice Line Yes/No Allows assignment of a directory number (LINE) table from the FONE command. The user is prompted for a Line Type, Directory Number, and User Group. If the directory number input does not exist, the user is prompted to input parameters that are used to build the new directory number.

SOP - Ring Treatment Ring

Ring, No Ring, Abbreviated, Delayed Ring

Specifies how the directory number rings when receiving a call.

This parameter only specifies how this line responds on one particular station device as it may ring differently on another station.

Voicemail Message Yes/No Defines if the STE station device will use the Message Waiting

M M


106 Aastra– 2512-004

FONE Parameter Option Description Waiting Indicator lamp for display of voicemail messages.

This feature requires an STE device with the MWI lamp and support of the ST36 or SASI interface cards

Verify Display Format

None, Detail, Picture, Both

Specifies how the FONE table displays prior to the “Does Update Verify” prompt. The “Both” and “Picture” options allow display of the button layout of the station device. For an STE device, the picture displays only the numeric keypad.

Build an STE Station Use the following procedure to build an STE station


1. At the ASP Select Command prompt: Log on to the ASP with an approved password.

2. Type FONE and press Enter. SELECT COMMAND => FONE

3. Type U and press Enter to update. SELECT MODE: PRINT, DISPLAY, UPDATE => U

4. Type C and press Enter to create a new STE port.

If ? is selected in the following step, the prompt repeats.

UPDT MODE: C-Create M-Modify D-Delete........ => C

5. Select the switch location were the station is attached. • Type the port number in the


• Type the location number in the format shown at right, and press Enter.




ww = Cabinet x = Shelf yy = Card zz = Circuit or a location:



6. Press Enter to accept the default port type (STE).

ENTER PORT TYPE: STE..........................STE =>

7. Type the Station User Group STATION USER GROUP NUMBER.........................=>

MM


Aastra – 2512-004 107

Step Action ASP Display Number, and press Enter.

• When displaying a port, the

system identifies whether Do Not Disturb is active or inactive.

• At the station, Do Not Disturb is enabled by using feature code (*6) and disabled using (#6).

• At the ASP terminal, the feature can be turned on and off using the DND field during UPDATE/MODIFY mode.

8. Select Do Not Disturb status. • Type Y and press Enter to

allow Do Not Disturb. • Type N and press Enter to

disallow.

An answering machine must be provided for the STE station to use the following function. This feature allows supervisory disconnect of an answering machine.

DO NOT DISTURB ALLOWED: Y=YES; N=NO .......Y =>

9. Select the answering machine feature. • Type Y and press <Enter> if

an answering machine is attached to the STE.

• Type N and press <Enter> if an answering machine is not attached.

ANSWER MACHINE ATTACHED: Y=YES;N=NO....N =>

10.

The following prompt is displayed when creating or modifying a Flex STE port.

Select the dial type. • Type D and press Enter if the

DIAL TYPE: D=DTMF, R=ROTARY..........D =>

M M


108 Aastra– 2512-004

Step Action ASP Display STE port operates in DTMF mode.

• Type R and press Enter if the STE port is a rotary dial phone.

11. Select the hook flash function. • Type Y and press Enter to

enable the hook flash (also called the switchhook).

• Type N and press Enter to disable the hook flash.

The feature code to activate the Voicemail feature is "*5."

HOOK FLASH ENABLED Y=YES; N=NO.............Y =>

12. Identify the STE phone as an Voicemail Desk Operator. • Type Y and press Enter if this

station is allowed to direct calls to a Voicemail Message Desk.

• Type N and press Enter to disallow.

• If a Timing Index is created

under SPAR, the following prompt is displayed.

• The switch can support up to seven different timing width tables.

InteMail MSG DESK OPERATOR: Y=YES; N=NO....N => (VMC)

13. Enter the DTMF pass-through timing index. • Type the tone length as

specified in SPAR System Parameters, and press Enter.

• Accept the default (N) for no timing index by pressing Enter.

DTMF PASSTHROUGH TIMING INDEX: 1-7,N or?......N =>

14. Identify the station as an analog or digital data device. • Type Y and press Enter for an

Analog Data Device. • Accept the default (N) by

ANALOG DATA DEVICE: Y=YES; N=NO.......................N =>

MM


Aastra – 2512-004 109

Step Action ASP Display pressing Enter for a digital data device or if a data device is not attached.

15. Identify the station as an emergency associated Calling Party Number (CPN). • Type Y and press Enter for an

emergency associated CPN. • Accept the default (N) by

pressing Enter for a CPN that is not emergency-associated.

Be sure to change the default if you are creating a port.

EMERGENCY ASSOCIATED CPN: Y=Yes; N=NO..................N =>

16. Indicate if a voice line is required for the STE. • Type Y and press Enter to

assign a voice line. • Accept the default (N) by

pressing Enter for no voice line assignment.

ASSIGN VOICE LINE: Y=Yes; N=NO.........................N =>

17. Type V and press Enter to create a standard voice line.

If the directory number is already in the database, the next prompt is Ring Treatment.

LINE TYPE OR ?.......................................V => ?

(V): STANDARD VOICE LINE (A): ACD LINE (T): TOD RESTRICTED (H): HOT LINE (C): CO LINE-DEDICATED (U): HUNT LINE

18. Type the directory number to be assigned to this port, and press Enter.

The following prompt does not appear if only one User Group is in the system or if all User Groups are sharing Directory Number allocation tables (UGRP/DNA).

VOICE DIRECTORY NUMBER or ?.................... =>

19. Type the User Group Number to be associated with this port and directory number, and press Enter.

USER GROUP NUMBER............................. =>

M M


110 Aastra– 2512-004


The next prompt only appears when a Directory Number is first created.

20. Type the name of the STE station user (up to 26 characters can be entered), and press Enter. This name is automatically assigned to the Name/Number Directory of the Directory Lookup System.

If an invalid CLOS is entered in the following step, an error message is received.

NAME (name/number directory):........................... =>

21. Type the existing Class of Service (CLOS) number to be assigned to this station, and press Enter.

CLASS OF SERVICE............................. =>

22. Enter the Call Pick Up Group (CPUG) number of which this station is a member. • Type the assigned group

number, and press Enter. • Type 0 and press Enter if this

station is not to be assigned to a Call Pick Up Group.

• A voice line can be a member

of several CPUG groups (pickup only).

• All Group members can be displayed using the CPUG command. A maximum of 32 members is possible.

23. Enter the call pickup type. • Type B and press Enter if this

station has the ability to pick up a call and be picked up by other group members.

• Type P and press Enter if this

CALL PICKUP TYPE: B, P, or ?.................. =>

MM


Aastra – 2512-004 111

Step Action ASP Display station can only pick up calls.

24. Type the ACD Agent line number, and press Enter.

ACD AGENT LINE.................................... =>

25. Identify the station as an Open Application Interface (OAI) associated member. • Type Y and press Enter if this

station is OAI associated. • Accept the default (N) if the

station is not OAI associated.

OAI ASSOCIATED MEMBER: Y=YES; N=NO...............N =>

26. Select automatic privacy release. (Code APR) • Type Y and press Enter if this

station is allowed automatic access to the Privacy Release feature.

• Type N and press Enter to disallow.

AUTOMATIC PRIVACY RELEASE: Y=YES; N=NO...........N =>

27. Select the number of abbreviated dialing numbers that can be stored under the Abbreviated Dial feature. • Type Y and press Enter to

allow 100 numbers. • Type N and press Enter to

allow only 10 abbreviated dial numbers.

Station diagnostics are used for testing and maintenance purposes, not for the general user. When enabled, diagnostics are accessed by pressing #* 6 on the phone keypad.

100 NUM. ABRV. DIALING: Y=YES; N=NO..........N =>

28. Select access to station diagnostics from the phone. • Type Y and press Enter to

allow station diagnostics to be run on this line.

• Type N and press Enter to disallow diagnostics.

STATION DIAGNOSTICS ALLOWED: Y=YES;N=NO..........N =>

29. Select the type of handling forwarded calls receive. • Type Y and press Enter to

CALL FORWARD INTERNAL/EXTERNAL HANDLING.........N =>

M M


112 Aastra– 2512-004

Step Action ASP Display allow internal and external call handling to be defined for forwarded calls.

• Type N and press Enter to allow for standard call forward.

30. Enter the destination number calls are forwarded to when unanswered. • Type up to 24 digits to identify

the Call Forwarding destination number, and press Enter.

• Accept the default (N) and press Enter if the caller hears ringback tone when an incoming call is unanswered.

Delayed call forwarding is indicated by a ring-beep tone (used for call waiting) before the call forwards to another line.

If Call Waiting termination is allowed for lines with this CLOS, choose Delayed as the response.

CALL FORWARD - NO ANSWER: N=INACTIVE or ?

24 digits MAX....................................N => (CFN)

31. Select how quickly calls are forwarded. • Accept the default (N) by

pressing Enter so callers reaching a busy station hear a busy tone and are not forwarded to another phone.

• Type D and press Enter so callers will hear a call waiting tone for a predefined period of time before forwarding to a predefined number.

• Type M and press Enter to immediately forward callers to a predefined number.

CALL FORWARD - BUSY ACTION: N=INACTIVE;

D=DELAYED; M=IMMEDIATE......................N =>

32.

The following prompt only appears

CALL FORWARD - BUSY NUMBER or ?

24 digits MAX.................................. =>

MM


Aastra – 2512-004 113

Step Action ASP Display if D or M was the response to the previous query.

Enter the station number to which this station forwards when the line is busy. • Type the destination with up to

24 digits, and press Enter. • Type ?, and press Enter for

format information.

The Voicemail ID number is usually (but not necessarily) the user’s directory number.

33. Enter the Voicemail ID number for this directory number. • Type up to eight digits to serve

as the Voicemail ID number for the station, and press Enter.

• Accept the default (N), and press Enter to deny access to voicemail.

INTEMAIL ID FOR VOICE LINE:

8 digits MAX................................N => (VID)

34. Enter the national calling party (NCP) number. • Type U and press Enter to

select a specific NCP. • Type S and press Enter to

select an NCP from the Directory Lookup System.

• Accept the default (N), and press Enter if an NCP is not used.

CONTENTS OF NATIONAL CALLING PARTY # or ?...N => ?

Select the contents of a National ISDN/Telephony number to be used as the calling party number for the Voice Line:

U = One of four numbers from the User Group. S = Specific number in the Directory Lookup System (DLS) for the Voice Line directory number. N = None

35.

The following prompt displays when U is selected for the previous prompt. The National ISDN/ Telephony numbers are assigned with the UGRP command. Type a National ISDN/ Telephony selection number and press Enter.

SELECT USER GROUP CALLING PARTY # or ?....... => ?

Enter the selection number of the National ISDN/Telephony number that is to be used from the User Group. (Range 1 to 4) User Group: 1 Choice National ISDN/Telephony Number

------ ------------------------------

1 214-222-9000 2 214-333-9000 3 214-444-9000 4 214-555-9000

M M


114 Aastra– 2512-004


Choose A or D as the response only if the directory number is assigned to more than one port.

Enter the number of the appropriate choice.

36. Select a ring treatment for incoming calls. Accept the default (R) by pressing Enter to provide an audible ring for incoming calls. • Type N and press Enter to

eliminate an audible ring for incoming calls.

• Type A and press Enter to provide an audible ring for a predefined period of time.

• Type D and press Enter to provide an audible ring after a predefined period of time has elapsed.

RING TREATMENTS: R=RING;

N=NO RING; A=ABBREVIATED; D=DELAYED RING.......R =>

37. Select voicemail message playback by lifting the handset. • Type Y and press Enter to

allow the user to hear voice messages.

• Accept the default (N) by pressing Enter to block the voice message response.

InteMail MESSAGE WAITING: Y=YES; N=NO.................N =>

38. Select operation of Open Application Interface (OAI) activity indicator one (1). • Type Y and press Enter to

enable OAI activity indicator one.

• Accept the default (N) by pressing Enter to disable OAI activity indicator one.

OAI ACTIVITY INDICATOR - OAI1: Y=YES; N=NO..N =>

39. Select operation of OAI activity indicator two (2). • Type Y and press Enter to

enable OAI activity indicator two.

• Accept the default (N) by pressing Enter to disable OAI


MM


Aastra – 2512-004 115

Step Action ASP Display activity indicator two.

40. Select operation of OAI activity indicator three (3). • Type Y and press Enter to

enable OAI activity indicator three.

• Accept the default (N) by pressing Enter to disable OAI activity indicator three.


41. Select operation of OAI activity indicator four (4). • Type Y and press Enter to

enable OAI activity indicator four.

• Accept the default (N) by pressing Enter to disable OAI activity indicator four.


42. Select the format of verification display. • Type N and press Enter to go

directly to the last option, DOES UPDATE VERIFY?

• Type D and press Enter to display the detail of all options set in the previous questions.

• Type P and press Enter to display a picture of the keypad and directory name, port number, and location.

• Press Enter to accept the default (B) for both Detailed and Picture displays.


VERIFY DISPLAY FORMAT:

(N)one; (D)etailed; (P)icture; (B)oth...............B =>

43. Type Y and press <Enter> to save the information in the database.


M M


116 Aastra– 2512-004

LINE Command The LINE command is used to Create, Modify, Display and Delete directory numbers. The LINE table stores parameters associated with a specific directory number. For each voice line directory number there is only one entry in the database, regardless of the number of station appearances of the directory number.

A directory number requires the User Group and class of service. The LINE can be created from the FONE command but can only be modified from the LINE command.

The following table lists the Line command parameters. Many of these parameters appear when creating the LINE from the FONE command (depending on the type of LINE being defined).

For “destination numbers” specified within the line table, all directory numbers input must be within the same User Group. For external numbers (1 to 24 digits), the line’s class of service must allow the type of call being input as the destination and must include the dialing level (EX: 9,233-4532).

LINE Parameters Table 17. LINE Parameters


User Group Number User Group Number Each “Voice Line” directory number must be associated with a User Group, and that User Group must have the directory number allocated within the UGRP/DNA table.

Name (Name/Number Directory)

Text Allows specifying a “text” user name to be associated with this Directory Number/ User Group. This optional entry populates a record in the NAME/NUMBER DIRECTORY database.-

COS – Class of Service Class Of Service Number Defines the class of service to be used for this directory number.

CPG – Call Pickup Group

Call Pickup Group No. None

If this line is to be a member of a specific call pickup group (for the “Group Call Pickup” feature), input the pre-existing Call Pickup group number.

TYP – Call Pickup Type Both, Pickup Only

If a pickup group number is input for CPG, this parameter specifies if this line can pickup only other calls or pickup and be picked up by other lines.

ACD – ACD Pilot Number

ACD Pilot Number, None

This entry is only required when building ACD stations and specifies the ACD pilot number to which this station belongs.

HUN – Hunt Pilot Number

Hunt Pilot Number None

Allows this line to be a member of a Hunt Pilot group. Input the pre-existing Hunt Pilot directory number or None.

APR – Automatic Privacy Release

Yes/No Only impacts lines that appear on more than one station device. When set to “Yes”, if a user is on this

MM


Aastra – 2512-004 117

Parameter Option Description line and another user picks up on it, he can hear the ongoing conversation. When set to “No”, the other appearances of this line cannot hear a conversation occurring on this line. This feature is normally associated with either a “PRIVACY” or a “PRIVACY RELEASE” button on an ITE device, so this setting can be overridden on a call-by-call basis.

CAD – 100 Number Abbreviated Dialing

Yes/No Allows an individual line to store 100 abbreviated dialing numbers. This parameter has no impact when the Abbreviated Dialing feature is disallowed in the class of service.

DIA – Station Diagnostics Allowed

Yes/No Specifies if the “#*6” Direct Port Select is allowed from this line. This feature is only for maintenance and testing purposes and should normally be set to “No”. Direct Port Select can allow users to directly select an outbound trunk and place untraceable calls on the switch.

FIE – Call Forward Internal/External Handling

Yes/No Allows different Call Forward – No Answer and Call Forward – Busy destinations to be specified and selected based on if a call to this line is an internal call or an external call (originating on a trunk).

FNA – Call Forward Number A

Destination Number Allows input of one of the two call forward/no answer/busy numbers for use with the Call Forward – Internal/External Handling feature.

Only applicable when FIE – Internal External Handling is set to Yes.

FNB – Call Forward Number B

Destination Number Allows input of the second of two call forward/no answer/busy numbers for use with the Call Forward – Internal/External Handling feature.


FNI – Call Forward No Answer Number For Internal Caller

Use number “A”, Use number “B”, None

Specifies the Call Forward – No Answer destination for Internal callers.


FNE – Call Forward No Answer Number for External caller


Specifies the Call Forward – No Answer destination for External callers.

M M


118 Aastra– 2512-004



FBI – Call Busy Number For Internal Caller






Specifies the Call Forward – Busy destination for Internal callers.


FBE – Call Forward Busy Number For External Caller


Specifies the Call Forward – Busy destination for External callers.


Call Forward Busy Internal

Delayed, Immediate

Specifies when the Call Forward busy action occurs for Internal callers. Note that a setting of Immediate prevents Call Waiting from operating correctly.


Call Forward Busy External

Delayed, Immediate

Specifies when the Call Forward busy action occurs for External callers. Note that a setting of Immediate prevents Call Waiting from operating correctly.


CFN – Call Forward - No Answer

Destination Number, None

Specifies the Call Forward – No Answer destination when Internal/External Handling is not used.


CFB – Call Forward – Busy Action

Inactive, Delayed, Immediate

Specifies when the Call Forward busy action occurs.

MM


Aastra – 2512-004 119


A setting of Immediate will prevent Call Waiting from operating correctly and Inactive disables Call Forward – Busy.



Specifies the Call Forward – Busy destination when Internal/External Handling is not used.

HOT – Hot Line Destination Number, None

Specifying a destination number for this field establishes this line as a Hotline. For Hotlines, whenever the station is taken off-hook, the destination number is called without the user having to dial any numbers.

OHA – Off hook Alert Destination Number, None

If specified, the destination input to this prompt is called if this station is left off-hook for an extended period of time. The parameters that define the duration of the “off-hook” condition and other options pertaining to this feature are defined in the User Group Call Handling Parameters Table (UGRP/CHP).

TOD – Time-of-Day Restrictions

Yes/No Selecting “Yes” to this prompt allows Time-of-Day restrictions to be in effect for this line. There is additional setup required for Time-of-Day restrictions to operate correctly.

Time-of-Day Call Restrictions Forward


This is the destination for calls to this line when Time-of-Day restrictions prevent this line from receiving calls.

VID – Voicemail ID For Voice Line

Voice Mailbox ID Number

Identifies this line to the voice mail system when calls are forwarded into voicemail. This number normally is the same as the directory number if the mailbox number and directory numbers are the same on both systems.

Assign Station Port Cabinet, Shelf, Card, Slot

Allows assigning this line to station ports when the line is being created with the LINE command.

CNC – National Calling Party Number

HNC – Home NNP Number

Home NNP Number Allows specification of a home NNP number for this line when using on-net, private networking resources.

OAM – OAI Associated Member

Yes/No Specifies whether or not this line is flagged to send CIMS to the application processor.

M M


120 Aastra– 2512-004

MM


Aastra – 2512-004 121

Chapter 9 Build an ITE Station

Overview This chapter describes how to build an Integrated Terminal Equipment (ITE) station. The ITE station is an Aastra Intecom proprietary digital phone. The ITE has the capability of communicating to the switch on one or two-pair copper wiring using a proprietary 9-bit digital format. ITE stations come in various models with generally the following distinctions:

• Number of definable feature and line buttons (4/12/24/30) • LCD display capability • Speaker phone

ITE Station The features for each ITE are defined by the FONE command. This command assigns a button template and voice line(s) to the station device. Line types include:

• Standard Voice Lines (the default type). • Hot Lines: Direct connection to a single destination number without dialing. • Dedicated Central Office (CO) Lines. Private connection over a CO line, bypassing

the local switch. • Station Status Lines. Private communication path between two to five phones. • Intercom Lines. Group connections by dialing a one-digit or two-digit number. • Data Lines. Synchronous or asynchronous data transfer. • Restricted Access DID Lines. Direct Inward Dial (DID) are restricted depending on

the time of day, day of week, or day of year.

Each of the following is associated with the line:

• A Class of Service (CLOS) • Directory Number (DIRN) • A User Group (UGRP)

Prerequisites The following are prerequisite database requirements for the ITE station:

• Class of Service • Button Template • User Group • Available Directory Number • Available ITE Port

M M

Chapter 9, Build an ITE Station

122 Aastra– 2512-004

You must determine if there are any existing database table entries that can be used in building the ITE, or you must create these table entries

ITE Station Port Determination Before the database can be built to support a new ITE device, an available ITE port must be identified in the switch. You must ensure that the ITE station is wired to the selected port. Some customers may install (wire) the station prior to any database modifications are made. In this case, the station port number is determined based on the location the station was wired on the Main Distribution Frame (MDF).

ITE Card Types

Table 18. ITE Card Types

Card Type Description

TITE Up To 24 Four-wire ITE Station Devices

ITEs connected by Distributed T1 may be in different time zones from the switching partition.

EITE Up To 36 Four-wire ITE Station Devices 2ITE Up To 24 Two-wire ITE Station Devices

FONE Command The FONE command is used to Create, Modify, Display and Delete an ITE phone.

FONE Parameters

Table 19. Required FONE Command Fields

Parameter Option Function

Location (Wiring Directory)

Text Text Allows input of text describing the physical location of the station wiring for location purposes. This entry is optional and is only prompted if the Wiring Directory option is purchased with the switch.

Port Cabinet, Shelf, Slot, Circuit

Specifies the port where the station is wired.

Phone Type Default Set ID

Default Set Name, “LIKE P, port”, “XACT P, port”

Allows specifying a default FONE setup (created under the DFLT command) and allows creation of stations with a default setup. This entry is optional. The LIKE and XACT formats can be used for this parameter to copy the setup of other existing stations. “LIKE” copies only the FONE table and “XACT” copies the

MM


Aastra – 2512-004 123

Parameter Option Function FONE and LINE tables for the new station device.

Port Type “ITE”, “IT4”, “ITES”, “ITEAP”

Defines the type of ITE station being created. ITE stations with speakers must be configured as “ITES” stations and not “ITE.

Button Template Button Template Number

Defines the pre-existing button template used for this station device.

SUG – Station User Group Number

User Group Number Defines the User Group number associated with this station device. This parameter is used only under the Virtual Telephony Environment.


Yes/No Specifies if this station is an OAI member.

DDP – Analog Data Device

Yes/No

EAC – Emergency Associated CPN

10 Digit CPN Number, None

Allows input of a 10-digit phone number for this device which is used as the “Caller ID” for emergency calls. A response is required for this prompt, but “None” is allowed where no CPN number is associated with this device.

DND – Do Not Disturb Allowed

Yes/No Specifies if the station has the ability to use the “Do Not Disturb” feature.

DNS – Do Not Disturb Status

Active/Inactive Allows the current “Do Not Disturb” status of a station to be displayed or modified. This prompt is only seen in the Display or Modify modes.

ANS – Answer Machine Attached

Yes/No Changes the incoming ring pattern for STE analog lines that are terminated by phone answering machines (as required) and provides supervisory disconnect to the answering machine.

VMC – Voicemail Message Desk Operator

Yes/No Specifies if this STE station is allowed to use the Message Desk Operator feature (forwarding a call to the voice mailbox of the original number dialed).

AND –Alphanumeric Display

Yes/No Defines if this station device has a display.

AHL –Automatic Hold Yes/No Only appears if the assigned button template has the Hold Type parameter set to “Normal” hold. This parameter defines what occurs to an existing call when a second line select button is pressed. Selecting “Yes” for this prompt places the first call on HOLD when another line button is pressed. Selecting “No” causes the existing call to be terminated when pressing a second line button.

HRC –Switchhook Yes, Defines how the phone rings when the user receives a

M M


124 Aastra– 2512-004

Parameter Option Function Ringer Cutoff No,

Ring-Ping second call and is already on a call on this station. Selecting “Yes” prevents the second call from ringing the station. Selecting “Ring-Ping” allows an abbreviated ring for the second call.

ADD - ADT Analog Side DTMF Dialing

Yes/No Only applicable to ITE lines connected to ADI devices. This option allows a digital ITE line to use DTMF tones for signaling between the ADI and the switch. Setting this option to “Yes” for a normal ITE device causes the ITE buttons to cease functioning on this station.

This option should only be set to “Yes” if an ADI device connects to the line.

LPR - Line Preselect P = Prime Line, R = Ringing Line, I = Idle Line, L = Last Line, N = No Line, PR = Prime and Ring, RI = Ring and Idle

Defines how the station selects available lines when going off hook to receive and place calls.

PLB - Prime line Select Button

Line Select Button Number

Identifies the prime line for this station device. When specifying any Line Preselect type that requires a prime line, this prompt displays.

Assign Line Select Buttons

Yes/No Allows available Line Select buttons (defined in the button template) to be assigned to voice lines. As in the STE, if a line being assigned does not exist, the user is prompted for the parameters to define a LINE table. When “Yes” is selected, the user is presented with a display of available Line Select buttons to assign.

Ring Treatment R = Ring, N = No ring, A = Abbreviated Ring, D = Delayed Ring

Defines how each line rings on this station. This prompt appears for each assigned voice line for this station device. This ring selection only affects this lines appearance on this device.

Preselect Inclusion Yes/No Defines if this line should be included in the pre-selection group and how this line is handled when receiving a call on this line. This prompt appears for each assigned voice line for this station device.

Alphanumeric Display Yes/No Defines if incoming call information to this line appears on display ITE devices.

MM


Aastra – 2512-004 125

Parameter Option Function

This prompt appears for each assigned voice line for this station device

Voicemail Message Waiting

Yes/No Defines if the Voicemail indicator should indicate received messages for this line. This prompt appears for each assigned voice line for this station device. The message waiting indicator on a station may indicate voicemail messages for more than one line.

Verify Display Format None, Detail, Picture, Both

Specifies how the FONE table should be displayed prior to the “DOES UPDATE VERIFY” prompt. The “Both” and “Picture” options allow display of the button layout of the station device. For an STE device, the picture only displays the numeric keypad.

Pre-selection Setting for an ITE

The following table lists the FONE pre-selection settings which are applicable to an ITE device.

Table 20. ITE Pre-select Types

Line Preselect Type Placing Call Line Selected

Receiving Call Line Selected

(P) Prime Line Prime Line Manual (other than Prime Line) (R) Ringing Line Manual Ringing Line (if in preselect group) (I) Idle Line Any Idle Line Manual (L) Last Line Last Used Line Manual (N) No Line Manual Manual (PR) Prime Line Prime Line Ringing Line (if in preselect group) (RI) Ringing Line Any Idle Line Ringing Line (if in preselect group)

Build an ITE Station


1. At the ASP Select Command prompt: Type BTNS, and press Enter.


2. Type U, and press Enter to update a port. SELECT MODE: PRINT, DISPLAY, UPDATE => U

3. Type C and press Enter to create a port.

• The following display text is for the ?

UPDT MODE: C-Create M-Modify D-Delete........ => C

M M


126 Aastra– 2512-004

Step Action ASP Display (format instructions) response.

• In the next several steps, after viewing help (?), press Enter to return to the Port Number prompt.

4. Select the switch location were the station is attached. • Type the port number in the format



• Type ? and press Enter to display port number and location formatting instructions.

• The following prompt is only

displayed if a port was entered in the previous step.

• The location entered in the next step is automatically assigned to the Wiring Directory.




ww = Cabinet x = Shelf yy = Card zz = Circuit

or a location:

..=> L,aaa.....aaa Specify LOCATION, where aaa.....aaa = Location name

5. Type the physical location of the phone jack using up to 20 alphanumeric characters, and press Enter.

LOCATION (wiring directory):................. =>

6. Select the phone default set identification. • Press Enter to specify no default set

to the system. • Type the Default Set code created in

the DFLT command, and press Enter.

• Type ? and press Enter to display formatting instructions.

Do not press <Enter> before making your entry. The default port type is an STE.

ENTER PHONE TYPE DEFAULT SET ID or ?......... =>

To COPY an EXISTING PORT, enter:

LIKE P,port_number for only the station information XACT P,port_number for both the station and voice line buttons information or

LIKE L,location (wiring directory) XACT L,location

OTHERWISE, enter:

"return" --- no default set to be used

or

One of the following DEFAULT SET names

SYMBOLIC NAMES NOT DEFINED

7. Select the port type. • Type the port type, and press Enter. • Type ? and press Enter to display the

port types.

ENTER PORT TYPE OR ?......................ITE =>

ITE......INTEGRATED TERMINAL EQUIPMENT IT4......ITE4 ITES.....ITE (WITH INTEGRATED SPEAKER) ITEAP....ITE APPLICATION PROGRAMMABLE

8. Select the button template by number. (BTP)

BUTTON TEMPLATE NUMBER: 0=INDEX............ =>

**

MM


Aastra – 2512-004 127


• Type the button template number, and press Enter.

• Type 0 and press Enter to display an index of existing button templates.

* ITE BUTTON TEMPLATE INDEX 02/27/00 14:38:50

**

TEMPLATE 1.. 12 BUTTONS ..1 SELECT 11 FEATURE ..0 UNASSIGNED TEMPLATE 2.. 12 BUTTONS ..2 SELECT .9 FEATURE ..1 UNASSIGNED TEMPLATE 4.. 4 BUTTONS ..0 SELECT .4 FEATURE ..0 UNASSIGNED TEMPLATE 6.. 12 BUTTONS ..3 SELECT .7 FEATURE ..2 UNASSIGNED

9. Type the station User Group number, and press Enter.

STATION USER GROUP NUMBER................... =>

10. Identify the station as an Open Application Interface (OAI) associated member. (OAM) • Type Y and press Enter if this station

is OAI associated. • Accept the default (N) by pressing

Enter if this station is not OAI associated.

OAI ASSOCIATED MEMBER: Y=YES; N=NO..........N =>

11. Select the do not disturb feature. (DND) • Type Y and press Enter to allow the

feature. • Type N and press Enter to deny it.

The following prompt only appears if Y is entered in the previous step.

DO NOT DISTURB ALLOWED: Y=YES; N=NO......... =>

12. Select Do Not Disturb status. (DNS) • Type A and press Enter to make the

feature active. • Accept the default (I) by pressing

Enter to make the feature inactive.

DO NOT DISTURB STATUS:A=ACTIVE; I=INACTIVE.I =>

13. Identify the CLOS user as the Voicemail Message Desk Operator. (VMC) • Type Y and press Enter if the user is

the operator. • Type N and press Enter if the user is

not the operator.

InteMail MSG DESK OPERATOR: Y=YES; N=NO..... =>

14. Identify the CLOS user as having a display phone. (AND) • Type Y and press Enter if the phone

has a display. • Accept the default (N) by pressing

Enter if the phone does not have a display.

ALPHANUMERIC DISPLAY: N=NO; Y=YES.........N =>

M M


128 Aastra– 2512-004


• The following prompt is displayed

only when the Button Template sets Normal Hold as the hold type.

• Automatic Hold allows a multiple-line ITE phone user to access a second ringing line by simply pressing the ringing line button. The line that was in use initially is put on hold automatically.

15. Select automatic hold. (AHL) • Type Y and press Enter if automatic

hold is required. • Type N and press Enter if automatic

hold is not required.

AUTOMATIC HOLD:Y=YES; N=NO................. =>

16. Select whether the station user's name (destination) or the caller's name display if character lengths are exceeded. (ADP) • Type Y and press Enter to display

the user's name when the destination is a survivable switching unit (SSU) or a remote switching partition (RSP).

• Type N and press Enter to display the caller’s name.

When the audible ringer is disabled, incoming calls on a second line are indicated by a flashing line lamp.

DESTINATION DISPLAY PREFERRED: Y=YES; N=NO.. =>

17. Select switchhook ringer cutoff mode. (HRC) • Type Y and press Enter if an audible

ringer is not required. • Type P and press Enter for Ring-

Ping. • Accept the default (N) by pressing

Enter if an audible ringer is required.

The database can contain up to seven timing width tables.

SWITCHHOOK RINGER CUTOFF:

Y=YES; N=NO; P=RING-PING...................N =>

18. Type the Dual-Tone Multi-Frequency (DTMF) tone length as specified in the

DTMF PASSTHROUGH TIMING INDEX: 1-7,N or ?..N =>

MM


Aastra – 2512-004 129

Step Action ASP Display System Parameter Variable DTMF Digit Width, and press Enter. (DTP)

If the following selection is answered yes (Y) and no ADT device is connected to the ITE, the user is not able to break dial tone. Also the following restrictions apply: • Digits can only occur from the initial

off hook state. • Hook flash is not recognized. • Data line is not supported. • Modem pooling for calls to such a

device is not supported.

19. Select the analog DTMF tones or proprietary digital codes. (ADT) • Type Y and press Enter if the ITE

port operates as an analog device with DTMF tone dialing.

• Accept the default (N) by pressing Enter if the ITE port operates as an analog device with proprietary system digital codes.

• If line pre-select is set to P, R, I or L,

any line other than the one preselected must be manually selected before lifting the handset.

• With Prime & Ring (PR) pre-select, the designated prime line is the line selected when making a call. When answering a call, the first ringing line is selected.

• With Ring & Idle (RI) pre-select, the first idle line is selected when making a call. When answering a call, the first ringing line is selected.

ADT ANALOG SIDE DTMF DIALING: Y=YES; N=NO..N =>

20. Type an emergency calling party number of up to 10 digits and press Enter. Or Type N (for none) and press Enter. (EAC)

EMERGENCY CALLING PARTY NBR OR ?............. =>

Enter an emergency Calling Party Number.

10 digits number, in the format XXXXXXXXXX,

or

N = none

M M


130 Aastra– 2512-004


21. Choose the line pre-selects. (LPR) • Type P and press Enter to pre-select

the prime line when lifting the handset.

• Type R and press Enter to pre-select the first ringing line when lifting the handset.

• Type I and press Enter to pre-select the first idle line when lifting the handset.

• Type L and press Enter to pre-select the last line used.

• Type N and press Enter to require the user to press a line select button to make or answer a call.

• Type PR and press Enter to select the designated prime line as the line selected when making a call.

• Type RI and press Enter to select the first idle line when making a call.

If Prime Line (P) or Prime and Ring (PR) is selected in the previous step, this prompt appears.

LINE PRESELECT: P=PRIME LINE; R=RINGING LINE;

I=IDLE LINE; L=LAST LINE; N=NO LINE; PR=PRIME & RING; RI=RING & IDLE...... =>

22. Type the button number that is used as the prime line pre-select button on the telephone, and press <Enter>. (PLB)

PRIME LINE PRESELECT BUTTON #............. =>

23. Select a data line required for the station. (DLN) • Type Y and press Enter if a data line

is required. • Type N and press Enter if a data line

is not required.

ASSIGN DATA LINE: Y=YES; N=NO............... =>

24. Select line select buttons for a multi-line ITE. • Type Y and press Enter to assign the

line select buttons. • Type N and press Enter and go to the

last step in this procedure.

• The following prompts are only

displayed when you assign Line Select Buttons to a multi-line ITE.

ASSIGN LINE SELECT BUTTONS: Y=YES; N=NO...... =>

MM


Aastra – 2512-004 131


• In the following prompt, the Line Select buttons are numbered (8, 9, and 10). Unassigned (UNAS) indicates that button is not assigned at this time. When the button has been assigned, UNAS is replaced with a four digit Voice Line (VL) number and its User Group (UGRP).

25. Type the button number to be assigned, and press Enter. (BTN).


8-UNAS 9-UNAS 10-UNAS

LINE SELECT BUTTON NUMBER: Return=END....... =>

26. Select a line type. • Accept the default (V) by pressing

Enter to assign a voice line with an assigned directory number.

• Type A and press Enter to assign an ACD agent line.

• Type T and press Enter to assign a time-of-day restricted line.

• Type H and press Enter to assign a Hotline.

• Type C and press Enter to assign a dedicated CO circuit, commonly known as a private line.

• Type U and press Enter to assign a hunt line.

• Type I and press Enter to assign an Intercom line.

• Type S and press Enter to assign a Buzz/Station Status line.

• Type ? and press Enter to view the line types.

ENTER LINE TYPE OR ?........................V =>

27. Type the directory number for this voice line, and press Enter. (VLN)

When directory numbers are shared between more than one user group, the following prompt does not appear. The system assumes that the directory number is assigned to the lowest numbered user group when the user group is shared.

VOICE LINE DIRECTORY NUMBER or ?............ =>

28. Type the UGRP Number to be associated with this ITE voice line, and press Enter.

USER GROUP NUMBER:......................... =>

M M


132 Aastra– 2512-004

Step Action ASP Display (UGP)

The system automatically assigns the display field within the Directory Lookup System (DLS) to enable the user's name to display on display telephones.

29. Enter a directory name of up to 26 characters. • Type the name to be displayed in the

DLS and on the display telephones, and press Enter.

• If no name is assigned to this directory number, press Enter.

Avoid user confusion about feature availability by assigning the same CLOS to each voice line directory number on a multi-line station.

NAME (name/number directory):................ =>

30. Type the Class of Service assigned to this directory number and press Enter.

CLASS OF SERVICE........................... =>

31. Type the Call Pickup Group number to which this directory number belongs, and press Enter. (CGP)

CALL PICKUP GROUP #: 0=NONE................0 =>

32. Select the call pickup type. • Accept the default (B) by pressing

Enter if the directory number can pick up calls and have calls picked up.

• Type P and press Enter if the directory number only needs to pick up calls.

• Type ? and press Enter to see the pickup types.

CALL PICKUP TYPE: B, P, or ?...........B =>

33. Type the ACD Agent Line, and press Enter.

ACD AGENT LINE............................. =>

34. Identify voice line as an Open Application Interface (OAI) associated member. • Type Y and press Enter if the voice

line is OAI associated. • Accept the default (N) by pressing

Enter if the voice line is not OAI


MM


Aastra – 2512-004 133

Step Action ASP Display associated.

35. Select automatic privacy release. (APR) • Type Y and press Enter to allow

access to the Automatic Privacy Release feature.

• Accept the default (N) by pressing Enter to disallow access to this feature.

AUTOMATIC PRIVACY RELEASE: Y=YES; N=NO.....N =>

36. Select the number of abbreviated dialing numbers that can be stored. (CAD) • Type Y and press Enter to allow 100

abbreviated dial numbers. • Accept the default (N) by pressing

Enter to allow only 10 abbreviated dial numbers.

Station diagnostics are used for testing and maintenance purposes, not for the general user. When enabled, diagnostics are accessed by pressing #* 6xxxx, on the phone keypad.

100 NUM. ABBV. DIALING: Y=YES; N=NO........N =>

37. Select access to station diagnostics from a phone. (DIA) • Type Y and press Enter to allow

access. • Accept the default (N) by pressing

Enter to disable phone access.

STATION DIAGNOSTICS ALLOWED: Y=YES; N=NO...N =>

38. Select the type of handling forwarded calls receive. (FIE) • Type Y and press Enter to allow Call

Forward handling to determine between an internal or external source.

• Accept the default (N) by pressing Enter to not distinguish between internal or external calls when forwarding when the line is busy or does not answer.

The following prompts are displayed only if N is selected in the previous step.

CALL FORWARD INTERNAL/EXTERNAL HANDLING....N =>

39. Enter the destination number calls are forwarded to when unanswered. (CFN)

Call Forward Internal/External Handling

M M


134 Aastra– 2512-004


• Type up to 24 digits, and press Enter to identify the Call Forwarding destination number.

• Accept the default (N) by pressing Enter if the line is forwarded when unanswered and enter call forwarding is denied.


CALL FORWARD NO ANSWER: N=INACTIVE or ?

24 digits.............................N =>

40. Select how quickly calls are forwarded. (CFB) • Accept the default (N) by pressing

Enter for inactive stations. • Type D and press Enter to delay call

forwarding. • Type M and press Enter to

immediately forward calls to another line.

Call Forward numbers may contain the Dial Pause character ( ), with the following exceptions: • Dial Pause is not allowed in directory

numbers. • The Dial Pause character cannot be

the last character of the call forward number. All 24-digit call forward numbers include the pause character.

• The following prompt only appears if D or M is entered in the previous step.


D=DELAYED;M=IMMEDIATE................N =>

41. Enter the call forward busy number. • Type the destination with up to 24

digits, and press Enter. • Type ? and press Enter for format

information.

• The following prompts only display

if Y is the response to Call Forward Internal/External Handling.

CALL FORWARD BUSY NUMBER or ?

24 digits MAX...................................N =>

MM


Aastra – 2512-004 135


• Two destination numbers are allowed for internal and external call forwarding.

• If an outside phone number is entered in the following step, the appropriate dialing level must precede the destination number.

Call Forward Internal/External Handling

42. Enter the destination number for internal and external call forwarding. (FNA) • Type a destination number of up to

24 digits, and press Enter. • Accept the default (N) by pressing

Enter if call forward number “A” is not to be assigned.

• Type ? and press Enter for format information.

CALL FORWARD NUMBER A: N=INACTIVE or ?

24 digits MAX...............N =>

43. Enter the destination number for internal or external call forwarding. (FNB) • Type a destination number of up to

24 digits, and press Enter. • Accept the default (N) by pressing

Enter if call forward number “A” is not to be assigned.

• Type ? and press Enter for format information.

CALL FORWARD NUMBER B: N=INACTIVE or ?

24 digits MAX.............................N =>

44. Identify the call route from step for internal sources. (FNI) • Type A and press Enter if the CFWD

Number designated “A” is the route for calls of an internal source.

• Type B and press Enter if the CFWD Number designated “B” is the route for calls of an internal source.

• Accept the default (N) by pressing Enter if this feature is inactive.

• Type ? and press Enter to see the directory numbers assigned to “A” and “B” before selecting.

CFWD NO ANSWER # FOR INTERNAL CALLER or ?...N =>

45. Identify the call route from step for external sources. (FNE) • Type A and press Enter if the CFWD

Number designated “A” is the route for calls of an external source

• Type B and press Enter if the CFWD Number designated “B” is the route

CFWD NO ANSWER # FOR EXTERNAL CALLER or ?...N =>

M M


136 Aastra– 2512-004

Step Action ASP Display for calls of an external Source.

• Accept the default (N) by pressing Enter if this feature is inactive.


The following prompt only appears if D or M is entered in the previous step.


digits, and press Enter. • Type ?, and press Enter for format

information.

• The following prompts only display

if Y is the response to Call Forward Internal/External Handling.

• Two destination numbers are allowed for internal and external call forwarding.

• If an outside phone number is entered in the following step, the appropriate dialing level must precede the destination number.


24 digits MAX...................................N =>

47. Select how quickly internal calls are forwarded when a station is busy (call waiting). • Accept the default (D) by pressing

Enter to delay forwarding of calls. • Type M and press Enter to

immediately forward calls.

CFWD BUSY INTERNAL: D=DELAYED; M=IMMEDIATE..D =>

48. Identify the directory number external calls are forwarded to when a station is busy. (FBE) • Type A and press Enter to forward

calls from an external source to the directory number assigned to route A.

• Type B and press Enter to forward calls from an external source to the directory number assigned to route B.

• Accept the default (N) by pressing Enter to disallow forwarding of

CFWD BUSY # FOR EXTERNAL CALLER or ?........N =>

MM


Aastra – 2512-004 137

Step Action ASP Display external calls.


Callers hear the ring-beep tone (used for call waiting) before the call forwards to another line.

49. Select how quickly external calls are forwarded when a station is busy (call waiting). • Accept the default (D) by pressing

Enter to delay call forwarding. • Type M and press Enter to

immediately forward calls.

CFWD BUSY EXTERNAL: D=DELAYED; M=IMMEDIATE..D =>

50. Enter the Voicemail ID number for this directory number. (VID) • Type up to eight digits, and press

Enter. • Accept the default (N) by pressing

Enter if voicemail is denied.

• The following prompt only appears if

the Line Preselect prompt is answered R, I, L, PR, or RI.

• In the following step, A or D can only be used if this station appears on more than one port.

InteMail ID FOR VOICE LINE

8 digit MAX...............................N =>

51. Select the ring treatment for calls termination on its extension. (SOP) • Accept the default (R) by pressing

Enter so the station rings for terminated calls.

• Type N and press Enter so the station will not ring.

• Type A and press Enter so the station rings for a predefined period of time then stops ringing.

• Type D and press Enter so ringing does not begin until a predefined period of time has elapsed.


N=NO RING; A=ABBREVIATED; D=DELAYED RING...R => (SOP)

M M


138 Aastra– 2512-004


Line selection must be preconfigured earlier in this procedure.

52. Define how incoming calls are selected, either by pre-selection or by pressing a line select button. • Accept the default (Y) by pressing

Enter so lines are preselected (answered without pressing a line select button).

• Type N and press Enter if the user must press a line select button to answer a call.

PRESELECT INCLUSION: Y=YES; N=NO............Y =>

53. Select the data appearing on a stations display. • Type Y and press Enter if the station

user's name should display under the caller's name.

• Accept the default (N) by pressing Enter if the user's directory number should display under the caller's name.

ALPHANUMERIC DISPLAY: Y=YES; N=NO.......N =>

54. Select operation of OAI activity indicator one (1). • Type Y and press Enter to enable

OAI activity indicator one. • Accept the default (N) by pressing

Enter to disable OAI activity indicator one.


55. Select operation of OAI activity indicator two (2). • Type Y and press Enter to enable

OAI activity indicator two. • Accept the default (N) by pressing

Enter to disable OAI activity indicator two.


56. Select operation of OAI activity indicator three (3). • Type Y and press Enter to enable

OAI activity indicator three. • Accept the default (N) by pressing

Enter to disable OAI activity indicator three.


57. Select operation of OAI activity indicator four (4).


MM


Aastra – 2512-004 139


• Type Y and press Enter to enable OAI activity indicator four.

• Accept the default (N) by pressing Enter to disable OAI activity indicator four.

Select the default (N) in the following step if the station button template does not include a voicemail feature button.

58. Select the Voicemail feature button lamp function. • Type Y and press Enter to have the

Voicemail feature button lamp indicator flutter when messages are waiting.

• Accept the default (N) by pressing Enter to disable the indicator.

InteMail MESSAGE WAITING: Y=YES; N=NO......N =>

59. Select format of verification display. • Type N and press Enter if verify

display is not needed. • Type D and press Enter to display

the station definition, including a list of features, and assigned line select buttons.

• Type P and press Enter to display a picture of the button assignment.

• Accept the default (B) to display the list and the picture by pressing Enter.

VERIFY DISPLAY FORMAT: (N)one; (D)etailed; (P)icture; (B)oth..B =>

60. Verify the entries. • Type Y and press Enter to save


all responses.


M M


140 Aastra– 2512-004

Line Command The LINE command is used to Create, Modify, Display and Delete a voice line.

Table 21. Line Command Parameters

Line Parameter Options Description

User Group Number User Group Number Each “Voice Line” directory number must be associated with a User Group, and that User Group must have the directory number allocated within the UGRP/DNA table.

Name (Name/Number Directory)

Text Allows specifying a “text” user name to be associated with this Directory Number/User Group. This optional entry populates a record in the Name/Number Directory.

COS – Class of Service Class Of Service Number Defines the class of service to be used for this directory number.

CPG – Call Pickup Group Call Pickup Group Number, None

If this line is to be a member of a specific call pickup group (for the “Group Call Pickup” feature), input the pre-existing Call Pickup group number.

TYP – Call Pickup Type Both, Pickup Only

If a pickup group number is input for CPG, this parameter specifies if this line can pickup only other calls or pickup and be picked up by other lines.

ACD – ACD Pilot Number

ACD Pilot Number, None

This entry is only required when building ACD stations and specifies the ACD pilot number to which this station belongs.

HUN – Hunt Group Number

Hunt Group Number, None

Allows this line to be a member of a Hunt group. Input the pre-existing Hunt Group directory number or None.

APR – Automatic Privacy Release

Yes/No Only impacts lines that appear on more than one station device. When set to “Yes”, if a user is on this line and another user picks up on it, he can hear the ongoing conversation. When set to “No”, the other appearances of this line cannot hear a conversation occurring on this line. This feature is normally associated with either a “PRIVACY” or a “PRIVACY RELEASE” button on an ITE device, so this setting can be overridden on a call-by-call basis.

CAD – 100 Number Abbreviated Dialing

Yes/No Allows an individual line to store 100 abbreviated dialing numbers. This parameter has no impact when the Abbreviated Dialing feature is disallowed in the class of service.

DIA – Station Diagnostics Allowed

Yes/No Specifies if the “#*6” Direct Port Select is allowed from this line. This feature is only for maintenance and testing purposes and should normally be set to “No”. Direct Port Select can allow users to directly

MM


Aastra – 2512-004 141

Line Parameter Options Description select an outbound trunk and place untraceable calls on the switch.

FIE – Call Forward Internal/External Handling

Yes/No Allows different Call Forward – No Answer and Call Forward – Busy destinations to be specified and selected based on if a call to this line is an internal call or an external call (originating on a trunk).

FNA – Call Forward Number A

Destination Number Allows input of one of the two call forward/no answer/busy numbers for use with the Call Forward – Internal/External Handling feature.


FNB – Call Forward Number B

Destination Number Allows input of the second of two call forward no answer/busy numbers for use with the Call Forward – Internal/External Handling feature.


FNI – Call Forward No Answer Number For Internal Caller


Specifies the Call Forward – No Answer destination for Internal callers.


FNE – Call Forward No Answer Number for External caller






Specifies the Call Forward – Busy destination for Internal callers.


FBE – Call Forward Busy Number For External Caller


Specifies the Call Forward – Busy destination for External callers.


M M


142 Aastra– 2512-004

Line Parameter Options Description

Call Forward Busy Internal

Delayed, Immediate

Specifies when the Call Forward busy action for Internal callers. Note that a setting of Immediate prevents Call Waiting from operating correctly.


Call Forward Busy External

Delayed, Immediate

Specifies when the Call Forward busy action occurs for External callers. Note that a setting of Immediate prevents Call Waiting from operating correctly.


CFN – Call Forward – No Answer


Specifies the Call Forward – No Answer destination when Internal/External Handling is not used.


CFB – Call Forward – Busy Action

Inactive, Delayed, Immediate

Specifies when the Call Forward busy action occurs.

A setting of Immediate will prevent Call Waiting from operating correctly and Inactive disables Call Forward – Busy.



Specifies the Call Forward – Busy destination when Internal/External Handling is not used.

HOT – Hot Line Destination

Number, None

Whenever this station goes offhook, this number is automatically dialed.

OHA – Off hook Alert Destination

Number, None

This destination will be called if this phone is left offhook for a specified length of time. This duration is defined in UGRP Call Handling Parameters.

TOD – Time-of-Day Restrictions

Yes/No Allows Time-of-Day restrictions to be in effect for this line. There is additional setup required for Time-of-Day restrictions to operate correctly.

Time-of-Day Call Restrictions Forward

Destination Number, None The destination for calls to this line when Time-of-Day restrictions prevent this line from receiving calls.

VID – Voicemail ID For Voice Line

Voice Mailbox ID Number Identifies this line to the voicemail system when calls are forwarded to voicemail. This number normally is the same as the directory number if the mailbox number and directory

MM


Aastra – 2512-004 143

Line Parameter Options Description numbers are the same on both systems.

Assign Station Port Cabinet Shelf Slot Circuit

Allows assigning this voice line to station ports when the line is being created.

CNC – National Calling Party Number Contents

HNC – Home NNP Number

Home NNP Number Allows specification of a home NNP number for this line when using on-net, private networking resources.


Yes/No Flags this voice line for Open Application Interface external applications. Allows external applications to manipulate the voice line.

M M


144 Aastra– 2512-004

MM


Aastra – 2512-004 145

Chapter 10 Build an Attendant Console

Overview An Attendant Console is the specialized telephone set also known as the “attendant station” or “operator console”. An attendant console is used by a receptionist or other front office personnel. Attendant consoles are built using ITE stations. ITE phones that can be configured to function as attendant consoles are as follows:

• ITE-12 • ITE-12S • ITE-12SD • ITE-30SD

Because of button requirements for attendant consoles the most efficient configuration involves the use of the ITE-30SD. An Aastra Intecom system can have as many as 250 attendant consoles. These ATDC’s are partitioned first into attendant console groups, and the groups are then assigned to user groups.

PC Attendant Console The PC Attendant Console (PC/ATDC) is a software application that supports all of the call handling functions, capabilities, and features of an attendant console. The PC/ATDC supports the same number of feature and line select buttons as the standard attendant console. The PC/ATDC is loaded on a PC using the Microsoft Windows.

This chapter provides an overview of how to build a PC/ATDC. Refer to the following document for additional information:

• PC Attendant Console User Guide (590-2424-XXX)

The physical hardware required for a PC/ATDC is an:

• ITE station • Programmable Data Interface (PDI) for control of the voice interface. • Programmable Data Interface for Directory Lookup access and for control of Meet-

Me Conference features.

Configuration Though an attendant console uses an ITE station, an ATDC is configured differently. Standard ITE stations are built in the system through the FONE command and directory numbers are assigned to Line Select buttons in the button template. For an ATDC, Line Select buttons in the template become “Loop” buttons on the attendant console. Loop buttons are used for incoming calls but are not assigned directory numbers. Attendant consoles are created using the CARD command to assign an ITE port directly to a physical station device.

M M

Chapter 10, Build an Attendant Console

146 Aastra– 2512-004

Table 22. Commands Required to Build an ATDC

Command Description

CLOS Create a class of service for the attendant console. BTNS GRPS UGRP/UGP APRG

Create a button template for the attendant console. Create an attendant group, define attendant group characteristics. Assign an attendant group to the user groups. Define a call priority group to control the order calls appear at the console.

DIRN CARD MOS

Create a directory number to associate with the attendant console. Assign an ITE port to the physical station device. Place ports into or out of service.

Button Templates for Attendant Consoles You must create a Button Template for attendant consoles in the system. The following table shows BTNS feature buttons associated with an Attendant Console. All other feature buttons are also available for assignment to an attendant console.

Table 23. Attendant Console Buttons

Feature Code Description

AAAN ATDC Auto Answer AADL ATDC Auto Answer AANS ATDC Answer ACJN ATDC Join ACMP ATDC Camp ON ADIL ATDC Dial AFRL ATDC Alt, FRL AOFL ATDC Offline ARLS ATDC Release ASCL ATDC Serial Call ASPL ATDC Split

MM


Aastra – 2512-004 147

Database Requirements for GRPS The following table defines the GRPS parameters applicable to an Attendant Console Group.

Table 24. GRPS Database Requirements for ATDC


UGP - User Group User Group Defines the user group number for this attendant group.

COS - Class Of Service Class of Service Defines the class of service for this attendant group.

ACQ - Call Queue Handling F=FIFO, C=Call Type Determines the order calls are queued for the attendant group. • F=First In-First Out • C=Priority based on call type

Call type priority requires an Attendant Priority Group be created with the APRG command.

LSH - Loop Selection Handling

L=Longest Idle, C=Call Type, P=Call Type Priority

Specifies how queued calls are directed to available attendant console loops. • L=Longest idle attendant • C=Call Type • P=Attendant with the highest priority and

longest idle

Call type priority requires an Attendant Priority Group be created with the APRG command.

ARP - Ring-ping Option N=No Ring-Ping, C=Calls Queued, T=Queue Threshold Exceeded

Specifies if the ring-ping option is used, and under which queueing circumstance.

CSN - Cold Start Night Answer

Yes/No Determines the mode the attendant group starts in following a cold start of the system.

CWT - Call Waiting Threshold

Number of Seconds Sets the number of calls that can be received before the system flutters the call waiting lamp.

NDN - Night Answer Direction

Directory Defines the directory number where calls route when the user group is in “Night Answer Mode”.

DRN - Group Directory Number

DIRN Defines a directory number that allows users to reach any member of this attendant group.

MMG - Meet Me Conference Group #

Meet-Me Group number Defines the Meet-me Conference Group number this attendant group has the ability to use and

M M


148 Aastra– 2512-004

Parameter Option Description control.

OHT - Outside Handling For Trunk Call

Yes/No Defines if trunk calls transferred to an attendant should use a double ring alert.

ANC - Announcement Trunk/ Annunciator Group Number

Annunciator Group Number

Defines the annunciator group to use for this attendant group.

Number Annunciator Message Number (1 to 47)

Defines the annunciator message number to play for callers in queue longer than the INT parameter defines.

INT - Interval Before Message Played

Number of Seconds Defines how long a caller receives ringing before hearing the annunciator message specified in the MSG parameter.

PAT - Post Announcement Treatment

R=Ringback Tone, S=Silence, M=Music

Defines what callers hear following the annunciator message defines in the MSG parameter. The music source is defined in the User Group - User Group Parameters table.

Attendant Group Assignment After creating an attendant group, you must assign the attendant group to a user group. This assignment is done in the User Group Parameters table. The table below describes the UGRP/UGP parameters for establishing the ATDC assignment.

Table 25. UGRP/UGP Database Requirements for ATDC

UGRP Parameter Option Description

AGN - Attendant Group Number

Attendant Group Number Defines the attendant group for this user group.

IAG - Intercept Attendant Group Number

Attendant Group Number Defines the attendant group this user group uses for the Attendant Intercept feature.

Create an Attendant Console Attendant Consoles are created using available ITE ports. The ITE port is assigned using the CARD command. The following table lists the CARD parameters related to the creation of an ITE port for an attendant console.

Table 26. CARD Requirements for ATDC

CARD Parameter Option Description

DRN-Directory Number Dirn, None

Defines the Attendant Listed Directory Number for this console.

COS-Class Of Service Class of Service Defines the class of service for this console.

MM


Aastra – 2512-004 149

CARD Parameter Option Description

PRG-Priority Group Number

APRG Number Defines the priority group number for this console.

ITE-ITE Option Yes/No Enter “Y” if an ITE is to be used as the Attendant Console.

VMC-Voicemail Message Center Operator

Yes/No Defines if this console can use the Message Center Operator feature.

MMG-Meet Me Conference Group Number

Meet-Me Group Number Defines the Meet-me Conference Group number that this console has the ability to use/control.

Maintenance Feature Allowed

Yes/No

Assign Data Line Yes/No Defines if this line console will have an associated data line for use in accessing the Directory Lookup system and for Meet-Me Conference control.

Data Directory Number Dirn, None

Defines the data directory number if one is assigned.

User Group User Group Defines the user group for this console. Programmable Device Yes/No Specifies that a PDI is attached. Class Of Service Class of Service Defines the class of service for this console. OAI Associated Member Yes/No Defines if this console is used with the OAI option. Inside Terminal Type Number

Terminal Type Enter the Inside Terminal Type for this console.

Outside Terminal Type Number

Terminal Type Enter the Outside Terminal Type for this console.

Call Alerting Type I=ITE, D=Data Equipment

Automatic Answer Yes/No Defines if the Hands-Free Auto-answer feature is allowed for this console.

Release On DTR Yes/No Defines if the data line is released on loss of the DTR signal from the console’s equipment.

Echo Dialed Characters Yes/No Defines if dialed digits are will echo to the attendant console equipment.

Hot Line None, 1 to 24 digits

Defines a hotline destination for this console.

Build Attendant Groups Use the following procedure to in the GRPS command to create Attendant Groups. The GRPS command both builds the attendant group, and associates it with an existing user group.

M M


150 Aastra– 2512-004




2. Type U and press Enter to update the attendant group data.

SELECT MODE: DISPLAY, UPDATE, TITLES, SEARCH => U

3. Type C and press Enter to create a new group.

A standard ATDC group number is 20.

UPDT: C-Create, M-Modify, D-Delete, P-Copy . .=> C

4. Type a number to identify the group being created, and press Enter.

SPECIFY GROUP NUMBER: . . . . . . . . . . => 20

5. Type AGRP, and press Enter. ENTER GROUPS TYPE: OR ? . . . . . . . . . => AGRP

6. Type an optional group title, and press Enter.

ENTER TITLE:. ______________ => NEW ATTENDANT GROUP

***. . .ATTENDANT GROUP . . . . . . . . . . . . .20

7. Type the number of the user group that accesses this group, and press Enter.

USER GROUP . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . => 50

8. Type the Class of Service number that was previously created for the ATDC, and press Enter.

CLASS OF SERVICE . . . . . . . .. . . . . . => 20

9. Select the feature monitored by the Open Application Interface (OAI). • Type Y and press Enter for OAI

monitoring. • Accept the default (N) by

pressing Enter for no OAI monitoring.


10. Establish the ATDC basis for answering queued calls. (ACQ) • Accept the default (F) by

pressing Enter if on a First-In-First-Out basis.

• Type C and press Enter for an assigned priority based on Call Type.

CALL QUEUE HANDLING: F=FIFO; C=CALL TYPE. . .F => F

11. Specify how queued calls are directed. (LSH) • Accept the default (L) by

pressing Enter if calls are directed to the attendant who has

LOOP SELECTION HANDLING: L=LONGEST IDLE;

C=CALL TYPE; P=CALL TYPE PRIORITY . . . . .L => L

MM


Aastra – 2512-004 151

Step Action ASP Display been idle the longest.

• Type C and press Enter if calls are directed by the call type.

• Type P and press Enter if calls are directed to the attendant with the highest priority that has been idle the longest.

12. Indicate if and how the ring ping option is implemented. (ARP) • Accept the default (N) by

pressing Enter if ring ping is not used.

• Type C and press Enter if ring ping is used for calls in queue.

• Type T and press Enter to warn the attendant that the queue threshold has been exceeded.

RING PING OPTION: N=No Ring Ping;

C=Calls Queued; T=Queue Threshold Exceeded. N => T

13. Select a Night Directory Number reinstatement for a cold start. (CSN) • Accept the default (Y) by

pressing Enter if the number will reinstate after a cold start.

• Type N and press Enter if the number is not reinstated.

A fluttering call waiting lamp indicates that the threshold for number of calls in queue is exceeded.

COLD START NIGHT ANSWER: Y=YES; N=NO. . . . .Y => Y

14. Type the number of calls that can simultaneously wait, and press Enter. (CWT)

CALL WAITING THRESHOLD. . . . . . . . . . . .3 => 3

15. Type a night service directory number, and press Enter. (NDN)

A group directory number allows users to reach a member of an attendant group.

NIGHT ANSWER DIRECTION: N=NONE . . . . . .N => 2300

16. Type a group directory number, and press Enter. (DRN)

The Meet Me Conference Group

GROUP DIRECTORY NUMBER: N=NONE . . . . . .N => 4610

M M


152 Aastra– 2512-004

Step Action ASP Display number is created with the GRPS command.

17. Select access to the meet me conference feature. (MMG) • Type Y and press Enter if all

attendants in this group are allowed to reserve a meet me conference.

• Accept the default (N) by pressing Enter, if only attendants who have the meet me conference group number assigned, can reserve this feature.

MEET ME CONFERENCE GROUP #: N=NONE . . . .N => 256

18. Select outside handling for trunk calls. (OHT) • Type Y and press Enter to

provide a double ring for incoming trunk calls that are transferred by the attendant to a station.

• Accept the default (N) by pressing Enter, if outside handling is not used.

• When in night service, the

attendant console forwards calls to this number. You can assign a night bell with the TAAL of the DIRN command.

• This occurs only if there are no restrictions in dialing between user groups.

OUTSIDE HANDLING For Trunk Call:Y=Yes; N=No..N => Y

19. Type the announcement trunk group number or annunciator group number (usually "53") to assign the call queuing messages and press Enter.(ANC)

ANNOUNCEMENT TRK/ANNUNCIATOR GRP#: N=NONE...N =>

20. If an annunciator group is selected at the previous prompt, type the number (1 through 47) of the message to play for the callers to this attendant group and press Enter. (MSG)

ANNUNCIATOR MESSAGE NUMBER: (1- 47) . .None => 46

21. Type the amount of time (from 1 to INTERVAL BEFORE MSG PLAYED: (1-254) SECS...10 =>

MM


Aastra – 2512-004 153

Step Action ASP Display 254 seconds) the system waits before playing the annunciator message to the caller and press Enter. (INT)

22. Select the post announcement treatment. (PAT) • Accept the default (R) by

pressing Enter for ringback tone.

• Type S and press Enter for silence.

• Type M and press Enter for music.

POST ANNOUNCEMENT TREATMENT: or ?...........R => ?

R.....RINGBACK S.....SILENCE M.....MUSIC

23. Select the source of the calling party number for an attendant extended call. (ECP) • Accept the default (A) by

pressing <Enter> for the attendant’s calling party number.

• Type E, and press <Enter> for the extended party’s calling party number.

SOURCE OF EXTENDED CALLING PARTY # or ?.....A => ?

Enter the source of the calling party number for an attendant extended call:

A = Attendant's calling party number E = Extended party's calling party number

24. Review the Display.



***. . . ATTENDANT GROUP. . . . . . . . . . . . .20

***. . .USER GROUP . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .50

CLOS. . .CLASS OF SERVICE . . .. . . . . . . . . .20 ACQ. . .CALL QUEUE HANDLING . . . . . . . . . FIFO LSH. . .LOOP SELECTION HANDLING. . . . . . .LONGEST ARP. . .ATTENDANT RING PING OPTION.R-P IF THRESHOLD CSN. . .COLD START NIGHT ANSWER. . . . . . . . .YES CWT. . .CALL WAITING THRESHOLD . . . . . . . . . .3 NDN. . .NIGHT NASWER DIRECTION . .VOICE ANSWER 2300 DRN. . .ATTENDANT GROUP DIRECTORY . . . . . . .4610 MMG. . .MEET ME CONFERENCE GROUP #. . . . . . .256 OHT. . .OUTSIDE HANDLING FOR TRUNK CALLS . . . .YES ANC. . .ANNUNCIATOR GROUP NUMBER. . . . . . . . .53 MSG. . .ANNUNCIATOR MESSAGE NUMBER. . . . . . . .46 INT. . .ANNUNCIATOR MESSAGE INTERVAL . . . . . . .5 PAT. . .POST ANNOUNCEMENT TREATMENT . . . . .MUSIC ECP...SOURCE OF EXTENDED CALLING PARTY #.ATTENDANT

DOES UPDATE VERIFY? => Y

25. Type Y and press Enter to save the information in the database.


M M


154 Aastra– 2512-004

Assign Attendants to an Attendant Group After you build an attendant group, you must specify the attendant group number (AGN) associated with it in the user group parameters table (UGRP?UGP) and assign attendants to the group (IAG).

To assign attendants to an attendant group:


1. At the ASP Select Command prompt: Type UGRP and press Enter.

2. Type U and press Enter. SELECT MODE: DISPLAY, UPDATE, TITLES . . . . => U

3. Type M and press Enter. UPDATE MODE: C-Create, M-Modify, D-Delete. . => M


USER GROUP NUMBER (1- 128) OR ? . . . . . . . => 50

5. Type UGP and press Enter. SELECT SUBCOMMAND or ? => UGP

6. Type AGN and press Enter. SPECIFY FIELD TO MODIFY or - or ?.......... => AGN

7. Type the Attendant Group Number for this user group, and press Enter.

ATTENDANT GROUP NUMBER: N=None. . . . .NONE => 120

8. Type IAG and press Enter. SPECIFY FIELD TO MODIFY or - or ?........... => IAG

9. Type the Intercept Attendant Group Number for this user group, and press Enter.

INTERCEPT ATTENDANT GROUP NUMBER: N=None. .. => 120

SPECIFY FIELD TO MODIFY or "ALL" or ? . . . . =>




** USER GROUP PARAMETERS FOR USER GROUP #56

MOH. .MUSIC ON HOLD PORT NUMBER . . . . . . .NONE HUG. .HOME USER GROUP NUMBER . . . . . . . .NONE IMD. .InteMail DIRECT CALL SDGP NUMBER . . .250 IMC. .InteMail MESSAGE CENTER SDGP NUMBER . NONE AGN. .ATTENDANT GROUP NUMBER . . . . . . . .120 IAG. .INTERCEPT ATTENDANT GROUP . . . . . . .120 PCG. .PARK CHANNEL GROUP NUMBER . . . . . . .60 HNP. .HOME NPA NUMBER . . . . . . . . . . . .214 HNC. .HOME NNP NUMBER. . . . . . . . . . . . .233 LOC. .LOCAL/LOCA-TOLL ROUTING . . . . . . .NORMAL ILC. .INTER-LATA CARRIER CODE . . . . . . . .NONE CRD. .CALL RECORDING DIRECTORY NUMBER . . . .NONE AC1. .1 DIGIT ACCESS CODE ROUTING . . .UNASSIGNED AC2. .2 DIGIT ACCESS CODE ROUTING. . . .ASSIGNED CHP. .CALL HANDLING PARAMETERS. . . . . .ASSIGNED CTR. .CALL TYPE ROUTING . . . . . . . . .ASSIGNED DNA. .DIRECTORY NUMBER ALLOCATION . . . .ASSIGNED FDD. .FIRST DIGIT DISPOSITION . . . . . .ASSIGNED IDD. .INTL DIRECT DIALING . . . . . . .UNASSIGNED LCR. .LOCAL CALL ROUTING. . . . . . . . .ASSIGNED LTR. .LOCAL TOLL ROUTING. . . . . . . .SHARES NPA NNP. .NNP ROUTING. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2 NPA. .NPA ROUTING. . . . . . . . . . . .ASSIGNED SNP. .SPECIAL NPA ROUTING. . . .. . . . .ASSIGNED

MM


Aastra – 2512-004 155

Step Action ASP Display TDD. .TWO DIGIT DISPOSITION . . . . . . .ASSIGNED 3DS. .THREE DIGIT SPEED NUMBERS. . . . . . .3 5 4DS. .FOUR DIGIT SPEED NUMBERS . . . . . . . . 4



Attendant Priority Groups If Call Type Queueing is being used in an Attendant Group, at least one Attendant Priority Group must be defined to identify the priority of queued calls. There are thirteen Call Types for attendant calls. They are described in the following table.

Table 27. Call Types for ATDC Calls

Priority Call Type Description

SERL - Serial Call Trunk calls extended back to the attendant group after the call is completed, when the attendant has flagged the call as a Serial Call.

INCL - Incoming Attended Incoming trunk calls terminated to the attendant or calls extended to the attendant group’s directory number.

ICAS -Incoming Central Attendant Service

Calls made to satellite switches can be directed to the main switch attendant station for a singular operation.

OPER - Operator Internal or external callers who reach the attendant by dialing the “Operator” or the attendant group’s directory number.

RGNA - Ring No Answer Unanswered calls that return to the attendant after the Transfer Reversion Time is reached (specified in the UGRP/UGP table).

INTC - Operator Number Intercept

When a user’s CLOS is set to ONI, all external call attempts will be routed to the attendant.

VCNT -Vacant Number Intercept

When a user dials an undefined directory number, the call will be routed to the attendant - if the vacant number intercept (IVI or EVI) is defined in the UGRP/CHP table.

ONLQ - Online Queue Timeout

If “route to attendant” is included as a step in the route guide, the call will be directed to an attendant in the user group.

PARK - Park Call Timeout Calls parked by a user or an attendant that are not retrieved before that Call Park Reversion Time is reached will return to the attendant (defined in the UGRP/CHP table).

HOLD - Timed Hold Delayed Hold calls that are not retrieved before the Delayed Hold Time-out is reached will return to the attendant (defined in the UGRP/CHP table).

CFBN - Call Forward Busy No Answer

Calls reverted to the attendant when a directory number’s CFBN is assigned to an attendant group directory number, an attendant port directory number, or “0”.

BSNA - Busy No Answer Calls reverted to the attendant when the Camp-On feature is used and the Transfer Reversion Time is reached (defined in UGRP/CHP.)

CFWD - Call Forward All calls reverted to the attendant (defined in the Call Forward All field of a user’s directory number.)

M M


156 Aastra– 2512-004

Create an Attendant Listed Directory Number An Attendant Listed Directory Number (ALDN) is the main listed directory number terminating at an attendant group. This directory number is created using the DIRN command.

Assign an Attendant Priority Group If Call Type Queuing is being used in an attendant group, at least one Attendant Priority Group (AGRP) must be defined to identify the priority of specific types of queued calls. An attendant priority group is assigned to each attendant console. This permits you to set up individual consoles to answer different types of calls.

To create an attendant priority group:

Step Action Display

1. Type APRG and press Enter. SELECT COMMAND => APRG


3. Type a number to identify the Attendant Priority Group and press Enter.

ATTENDANT PRIORITY GROUP. . . . . . . . . . . => 2

4. Establish the availability of each of the 12 priority call types for the attendant console under this group. (PRI) For each call type: • Press Enter to accept the default

value. • Type 0 (Zero), and press Enter

to delete the default value. • Type D and press Enter to

display the previous priority steps.

If you enter N (No) in the following step, your entries are lost.

PRI 1 OPTION, 0=DELETE, D=Display or ? SERL => PRI 2 OPTION, 0=DELETE, D=Display or ? INCL => PRI 3 OPTION, 0=DELETE, D=Display or ? OPER => PRI 4 OPTION, 0=DELETE, D=Display or ? RGNA=> 0 PRI 5 OPTION, 0=DELETE, D=Display or ? INTC=> 0 PRI 6 OPTION, 0=DELETE, D=Display or ? VCNT=> 0 PRI 7 OPTION, 0=DELETE, D=Display or ? ONLQ=> 0 PRI 8 OPTION, 0=DELETE, D=Display or ? PARK=> 0 PRI 9 OPTION, 0=DELETE, D=Display or ? HOLD=> 0 PRI 10 OPTION, 0=DELETE, D=Display or ? CFBN=> 0 PRI 11 OPTION, 0=DELETE, D=Display or ? BSNA=> 0 PRI 12 OPTION, 0=DELETE, D=Display or ? CFWD=> 0 PRI 13 OPTION, 0=DELETE, D=Display or ? ICAS=> 0


PRI. . .1 . . . . .SERL. . .SERIAL CALL PRI. . .2 . . . . .INCL.. . .INCOMING

ATTENDED




MM


Aastra – 2512-004 157

Chapter 11 Line Types

Overview This chapter provides information about voice lines and data lines. The following basic line types are described.

• Standard Voice Lines • Hot Lines • Dedicated Central Office (CO) Lines • Station Status Lines • Intercom Lines • Data Lines • Restricted Access DID Lines

ACD Agent Lines are documented in the ACD Database Administration Guide, 590-2371-XXX.

Standard Voice Lines Standard voice lines are the default line type for STE and ITE stations. The Class of Service (CLOS) assigned to a directory number defines the features of the voice line connected to it.

STE and ITE4 stations support single voice lines. Some ITE models support the assignment of more than one voice line to a station.

Hotline A hotline is a voice line used to directly connect a station (for an STE) or a line button (for an ITE) to a predefined destination number. The LINE definition for a Hotline is identical to a voice line with the exception of having a destination input for the Hotline parameter.

A Hotline is also referred to as a ring down circuit.

A common use of a Hotline station is an elevator phone, parking lot security phone, Hunt Group or Satellite Directory number, where users cannot place normal phone calls. A Hotline can be an ITE or STE device, but does not normally require a station with a numeric keypad.

Hotline destinations do not have to be internal numbers. A Hotline can have a local, long distance, international or other destination type, up to 24 digits; however, the Hotline’s class of service must allow for the type of call where the Hotline routes.

Hotline does not have a special feature button. The Hotline line-select button is labeled as such on the phone detail sheet.

M M

Chapter 11, Line Types

158 Aastra– 2512-004

When you press the Hotline line-select button on an ITE, the call is immediately routed to the Hotline destination number without any further input. On an STE, the call is automatically routed to the destination number when you go off hook. An invalid Hotline destination number may result in reorder or a message describing why the call cannot be completed.

Database Requirements for Hotline Table 28. Database Requirements for Hotline


FONE

BTN - Button Line Select Button (H) type.



LINE

HOT - Hotline N=Inactive, or Destination number

Defines the destination number for a Hotline. If a directory number is entered, it must be within the same User Group. If an outside destination number is entered, it must include the dialing level (for example a “9” for outside calling) and the call type must be allowed in the line’s class of service

MM


Aastra – 2512-004 159

Create a Hotline You can also create a Hotline using the FONE command.



2. Type U and press Enter.


4. Enter the directory number and user group and press Enter.

5. Enter the class of service and press Enter.

6. Answer the prompts from the Call Pickup Group Number to the Call Forward-Busy Action.

7. At the Hotline prompt, enter the destination number for the hotline, up to 24 digits.

8. Answer the remaining prompts.

9. Verify the display.

10. • Enter Y to save the line Or • Enter N to exit without

saving.

M M


160 Aastra– 2512-004

Create a Phone and Add the Hotline You can also create the hotline as you are creating the phone in the FONE command.

Step Action Result

1. Answer all prompts up to “Assign Line Select Buttons”.

2. Enter Y and press Enter.

3. Type the line-select button number and press Enter.

4. Type H and press Enter for line type.

5. Type the DIRN, User Group Number and press Enter.

6. Answer the remaining prompts.

7. Verify the display.

8. • Press Y to save. Or • Press N to discard

changes.

MM


Aastra – 2512-004 161

Dedicated Central Office Lines A Dedicated Central Office (CO) Line provides local CO dial tone to a station device through the switch. A Dedicated CO line can be assigned to an STE or ITE device. Although the line is connected through the switch, the switch does not collect digits or call processing. The switch is transparent to the calls on a Dedicated CO Line. Dedicated CO lines are:

• Private lines • Not assigned directory numbers • Cannot be called internally.

Typical applications for a Dedicated CO line is an executives private line or a fax machine assigned to an STE port.

Create and Assign Dedicated CO Lines The following process is used to create and assign dedicated CO lines.

Step Action

1. Create a private line trunk group using the GRPS command. Refer to the Pointspan System Database Administration Manual (590-2513-nnn).

2. Assign the private line trunk group to a trunk port using the CARD command.

3. Using the FONE command, assign a station to the configured trunk port with the phone command. The station must have an unused line-select button for the dedicated line. Choose CO Line-Dedicated as the line type for an ITE port. Choose VLN as the type for an STE port.

Database Requirements for a Dedicated CO Line

To create a Dedicated CO Line, the following commands and actions are required.

Field Name Description

GRPS

Trunk Group Creates the DDCO Trunk Group. See the Pointspan System Database Administration document for details.

CARD

Trunk Port Creates the trunk port. For each trunk port equipped, specify the trunk group of which to assign the trunk.

FONE

BTN – Line Select Button

• C-CO line type • Trunk Group Number • Ring type

Assigns the dedicated CO Line to the station.

M M


162 Aastra– 2512-004


• Pre-select Inclusion

Display the DDCO Trunk Group




2. Type T and press Enter.A list of available groups is displayed by number and title.

SELECT MODE:PRINT,DISPLAY,UPDATE,TITLES,SEARCH => T

*** * TITLES FOR GROUPS 08/06/01 06:17:27 ***

GRP0001.....2WT 1.2.6 LOOP GRP0002.....CALL PARK SP0 GRP0003.....DID 1.2.9 LOOP GRP0004.....MEET ME CONFERENCE GROUP 4 GRP0005.....DDCO TERM

3. Type D and press Enter. SELECT MODE:PRINT,DISPLAY,UPDATE,TITLES,SEARCH => D

4. Type the group number and press Enter.

On the right is a typical dedicated CO trunk group display. See the Pointspan System Database Administration manual for more information.

SPECIFY GROUP NUMBER or - ................. => 5 Example:

Dedicated CO Trunk Group

** TRUNK GROUP DEFINITION 03/02/00 20:07:10

***...TRUNK GROUP........................107 ***...TRUNK GROUP TYPE...................DDCO TERM TCI...TRUNK CLASS IDENTIFICATION.........LOCAL CO UGP...USER GROUP NUMBER..................50 VTT...VOICE TRUNK TRANSFER ENABLED.......YES FTH...FAILURE THRESHOLD..................3 RDT...RESEIZE DELAY TIME............MSEC:50 DET...DISTANT END RELEASE TIME.......SEC:60 DCT...DATA CALLS ALLOWED.................YES SWM...SEIZE WHEN MOS.....................YES TCH...TRUNK CALL HANDLING................EXTERNAL NDS...DISCONNECT SUPERVISION.............NO GDT...GLARE DETECT TIME.............MSEC:100 DPT...DTMF PASSTHROUGH TIMING INDEX......NONE ......TRUNK DIRECTION....................BOTH WAYS

*** INCOMING PARAMETERS

STY...INCOMING CALL ORIGINATION TYPE.....RING+SEIZE.....GRST (GROUND START) ICM...INCOMING CALL MESSAGE #............NONE IDS...INCOMING DIGIT SEQUENCE............NONE IRD...RESPONSE TO DESTINATION NUMBER.....NONE IRC...RESPONSE TO CALLING PARTY NUMBER...NONE IIT...INCOMING INFO DIGIT TYPE/LENGTH....NONE IDF...DESTINATION...............STATION: CLOS...CLASS OF SERVICE.............71 CFN...CALL FORWARD - NO ANSWER.....INACTIVE APR...AUTOMATIC PRIVACY RELEASE....NO CWR...CALLWAIT RINGBACK..................NO UCT...TRUNK UPDATE CDR ON TRANSFER.......ALL RIO...RESPONSE TO INCOMING ORIGINATION...SEIZE ANSWER NDN...NIGHT ANSWER DIRECTORY.............NONE TCT...STATION CALL RESTRICTION ENABLED...NO

MM


Aastra – 2512-004 163

Step Action ASP Display *** OUTGOING PARAMETERS

TXA...DIRECT TGRP SELECT ALLOWED.........YES SDP...SPECIAL DIAL PULSE OUTPUT..........NO ATG...ANNOUNCEMENT TRUNK GROUP...........NO SLC...TRUNK SELECTION....................LONGEST OSG...OUTGOING SIGNALLING TYPE...........DTMF ATI...DEFAULT ANSWER DETECT TIME.....SEC:35 DAT...DIAL TONE WAIT TIME............SEC:6 SWW...SEIZE/WINK WAIT TIME...........SEC:3 CXF...CANCEL TRANSFER....................NO ICA...INTER-LATA CARRIER.................10XXX DIAGNOSTIC PARAMETERS: Y or N...............N =>

PORT ASSIGNMENT REPORT

1.2.03.08

END OF DISPLAY

5. Type the abort (@) character at each prompt until SELECT COMMAND => displays.

SELECT COMMAND => @

Assign a Dedicated CO Line to a Station

Step Action Result




3. Type M and press Enter. UPDT MODE: C-Create M-Modify D-Delete........ => M

4. Select the switch location where the station is attached. • Type the port number in the format




When a port number or location is entered, the port type is displayed


Enter a port number: ..=> ww.x.yy.zz Specify port, where

ww = Cabinet x = Shelf yy = Card zz = Circuit or a location: ..=> L,aaa.....aaa Specify LOCATION, where aaa.....aaa = Location name

PORT TYPE...........................ITES

5. Type BTN and press Enter. Specify ITE /STE Field to Modify or - or ?.. => BTN

6. Select a line select button for the CO line.

LINE SELECT (Button #-Type-Number/Group): 8-VLIN- 2297/50 9-SEL 10-SEL

7. Type the button number and press Enter. LINE SELECT BUTTON NUMBER: Return=END........ => 9

M M


164 Aastra– 2512-004

Step Action Result

The displayed text on the right shows the type of lines that can be assigned.



8. Type C and press Enter. ENTER LINE TYPE OR ?...................V => C

9. Type the trunk group number and press Enter.

TRUNK GROUP NUMBER or ?................. => 5

10. Press Enter for each of the listed prompts to accept the default settings.


N=NO RING; A=ABBREVIATED; D=DELAYED RING....R => PRESELECT INCLUSION: Y=YES; N=NO............N => ALPHANUMERIC DISPLAY: Y=YES; N=NO...........N => InteMail MESSAGE WAITING: Y=YES; N=NO......N =>

11. • If the station has two dedicated CO lines; type the button number, press Enter, and go to step 8.

Or • Press Enter to go to step 12.

LINE SELECT (Button #-Type-Number/Group): 8-VLIN- 2297/50 9-CO 10-UNAS LINE SELECT BUTTON NUMBER: Return=END........ =>

12. Press Enter to go to the verify display. Specify ITE /STE Field to Modify or - or ?... =>

13. Select the display format. • Type N and press Enter to if a

display is not required. • Type D and press Enter to display a

detailed description of station features including a list of features and assigned buttons.

• Type P and press Enter to display a picture of assigned buttons.


The display at right is an example of a “type D” format.

VERIFY DISPLAY FORMAT: N, D, P, B or ?......B => D

*** VERIFY DISPLAY *** ***...STATION.......................PORT 01.3.07.19 ***...STATION EQUIPMENT TYPE.............ITES

BTP...BUTTON TEMPLATE NUMBER.............10 DND...DO NOT DISTURB ALLOWED.............YES DNS...DO NOT DISTURB STATUS..............INACTIVE VMC...InteMail MESSAGE DESK OPERATOR.....NO AND...ALPHANUMERIC DISPLAY...............YES ADP...DESTINATION DISPLAY PREFERRED......YES AHL...AUTOMATIC HOLD.....................NO HRC...SWITCHHOOK RINGER CUTOFF...........NO DPT...DTMF PASSTHROUGH TIMING INDEX......NONE ADD...ADT ANALOG SIDE DTMF DIALING.......NO

MM


Aastra – 2512-004 165

Step Action Result LPR...LINE PRESELECT TYPE................PRIME & RING PLB...PRIME LINE PRESELECT BUTTON #......8


1.........FEATURE........CALL TRANSFER 2.........FEATURE........CONFERENCE 3.........FEATURE........CALLBACK 4.........FEATURE........ABBREVIATED DIAL 5.........FEATURE........CALL PARK 6.........FEATURE........DISPLAY 7.........FEATURE........HOLD 8.PL......VOICE LINE.....DRN:2297 - UGP:50..RING PRESEL DISP 9.........CO TRUNK.......GROUP NUMBER 107 ...RING PRESEL 10.........LINE SELECT....UNASSIGNED 11.........FEATURE........CALL PICKUP 12.........FEATURE........CANCEL

14. Verify the FONE entries. • Type Y and press Enter to save the


all responses.


Buzz/Station Status Lines The Buzz/Station Status feature provides a direct connection between two users. For example, a department manager and the department secretary may need to communicate often. The Buzz/Station Status feature provides this communication by pressing one button. Buzz/Station Status is a variation of the Intercom feature. It provides a private line between a Base station and up to four supporting Status stations. Buzz/Station Status lines do not support the use of Do Not Disturb, Transfer, or Forward.

At least two phones must be configured (each with a line select button) to install the feature. A line select button on one ITE is built as the Base (Boss) station. The other line select button is configured as the Status (Secretary) station.

Database Requirements for Buzz/Station Status Table 29. Database Requirements for Buzz/Station Status


FONE

BTN – Line Select Button Line Type S Assigns the line select as a Station Status line. Base Station Port Yes/No Defines the port as a Base (Boss) station (Y) or a status station (N).

The Base Station must always be defined prior to any of the Status

M M


166 Aastra– 2512-004

Stations. Alert Only Option Yes/No Applies to Base Station Only. Defines if the Station Status Line is

only used for signaling or for voice and signaling. • Yes = Does not allow voice and allows signaling only. • No = Allows both voice and signaling.

Alert Ring Time 1-60 seconds

Applies to Base Station only. Defines how long an unanswered Station Status line

Port Number Cabinet Shelf Slot Circuit

Applies to Status Stations only. Defines the Base station port of the station this line will status. The Base station must be defined first.

Buzz Option Yes/No Applies to Status Stations only. Defines if this status station buzzes when signaled. • Yes = Buzzes when signaled. • No – Only flashes the line lamp for the Station Status line.

Build the Base Station To install the Buzz/Status feature for use with two ITEs, first configure a line on the Base (Buzz or Boss) station.


1. At the ASP Select Command prompt: Type FONE, and press Enter.



3. Type M and press Enter. UPDT MODE:C-Create M-Modify D-Delete.. => M

4. Type the port location for the voice line modified for Base Station use, and press Enter.

ENTER PORT NUMBER, LOCATION, or ?..... => 1.2.3.7

PORT TYPE....................ITE

5. Type BTN and press Enter. Specify ITE/STE Field to Modify or - or ?. => BTN

LINE SELECT (Button #-Type-Number/Group): 8-VLIN- 6119/1 9-UNAS 10-UNAS

6. Type the number of the line select button to configure for Station Status use, and press Enter.

LINE SELECT BUTTON NUMBER: Return=END...... => 9

7. Type S and press Enter. ENTER LINE TYPE OR ?......................V => S

8. Type Y to indicate that this port is for the Base (or Buzz) station, and press Enter.

IS THIS THE BASE PORT:.....Y=YES; N=NO....N => Y

9. Select the alert option. • Type Y if you want the phone to

buzz the user at the Status Station,

ALERT ONLY OPTION:..........Y=YES; N=NO...N => Y

MM


Aastra – 2512-004 167

Step Action ASP Display and press Enter.

• Accept the default (N) for alert only, and press Enter.

When you select Alert Only, no voice path is provided between the two phones configured for Station Status.

10. Type the number of seconds (1 through 60) buzzing lasts, and press Enter.

ALERT RINGING TIME:........1-60 seconds...7 => 7


8-VLIN- 6119/1 9-SSTS 10-UNAS

Button Option: A, M, R, -, ? or Return=End.. =>

12. Press Enter. Specify ITE /STE Field to Modify or - or ?... =>





• Type B and press Enter to display the list and the picture.


(N)one; (D)etailed; (P)icture; (B)oth...B => D


***...STATION....................PORT 01.02.3.07

***...STATION EQUIPMENT TYPE.................ITE

BTP...BUTTON TEMPLATE NUMBER...................4

***...ITE TYPE...........................

OAM...OAI ASSOCIATED MEMBER..............NO DND...DO NOT DISTURB ALLOWED.............YES DNS...DO NOT DISTURB STATUS..............INACTIVE VMC...InteMail MESSAGE DESK OPERATOR.....NO AND...ALPHANUMERIC DISPLAY...............NO AHL...AUTOMATIC HOLD.....................NO HRC...SWITCHHOOK RINGER CUTOFF...........NO ADD...ADT ANALOG SIDE DTMF DIALING.......NO LPR...LINE PRESELECT TYPE................PRIME PLB...PRIME LINE PRESELECT BUTTON #......8 BUTTON TYPE LINE/FEATURE ID

1......FEATURE.....ABBREVIATED DIAL 2......FEATURE.....AUTOMATIC DIAL 3......FEATURE.....CALL PICKUP 4......FEATURE.....EXCLUSIVE HOLD 5......FEATURE.....LAST NUMBER REDIAL 6......FEATURE.....CALL TRANSFER 7......FEATURE.....HOLD 8.PL...VOICE LINE..DRN:6119-UGP:1.RING Mail-MSG 9......STATION STATUS BASE...ALERT ONLY 7 SECS. 10......LINE SELECT....UNASSIGNED

M M


168 Aastra– 2512-004

Step Action ASP Display 11......FEATURE........PRIVACY RELEASE 12......DATA LINE......NO DIRECTORY NUMBER DOES UPDATE VERIFY ? =>


FONE information in the database. • Type N and press Enter to



Build a Status Station After setting up a Base station, you can configure one or more phones to serve as Status Stations.






4. Type the port or location information for the station to be modified, and press Enter.

ENTER PORT NUMBER, LOCATION, or ?....... =>1.2.4.8

PORT TYPE....................ITE

5. Type BTN and press Enter. Specify ITE /STE Field to Modify or - or ?. => BTN


8-VLIN- 6120/1 9-UNAS 10-UNAS

6. Type the number of the button to assign, and press Enter.


7. Type S for Station Status, and press Enter.

ENTER LINE TYPE OR ?........................V => S

8. Type N to indicate that this line is NOT the Base station, and press Enter.

IS THIS THE BASE PORT:......Y=YES; N=NO.....N => N

9. Type the location of the port that provides the Base Station, and press Enter.

SPECIFY STATION BY PORT #: nnnn(A/B).....=>1.2.3.7

10. Select a buzz option. • Press Enter to accept the default. • Type N and press Enter to send a

line lamp flash instead of a buzz.

The "Buzz Option" prompt provides

BUZZ OPTION: Y=YES; N=NO...................Y => Y

MM


Aastra – 2512-004 169

Step Action ASP Display ringing at the status stations when the Base Station calls.


8-VLIN- 6119/1 9-SSTS 10-UNAS


12. Press Enter. Specify ITE /STE Field to Modify or - or ?... =>





• Type B and press Enter to display the list and the picture.


(N)one; (D)etailed; (P)icture; (B)oth...B => D

Review the display. *** VERIFY DISPLAY ***

***...STATION.......................PORT 01.02.4.08 ***...STATION EQUIPMENT TYPE.............ITE BTP...BUTTON TEMPLATE NUMBER.............4

***...ITE TYPE...........................

OAM...OAI ASSOCIATED MEMBER..............NO DND...DO NOT DISTURB ALLOWED.............YES DNS...DO NOT DISTURB STATUS..............INACTIVE VMC...InteMail MESSAGE DESK OPERATOR.....NO AND...ALPHANUMERIC DISPLAY...............NO AHL...AUTOMATIC HOLD.....................NO HRC...SWITCHHOOK RINGER CUTOFF...........NO ADD...ADT ANALOG SIDE DTMF DIALING.......NO LPR...LINE PRESELECT TYPE................PRIME PLB...PRIME LINE PRESELECT BUTTON #......8


1.......FEATURE.......ABBREVIATED DIAL 2.......FEATURE.......AUTOMATIC DIAL 3.......FEATURE.......CALL PICKUP 4.......FEATURE.......EXCLUSIVE HOLD 5.......FEATURE.......LAST NUMBER REDIAL 6.......FEATURE.......CALL TRANSFER 7.......FEATURE.......HOLD 8.PL....VOICE LINE....DRN:6120-UGP:1...RING Mail- MSG 9.......STATION STATUS MEMBER.. RING BASE....PORT # 01.02.3.07 ALERT ONLY BUTTON 9 10.......LINE SELECT...UNASSIGNED 11.......LINE SELECT...UNASSIGNED 12.......FEATURE.......PRIVACY RELEASE



all responses.


M M


170 Aastra– 2512-004

Intercom Lines An Intercom line allows a user to contact other members of a group by dialing a one-digit or two-digit number. Refer to Chapter 6 for a description of Intercom Groups and how to work with them. This feature is not available on STE stations.

Data Lines Data lines allow users to interconnect low speed (<56k) data connections into the switch on the same physical line as their ITE voice line. Doing so requires an interface device known as a Programmable Data Interface (PDI) to combine the two digital data streams (Voice and Data) onto the one physical line.

Using data lines allows a system to “pool” modems and support many data dial-up type connections with a limited number of modems. (EXAMPLE: 20 modems can support 100 users if all 100 users do not need dedicated or long-term connections).

Data lines are “linked” (or “created”) by the FONE command. A data line can only be created for an ITE phone and only one line can be created per ITE port.

Creating data lines requires “TERMINAL TYPE” tables created to define the data rates and communications parameters that the switch uses to talk to the data devices. For a data line, there are two terminal types required:

• INTERNAL - Used for establishing communications parameters used internally by the switch.

• EXTERNAL - Used when data lines access a modem pool.

When modem pools are created, they require a MODEM terminal type to link a data line to a modem pool when required. The MODEM and OUTSIDE terminal types must match when a line accesses a modem.

Data lines require a class of service that defines data parameters and disables call features that interfere or impact data connections.

Data lines MAY be assigned a data directory number. This number is only required if the data connection is dialed from another data device (EXAMPLE: An internal terminal calls another internal terminal.) For dedicated data connections, a directory number for the line is not required.

A typical configuration is shown in the following figure.

MM


Aastra – 2512-004 171

Figure 5. Typical Data Configuration

Database Requirements for a Data Line


CLOS

Data Class of Service NA A Data Line requires a class of service to identify permissions of operation. A universal Class of Service can be used for a Data Line, or a Data Line Class of Service can be created and used.

TTYP

Terminal Type NA The TTYP command creates tables that identify the operating characteristics of the data connections. TTYP defines parameters

M M


172 Aastra– 2512-004

such as Baud Rates, Parity, Stop Bits, and others. These tables allow the switch to understand the data being routed.

BTNS

BTN DATA Assigns the Data feature to a button in the template

FONE

DLN Yes/No Assigns the Data Line and its required parameters.

Data Terminal Types Most data devices such as terminals, personal computers, and modems have their own transmission characteristics or protocol. The switch must be programmed for the device protocol. This is accomplished by defining the data device with the Terminal Type Command (TTYP). The TTYP command defines the following:

• Data Bits Transmitted • Parity • Stop Bits • Data Speed • Data Code Used

Create a Terminal Type


1. At the ASP Select Command prompt: Type TTYP and press Enter.

SELECT COMMAND => TTYP

2. Type U and press Enter. SELECT MODE:PRINT, DISPLAY, UPDATE, SEARCH, TITLES =>


Unassigned numbers can be found with the Select Mode Display subcommand.

UPDATE MODE: C=Create, M=Modify, or D=Delete. =>

4. Type an identification number, and press Enter.

SPECIFY DATA TERMINAL TYPE NUMBER............ =>

5. Type a title for the application in which this Terminal Type is used, and press Enter.

• Low-Speed Synchronous transfer

provides a Baud rate of 300 to 19.2 Kbps.

ENTER TITLE:..... =>

MM


Aastra – 2512-004 173


• High-Speed Synchronous transfer provides a Baud rate of 1200 to 57.6 Kbps.

6. Enter the data transfer speed. • Accept the default (A) by

pressing Enter if the terminal accepts Asynchronous transfer. (TYP)

• Type L if the terminal operates Low-Speed Synchronous and press Enter.

• Type H if the terminal operates High-Speed Synchronous and press Enter.

• A terminal type that is used for

asynchronous operation is not affected by protocol. Choose the default value for the next prompt.

• Bisynchronous (BISYNC) transmission is a protocol for synchronous transmission of binary codes.

• Synchronous Data Link Control (SDLC) is a bit oriented protocol for synchronous communications. A message may contain any collection or sequence of bits without being mistaken for a control character.

• High level Data Link Control (HDLC) is a standard bit oriented protocol developed by the International Standards Organization (ISO).

• Digital Data Communications Message Protocol (DDCMP) is used with DEC computers.

ENTER LINE TYPE: A=Asynchronous; L=Lo-Speed Sync; H=Hi-Speed Sync.....A =>

7. Select the transfer protocol of the terminal type you are creating: (PTC) • Accept the default (B) by

pressing Enter for Bisynchronous protocol.

• Type S and press Enter for SDLC protocol.

ENTER PROTOCOL: B=BISYNC;S=SDLC; H=HDLC; D=DDCMP....B =>

M M


174 Aastra– 2512-004


• Type H and press Enter for HDLC protocol.

• Type D and press Enter for DDCMO protocol.

8. Specify if the terminal is a modem. (MDM) • Type Y and press Enter if the

terminal is a modem in a modem pool.

• Accept the default (N) by pressing Enter if the terminal is not a modem.

Restricted Digital Data calls are used for user information having a restricted format (at least one bit out of every eight being set to one, such as inverted HDLC).

IS THIS A MODEM? Y=Yes or N=No.............N =>

9. Enter the type of user information accepted by the terminal. • Accept the default (U) by

pressing Enter for unknown users.

• Type M and press Enter if the user is a Modem when a modem call is established.

• Type R and press Enter for Restricted Digital Data calls.

• Type D and press Enter if the user is Unrestricted Digital Data when a data call is established.

• Type ? and press Enter for prompt help (as shown at right).

ENTER TYPE OF USER INFORMATION: U=Unknown; M=Modem; R=Rstr Data; D=Unrstr Data or ?..U => (TUI)

Select one of the following types of user information exchanged by the destination (used for outgoing calls only):

U = Unknown - either modem or unrestricted digital data call, depending on how call is placed

M = Modem Data - modem call established

R = Restricted Digital Data - data call established for user information having a restricted format (at least one bit out of every eight being set to one, such as inverted HDLC)

D = Unrestricted Digital Data - data call established for user information having any format

10. Type the code number that indicates the terminal BAUD speed desired as listed in the table, and press Enter. (SPD)

TERMINAL SPEED CODE or ?............AUTO BAUD =>

1 = 19200 2 = 19800 3 = N/A 4 = 38400 5 = N/A 6 = 300 7 = N/A 8 = 1200 9 = N/A 10 = N/A 11 = 2400 12 = N/A 13 = 4800 14 = N/A

MM


Aastra – 2512-004 175

Step Action ASP Display 15 = 9600 16 = 19200-ADJUST TO 19800

11. Type the code number that indicates the default terminal BAUD speed desired as listed in the table, and press Enter.

DEFAULT SPEED CODE or ?...................300 => ?

1 = 19200 2 = 19800 3 = N/A 4 = 38400 5 = N/A 6 = 300 7 = N/A 8 = 1200 9 = N/A 10 = N/A 11 = 2400 12 = N/A 13 = 4800 14 = N/A 15 = 9600 16 = 19200-ADJUST TO 19800

12. Identify the first choice Modem Pool Group. (MGF) • Type the Group Number to which

this Outside Terminal Type is directed, and press Enter.

• Accept the default (N) by pressing Enter if no group is assigned. (Inside Terminal Types use this option response.)

FIRST CHOICE MODEM GROUP NUMBER: N=None....N =>

13. Identify the second choice Modem Pool Group. (MG2) • Type the Group Number to which



SECOND CHOICE MODEM GROUP NUMBER: N=None...N =>

14. Identify the third choice Modem Pool Group. (MG3) • Type the Group Number to which



THIRD CHOICE MODEM GROUP NUMBER: N=None....N =>

15. Identify the Integrated Services Digital Network (ISDN) Data Rate Adaption Group. • Type the Group Number to which

ISDN DATA RATE ADAPTION GROUP #: N=None.....N =>

M M


176 Aastra– 2512-004

Step Action ASP Display this Outside Terminal Type is directed, and press Enter.

• Accept the default (N) by pressing Enter if no group is assigned.

16. Identify the data encoding format. (CDE) • Accept the default (A) by

pressing Enter for ASCII code. • Type E and press Enter for

EBCDIC code. • Type B and press Enter for

BAUDOT code.

ENCODING: A=ASCII; E=EBCDIC; B=BAUDOT......A =>

17. Identify the terminal type. (DTE) • Type Y and press Enter for Data

Terminal Equipment (DTE). • Accept the default (N) by

pressing <Enter> for Data Communication Equipment (DCE).

When setting up ASP terminals, choose Even Parity.

DATA TERMINAL EQUIPMENT (DTE)? Y=Yes; N=No N =>

18. Select the data parity. (PAR) • Accept the default (E) by

pressing Enter for even parity. • Type O and press Enter for odd

parity. • Type A and press Enter for mark

parity. • Type S and press Enter for space

parity. • Type N and press Enter if parity

is not applicable.

PARITY: E=Even; O=Odd; A=Auto; M=Mark; S=Space; N=None..........E =>

19. Enter the desired number of stop bits for the terminal type. Type 1, 2, or 1.5, and press Enter. (STB)

When setting up ASP terminals, use 8 bits.

STOP BITS: 1, 2, or 1.5....................1 =>

20. Enter the data length in bits for the terminal type. Type 5, 6, 7, or 8, and

DATA LENGTH IN BITS: 5, 6, 7, or 8..........7 =>

MM


Aastra – 2512-004 177

Step Action ASP Display press Enter. (Code DLG)

21. Press Enter once or twice without entering data to proceed the verify display.


test

** DATA TERMINAL TYPE DEFINITION NUMBER 13 08/08/01 02:35:53

TYP...LINE TYPE..........................ASYNCHRONOUS PTC...PROTOCOL...........................BISYNC MDM...MODEM..............................NO TUI...TYPE OF USER INFORMATION...........UNKNOWN SPD...TERMINAL SPEED.....................AUTO BAUD DEFAULT SPEED......................300 MGF...MODEM GROUP........................0 MG2...MODEM GROUP, SECOND CHOICE.........0 MG3...MODEM GROUP, THIRD CHOICE..........0 DRG...ISDN DATA RATE ADAPTION GROUP......NONE CDE...ENCODING...........................ASCII DTE...DATA TERMINAL EQUIPMENT............NO PAR...PARITY.............................EVEN STB...STOP BITS..........................1 DLG...DATA LENGTH........................7 DATA BITS DOES UPDATE VERIFY ? =>

22. Type Y and press Enter. DOES UPDATE VERIFY ? =>

Add a Data Line to a Port

Step Action Result




3. Type M and press Enter. UPDT MODE: C-Create M-Modify D-Delete........ => M

4. Select the switch location where the station is attached. • Type the port number in the


• Type the location number in the format shown at right, and press Enter.





ww = Cabinet x = Shelf yy = Card zz = Circuit or a location:

..=> L,aaa.....aaa Specify LOCATION, where aaa.....aaa = Location name

5. Type DLN and press Enter to assign a data line.

Specify ITE /STE Field to Modify or ?........ => DLN

M M


178 Aastra– 2512-004

Step Action Result

• Enter a number that is to be assigned to the data directory.

• The button template does not have to include a data button. If the data line does not receive data calls, a data directory number is not required

6. Enter a Data Directory Assignment number. • Type a number, and press

Enter. • Accept the default (N) by

pressing Enter if directory numbers are not used.

DATA DIRECTORY NUMBER: N=NO or ?............N =>

7. Type the user group number to which the Data Line is assigned, and press Enter.

Use the DFLT command to create a default set.

USER GROUP................................... =>

8. Identify the default data type. • Type the default set

identification number, and press Enter.

• Press Enter if a default set is not used.

ENTER DATA TYPE DEFAULT SET ID or ?.......... =>

9. Identify the data device as a Programmable Data Interface (PDI). • Accept the default (Y) by

pressing Enter for PDI data devices.

• Type N and press Enter for ADI and SDI data devices.

• The following prompt appears

if Y is selected in the previous step.

• See the Help (?) menu for a list of application names.

PROGRAMMABLE DEVICE: Y=YES; N=NO............Y =>

10. Type the appropriate loader application for the PDI, and press

APPLICATION NAME or ?....................ITAP => ?

MM


Aastra – 2512-004 179

Step Action Result Enter. *** APPLICATION NAMES ****

11. Type a valid Class of Service (CLOS) number for this data line, and press Enter.

CLASS OF SERVICE........................... => (CLOS)

12. Define the data line as associated with an Open Application Interface (OAI). • Type Y and press Enter for

OAI associated lines. • Accept the default (N) by

pressing Enter for lines not OAI associated.

The inside terminal type number is created with the TTYP command. This number may be obtained from the system designer or the field engineer and is used to define the data terminal protocol used internally to the switch (usually TTYP 99).

DATA LINE OAI ASSOCIATED: Y=YES; N=NO......N =>

13. Type the inside terminal type number and press Enter. (ITT)

The outside terminal type number is created with the TTYP command. The terminal type defines the protocol used when transmitted data must be converted to an analog signal for a modem. The terminal type also directs data to Modem Pool Groups. If no outside terminal type is required, use the same terminal type as the inside terminal type.

INSIDE TERMINAL TYPE NUMBER................. =>

14. Type the outside terminal type number and press Enter. (OTT)

Audio alerts are typically used with ITE equipment. Visual alerts are typically used with data equipment.

OUTSIDE TERMINAL TYPE NUMBER................ =>

15. Select an audio alert for receive CALL ALERTING: I=ITE; D=DATA EQUIPMENT.....I =>

M M


180 Aastra– 2512-004

Step Action Result data. (ALT) • Accept the default (I) by

pressing Enter for an audio alert (ringing) when receiving.

• Type D and press Enter for a visual (fluttering line indicator lamp) when receiving.

16. Select automatic or manual answer for the data line. (AAT) • Type Y and press Enter for

data lines automatically answered by the system.

• Accept the default (N) by pressing Enter for manually answered data lines.

AUTOMATIC ANSWER: Y=YES; N=NO..............N =>

17. Select the type of data connection release. (DRL) • Type Y and press Enter if the

data connection is released at the DTR (Data Terminal Ready) condition.

• Accept the default (N) by pressing Enter if the data connection is not released.

RELEASE ON DTR: Y=YES; N=NO................N =>

18. Accept the default (N) by pressing Enter if this query displays. This field has not been implemented. (CEC)

• The normal format is PointSpan

data format. • When using ISDN, the data

transmission must be changed in a Data Rate Adapter card from standard asynchronous protocol to V120 packet protocol used by the ISDN network.

ECHO DIALED CHARACTERS: Y=YES; N=NO........N =>

19. Select the trunk data format • Accept the default (N) by

pressing Enter for normal data format.

• Type V and press Enter for data transfer over an ISDN

DATA FORMAT N=NORMAL IBX; V=ISDN V.120 or ?.N =>?

MM


Aastra – 2512-004 181

Step Action Result Primary Rate Interface trunk.

A hot line is used if the Data Line is always terminated to a particular data facility.

20. Enter a Data Hot Line destination. (HOT) • Type the destination of up to 24

digits, and press Enter. • Accept the default (N) by

pressing Enter if a data hot line not is used.

HOT LINE: N=INACTIVE 24 digits MAX..........................N =>

21. Press Enter to end modifications. Specify ITE /STE Field to Modify or ?........ =>

22. Select the format of verification display. • Type N and press Enter to go

directly to the last option, DOES UPDATE VERIFY?.

• Type D and press Enter to display the detail of all options set in the previous questions.

• Type P and press Enter to display a picture of the keypad and directory name, port number, and location.

• Accept the default (B) by p pressing Enter to have both Detailed and Picture displayed.

VERIFY DISPLAY FORMAT: (N)one; (D)etailed; (P)icture; (B)oth...............B =>

23. Review the displayed text. *** VERIFY DISPLAY *** ***...STATION.......................PORT 01.3.07.19 ***...STATION EQUIPMENT TYPE.............ITE

BTP...BUTTON TEMPLATE NUMBER.............11 DND...DO NOT DISTURB ALLOWED.............YES DNS...DO NOT DISTURB STATUS..............INACTIVE VMC...InteMail MESSAGE DESK OPERATOR.....NO AND...ALPHANUMERIC DISPLAY...............NO AHL...AUTOMATIC HOLD.....................NO HRC...SWITCHHOOK RINGER CUTOFF...........NO LPR...LINE PRESELECT TYPE................PRIME & RING PLB...PRIME LINE PRESELECT BUTTON #......8 DLN...DATA LINE DIRECTORY NUMBER.........4511 SDV...PROGRAMMABLE DEVICE..........NO UGP...USER GROUP NUMBER............41 CLOS...CLASS OF SERVICE.............200 ITT...INSIDE TERMINAL TYPE.........4 OTT...OUTSIDE TERMINAL TYPE........4 ALT...CALL ALERTING................RING ITE AAT...AUTOMATIC ANSWER.............YES DRL...RELEASE ON DTR...............NO CEC...ECHO DIAL CHARACTERS.........NO DFF...DATA FORMAT..................NORMAL

M M


182 Aastra– 2512-004

Step Action Result HOT...HOT LINE DIRECTORY NUMBER....INACTIVE BUTTON TYPE LINE/FEATURE ID

1......FEATURE.........CALL TRANSFER 2......FEATURE.........CONFERENCE 3......FEATURE.........CALLBACK 4......FEATURE.........ABBREVIATED DIAL 5......FEATURE.........CALL PARK 6......DATA LINE.......DRN:4511 - UGP:50 7......FEATURE.........HOLD 8..PL..VOICE LINE......DRN:2304 - UGP:50..RING PRESEL Mail-MSG 9......VOICE LINE......DRN:2324 - UGP:50..RING PRESEL 10.....FEATURE.........CALL FORWARD 11.....FEATURE.........CALL PICKUP 12.....FEATURE.........InteMail - DIRECT ACCESS DOES UPDATE VERIFY ? =>

24. Type Y to save the information in the database.


Restricted Access Direct Inward Dial (DID) Lines Restricted access Direct Inward Dial (DID) lines limit calls from limit calls from DID trunk ports to a voice line. Restrictions are specified with Time of Day (TOD), Day of Week (DOW), and Day of Year (DOY) tables. A common use of this line is to restrict phones from receiving calls at specific times of the day, a particular day of the week, or a day of the year. Examples might be a patient room in a hospital during late night hours or college dorm rooms during summer months.

Time of Day (TOD) Restrictions Time of Day (TOD) restricted lines are commonly used to limit incoming calls during lunch periods and after normal business hours. The system allows up to 24 TOD tables per line.

Day of Week (DOW) Restrictions Day of Week (DOW) restricted lines are commonly used to limit incoming calls on Particular days when an office is closed such as Saturday or Sunday. The system allows up to nine DOW tables per line.

Day of Year (DOY) Restrictions Day of Year (DOY) restricted lines are commonly used to limit incoming calls on Holidays. The system allows up to 14 TOD tables per line.

Database Requirements for Restricted Lines To activate restricted access lines you must create or modify commands in the order outlined in the table below.

MM


Aastra – 2512-004 183


ATTR

TOD – Time of Day Time of Day Restriction

Create up to 8 different options for TOD restrictions.

DOW – Day of Week Day of Week Restrictions

Create up to 8 different options for DOW restrictions.

DOY – Day of Year Day of Year Restrictions

Create up to 8 different options for DOY restrictions.

CLOS

Call Restriction Option N=None A=Attendant T=TOD

Select “T” to enable Time of Day Restrictions.

Restriction Treatment V=Valid I=Invalid TOD DOW DOY

Select the restriction treatment used from TOD, DOW, DOY.

CRT Entry Number Numeric (1-24) Enter the number of the TOD, DOW, or DOY table you want to use. See ATTR.

GRPS

TCT - Station Call Restriction Enabled

Yes/No Must be set to Yes on the DID trunks.

LINE

TOD - Time of Day Forward Destination Number

Must be implemented with a forward destination when the TOD Invalid restriction is in place.

Create a Time of Day (TOD) Table

Step Action Result

1. Type ATTR and press Enter. SELECT COMMAND => ATTR


3. Type C and press Enter. SELECT MODE: C=CREATE;M=MODIFY;D=DELETE...... => C

4. Type TOD and press Enter. ATTR TREATMENT: DOY,DOW,TOD or ?............. => TOD

5. Type an identification number and press Enter.

ATTR ENTRY NUMBER: 1-24 .................... =>

6. Select the type of force treatment. • Type V and press Enter if

calls are not restricted.

FORCE TREATMENT or ?......................... => ?

ENTER FORCE TREATMENT IN ONE OF THE FOLLOWING WAYS >(V,I or N)

WHERE THE FORCE TREATMENT WILL BE FORCED TO EITHER V=VALID;

M M


184 Aastra– 2512-004

Step Action Result

• Type I and press Enter if calls are to be restricted and sent to the forward destination.

• Type N and press Enter if calls will use the timing tables.

• Type ? and press Enter to see force treatment choices.

Type the time of day in military format (i.e. 24 hour clock). The start of each day is midnight (00:00).

I=INVALID; N=NO FORCE.

7. Enter the time of day in the format shown at right. • Type the time, followed by V

or I and press Enter. • Type ? and press Enter to see

treatment format (as shown at right).

TIME OF DAY TREATMENT or ? or RETURN=END..... => ?

ENTER TIME OF DAY TREATMENT IN THE FOLLOWING WAYS IF IN CREATE MODE

...>hh:mm,(V or I)

WHERE hh:mm IS THE TIME.

THE 2ND PARAMETER IS FOR THE TYPE:

V=VALID; I=INVALID.

IF IN MODIFY ADD MODE

...>A,hh:mm,(V or I)

WHERE A IS FOR ADD MODE.

IF IN MODIFY REMOVE MODE

...>R,n

WHERE R IS REMOVE.

WHERE n IS THE TIME PERIOD TO BE REMOVED.

8. Repeat step 8 until the TOD treatment table is complete.

TIME OF DAY TREATMENT or ? or RETURN=END..... => 00:00,i TIME OF DAY TREATMENT or ? or RETURN=END..... => 08:00,v TIME OF DAY TREATMENT or ? or RETURN=END..... => 12:00,i TIME OF DAY TREATMENT or ? or RETURN=END..... => 13:00,v TIME OF DAY TREATMENT or ? or RETURN=END..... => 19:00,i

9. Press Enter once or twice without entering data to proceed to the verify display.

** VERIFY DISPLAY

** AUTH/TRUNK TIME RESTRICTION DISPLAY=


TABLE CHANGE PERFORMED

MM


Aastra – 2512-004 185

Create a Day of Week (DOW) Table

Step Action Result




4. Type DOW and press Enter. ATTR TREATMENT: DOY,DOW,TOD or ?............. => DOW


FORCE TO DAY OF WEEK entries require predefined TOD tables. FORCE TO SPECIAL TREATMENT allows selection a particular restriction for an entire day: • V eliminates call

restrictions. • I restricts all calls which are

sent to the forward destination.

• N selects TOD tables.

ATTR ENTRY NUMBER: 1-9 ..................... =>

6. Type N and press Enter. FORCE TREATMENT or ?......................... => ?

ENTER FORCE TREATMENT IN THE FOLLOWING WAYS FORCE TO DAY OF WEEK

...>(MON or TUE...) ENTER FIRST THREE CHARACTERS

OF THE DAY OF WEEK TO BE FORCED TO. FORCE TO SPECIAL TREATMENT

...>(I,V,N or TOD),(n) WHERE THE 1ST PARAMETER IS THE TYPE; I=INVALID; V=VALID; N=NO FORCE; TOD=TIME OF DAY.

IF TOD IS ENTERED A 3RD PARAMETER IS REQUIRED, WHERE n IS THE ENTRY NUMBER IN TIME OF DAY.

7. Enter each day and the treatment required in the format shown at right, and press Enter.

DAY OF WEEK TREATMENT or ? or RETURN=END..... => ? DAY OF WEEK TREATMENT MAY BE ENTERED AS FOLLOWS:

...>(MON or TUE..),(V,I or TOD),(n)

WHERE PARAMETER ONE IS THE FIRST 3 CHARACTERS IN THE DAY TO BE CREATED/MODIFIED.THE 2ND PARAMETER IS THE TYPE: V=VALID; I=INVALID;

TOD=TIME OF DAY.IF TOD IS SELECTED THAN A 3RD PARAMETER IS NEEDED,WHERE n IS THE ENTRY NUMBER FOR TIME OF DAY.

...>RETURN

M M


186 Aastra– 2512-004

Step Action Result NO DAY WILL BE CHANGED FROM ITS CURRENT TYPE.

IN CREATE MODE ALL DAYS WILL HAVE A VALID TYPE.

8. Repeat step 8 until the DOY treatment table is complete.

DAY OF WEEK TREATMENT or ? or RETURN=END..... => MON,TOD,1 DAY OF WEEK TREATMENT or ? or RETURN=END..... => TUE,TOD,1 DAY OF WEEK TREATMENT or ? or RETURN=END..... => WED,TOD,1 DAY OF WEEK TREATMENT or ? or RETURN=END..... => THU,TOD,1 DAY OF WEEK TREATMENT or ? or RETURN=END..... => FRI,TOD,1 DAY OF WEEK TREATMENT or ? or RETURN=END..... => SAT,i DAY OF WEEK TREATMENT or ? or RETURN=END..... => SUN,i DAY OF WEEK TREATMENT or ? or RETURN=END..... =>


** VERIFY DISPLAY

** AUTH/TRUNK TIME RESTRICTION DISPLAY



Create a Day of Year (DOY) Table

Step Action Result




4. Type DOY and press Enter. ATTR TREATMENT: DOY,DOW,TOD or ?............. => DOW


You can specify two treatments as described in the next two steps or you can “force” all of the treated dates to the single treatment specified in step 8.

The call restrictions are: • V eliminates call

restrictions. • I restricts all calls and

sends them to the forward destination.

• N selects the two treatments created in the previous steps. DOW and TOD

ATTR ENTRY NUMBER: 1-14 ..................... =>

MM


Aastra – 2512-004 187

Step Action Result must be predefined.

6. Select a treatment type. Type the appropriate letter(s), and press Enter.

TREATMENT ONE or ?........................... => ? TREATMENTS CAN BE ENTERED AS FOLLOWS:

...>(V,I,DOW,TOD),(n)

WHERE V=VALID; I=INVALID; DOW=DAY OF WEEK; TOD=TIME OF DAY.

IF DOW OR TOD ARE ENTERED, A SECOND PARAMETER IS NEEDED. WHERE n IS THE ENTRY NUMBER.

7. Select a treatment type. Type the appropriate letter(s), and press Enter.

Force Treatment selects a particular restriction for all of the day(s) selected for treatment. If treatments were specified in steps 6 and 7, select N in the following step.

TREATMENT TWO or ?........................... =>

8. Type N and press Enter. FORCE TREATMENT or ?......................... => ?

FORCE TREATMENT CAN BE ENTERED AS FOLLOWS

...>(N,TR1,TR2,V,I,DOW,TOD),(n)

N - NO FORCE TR1 - TREATMENT ONE TR2 - TREATMENT TWO V – VALID I – INVALID DOW - DAY OF WEEK TOD - TIME OF DAY

IF DOW OR TOD ARE ENTERED, A SECOND PARAMETER IS NEEDED,WHERE n IS THE ENTRY NUMBER.

9. Select a date treatment. Type the appropriate treatment and the date(s) it applies to, and press Enter.

** CREATE VERIFY DISPLAY **

TR1...TREATMENT ONE......................DAY OF WEEK TR1...TREATMENT ONE ENTRY NUMBER.........2 TR2...TREATMENT TWO......................TIME OF DAY TR2...TREATMENT TWO ENTRY NUMBER.........2 FRC...FORCE TREATMENT....................NO FORCE DATE TREATMENT or ? or Return=END............ => ?

ENTER DATE TREATMENT IN ONE OF THE FOLLOWING WAYS:

...>n,mm/dd,mm/dd....

...>n,mm/dd-mm/dd,mm/dd-mm/dd....

...>n,mm/dd,mm/dd,mm/dd-mm/dd....

WHERE n IS TREATMENT ONE OR TWO AND mm/dd IS THE DATE.A SINGLE DATE OR A RANGE OF DATES CAN BE SET AT ONE TIME.

THESE METHODS CAN BE ENTERED ON THE SAME LINE, AS MANY AS DESIRED.

10. Type the next treatment and the date(s) it applies to, and press

DATE TREATMENT or ? or Return=END............ => ?

M M


188 Aastra– 2512-004

Step Action Result Enter.


** VERIFY DISPLAY

** AUTH/TRUNK TIME RESTRICTION DISPLAY



Create Restricted Access in CLOS Class of Service (CLOS) for the line must assign the TOD, DOW, or DOY table to be used. If you decide to modify a CLOS, access the Call Restriction Option (CRO) field. In the following partial example, a CLOS is created with the appropriate setting for allowing Time Restriction. The system checks for the entry number you to specify. Your response is not accepted unless the entry exists in the database.

To modify an existing CLOS:

Step Action Result

1. Type CLOS and press Enter. SELECT COMMAND => CLOS



4. Type the number of the Class of Service being modified, and press Enter.

SPECIFY CLASS OF SERVICE #:................. =>

5. Type CRO and press Enter. SPECIFY CLOS Field To Modify or - or ?...... => CRO

6. Type TOD and press Enter. CALL RESTRICTION OPT:

N=NONE; A=ATTENDANT; T=TOD..................N => T

7. Type TOD, DOY, or DOW, and press Enter.

RESTRICTION TREATMNT:V,I,DOY,DOW,TOD or ?...V => DOW

8. When you have finished your modifications, press Enter twice to proceed to the update verify prompt.


9. Verify the CLOS entries. • Type Y and press Enter to save

CLOS information in the database.



MM


Aastra – 2512-004 189

Add Time Restriction for the DID Trunk Group The TCT field of the GRPS command determines whether a trunk group has the restriction capability enabled. In the following example, a DID Trunk Group is modified to use the station call restriction. SELECT COMMAND => grps SELECT MODE: PRINT, DISPLAY, UPDATE, TITLES, SEARCH => u UPDT: C-Create,M-Modify,D-Delete,P-Copy...... => m SPECIFY GROUP NUMBER:........................ => 112 GROUP TYPE.......TRUNK

Specify TGRP Field to Modify or - or ?....... => ?

- ...ALL 8NC...800 NUMBER TO SPEED CONV AAU...APPEND AUTH TO CDR ACC...TGRP AUTH CODE AFI...AUTH CODE FAIL INDICATION APA...TRUNK GROUP AUTH AUT...TRUNK GRP AUTHORIZATION DIG. BGP...ANNOUNCEMENT BROADCAST TGRP BTG...BROADCAST TRUNK GROUP CPT...CALL PROGRESS TONES CWR...CALLWAIT RINGBACK DCT...DATA CALLS ALLOWED DET...DISTANCE END RELEASE TIME DGN...DIAGNOSTIC PARAMETERS FTH...FAILURE THRESHOLD GAC...GROUP AUTH REQUIRED ICM...INCOMING CALL MESSAGE # IDF...DESTINATION ITY...InteMail TYPE LVL...PREDEFINED LEVEL CODES MCL...MULTIPLE CALLS ALLOWED MOD...INCOMING DIAL MODE NDC...NO. OF DIGITS TO COLLECT NDN...NIGHT ANSWER DIRECTORY NDS...DISCONNECT SUPERVISION PFX...PREFIX DIGITS PVA...PRE-VALIDATE AUTH RAA...RESET AUTH ALLOWED RAC...REUSE AUTH FOR MULT CALLS RDT...RESEIZE DELAY TIME RGF...MF/DTMF RECEIVER GROUP RIO...RESPONSE TO INCOMING CALLS RSC...RESET COUNT SAC...SYSTEM ACCESS CODE STY...INCOMING CALL ORIG TYPE SWM...SEIZE WHEN MOS TCH...TRUNK CALL HANDLING TCI...TRUNK CLASS IDENTIFICATION TCT...STATION CALL RESTR. ENABLED TNE...TONE TABLE # TOO...TIMEOUT TO ATTENDENT TTL...TITLE IDENTIFIER UCT...TRUNK UPDATE CDR ON TRANSFER UGP...USER GROUP # VA8...VALIDATE ANI FOR 800 CALL VAC...VALIDATE TRUNK GROUP AUTH VTT...VOICE TRUNK TRANSFER WIT...WINK TIME WWT...WINK WAIT TIME

Specify TGRP Field to Modify or - or ?....... => tct STATION CALL RESTRICTION ENABLED: Y/N.......N => y

Specify TGRP Field to Modify or - or ?....... =>


DID TRUNK CONNECTED FROM LOOPSTART

***...TRUNK GROUP........................112 PORT ASSIGNMENT REPORT 1.3.02.01

DOES UPDATE VERIFY ? => Y

Modify the DID Trunk Group

Step Action Result

1. Type GRPS and press Enter. SELECT COMMAND => GRPS



4. Type the number of the group being modified, and press Enter.

SPECIFY GROUP NUMBER.......................... =>

M M


190 Aastra– 2512-004

Step Action Result

5. Type TCT and press Enter. Specify TGRP Field to Modify or - or ?....... => TCT

6. Type Y and press Enter. STATION CALL RESTRICTION ENABLED: Y/N.......N => y

7. Press Enter twice to proceed to the update verify prompt.


8. Verify the TCT entry. • Type Y and press Enter to

save TCT information in the database.



Activate Call Restriction Use LINE to assign a Class of Service (CLOS) that has Time of Day (TOD) restriction enabled. The TOD parameter of LINE must be set to Yes to allow restriction. A Time of Day Call Restriction Forward destination number must be specified in the CFR field of LINE for proper time restriction operation.

To modify an existing DID trunk group:

Step Action Result

1. Type LINE, and press Enter. SELECT COMMAND => LINE

2. Type U, and press <Enter>. SELECT MODE:PRINT,DISPLAY,UPDATE,SEARCH,TITLES => U


4. Type the number of the group being modified, and press Enter.

DIRECTORY NUMBER or?.......................... =>


USER GROUP.................................... =>

6. Type CLOS and press Enter. SPECIFY VLIN Field To Modify or - or ?...... => CLOS

7. Type the class of service number, and press Enter.

CLASS OF SERVICE...........................100 =>

8. Type TOD and press Enter. SPECIFY VLIN Field To Modify or - or ?...... => TOD

9. Enter a forwarding number. • Type the number, and press

Enter. • Type N and press Enter to

disable call forwarding.

TOD CALL RESTRICTIONS FORWARD: N=INACTIVE

24 digits MAX...........................N =>

10. Press Enter twice to proceed to the update verify prompt.

SPECIFY VLIN Field To Modify or - or ?...... =>

11. Verify the LINE entries. DOES UPDATE VERIFY? =>

MM


Aastra – 2512-004 191

Step Action Result

• Type Y and press Enter to save LINE information in the database.


M M


192 Aastra– 2512-004

MM


Aastra – 2512-004 193

Chapter 12 Default Command

Overview The FONE command displays the following prompt that accepts a “default set”, which is default template for a particular phone type. There are also data default sets for PDI’s and ADIs. ENTER A PHONE TYPE DEFAULT SET ID................................=>

If you have already created a default set, you can enter the ID (ITE4, ITE, etc.) at this prompt to automatically build the phone like the default phone.

Default sets are created using the DFLT command.

View Default Template Titles

Step Action Display

1. Type DFLT and press Enter. SELECT COMMAND => DFLT

2. Type T and press Enter. SELECT MODE: PRINT, DISPLAY, UPDATE, SEARCH, TITLES => T

3. The default titles display. SELECT COMMAND => DFLT

SELECT MODE: PRINT, DISPLAY, UPDATE, TITLES => T

***** PHONE TYPE DEFAULT SETS *****

ITE4..........ITE4 OPX...........opx STE...........ste

***** DATA TYPE DEFAULT SETS *****

ADI...........adi PDI...........pdi-1000s aard

SELECT MODE: PRINT, DISPLAY, UPDATE, TITLES =>

Display the Values of a Default Template

Step Action Display


2. Type D and press Enter. SELECT MODE: PRINT, DISPLAY, UPDATE, SEARCH, TITLES => D

3. Type ? and press Enter to see the default sets.

SPECIFY DEFAULT SET ID or - or ?............. => ?

-.............ALL ITE4..........ITE4 OPX...........opx STE...........ste ADI...........adi

M M

Chapter 12, Default Command

194 Aastra– 2512-004

Step Action Display PDI...........pdi-1000s aard

SPECIFY DEFAULT SET ID or - or ?............. =>

4. Type the default set ID and press Enter.

SPECIFY DEFAULT SET ID or - or ?............. =>

5. The default values display.

Default Values Display Example The following is an example of a default values display: SELECT COMMAND => DFLT

SELECT MODE: PRINT, DISPLAY, UPDATE, TITLES => T

***** PHONE TYPE DEFAULT SETS *****

ITE4..........ITE4 OPX...........opx STE...........ste

***** DATA TYPE DEFAULT SETS *****

ADI...........adi PDI...........pdi-1000s aard

SELECT MODE: PRINT, DISPLAY, UPDATE, TITLES => D

SPECIFY DEFAULT SET ID or - or ?............. => ?

-.............ALL ITE4..........ITE4 OPX...........opx STE...........ste ADI...........adi PDI...........pdi-1000s aard

SPECIFY DEFAULT SET ID or - or ?............. => -

ITE4

** PHONE TYPE DEFAULT SET DEFINITION: ITE4 08/18/01 05:04:23

***...STATION EQUIPMENT TYPE.............ITE4 BTP...BUTTON TEMPLATE NUMBER.............4 OAM...OAI ASSOCIATED MEMBER..............NO DND...DO NOT DISTURB ALLOWED.............YES VMC...InteMail MESSAGE DESK OPERATOR.....YES

ste

** PHONE TYPE DEFAULT SET DEFINITION: STE 08/18/01 05:04:23

***...STATION EQUIPMENT TYPE.............STE OAM...OAI ASSOCIATED MEMBER..............NO DND...DO NOT DISTURB ALLOWED.............YES VMC...InteMail MESSAGE DESK OPERATOR.....NO ANS...ANSWER MACHINE ATTACHED............NO DLT...DIAL TYPE..........................DTMF HKF...HOOK FLASH ENABLED.................YES

adi

RETURN CONTINUES DISPLAY..... =>

MM


Aastra – 2512-004 195

** DATA TYPE DEFAULT SET DEFINITION: ADI 08/18/01 05:04:25

SDV...PROGRAMMABLE DEVICE................NO OAM..OAI ASSOCIATED MEMBER...............NO ITT...INSIDE TERMINAL TYPE...............99 OTT...OUTSIDE TERMINAL TYPE..............99 ALT...CALL ALERTING......................RING ITE AAT...AUTOMATIC ANSWER...................YES DTR...RELEASE ON DTR.....................YES CEC...ECHO DIAL CHARACTERS...............NO CNC...NATIONAL CALLING PARTY # CONTENTS..NONE HOT...HOTLINE............................NO DFF...DATA FORMAT........................NORMAL IBX

pdi-1000s aard

** DATA TYPE DEFAULT SET DEFINITION: PDI 08/18/01 05:04:25

SDV...PROGRAMMABLE DEVICE................YES PDA...APPLICATION NAME...................AARD - PDI-1000S MODEM EMULATIONDCE OAM..OAI ASSOCIATED MEMBER...............NO ITT...INSIDE TERMINAL TYPE...............99 OTT...OUTSIDE TERMINAL TYPE..............99 ALT...CALL ALERTING......................RING ITE AAT...AUTOMATIC ANSWER...................YES DTR...RELEASE ON DTR.....................YES CEC...ECHO DIAL CHARACTERS...............NO CNC...NATIONAL CALLING PARTY # CONTENTS..NONE HOT...HOTLINE............................NO DFF...DATA FORMAT........................NORMAL IBX

opx

** PHONE TYPE DEFAULT SET DEFINITION: OPX 08/18/01 05:04:26

***...STATION EQUIPMENT TYPE.............STE OAM...OAI ASSOCIATED MEMBER..............NO DND...DO NOT DISTURB ALLOWED.............YES VMC...InteMail MESSAGE DESK OPERATOR.....NO ANS...ANSWER MACHINE ATTACHED............NO DLT...DIAL TYPE..........................DTMF HKF...HOOK FLASH ENABLED.................YES LPT...LOSS PLAN TYPE.....................ACO

Create a Default Template for an ITE or STE Station

Step Action Display


2. Type U and press Enter. SELECT MODE: PRINT, DISPLAY, UPDATE, SEARCH, TITLES => U

3. Type C and press Enter. SELECT MODE: C-Create; M-Modify; D-Delete.... => C

4. Enter a default set type. • Type P and press Enter for a

telephone. • Type D and press Enter for a data

device.

SPECIFY DEFAULT SET TYPE: (P)hone or (D)ata.. => P

5. Type a default set identification, and press Enter.

SPECIFY DEFAULT SET ID:..................... =>

6. Type a default title of up to 24 characters, and press Enter.

ENTER TITLE:.....______________________________ =>

M M


196 Aastra– 2512-004

Step Action Display

7. Type an equipment type, and press Enter.

SPECIFY STATION EQUIPMENT TYPE: or ?......... => ?

STE....STANDARD TELEPHONE EQUIPMENT OPX....OFF PREMISES EQUIPMENT ITE....STANDARD INTEGRATED TELEPHONE EQUIPMENT ITE4...SINGLE LINE ITE ITES...ITE WITH SPEAKER ITEAP..ITE APPLICATION PROGRAMMABLE ITSP...ITE SMART PHONE TURT...TURRET PHONE BRI1...BRI WITH 1 CHANNEL BRI2...BRI WITH 2 CHANNELS

8. Select the feature monitored by the Open Application Interface (OAI). • Type Y and press Enter for OAI

monitoring. • Accept the default (N) by pressing

Enter for no OAI monitoring.


9. Select the do not disturb feature. • Accept the default (Y) by pressing

Enter to allow the feature. • Type N and press Enter to deny it.

DO NOT DISTURB ALLOWED: Y=YES; N=NO.........Y =>

10. Identify the CLOS user as the Voicemail Message Desk Operator. • Type Y and press Enter if the user

is the operator. • Accept the default (N) by pressing

Enter if the user is not an operator.

InteMail MSG DESK OPERATOR: Y=YES; N=NO.....N =>

11. Identify if an answering machine is attached to the station. • Type Y and press Enter if an

answering machine is used. • Accept the default (N) by pressing

Enter if an answering machine is not used.

ANSWER MACHINE ATTACHED: Y=YES; N=NO........N =>

12. Identify the station dial type. • Type R and press Enter for Rotary. • Press Enter to accept the DTMF

default (D).

DIAL TYPE: D=DTMF, R=ROTARY.................D =>

13. Identify if hook flash is used at the station. • Type N and press Enter if hook

flash is not used. • Accept the default (Y) by pressing

Enter if hook flash is used.

HOOK FLASH ENABLED: Y=YES; N=NO.............Y =>


MM


Aastra – 2512-004 197

Step Action Display



all responses.


Modify a Default Template

Step Action Display


2. Type U and press Enter. SELECT MODE: PRINT, DISPLAY, UPDATE, SEARCH, TITLES => U

3. Type M and press Enter. SELECT MODE: C-Create; M-Modify; D-Delete.... => M

4. Type the default identification title, and press Enter.

SPECIFY DEFAULT SET ID:...................... => STE

5. Type the default field acronym, and press Enter.

Specify DFLT SET Field to Modify or - or ?... => ?

- ...ALL ANS...ANSWER MACHINE ATTACHED DLT...DIAL TYPE DND...DO NOT DISTURB ALLOWED HKF...HOOK FLASH ENABLED OAM...OAI ASSOCIATED MEMBER TTL...TITLE FOR DEFAULT SET VMC...VOICE MESSAGE DESK OPERATOR

6. Type the value for each field, and press Enter.

7. Repeat steps 6 and 7 for each field change.

8. Press Enter. Specify DFLT SET Field to Modify or – or ?... =>



information in the database. • Type N and press Enter to



M M


198 Aastra– 2512-004

STE Default (DFLT) Parameters Prompts for the following fields display when STE is entered as the phone type for the Default (DFLT) command.

Table 30. STE Default (DFLT) Parameters

Field Description Requirement

OAM OAI Associated Member Enter Y if you have an Open Application Interface (OAI). DND Do Not Disturb Allowed Enter Y if the Do Not Disturb feature is allowed for this

device. VMC Voicemail Message Desk

Operator Enter Y if this device is assigned as a message desk operator.

ANS Answer Machine Attached Enter Y if this device is making use of and is attached to an answering machine.

DLT Dial Type Establish the type of STE phone this device is by selecting: • D for Dual Tone Multi-Frequency (DTMF) • R for Rotary

HKF Hook Flash Enabled Enter Y if this phone requires that the TAP button or Hook Flash (switchhook) be used to restore dial tone (e.g., conference, transfer, leaving a callback, hold, call park, etc.). Hook Flash must be enabled to allow the feature to work, regardless of the FTC parameter setting under the SPAR updatable parameters.

Off-Premise Extension (OPX) Default (DFLT) Parameters Prompts for the following fields display when OPX is entered as the phone type for the DFLT command.

Table 31. STE Off-Premise Extension (OPX) Default Parameters


OAM OAI Associated Member If you have purchased the Open Application Interfaces (OAI) option, enter Y to make this device a member.

DND Do Not Disturb Allowed Enter Y if the Do Not Disturb feature is allowed for this device. VMC Voicemail Message Desk

Operator Enter Y if this device is assigned as a message desk operator.

ANS Answer Machine Attached Enter Y if this device is making use of and is attached to an answering machine.

DLT Dial Type Establish the type of STE phone this device is by selecting: • D for Dual Tone Multi-Frequency (DTMF) • R for Rotary

MM


Aastra – 2512-004 199


HKF Hook Flash Enabled Enter Y if this phone has been equipped for use with the Hook Flash capability.

LPT Loss Plan Type Loss plans are created with the PAD command. Enter a three-digit code which signifies the type of loss plan this device is to use as: • ACO for Analog CO Trunk • ATO for Analog Toll Office Trunk • ATT for Analog Tie Trunk • DCO for Digital CO Trunk • DTO for Digital Toll Office Trunk • DTT for Digital Tie Trunk • ONS for On-Premise Station • OPO for OPX 0 Loss Plan Type • OP1 for OPX 1 Loss Plan Type • OP2 for OPX 2 Loss Plan Type • OP3 for OPX 3 Loss Plan Type • OPS for Off-Premise Station • TKO for Trunk 0 Loss Plan Type • TK1 for Trunk 1 Loss Plan Type • TK2 for Trunk 2 Loss Plan Type • TK3 for Trunk 3 Loss Plan Type

ITE Default (DFLT) Parameters Prompts for the following fields display when ITE is entered as the phone type for the DFLT command.

Table 32. ITE Default Parameters


BTN Button Template Number Enter 0 to list the index of the predefined Button Template Numbers (created under BTNS).


DND Do Not Disturb Allowed Enter Y if the Do Not Disturb feature is allowed for this device.

VMC Voicemail Message Desk Operator Enter Y if this device is assigned as a message desk operator.

AND Alpha Numeric Display

C is the only available choice at this

Enter the type of display this device is to have. • N for No display • E for LED (Light Emitting Diode) display • C for LCD (Liquid Crystal) display

M M


200 Aastra– 2512-004

Field Description Requirement time.

ADP Destination Display Preferred Enter Y if this device is to display the destination name in whole and the originator's name truncated when necessary. Enter N for the opposite effect.

AHL Automatic Hold Enter Y if pressing the select button for another line places the current line on hold.

HRC Switchhook Ringer Cutoff Enter Y if a call that comes in on a second line makes the line light to flash.

LPR Line Preselect Type To determine which line of a multi-line phone is the prime line at a given time, enter: • P if prime line is always selected while phone is on-

hook. • R if the first ringing line is selected when going off-

hook to answer a call. • I if the first idle line is selected when going off-hook to

place a call. • L if the last line used remains the selected line after the

phone goes on-hook. • N if the user must press a line select to place or to

answer a call. • PR if prime line is always selected while phone is on-

hook. • RI if the first ringing line is selected when going off-

hook to answer a call and the first idle line is selected when going off-hook to place a call.

PLB Prime Line Preselect Button If P or PR was entered for the previous prompt, enter the button number to use as the prime line preselect option on this device.

ITE-4 Default (DFLT) Parameters Prompts for the following fields display when ITE-4 is entered as the phone type for the DFLT command.

Table 33. ITE4 Default Parameters


BTP Button Template Number Enter 0 to list the index of the predefined Button Template Numbers (created under BTNS).


DND Do Not Disturb Allowed Enter Y if the Do Not Disturb feature is allowed for this device. VMC Voicemail Message Desk Enter Y if this device is assigned as a message desk operator.

MM


Aastra – 2512-004 201

Field Description Requirement Operator

ITE-S Default (DFLT) Parameters Prompts for the following fields display when ITE-S is entered as the phone type for the DFLT command.

Table 34 ITE-S Default Paramters




DND Do Not Disturb Allowed Enter Y if the Do Not Disturb feature is allowed for this device.

VMC Voicemail Message Desk Operator Enter Y if this device is assigned as a message desk operator.


C is the only available choice at this time.

Enter the type of display this device is to have. • N for No display • E for LED (Light Emitting Diode) display • C for LCD (Liquid Crystal) display


AHL Automatic Hold Enter Y if pressing the select button for another line places the current line on hold.

HRC Switchhook Ringer Cutoff Enter Y if a call that comes in on a second line makes the line light to flash.

LPR Line Preselect Type To determine which line of a multi-line phone is the prime line at a given time, enter: • P if prime line is always selected while phone is on-

hook. • R if the first ringing line is selected when going off-

hook to answer a call. • I if the first idle line is selected when going off-hook to

place a call. • L if the last line used remains the selected line after the

phone goes on-hook. • N if the user must press a line-select to place or to

answer a call.

M M


202 Aastra– 2512-004


• PR if prime line is always selected while phone is on-hook.

• RI if the first ringing line is selected when going off-hook to answer a call and the first idle line is selected when going off-hook to place a call.

PLB Prime Line Preselect Button If P or PR was entered for the previous prompt, enter the button number to use as the prime line pre-select option on this device.

MM


Aastra – 2512-004 203

Chapter 13 Move Stations

Overview The Station Move Feature allows you to move a port on the Pointspan system. If there is already a cross-connect to the new location, you do not have to physically rewire the port.

Station Move This procedure is accomplished in the software using the CARD command. The command also takes the old port out of service, brings the new port into service, and logs the move for tracing purposes.

Ports can be moved from an existing to an unassigned port, or from an existing to another existing port. When you begin this move, first be sure that the "from" and the "to" port types are the same type.

Port types that can be moved are: ITE, ITE4, ITES, ATDC, DPRT, TRNK (except T1, IXL, and PRI types), STE, ANUN, RCVR, TAAS, and ITEAP.

The following CARD parameters can be set to move a port from one station to another.

Step Action Result

1. At the ASP Select Command prompt: Type CARD and press Enter.

2. Type M and press Enter.

3. Enter the existing port number which you want to move and the port number destination separated by a comma. (e.g., 1.2.10.1,1.2.10.10)

The "From" port type is displayed. (e.g., = STNE). The system displays the port number(s) in service and asks if you want to force it (them) out.

4. Enter Y for Yes. The system displays that the MOS of the requested service port is as requested.

5. Enter Y to verify. The system displays that the "To" ports were successfully put in service.

M M

Chapter 13, Move Stations

204 Aastra– 2512-004

MM


Aastra – 2512-004 205

Chapter 14 Delete Stations and Lines

Overview You must determine if you are deleting the line or lines (directory numbers) associated with the station or if you are only deleting the station itself.

Deleting the station does not automatically delete the line. The system does not allow you to delete a line from the FONE command if it is linked to another station. When deleting a station using FONE, you are asked to delete the voice lines only if the lines on this station are not assigned to any other stations.

If you want to delete any lines, you use the DIRN/Search command to search for all database references to the directory number(s) being deleted. If the search returns any references to the directory number, these references should be deleted or modified prior to deleting any lines. For example, do not delete a directory number defined as the Call Forwarding destination for another line. When deleting the line, the system does not check for other database references, and these must be identified through the DIRN/Search command.

When deleting lines from the FONE command, the system does not remove any directory information from the Name/Number Directory. Individual voice lines can also be deleted from the LINE command. When deleting directory numbers with the LINE command, the system removes all appearances of this directory number from each station device where the line is assigned. The LINE command also prompts you to delete any Name/Number Directory information from the Directory Look-up System.

Delete a Station Port Once the station port has been placed out of service, the FONE command is used to delete the station.

Use Maintenance Out-of-Service (MOS) The Maintenance-Out-of-Service (MOS) command provides:

• A tool for placing individual ports or a range of ports in-service and out-of-service. • A visual display of ports and their condition.

The MOS command also allows switch ports to be queried and altered by Group for those port types placed into switch groups. For example, trunk ports are normally placed into trunk groups within the system. An entire trunk group can be placed into/out of service as a group by specifying the group number.

User verification is not requested prior to execution; however, the command can be aborted prior to completion.

A steady ring-back tone is heard in the handset of an out-of-service telephone.

M M

Chapter 14, Delete Stations and Lines

206 Aastra– 2512-004

Service States

The following service states are available:

Table 35. MOS Service States

Service State Description

(I)N SERVICE Places out-of-service ports back into service (O)UT OF SERVICE Takes ports out-of-service. For ports specified that are in-use, the system waits

for the port to become Idle and then places the port out-of-service. (F)ORCE OUT OF SERVICE Places ports out-of-service immediately regardless of the status (Idle/Busy) at

the time the command executes. (P)ERMANENT OUT OF SERVICE

Ports placed “Permanently” out-of-service must be brought back in-service individually by port and cannot be brought back into service as part of a “range” or “group” of ports. Use care when placing ports Permanent OOS as the command allows ports to be placed in that state as a range but only allows them to be brought back in by individual port numbers.

Service Status Display with the MOS Command

In addition to these selectable port statuses, the system can also display port status as being in one of the following states:

Table 36. MOS Port Status States

State Description

OSV Out of service – Reason Unknown UNAS Port Unassigned MM POS Permanent Out of Service GR OSV Group Out of Service RN OSV Range Out of Service CD OSV Card Out of Service CK OSV Circuit Out of Service SB OSV D-Channel or Smart Buffer Out of Service HL OSV Higher Level Unit Out of Service CO OSV Loss of Communication Out of Service PB OSV Push Button Out of Service AP OSV Alarm Information Processor Out of Service RE OSV Recovery Out of Service DOS Data Out of Service BZ OSV Pending Out of Service – But currently Busy DNDL Down Loading

MM


Aastra – 2512-004 207

State Description

ISV In Service

Place the Station Port Out-of-Service

The following example uses the MOS command to determine the status of as STE port switch port and place it out of service.

Step Action Asp Display

1. At the ASP Select Command prompt: Type MOS and press Enter.

SELECT COMMAND => MOS

2. Type D and press Enter. SELECT MODE: DISPLAY, FUNCTION => D

3. Type D and press Enter. MOS DISPLAY: (D=Detailed, S=Summary)........D => D

4. Type ? to display the port status options and press Enter.

ENTER DISPLAY OPTION or - or ?..............- => ?

Enter one of the following Display Options:

I = IN SERVICE O = OUT OF SERVICE U = UNASSIGNED S = SERVICE STATE DEFINITIONS - = ALL SERVICE STATES

5. Type “-” to search all port status options and press Enter.

ENTER DISPLAY OPTION or - or ?..............- => -

6. Type P and press Enter. ACCESS BY P=PORT OR G=GROUP.................P => P

7. Type the desired port number and press Enter.

ENTER LOCATION, or ?......................... => 1.3.11.12

8. Review the display. ***

* ALL PORTS (01.3.11.12 - 01.3.11.12) 01/ 07/02 09:25:09

***

CB.SH.CD.CT TYPE STATUS ----------- ----- ------ 01.3.11.12 STE IDLE

END OF DISPLAY

9. Type @ and press Enter to select the port to place out of service.

ENTER LOCATION, or ?......................... => @

10. Type MOS and press Enter. SELECT COMMAND => MOS

11. Type F and press Enter. SELECT MODE: DISPLAY, FUNCTION => F

12. Type F and press Enter. SELECT MODE: I, O, F, P or ?................. => F

13. Type P and press Enter. ACCESS BY P=PORT OR G=GROUP.................P => P

14. Type the desired port number and press Enter.

ENTER LOCATION, or ?......................... => 1.3.11.12

M M


208 Aastra– 2512-004

Step Action Asp Display

15. Review the display. ***

* ALL PORTS (01.3.11.12 - 01.3.11.12) 01/ 07/02 09:25:23

***

CB.SH.CD.CT TYPE STATUS ----------- ----- ------ 01.3.11.12 STE CK OSV

END OF DISPLAY

View Detailed Display of Group by Status

Step Action Display

1. Log on to the ASP with an approved password.

2. Type MOS and press Enter. SELECT COMMAND => MOS

3. Type D and press Enter to update a port.

SELECT MODE: PRINT, DISPLAY, FUNCTION => D

4. Press Enter to accept the default (D).

In the following step, entering S displays a list of all port or group states as shown at right. These definitions are shown in the STATUS column of the detailed display. (See step 8.)

MOS DISPLAY: (D=Detailed, S=Summary).........D=>

ENTER DISPLAY OPTION or - or ?..............- => S

ISV - IN SERVICE OSV - OUT OF SERVICE - REASON UNKNOWN UNAS – UNASSIGNED MM POS - PERMANENT OUT OF SERVICE GR OSV - GROUP OUT OF SERVICE RN OSV - RANGE OUT OF SERVICE CD OSV - CARD OUT OF SERVICE CK OSV - CIRCUIT OUT OF SERVICE SB OSV - OUT OF SERVICE BY SMART BUFFER OR D-CHANNEL HL OSV - OUT OF SERVICE BY HIGHER LEVEL UNIT CO OSV - OUT OF SERVICE DUE TO LOSS OF COMMUNICATION PB OSV - OUT OF SERVICE DUE TO PUSHBUTTON AP OSV - OUT OF SERVICE BY ALARM INFORMATION PROCESSINGRE OSV - OUT OF SERVICE BY RECOVERY DOS - DATA OUT OF SERVICE BZ OSV - PENDING MOS BUT PRESENTLY BUSY DNLD - DOWN LOAD PRI TS - TEST / MAINTENANCE IDLT - PENDING IN SERVICE BUT PRESENTLY TEST IDLM - PENDING IN SERVICE BUT PRESENTLY MOS TSTM - PENDING TEST / MAINTENANCE BUT PRESENTLY MOS

5. Select the display option. • Type I and press Enter for all in

service ports or groups. • Type O and press Enter for all out

of service ports or groups. • Type T and press Enter for all

test/maintenance service ports or groups.

• Type U and press Enter for all

ENTER DISPLAY OPTION or - or ?..............- => ?


I = IN SERVICE O = OUT OF SERVICE T = TEST / MAINTENANCE U = UNASSIGNED S = SERVICE STATE DEFINITIONS - = ALL SERVICE STATES

MM


Aastra – 2512-004 209

Step Action Display unassigned ports or groups.

• Type S and press Enter for all service states and acronyms.

• Press Enter to accept the default (-) for all in service ports or groups.

6. Press Enter to accept the default (P). ACCESS BY P=PORT OR G=GROUP.................P =>

7. Type the port location in the format described at right, and press Enter.

ENTER LOCATION, or ?......................... => -


.. => X Any specific location

.. => X-Y Any range of locations

where a location is:

.. => WW.XX.YY Specific Slot

.. => WW.XX.YY.ZZ Specific location

8. The status report for the port, location, or range of locations is displayed. A typical display is shown at right with: • A Range of Ports • Port Types • Port Status

*** * ALL PORTS (01.2.01.01 - 01.2.16.16) 08/10/01 02:29:52***

CB.SH.CD.CT TYPE STATUS CB.SH.CD.CT TYPE STATUS

----------- ----- ------ ----------- ----- ------

01.2.01.01 WDET RE OSV 01.2.01.02 WDET RE OSV 01.2.01.03 WDET RE OSV 01.2.01.04 WDET RE OSV 01.2.01.05 WDET RE OSV 01.2.01.06 WDET RE OSV 01.2.01.07 WDET RE OSV 01.2.01.08 WDET RE OSV 01.2.01.09 WDET RE OSV 01.2.01.10 WDET RE OSV 01.2.01.11 WDET RE OSV 01.2.01.12 WDET RE OSV

01.2.01.13 WDET RE OSV 01.2.01.14 WDET RE OSV 01.2.01.15 WDET RE OSV 01.2.01.16 WDET RE OSV 01.2.01.17 WDET RE OSV 01.2.01.18 WDET RE OSV 01.2.01.19 WDET RE OSV 01.2.01.20 WDET RE OSV 01.2.01.21 WDET RE OSV 01.2.01.22 WDET RE OSV 01.2.01.23 WDET RE OSV 01.2.01.24 WDET RE OSV 01.2.01.25 DTMF RE OSV 01.2.01.26 DTMF RE OSV 01.2.01.27 DTMF RE OSV 01.2.01.28 DTMF RE OSV 01.2.01.29 DTMF RE OSV 01.2.01.30 DTMF RE OSV 01.2.01.31 TSRV RE OSV 01.2.01.32 ANUN RE OSV

RETURN CONTINUES DISPLAY..... =>

View Detailed Status Display of the Group




2. Type D and press Enter. SELECT MODE: PRINT, DISPLAY, FUNCTION => D

3. Press Enter to accept the default (D). MOS DISPLAY: (D=Detailed, S=Summary).........D=>

4. Type G and press Enter. ACCESS BY P=PORT OR G=GROUP.................P => G

M M


210 Aastra– 2512-004


5. Type a valid group number, and press Enter.

ENTER GROUP NUMBER or ?...................... => ?

Valid group types are :

AGRP....ATTENDANT TGRP....TRUNK DGRP....DATA TRUNK MODG....MODEM XCVG....TRANSCEIVER MFRC....MF RECEIVER DTRC....DTMF RECEIVER ANUG....ANNUNCIATOR RSPG....REMOTE SWITCH PARTITION CB4P....4 PORT CONFERENCE BRIDGE CB8P....8 PORT CONFERENCE BRIDGE CB12....12 PORT CONFERENCE BRIDGE PRIG....PRI PRIP....PRI TRUNK POOL DRAG....DATA RATE ADAPTION WDTG....ENERGY DETECTOR IVSG....INTEGRATED VOICE SVCS

6. A report of group status displays.

View Summary Display of Port Status




2. Type D and press Enter. SELECT MODE: PRINT, DISPLAY, FUNCTION => D

3. Type S and press Enter for a summary. MOS DISPLAY: (D=Detailed, S=Summary).........D=> S

4. Select a display option: • Type I and press Enter to view in

service ports. • Type O and press Enter to view out

of service ports. • Type U and press Enter to view

unassigned ports.

ENTER DISPLAY OPTION or ?.................... => ?


I = IN SERVICE O = OUT OF SERVICE U = UNASSIGNED

5. Type the port location in the format described at right, and press Enter. A summary report for the port, location, or range of locations displays.

ENTER LOCATION, or ?......................... => ?


.. => X Any specific location

.. => X-Y Any range of locations

where a location is:

.. => WW.XX.YY Specific Slot

.. => WW.XX.YY.ZZ Specific location

MM


Aastra – 2512-004 211

Use the FONE Command to Delete the Station Once the station port has been placed out of service, the FONE command is used to delete the station device.




2. Type U and press Enter. SELECT MODE: PRINT, DISPLAY, UPDATE => u

3. Type D and press Enter. UPDT MODE: C-Create M-Modify D-Delete........ => d

4. Select the switch location to be deleted. • Type the port number in the format






..=> ww.x.yy.zz Specify port, where: ww = Cabinet x = Shelf yy = Card zz = Circuit or a location:



5. Verify the directory number has no stations assigned.

PORT TYPE....................ITES

DIRECTORY NUMBER HAS NO STATIONS ASSIGNED

6. Type Y and press Enter. DELETE THIS VOICE LINE: Y=YES; Rtn=NO....2296 => y

7. Type Y and press Enter. Delete NAME from "NAME/NBR":................N => y

8. Type Y and press Enter. Delete LOCATION from "WIRING":..............N => y

9. Type Y and press Enter. DOES UPDATE VERIFY ? => y


M M


212 Aastra– 2512-004

Delete the Line

Use DIRN/Search

Use the DIRN command and the Search option to ensure the line to be deleted is not being used elsewhere. The following example demonstrates the use of the DIRN/Search command. In this example, the directory number 2324/50 is a member of Call Pickup Group 7 and referenced in Group 120. Group 120 is an Attendant group and the directory number 2324/50 is assigned as the night answer directory number. This information is not identified in this example. These references should be addressed before deleting this line.


1. At the ASP Select Command prompt: Type DIRN, and press Enter.


2. Type S and press Enter. SELECT MODE: DISPLAY, UPDATE, LOGGING, SEARCH, VACANT => S

3. Type desired directory number or ? to display all directory numbers and press Enter.

DIRECTORY NUMBER or ?........................ => 2324

4. Type the number of the User Group that accesses the table being modified and press Enter.

USER GROUP................................... => 50

5. Type ? to display the available directory number search parameters and press Enter.

SEARCH TYPE: D, C, S, G, P, T, U, L, - or ?.- => ?

D = DIRECTORY NUMBERS C = CALL PICKUP GROUPS S = SATELLITE DIRECTORY GROUPS G = ATTENDANT/TRUNK GROUPS P = ACD PILOT NUMBERS T = TRUNK PORT NUMBERS U = USER GROUP SEARCHES L = SYSTEM LISTED DIRECTORY NUMBERS - = ALL

6. Type “-” to search for all number references and press Enter.

SEARCH TYPE: D, C, S, G, P, T, U, L, - or ?.- => -

7. Review the display. DIRECTORY NUMBER 2324 REFERENCED BY: 01/15/02

10:07:21

DIRNs: ***** No references found for this directory # *****

CPUGs:

7

SDGPs: ***** No references found for this directory # *****

SLDNs:

120

MM


Aastra – 2512-004 213

Step Action ASP Display GRPs:

120

ACDs: ***** No references found for this directory # *****

TRNKs: ***** No references found for this directory # *****

UGRPs:

DNIS numbers for requested DIRN/User Group: ***** No references found for this directory # *****

UGP/CRD matches for the following user groups: ***** No references found for this directory # *****

END OF DISPLAY

8. Type @ and press Enter to search another directory number if desired.

DIRECTORY NUMBER or ?........................ => @

M M


214 Aastra– 2512-004

MM


Aastra – 2512-004 215

Chapter 15 Telephone Features

Overview This chapter provides information and instructions for the following phone features:

Table 37. Telephone Features

Feature Feature

Abbreviated Dial Do Not Disturb Answer/Release Do Not Disturb-Distinctive Auto Dial Emergency Call Handling Busy Override Event Timer Buzz/Station Status Group Listen Automatic Line Preselect Hands-Free Auto Answer Callback – Busy Hold Callback Cancel Hotline Callback Date/Time Stamp Hunt Groups Callback-Display Voicemail Callback-Message Waiting Last Number Redial Callback - No Answer Off Hook Alert Call Forward – All Call Forward Busy/No Answer

Paging Access

Call Forward Display Privacy Call Mark Privacy Release Call Park Queuing - Callback Call Pickup Queuing - Short Term Call Recording Silent Monitor Any Call Waiting Silent Monitor/Remote Silent Monitor Cancel Split Monitor Conference and Group Listen Station Hold Return Consultation Hold Transfer Camp-On Display Transfer/3-Way

M M

Chapter 15, Phone Features

216 Aastra– 2512-004

Abbreviated Dial The Abbreviated Dial feature stores frequently-dialed internal and external numbers, up to 28 digits in length). Each entry is referenced by an associated one- or two-digit ID number depending upon the type of abbreviated dial that is assigned. A user can press the Abbreviated Dial feature button, dial only the ID number, and the switch automatically dials the corresponding phone number.

The default allocation of abbreviated numbers is 10, but 100-number Abbreviated Dial can be enabled for a voice line. Administrators can also store Abbreviated Dial numbers using the ABVD command.

Database Requirements for Abbreviated Dial

Table 38. Database Requirements for Abbreviated Dial


CLOS

ABD – Abbreviated Dial Yes/No Setting this option to “YES” gives all lines with this class of service access to 10-number abbreviated dial. 100-number abbreviated dial is set on a line-by-line basis.

BTNS

ABVD The button template must have an Abbreviated Dial (ABVD) button for an ITE device.

BTN – Button

DSPL Allows display of the abbreviated dial numbers.

LINE

CAD – 100 Number Abbreviated Dial

Yes/No Allows 100 abbreviated dial numbers rather than 10. However, if the class of service does not allow abbreviated dial (ABD) this parameter has no effect.

Add the ABVD Button to a Template To modify a button template to include an Abbreviated Dial feature button, see the procedures in Chapter 4.

MM


Aastra – 2512-004 217

Activate 100-Number Abbreviated Dial



SELECT COMMAND => LINE

2. Type U and press Enter. ELECT MODE: DISPLAY, UPDATE, SEARCH, TITLES => U

3. Type M and press Enter. UPDATE MODE: C-Create; M-Modify or D-Delete.. => M

4. Type the port number or location of the phone, and press Enter.

ENTER PORT NUMBER, LOCATION, or ?.... => 1.3.7.19

5. Type CAD and press Enter. Specify LINE Field to Modify or - or ?....... => CAD

6. Select the number of abbreviated dial numbers that can be stored. • Type Y and press Enter to allow 100

abbreviated dial numbers. • Type N and press Enter to allow only

10 abbreviated dial numbers(depending on CLOS)

100 NUM. ABBV. DIALING: Y=YES; N=NO........N => Y

7. Press Enter twice to proceed to the verify display.

Specify LINE Field to Modify or - or ?....... =>

8. Review the changes. *** VERIFY/DISPLAY ***

***...STATION PORT........................01.3.07.19

***...STATION EQUIPMENT TYPE.............ITE BTP...BUTTON TEMPLATE NUMBER.............1 DND...DO NOT DISTURB ALLOWED.............YES . . . APR...AUTOMATIC PRIVACY RELEASE..........NO CAD...100 NUM ABBREVIATED DIALING........YES DIA...STATION DIAGNOSTIC ALLOWED.........NO . . .

9. • Type Y and press Enter to save information in the database.

• Type N and press Enter to cancel.


M M


218 Aastra– 2512-004

ABVD Command You can also use the Abbreviated Dial (ABVD) command to store numbers for a directory number.


1. At the ASP Select Command prompt: Type ABVD and press Enter.

SELECT COMMAND => ABV


3. Type the directory number for which Abbreviated Dial numbers are stored, and press Enter.

If there are two or more user groups that do not share directory numbers, you are prompted to enter User Group number for the directory number.

DIRECTORY NUMBER:.......................... => 5018


USER GROUP................................... => 1

5. Type the storage index number and the phone number, separated by a comma, and press Enter.

The ABVD number may contain the Dial Pause character "*" with the following exceptions: • Dial Pause is NOT allowed in

directory numbers. • The Dial Pause character cannot be

the last character of the ABVD number.

• The 28 digits maximum includes the pause character.

REFERENCE NUMBER, NUMBER, ?, or Return = End. => ?

REFERENCE NUMBER = 0 – 9 NUMBER = ABBREVIATED DIAL NUMBER (1-28 DIGITS MAX)

6. Type the storage index number and the phone number, separated by a comma, and press Enter.

The following prompt will repeat to allow you to enter more numbers to be stored for Abbreviated Dial use. When you press Enter without typing an entry, the prompting ends.

REFERENCE NUMBER,NUMBER, ?, or Return=End.=>00,2301 REFERENCE NUMBER,NUMBER,?,or Return=End. >01,2502 REFERENCE NUMBER,NUMBER,?,or Return=End. =>02,97279141 REFERENCE NUMBER, NUMBER,?, or Return=End.=>

MM


Aastra – 2512-004 219


7. Review the abbreviated dial numbers in the Verify/Display

** VERIFY DISPLAY **

ABBREVIATED DIAL 06/11/00 09:48:10

DIRN: 5018 NAME:

00 2301 02 97274595 01 2502


8. • Type Y and press Enter to save information in the database.



Display Assigned ABVD Numbers

Step Action Result

1. On the ITE: Press the Display button followed by the Abbreviated Dial (ABVD) feature button.

The abbreviated dial display starts with entry number 0 along with the number if assigned.

• Standard ABVD Display - Entry numbers 0 through 9 • 100-number Display– Entry number 00-00 display.

2. To scroll through the entries: Press the ABVD button again.

The next entry and number displays.

Use Abbreviated Dial Table 39. Use Abbreviated Dial

Phone Type Procedure

ITE – Non Display Feature Button + Entry Number ITE12SD and ITE30 with Display Feature Button + Entry Number

+ = Display Abbreviated Dial Numbers STE

+ Entry Number ITE4

+ Entry Number

M M


220 Aastra– 2512-004


+ + Entry Number Or

Feature Key + Entry Number

ITE760 and ITE780

+ = Display Abbreviated Dial Number

Answer/Release The Answer/Release feature allows an ITE user with a headset to answer and end calls without using the handset. To go off-hook, the user presses the Answer/Release (ANRL) feature button. To conclude the call and go on-hook, the user again presses the ANRL feature button. Modify the station button template to include an ANRL feature button using the procedure described at the beginning of the chapter.

Database Requirements for Answer/Release

Table 40. Database Requirements for Answer/Release

Parameter Options Description

BTNS

ANRL Feature button allows a user with a headset to go off and on hook by pressing this button.

BTN – Button

DSPL Allows the user to display the auto dial number.

User Answer Release Table 41. Use Answer Release


ITE - All

Feature Button ITE 760 ITE 780 Feature Key

MM


Aastra – 2512-004 221

Automatic Dial The Automatic Dial (Auto Dial) allows users to store one number (up to 28 digits) and dial it by pressing the associated Auto Dial feature button. There can be up to a maximum of 15 Auto Dial feature buttons on an ITE phone.

An Auto Dial number is stored or changed by pressing an Auto Dial button while onhook. Dial the phone number to be stored, including any Access Codes and Area Codes required for an outside call. Be sure to include access codes, area codes, or other numbers required to complete a call. You may include the pause character, * (asterisk) in the number.

If a Display button is included in the template, press the Display button, then the Auto Dial button to view the stored number.

Database Requirements for Auto Dial

Table 42. Database Requirements for Auto Dial


BTNS

AUTD Allows the user to set up a frequently dialed number to be automatically dialed when the button is pushed.

BTN – Feature Button

DSPL Allows the user to display the auto dial number.

Assign a Number to an Auto Dial Feature Button

Step Action Result

1. To create the Auto Dial number: Press the AUTD feature button on the phone.

The lamp is ON, but there is no display

2. Dial the complete phone number to be stored, including any Access Codes and Area Codes required for an outside call. You can also include the pause character, * (asterisk) in the number.

The lamp is OFF

3. To delete an Auto Dial Number: Store another number on the same button.

Display the Auto Dial Number

Step Action Result

1. Press +

The Display lamp is ON, the Auto Dial lamp is OFF, and the ADL number displays.

M M


222 Aastra– 2512-004

Use Auto Dial Table 43. Use Auto Dial


ITE - All

Feature Button STE and ITE4 N.A.

or Feature Key = Number is dialed. ITE 760 ITE 780

+ = Display Auto Dial Number on that key.

Busy Override The Busy Override feature lets a user interrupt a phone call in progress. The overriding user must have a Busy Override Priority that is higher than the user(s) involved in the call to be interrupted. A warning tone signals call participants that the call is about to be interrupted.

If the user CLOS is set for automatic Busy Override, the user making the call does not need to press the Busy Override feature button. The called party's current call is automatically overridden if all users involved have a lower Busy Override Priority than the user invoking the feature.

Busy Override Fields in CLOS Busy Override is often used in emergency situations. Normally managers, supervisors, and console operators have the highest override priorities assigned.

Database Requirements for Busy Override

Table 44. Database Requirements for Busy Override


CLOS

BSO Busy Override Allowed

Yes/No Allows Busy Override is allowed.

BOP – Priority Level 0 to 7 Priority Level for Busy Override.

BTNS

BTN – Feature Button BSOV Add the Busy Override feature button to the template.

MM


Aastra – 2512-004 223

Use Busy Override Table 45. Use Busy Override


ITE - All

Feature Button STE and ITE4 NA ITE760 ITE780 Feature Key

Busy Recall (Callback-Busy) The Busy Recall feature allows the user to leave a Callback on a busy destination line. The switch automatically calls back the originator back when the destination line hangs up. There is no limit to the number of internal lines that can be marked for recall, system-wide.

Modify the CLOS using the procedures provided in Chapter 3.

Modify the button template using the procedure described in chapter 4.

Table 46. Parameter Requirements for Busy Recall (Callback-Busy)

CLOS Parameter Option Description

CLOS

BRC – Busy Recall Yes/No When set to Yes, enables users to leave Callbacks for busy internal numbers.

BRD - Busy Recall Destination

Yes/No Allows a line to accept Callback Busy from other lines.

BTNS

BTN – Feature Button CLBK Allows users access to the Callback-Busy feature.

Use Busy Recall Table 47. Use Busy Recall/Callback Busy


ITE – All

Feature button ITE4

+ + = Leave Callback

M M


224 Aastra– 2512-004


From dial tone - + = Return Callback ITE760 ITE780 Feature key

Callback The Callback feature allows the call originator to leave a Callback on a destination line if the line is busy or no-answer. The originator can view callbacks with date and time with a Callback button and a Display button, can cancel a callback, and can leave a message waiting indicator on the line marked for Callback.

Database Requirements for Callback

The following table lists the database parameters that affect the following features:

• Callback – No Answer • Callback – Cancel • Callback – Display • Callback – Message Waiting Indicator Table 48. Database Requirements for Callback


CLOS

MSW Yes/No Allows a user to leave a Callback on an internal unanswered line. MWD Yes/No Allows the user station to accept a Callback from another internal

station. CTS – Callback Date/Time Stamp Enabled

Yes/No Allows the date and time of the Callback-No Answer call to display on the ITE phone, using the Display button and the Callback button.

BTNS

CLBK Places the callback feature button on the button template. DISP Allows the user to display Callback Information

BTN – Button

CNCL Allows the user to cancel a Callback using the display.

SPAR Updateable System Parameters

- “-“applies the feature to all callbacks C “C” applies it based on the class of service.

CTS – Callback Date/Time Application

N “N” disallows date/time stamp use system-wide

MM


Aastra – 2512-004 225

Date/Time Stamp This feature allows a user with an ITE display phone to view date/time information about a Callback.

The feature is accessed by pressing the DISP button followed by the CLBK button. The display provides the name or directory number of the internal party that left the callback and the time and date of the callback.

Stations provided with the Callback Date/Time Stamp feature can have a maximum of five callbacks. Stations without the Callback Date/Time Stamp feature can have a maximum of 10 callbacks.

Callback - Cancel This feature allows callback recipients with an ITE display phone to cancel a callback using the CNCL (Cancel) button. When the callback number is shown on the display, press the CNCL button, and the callback is cancelled. Modify the station button template to include the CNCL and DISP (Display) feature buttons using the procedures described in Chapter 4.

Callback - Display If a callback is left at a display phone, the word “Message” is displayed. The user can then scroll through the messages by pressing the DSPL feature button followed by the CLBK feature button. The calling party name and number is displayed in the order they were left. The information displayed for each callback provides the callback number, the name of the person leaving the callback, along with the date and time the callback was left. When the date and time are included with the messages, the number of callbacks which can be left on a line is reduced from 10 to 5.

Callback - Message Waiting Indicator Internal calls to a station that rings but does not answer can be marked with a message waiting lamp signal by the calling station. Both stations must have a Callback (CLBK) button for the feature to work. The voice line button lamp on the destination station flutters when a callback has been placed.

There is no system-wide limit to the number of lines that can be class-marked for Callback-Message Waiting. However, a maximum of 10 messages can be left for one line. The 11th Callback - Message Waiting attempt receives reorder tone.

Callback - No Answer Callback-No Answer allows a user to leave a Callback on an unanswered internal line. This feature differs from Callback-Busy in that the destination user must press the CLBK feature button to return the Callback.

Callbacks can be placed on or returned to internal extensions configured to support the feature. A maximum of ten Callbacks can be left per line. If the Callback date/time stamp feature is activated in the SPAR table or within the CLOS table, only five callbacks can be left per line.

M M


226 Aastra– 2512-004

Use Callback Table 49. Use Callback


ITE – Non-Display

= Leave Callback

= Return Callback ITE 12SD and ITE30

+ = Display Callback

+ + = Cancel Callback ITE 760 ITE 780 = Leave Callback

= Return Callback

+ = Display Callback -

+ + = Cancel Callback ITE4


From dial tone - + = Return Callback STE


From dial tone - + = Return Callback

Call Forward Call Forward allows the user to press the Call Forward feature button to automatically forward all incoming calls to an internal or external number. A single call can be forwarded a maximum of 16 times.

You can configure the database to handle incoming internal and external Call Forward differently. When calls are to be forwarded to an external number, access codes and other numbers required for completing the call must be included. The forward destination can be up to 28 digits long. There are 3 types of call forward:

MM


Aastra – 2512-004 227

• Call Forward – All • Call Forward – No Answer • Call Forward – Busy

Call Forward - All When Call Forward - All is activated at a station, the only calls that can be received are from the internal call forward destination station. The call forward destination station can transfer the forwarded call back to the forwarding station thus providing a call screening capability. A call can be internally forwarded a maximum of 16 times to 16 different destinations.

Users who will be away from their stations and know where they can be reached can activate Call Forward - All calls from their directory number to another.

Call Forward – All is the only call forward option that allows the user to set the destination for ALL calls

Database Requirements for Call Forward - All

The following table lists the database parameters that affect the Call Forward – All feature:

Table 50. Database Parameters for Call Forward - All


CLOS

CFD – Call Forward Destination

Yes/No Allows a line with this class of service to be the destination of another lines Call Forward – All.

CFA – Call Forward-All

Yes/No Allows a line with this class of service to use the Call Forward – All feature to forward their line to another internal station.

DFL –Call Forward All - Local

Yes/No Allows a line to forward all calls to a local telephone number. The class of service must also allow local calls (Parameter OLO) and CFA must also allow the Call Forward feature.

DFO – Call Forward All - DDD

Yes/No Allows a line to forward all calls to a long distance toll number (DDD). The class of service must also allow toll calls (Parameter TOL) and CFA must also allow the Call Forward feature.

BTNS

BTN – Feature Button CFWD For an ITE device, the station may require a CFWD button on the template for use of the feature. For an STE device, the feature code *3 + number is used for the Call Forward – All feature and #3 is used to cancel Call Forward - All.

Because *3 and #3 are both accessed from dial tone, these feature codes

M M


228 Aastra– 2512-004

Parameter Option Description can also be used from an ITE station if no buttons are available for the CFWD button.

LINE

CFA – Call Forward – All

Inactive or Destination Number

This parameter is only available in LINE/Update/Modify mode of the LINE command and defines the destination number for Call Forward – All. If the number is a local or long distance number, the number must be prefixed with an access level (EX: 9) just as if the number is dialed directly.

Using this parameter, a technician can enable/disable Call Forward – All from an ASP terminal vs. being physically present at the station device.

Call Forward – Busy/No Answer Call Forward – No Answer and Call Forward – Busy are not user-adjustable features and can only be set at an ASP terminal. These call forward features determine where a station forwards to on an unanswered or busy condition. Note that a busy condition occurs when the user is off-hook on the called line and is not impacted by the Call Waiting feature.

There are CLOS options for either of these features. To disable these features, set the LINE parameters to inactive.

In addition to Standard call forward no answer and busy, a line can be set up to use Internal/External handling for both of these forward types. Internal/External handling enables the switch to forward to different destinations if the call originates internally (another station) or via the public network. A good example of this handling is a salesman’s station, where internal calls forward to voicemail, but an external call (prospective sale) forwards to another salesman or a receptionist.

The following tables define how to set-up standard Call Forward No Answer/Busy only and do not reflect Internal/External Handling.

Database Requirements for Call Forward – No Answer/Busy.

Table 51. Database Requirements for Call Forward – No Answer/Busy.


LINE

CFN – Call Forward – No Answer


Defines the destination number for Call Forward – No Answer. If the number is local, long distance, international, etc., the number must be prefixed with an access level (EX: 9) as if the number was dialed directly. Additionally, the class of service for this line must allow that type of call.

MM


Aastra – 2512-004 229


Normally this number is set to the satellite directory number of the systems voicemail system.

CFB - Call Forward – Busy Action

N=Inactive D=Delayed M=Immed

Defines if Call Forward Busy is active. • Immediate - Causes calls to the busy extension to

immediately forward to the Call Forward Busy destination.

• Delayed - Waits the amount of time specified in the UGRP/CHP table before forwarding.

This option MUST be set to “Delayed” if this line uses the Call Waiting Feature.

CALL FORWARD – Busy Number


Defines the destination number for Call Forward – Busy. If the number is local, long distance, international, etc., the number must be prefixed with an access level (EX: 9) as if the number is dialed directly.

Additionally, the class of service for this line must allow that type of call. Normally this number is set to the satellite directory number of the systems voicemail system.

BTNS

CFWD Allows access to the Call Forward feature. BTN – Feature Buttons DSPL Allows display of the Call Forward feature.

UGRP/CHP

FBW – Call Forward Busy Wait Time

0-60 sec. Defines how long a call waits on a busy line (for Call Waiting) before forwarding to the Busy Forward destination defined in the LINE command. This time is specified in 4-second increments, as a ring cycle (ring – pause) is four seconds in length. For example, to allow a caller to sit in call waiting status for four rings, set this parameter to 16 seconds.

FNR – Call Forward No Answer Time

0-60 sec. Defines how long a call waits on an unanswered line before forwarding to the No-answer Forward destination defined in the LINE command. This time is specified in 4-second increments, as a ring cycle (ring – pause) is four seconds in length. For example, to allow a caller to sit in call waiting status for four rings, set this parameter to 16 seconds. Usually forwards to voicemail.

M M


230 Aastra– 2512-004

Configure Call Forward - Busy/No Answer You can configure the operation of Call Forward, Call Forward-Busy, and Call Forward- No Answer for incoming calls to suit user needs.

If FIE is set to Yes, additional prompts display for configuring Call Forward to handle internal and external calls differently. This is shown in the next example.

Step Action Display

1. Type LINE and press Enter. SELECT COMMAND => LINE

2. Type U and press Enter. SELECT MODE:PRINT, DISPLAY, UPDATE, LOGGING=> U

3. Type M and press Enter. UPDT MODE:C-Create M-Modify D-Delete P-Copy=> M

4. Type the directory number assigned to the line to be modified, and press Enter.

If the User Groups on the switch share directory numbers, or if there is only one user group, this prompt does not display.


5. Type the number of the User Group for the directory number, and press Enter.

USER GROUP............................. => 1


6. Type FIE to modify the Call Forward Internal/External field, and press Enter.

Specify VLIN Field to Modify or - or ?...=> FIE

7. Select the call handling. • Accept the default (N) by pressing

Enter to have Call Forward handle internal and external calls identically.

• Type Y and press Enter if you want the feature to distinguish between internal and external calls to allow different handling for each.

CALL FORWARD INTERNAL/EXTERNAL HANDLING..N => N

8. Type CFB to set the Call Forward Busy Action and press Enter.


Specify VLIN Field to Modify or - or ?.. => CFB

9. Select call forwarding speed. • Accept the default (N) by pressing

Enter for inactive stations. • Type D and press Enter to delay call


D=DELAYED;M=IMMEDIATE................N => (CFB)

MM


Aastra – 2512-004 231

Step Action Display forwarding.

• Type M and press Enter to immediately forward calls to another line.

The following prompt only appears if D or M is entered in the previous step.

Call Forward numbers may contain the Dial Pause character (*), with the following exceptions: • Dial Pause is not allowed in directory

numbers. • The Dial Pause character cannot be

the last character of the call forward number.

• All 24-digit call forward numbers include the pause character.


digits, and press Enter. • Type ? and press Enter for format

information.


24 digits MAX...................................N =>

11. Press Enter to end prompting. Specify VLIN Field to Modify or - or ?...... =>

12. Review the display *** VERIFY/DISPLAY ***

DRN...DIRECTORY NUMBER...................5018 UGP...USER GROUP NUMBER..................1 CLOS...CLASS OF SERVICE...................1 CPG...CALL PICKUP GROUP NUMBER...........0 HUN...HUNT PILOT NUMBER..................NONE OAM...OAI ASSOCIATED MEMBER..............NO APR...AUTOMATIC PRIVACY RELEASE..........NO CAD...100 NUM ABBREVIATED DIALING........YES DIA...STATION DIAGNOSTIC ALLOWED.........NO FIE...CALL FORWARD - INTERNAL/EXTERNAL...NO CFN...CALL FORWARD - NO ANSWER...........5023 CFB...CALL FORWARD - BUSY................IMMEDIATE . . . . . .BUSY DIRECTORY NUMBER........5022 CFA...CALL FORWARD - ALL.................INACTIVE HOT...HOT LINE DIRECTORY NUMBER..........INACTIVE OHA...OFFHOOK ALERT DESTINATION NUMBER...INACTIVE . . .

13. Verify the LINE entries. • Type Y and press Enter to save LINE



M M


232 Aastra– 2512-004

Step Action Display all responses.

Database Requirements for Internal/External Call Forward Table 52. Database Requirements for Internal/External Call Forward


LINE

FIE Yes/No Allows specific Call Forward handling for internal and external calls. FNA Number Designates a specific number for Forward Number A. FNB Number Designates a specific number for Forward Number B. FNI A or B Use specific forward number (A or B) for internal calls. FNE A or B Use specific forward number (A or B) for external calls. FBI A or B Select specific destination number for internal Call Forward-Busy Calls (A or

B) BAI Delayed

Immediate Selected CFB handling for internal calls.

FBE A or B Select specific destination number for external CFB calls. (A or B) BAE Delayed

Immediate Selected CFB handling for external calls.

Configure Internal/External Handling

Step Action Display




4. Type the directory number to be modified, and press Enter.

The next prompt does not display if User Groups share directory numbers.



USER GROUP............................... => 1

DIRECTORY TYPE......................VOICE LINE

6. Type FIE and press Enter to set Forward Internal/External handling.

Specify VLIN Field to Modify or - or ?...=> FIE

MM


Aastra – 2512-004 233

Step Action Display

7. Type Y and press Enter for internal or external handling.

CALL FORWARD INTERNAL/EXTERNAL HANDLING..N=> Y

8. Type FNA to set Forward Number A, and press Enter.

Specify VLIN Field to Modify or - or ?.. => FNA

9. Type the destination number that is to be designated as A, and press Enter.

CALL FORWARD A: N=INACTIVE or ?

24 digits MAX.....................N => 97275031

10. Type FNB to set Forward Number B, and press Enter.

Specify VLIN Field to Modify or - or ?.. => FNB

11. Type the destination number that is to be designated as B, and press Enter.

CALL FORWARD B: N=INACTIVE or ?

24 digits MAX.........................N => 5032

12. Type FNI and press Enter to specify the destination number to use for internal callers.

Specify VLIN Field to Modify or - or ?.. => FNI

13. Select a destination to use when forwarding internal calls. • Type A or B and press Enter. • Accept the default (N) by pressing

Enter for no forwarding destination.

CFWD NO ANSWER # FOR INTERNAL CALLER or ?.N=> A

14. Type FNE and press Enter to specify the destination number to use for external callers.

Call Forward numbers (as specified in Prompts 8 and 10) may contain the Dial Pause character ("*"), but some restrictions apply. The Dial Pause is not allowed in directory numbers, and it cannot be the last character of the call forward number. Also, it is counted as part of the 24-digit maximum.

Specify VLIN Field to Modify or - or ?.. => FNE

15. Select a destination to use when forwarding external calls. • Type A or B and press Enter. • Accept the default (N) by pressing


CFWD NO ANSWER # FOR EXTERNAL CALLER or ?.N=> B

16. Type FBI and press Enter to specify the destination number to which internal callers are forwarded when the line is busy.

Specify VLIN Field to Modify or - or ?.. => FBI

17. Select a destination to use when forwarding internal calls when the line is busy.

CFWD BUSY # FOR INTERNAL CALLER or ?...N => A

M M


234 Aastra– 2512-004

Step Action Display

• Type A or B, and press Enter. • Accept the default (N) by pressing


18. Type BAI and press Enter to specify the destination number to which internal callers are forwarded when the line is busy.

Specify VLIN Field to Modify or - or ?.. => BAI

19. Type M and press Enter to forward caller immediately to another line.

CFWD BUSY INTERNAL: D=Delayed;

M=Immediate.............................D => M

20. Type FBE and press Enter to specify the destination number to which external callers are forwarded when the line is busy.

Specify VLIN Field to Modify or - or ?.. => FBE

21. Select the call forward destination. • Type A or B and press Enter. • Accept the default (N) by pressing


CFWD BUSY # FOR EXTERNAL CALLER or ? ..N => B

22. Type BAE and press Enter to specify the destination number to which external callers are forwarded when the line is busy.

Specify VLIN Field to Modify or - or ?.. => BAE

23. Type M and press Enter to forward the caller immediately to another line.

CFWD BUSY EXTERNAL: D=Delayed;

M=Immediate...........................D => D

24. Press Enter to end prompting. Specify VLIN Field to Modify or - or ?...... =>

25. Review the Display. *** VERIFY/DISPLAY ***

DRN...DIRECTORY NUMBER...................5018 UGP...USER GROUP NUMBER..................1 CLOS...CLASS OF SERVICE...................1 CPG...CALL PICKUP GROUP NUMBER...........0 ACD...ACD PILOT NUMBER...................NONE HUN...HUNT PILOT NUMBER..................NONE OAM...OAI ASSOCIATED MEMBER..............NO APR...AUTOMATIC PRIVACY RELEASE..........NO CAD...100 NUM ABBREVIATED DIALING........YES DIA...STATION DIAGNOSTIC ALLOWED.........NO FIE...CALL FORWARD - INTERNAL/EXTERNAL...YES FNA...CALL FORWARD NUMBER A..............97275031 FNB...CALL FORWARD NUMBER B..............5032 FNI...CFW FOR INTERNAL CALLER..........A: 97275031 FNE...CFW FOR EXTERNAL CALLER..........B: 5032 FBI...CFB FOR INTERNAL CALLER..........A: 97275031 BAI...INTERNAL CALLER BUSY TREATMENT.....IMMEDIATE FBE...CFB FOR EXTERNAL CALLER.............B: 5032 BAE...EXTERNAL CALLER BUSY TREATMENT......DELAYED CFA...CALL FORWARD - ALL..................INACTIVE HOT...HOT LINE DIRECTORY NUMBER...........INACTIVE OHA...OFFHOOK ALERT DESTINATION NUMBER....INACTIVE TOD...TIME OF DAY RESTRICTIONS.............NO VID...InteMail ID FOR VOICE LINE...........NONE CNC...NATIONAL CALLING PARTY # CONTENTS....NONE STATION TYPE BUTTON RING OPTION

MM


Aastra – 2512-004 235

Step Action Display DOES UPDATE VERIFY ? =>


information in the database. • Type N and press Enter to cancel all

responses.


Call Forward Display When a line on a display phone has invoked the Call Forward feature, the display reads FORWARD. To display where the calls have been forwarded, press the Display feature button followed by the Forward feature button (handset is on-hook).

Use Call Forward Table 53. Use Call Forward


ITE – Non-Display

Feature Button + Extension Number = Forwarded

Feature Button = Forward Cancelled ITE 12SD and ITE30

+ ITE 760 ITE 780 + Extension + = Forward On

= Clears the Forward number

+ Extension + = Forward Off Or

Feature Key + Number = Forwarded

+ = Cancel Forward

+ = Display Forward STE and ITE4

From dial tone - + + Number = Forward ON

M M


236 Aastra– 2512-004


From dial tone - + = Forward OFF

Call Mark The Call Mark feature allows users to report an outside call with poor audio quality by using a single feature button (MARK). The feature is used to identify bad trunk lines. Pressing the MARK button generates an alarm with the necessary information to identify the bad trunk, on the system console.

Using Call Mark is similar to using the "#*118" feature code to identify an active trunk by port number. However, this feature eliminates the need for a user to personally notify technicians of problems using a trunk port.

The customer service technician can then investigate the cause of the problem using this information. Modify the station button template to include a call mark (MARK) feature button using the procedure described at the beginning of the chapter.

Call Mark is normally assigned to ITE phones that receive large numbers of calls with the potential of encountering noisy and distorted trunk equipment (e.g., Attendant Consoles, ACD agent or supervisor phones, and sometimes ITE user phones). A feature button can be created for use with Call Mark, but no other database changes are required. Users simply press the button push on the phone to activate reporting.

Database Requirement for Call Mark Table 54. Database Requirements for Call Mark


BTNS

BTN – Feature Button MARK Allows the user to report a bad/noisy line during a call.

Call Mark Alarm on System Console An alarm similar to the example below is displayed in the switch room to notify technicians of the bad trunk reported by a Call Mark feature button press.

10:59:08 INF CP:TRNK-3303 23120000 PRT=006A 0000002C PRT=0038-A

All data is displayed in hexadecimal format. The columns are labeled for documentation purposes only.

• A = Data Word 0 holds the Caller’s Directory Number

MM


Aastra – 2512-004 237

• B = Data Word 1 holds the Caller's Port Number • C = Data Word 2 holds the Caller's Trunk Group Number • D = Data Word 3 holds the Caller's Trunk Port Number

Use Call Mark Table 55. Use Call Mark


ITE Only - All

Feature button ITE760 ITE780 Feature key STE and ITE4 NA

Call Park The Call Park feature allows a user to park a call on a temporary directory number for retrieval from any telephone on the system. A parked call is placed in a state very similar to Hold.

When a user parks a call, the system provides a 1-digit to 5-digit call park number. The user dials the park number to retrieve a parked call.

If the parked call is not retrieved within a predefined period of time, it rings back to the telephone from which it was originally parked or to the attendant, depending on the database design.

Database Requirements for Call Park Table 56. Database Requirements for Call Park


CLOS

PRK – Call Park Yes/No Allows users access to the Call Park feature.

BTNS

BTN – Button CLPK Add a button for the Call Park feature to the button template.

UGRP/CHP

CPT - Call Park Reversion Time

(1 to 250 minutes)

Enter the number of minutes (1 to 250) a call stays in “park” before it returns to the line that parked it or to the Attendant Console.

PRD - Call Park Return Destination

A=ATDC L=Line

Enter a letter to indicate the destination for calls after the Call Park Reversion Time Limit expires.

M M


238 Aastra– 2512-004


• A=Send call to the Attendant Console. • L=Send call to the line that originally parked it.

Use Call Park Table 57. Use Call Park


ITE All

- Feature Button ITE4

+ STE

+ + ITE760 ITE780 Feature Key

Call Pickup The Call Pickup feature allows station users to answer a call ringing at another extension within the same user group. Three types of Call Pickup are supported:

• Directed - The user answers any ringing telephone by pressing the Pickup feature button and then dialing the extension number of the ringing telephone.

• Group - Users are assigned to pickup groups of up to 32 members. Group members can answer any ringing extension in the group by pressing the Pickup feature button.

• Both - This type includes features of both the Directed and Group types: – A user presses a Call Pickup feature button or dials a Numeric Feature code,

followed by the directory number, to use Directed Call Pickup to answer any ringing station.

– A user presses the Call Pickup feature button to access Group Call Pickup. Only directory numbers in the assigned pickup group can be picked up in this manner.

Database Parameters for Call Pick-up Table 58. Database Parameters for Call Pick-up

Parameters Option Description

CLOS

CPI -Call Pickup Termination

Yes/No When set to Yes, users can pick up incoming calls that ring at the station.

MM


Aastra – 2512-004 239

Parameters Option Description

CLP - Call Pickup Origination

Directed Group Both

The station can be set to allow Directed, Group or Both pickup methods.

CPH - Call Pickup On Held Calls

Yes/No When set to Yes, users can pick up calls holding at another station.

BTNS

BTN - Button CPLU The feature button to add to the button template.

Use Call Pickup Table 59. Use Call Pickup


ITE – All

CPUG member -

CPUG non-member - + Extension number STE or ITE 4

From dial tone - ITE760 ITE780 PUG member -

CPUG non-member - + Extension number

Call Recording This feature allows an ITE user to record a conversation using a customer-provided recording device by pressing a single feature button.

Database Requirements for Call Recording

Table 60. Database Requirements for Call Recording


CLOS

CRI Yes/No Allows the user to invoke call recording with the CREC feature button. CRD Yes/No Calls made to and from this directory number can be recorded by

voicemail users who can invoke the Call Recording feature with the CREC feature button.

CCR N Selects Continuous Call Recording feature:

M M


240 Aastra– 2512-004

Field Option Description A D

• N - No Continuous Call Recording • A - Continuous Record ALL Calls • D - Continuous Record ACD Calls Only

BTNS


CREC Call Recording Button.

Call Waiting This feature allows a user to accept a second incoming call on the same line by placing the first caller on hold (after hearing the Call Waiting tone). There can be only one call on hold per line. There are two ways to accept a Call Waiting, determined by the type of Hold assigned to the user's phone. See Hold in this chapter.

If the Call Waiting feature is active but the Hold feature is not, call waiting will still function, but the first call must be terminated to answer the second call.

Database Requirements for Call Waiting Table 61. Database Requirements for Call Waiting


CLOS

CWO – Call Waiting Origination

Yes/No This parameter specifies if a line with this class of service can appear as a “Call-Waiting” call on another station that has the Call Waiting feature active.

CWT – Call Waiting Termination

NA – Not Allowed NT – Allowed, No ToneTN – Allowed Tone

This feature specifies if a line with this class of service has Call Waiting. If this option is set to NT – Allowed, No Tone, the only indication that a second call has arrived is a blinking LED on the line button.

For STE devices, setting this option to “No Tone” does not give the user the ability to determine when a second call arrives.

MM


Aastra – 2512-004 241


UGRP/CHP

FBW – Call Forward Busy Wait Time

0-60 sec. This parameter defines how long a call can set on a busy line (for Call Waiting) before forwarding to the Busy Forward destination defined in the LINE table. This time should be specified in 4-second increments, as a ring cycle (ring – pause) is four seconds in length. For example, to allow a caller to sit in call waiting status for four rings, set this parameter to 16 seconds.

LINE

CFB – Call Forward Busy

Call Forward Busy defined and set to “Delayed”.

Enable Call Forward-Busy Feature for Call Waiting The Call Forward-Busy feature allows incoming calls to be forwarded to an alternate destination immediately or after a preset delay time.

Step Action Display


2. Type U and press Enter. SELECT MODE: DISPLAY, UPDATE, LOGGING => U

3. Type M and press Enter. UPDT MODE:C-Create M-Modify D-Delete P-Copy. => M


DIRECTORY NUMBER or ?.................... => 5018

5. Type the user group number to which the directory number belongs, and press Enter.

USER GROUP............................... => 1


6. Type CFB and press Enter. Specify VLIN Field to Modify or - or ?... => CFB

7. Type D and press Enter to have incoming calls delayed before forwarding when the line is busy.


D=DELAYED; M=IMMEDIATE...............N => D

8. Type the number where calls forward after the delay period, and press Enter.


24 digits MAX............................ => 5019

9. Press Enter. Specify BTNS Field to Modify or - or ?...... =>


DRN...DIRECTORY NUMBER...................5018 UGP...USER GROUP NUMBER..................1 CLOS...CLASS OF SERVICE...................1

M M


242 Aastra– 2512-004

Step Action Display CPG...CALL PICKUP GROUP NUMBER...........0 ACD...ACD PILOT NUMBER...................NONE HUN...HUNT PILOT NUMBER..................NONE OAM...OAI ASSOCIATED MEMBER..............NO APR...AUTOMATIC PRIVACY RELEASE..........NO CAD...100 NUM ABBREVIATED DIALING........YES DIA...STATION DIAGNOSTIC ALLOWED.........NO FIE...CALL FORWARD - INTERNAL/EXTERNAL...NO CFN...CALL FORWARD - NO ANSWER...........5019 CFB...CALL FORWARD - BUSY................DELAYED CFA...CALL FORWARD - ALL.................5019 HOT...HOT LINE DIRECTORY NUMBER..........INACTIVE OHA...OFFHOOK ALERT DESTINATION NUMBER...INACTIVE TOD...TIME OF DAY RESTRICTIONS...........NO VID...InteMail ID FOR VOICE LINE.........NONE CNC...NATIONAL CALLING PARTY # CONTENTS..NONE STATION TYPE BUTTON RING OPTION


11. Verify the CFB entries. • Type Y and press Enter to

save the information in the database.

• Type N and press Enter to cancel all responses.


Set Call-Forward Busy Wait Time If a station uses the Call Forward-Busy feature, incoming calls wait a specified amount of time, specified in four-second intervals, before forwarding a call to an alternate destination.

Step Action Display

1. Type UGRP and press Enter. SELECT COMMAND => UGRP

2. Type U and press Enter. SELECT MODE:PRINT, DISPLAY, UPDATE, TITLES => U

3. Type M and press Enter. UPDATE MODE:C-Create, M-Modify, D-Delete => M

4. Type the User Group number for the directory number, and press Enter.

USER GROUP NUMBER (1- 63) OR ?..... => 1

5. Type CHP and press Enter. SELECT SUBCOMMAND or ? => CHP

6. Type FBW and press Enter to set the Call Forward Busy Wait Time.

The normal ring cycle is 4 seconds per ring. This means that the entry in this procedure, 15 seconds, allows about 4 rings before calls are forwarded.

SPECIFY FIELD TO MODIFY or - or ?....... => FBW

MM


Aastra – 2512-004 243

Step Action Display

7. Type delay time in seconds (1 to 60) before calls are forwarded.

CALL FORWARD BUSY WAIT TIME(1-60 secs).12 => 15

8. Press Enter. SPECIFY FIELD TO MODIFY or - or ?....... =>

9. Review the Display ** VERIFY/DISPLAY ***

** CALL HANDLING PARAMETERS FOR USER GROUP # 1 DIG...STATION DIAGNOSTICS ALLOWED......YES DND...DO NOT DISTURB TREATMENT.........DISTINCT NIT...NORMAL INTERDIGIT TIMEOUT (second....5 FIT...FAST INTERDIGIT TIMEOUT (seconds)....15 CPT...CALL PARK REVERSION TIME (minutes....1 PRD...CALL PARK RETURN DESTINATION.........ATDC TRT...TRANSFER RETURN TIME (seconds).......10 TRD...TRANSFER RETURN DESTINATION..........ATDC HFA...HANDS FREE ANSWERBACK RING TIME (secs). 0 CBT...CALLBACK QUEUE DELAY (minutes)..........5 MCA...MAXIMUM CALLBACK ATTEMPTS...............5 FNR...CALL FORWARD NO ANSWER TIME (seconds)..12 FBW...CALL FORWARD BUSY WAIT TIME (seconds)..15 . . . CAH...CALL ACCEPT WITH HELD PARTY........NO CWR...CALL WAIT RING THROUGH.............NO A1T...OFFHOOK ALERT TIME (seconds).......15 AFT...OFFHOOK ALERT CFNA TIME (seconds)..15 ART...OFFHOOK ALERT AUDIBLE SIGNAL..INSIDE RING


10. Verify the UGRP entries. • Type Y and press Enter to save

UGRP information in the database. • Type N and press Enter to abandon

all responses.


Cancel The Cancel feature on ITE display phones allows a user to disconnect a dialed party without hanging up the handset. The feature can also be used to cancel call transfers, a conference addition, or callback messages. Modify the station button template to include a cancel (CNCL) feature button using the procedure described at the beginning of the chapter.

Database Requirement for Cancel

Table 62. Database Requirement for Cancel


BTNS

BTN – Feature Button CNCL Button used to cancel call transfers, callbacks, etc.

M M


244 Aastra– 2512-004

Conference The Conference feature allows up to seven parties in a Conference call. To preserve the sound quality of the conversation, station users should include no more than four external parties in a conference.

The Conference feature button can be pressed to place the conference on hold or to add parties to the conference. For example, if a party in a conference needs to pick up another call, that party must first press the Conference button, not the Hold button. When a conferenced party places the conference on hold, the other parties can continue talking in conference.

Also see Group Listen.

Table 63. Class of Service Parameters - Conference/Group Listen


CLOS

CNF - Conference and Group Listen

Yes/No When set to Yes, allows the user access to the Conference and Group Listen feature.

DXL - XFER/CONF - LOCAL

Yes/No Allows the user to transfer calls and to set up a conference call to a local number.

DXO - XFER/CONF - DDD

Yes/No Allows the user to transfer calls and set up a conference call to a long distance number.

ATC - All Trunk Conference

Yes/No When set to Yes, allows users to setup conferences with trunk facilities. If the user goes onhook, the trunks continue the conference through the conference bridge.

BTNS

BTN – Button CNFR For an ITE device, the Conference and Group Listen feature can be added to the button template.

Use Conference Table 64. Use Conference

Phone Type Use

ITE – All

Feature Button + Next Party Number + Optional

Announcement + = Connected to Conference. Repeat sequence to add additional parties.

MM


Aastra – 2512-004 245

Phone Type Use

STE From dial tone + + Next Party Number +

Optional Announcement + + = Connected to Conference. Repeat sequence to add additional parties.

ITE4

From dial tone + + Next Party Number +

Optional Announcement + + = Connected to Conference. Repeat sequence to add additional parties.

ITE760 ITE780 Feature Key + Number + Optional Announcement +

=- Connected to Conference. Repeat sequence to add additional parties.

Do Not Disturb The Do Not Disturb feature allows users to block all incoming calls to the station. When the feature is enabled, callers hear ringing, a busy signal, or a "please call back later" message (depending on database configuration).

When a call rings at a station in the DND state, the extension lamp flashes on that station as well as other stations having the same extension. The line lamp flashes until the call is answered on another phone. The "Do Not Disturb" text appears on display-type phones when the feature is active.

When the Do Not Disturb feature is invoked, it applies to the station. This is the only call feature controlled by the class of service.

Database Requirements for Do Not Disturb

Table 65. Database Requirements for Do Not Disturb


UGRP/CHP

DND - Do Not Disturb

(R)inging, (B)usy, (D)istinct

Enter a letter to indicate what the caller hears after calling a station with Do Not Disturb activated. • Enter R for Ringing. • Enter B for Busy tone or forwarding. • Enter D for “Please call back later.”

M M


246 Aastra– 2512-004


If Call Forward - Busy is implemented, the call is forwarded as specified for the feature.

BTNS


DNTD To assign the Do Not Disturb feature to the specified button. STE devices implement this feature with the *6 feature code.

FONE

DND - Do Not Disturb Allowed

Yes/No Enter 0 to list the index of the predefined Button Template Numbers (created under BTNS).

Do Not Disturb Status

A=Active I=Inactive

Used to force the user’s phone in or out of a Do Not Disturb state instead of using the feature button. Enter A to Activate the Do Not Disturb feature I to Inactivate. Users can still use the feature button to activate or inactivate the feature as needed.

Set Do Not Disturb Call Handling Parameters To set the Call Handling Parameters for the Do Not Disturb feature:

Step Action Display


2. Type U and press Enter. SELECT MODE:PRINT, DISPLAY, UPDATE, TITLES. => U

3. Type M and press Enter. UPDT MODE: C-Create,M-Modify,D-Delete . . => M

4. Type the User Group number to be modified, and press Enter.

USER GROUP NUMBER (1- 128) OR ?. . . . . => 1

5. Type CHP and press Enter to access Call Handling Parameters.

SELECT SUBCOMMAND or ?. . . . . . . . . . => CHP

6. Type DND and press Enter to modify the Do Not Disturb field.

If Call Forward - Busy is implemented, the call is forwarded as specified for the feature.

SPECIFY FIELD TO MODIFY or "-" or ? . . . => DND

7. Select an audio treatment that callers hear after calling a station with Do Not Disturb activated. • Type R and press Enter for

Ringing. • Type B and press Enter for Busy

tone or forwarding.

DO NOT DISTURB Treatment(R)inging, (B)usy,

(D)istnct..................................=> D

MM


Aastra – 2512-004 247

Step Action Display

• Type D and press Enter for a "Please call back later" message.

8. Press Enter. SPECIFY FIELD TO MODIFY or "ALL" or ?. . . =>


** CALL HANDLING PARAMETERS USER GROUP#1 09/22/00

DIG. . .STATION DIAGNOSTICS ALLOWED. . . . . . .YES DND. . .DO NOT DISTURB TREATMENT. . . . . .DISTINCT NIT. . .NORMAL INTERDIGIT TIMEOUT (seconds) . . .10 FIT. . .FAST INTERDIGIT TIMEOUT (seconds). . . . .5 CPT. . .CALL PARK REVERSION TIME (minutes) . . . .3 PRD. . .CALL PARK RETURN DESTINATION. . . . . .LINE . . .

10. Verify the CHP entries. • Type Y and press Enter to save

CHP information in the database. • Type N and press Enter to


DOES UPDATE VERIFY?

Assign the Do Not Disturb Feature You must assign the Do Not Disturb feature to the station before it can be invoked. You can also activate Do Not Disturb in the database (instead of pressing the feature button or dialing the feature code).

Step Action Display



3. Type M and press Enter. UPDT MODE: C-Create M-Modify D-Delete... => M

4. Type the port number to be modified, and press Enter.

ENTER PORT NUMBER, LOCATION, or ?....... => 1.1.3.1

PORT TYPE..................................ITE

5. Type DND and press Enter to modify the Do Not Disturb field.

Specify ITE /STE Field to Modify or - or ?. => DND

6. Select the do not disturb option for the phone(s). • Accept the default (Y) by pressing

Enter if the feature can be activated at the phone.

• Type N and press Enter if the feature is not allowed.

DO NOT DISTURB ALLOWED: Y=YES; N=NO........Y => Y

7. Type DNS and press Enter.

The Do Not Disturb feature should be

Specify ITE /STE Field to Modify or - or ?. => DNS

M M


248 Aastra– 2512-004

Step Action Display set to Inactive to avoid confusion. Users can press the feature button to activate the feature as needed.

8. Select a Do Not Disturb Status for the port. • Accept the default (A) by pressing

Enter to Activate the feature. • Type I and press Enter to

deactivate the feature.

DO NOT DISTURB STATUS:A=ACTIVE;I=INACTIVE.A => I

9. Press Enter. Specify ITE /STE Field to Modify or - or ?. =>







(N)one; (D)etailed; (P)icture; (B)oth..B =>

11. Review the Display. *** VERIFY DISPLAY ***

***...STATION.......................PORT 01.01.3.01

***...STATION EQUIPMENT TYPE.............ITE BTP...BUTTON TEMPLATE NUMBER.............1 OAM...OAI ASSOCIATED MEMBER..............NO DND...DO NOT DISTURB ALLOWED.............YES DNS...DO NOT DISTURB STATUS..............INACTIVE BUTTON TYPE LINE/FEATURE ID

1.........FEATURE........CALL TRANSFER 2.........FEATURE........CONFERENCE . . . 10.........FEATURE........DO NOT DISTURB. . .



all responses.


MM


Aastra – 2512-004 249

Do Not Disturb – Distinctive The Distinctive “Do Not Disturb” feature allows only internal incoming calls to the station to hear the distinctive message. This feature is for internal (station or Attendant Console) callers. When an internal caller dials the blocked station, the System’s Voice Recognition Unit (VRU) announces “Please call back later” followed by a busy tone. External callers hear a busy tone rather than the verbal message. Modify the station button template to include a DNTD feature button using the procedures described in Chapter 6.

Database Requirements for Distinctive Do Not Disturb

Table 66. Database Requirements for Distinctive Do Not Disturb


UGRP/CHP

DND - Do Not Disturb

(R)inging, (B)usy, (D)istinct

Enter a letter to indicate what the caller hears after calling a station with Do Not Disturb activated. • Enter R for Ringing. • Enter B for Busy tone or forwarding. • Enter D for “Please call back later.” If Call Forward - Busy is implemented, the call is forwarded as specified for the feature.

Use Do Not Disturb Table 67. Use Do Not Disturb

Phone Type Use

ITE-All

Feature Button = Do Not Disturb On or Off STE and ITE4

From dial tone - = Do Not Disturb On

From dial tone - = Do Not Disturb Off ITE760 ITE780 Feature Key = Do Not Disturb On or Off

Event Timer The event timer feature provides display phones with a stopwatch-type timer display in minutes and seconds. The event timer is activated and deactivated by pressing the Event Timer (EVTM) feature button on the phone.

M M


250 Aastra– 2512-004

Database Requirements for Event Timer Table 68. Database Requirements for Event Timer


BTNS

BTN – Feature Button EVTM Add the Event Timer button to the template.

Group Listen The Group Listen feature allows any active participant in a conversation or conference call to add passive participants to the call. The parties added through the Group Listen feature remain in a listen-only mode and cannot participate in the conversation. Up to 10 passive participants can be added to a call.

Database Requirements for Group Listen Table 69. Database Requirements for Group Listen


BTNS

BTN – Button GRPL The GRPL button must be added to the template to allow the Group Listen feature.

Use Group Listen Table 70. Use Group Listen

Phone Type Use

ITE – All

Feature Button + Number + = Connected to Conference in Listen Only Mode

STE and ITE 4 NA ITE760 ITE780 Feature Key + Number + = Connected to

Conference in Listen Only Mode

Hands-Free Auto Answer Hands-Free Auto Answer allows calls coming into a station to be answered automatically without having to pick up the handset or press the speaker button. Ending one call and receiving the next can be automatic. The class of service allows the user access to this

MM


Aastra – 2512-004 251

feature and the User Group Call Handling Parameters defines the number of seconds in which phone using Hands-Free Auto Answer is automatically answered.

Database Requirements for Hands-Free Auto Answer Table 71. Database Requirements for Hands-Free Auto Answer


CLOS

HFA – Hands-Free Auto Answer

Yes/No Allows users to access the Hands Free answer feature.

This feature is only available with an ITE instrument

BTNS

BTN – Feature Button HFAA The Hands Free Auto Answer feature button is required for this feature.

UGRP/CHP

HFA – Hands-Free Answerback Ring Time

(0 to 15 seconds) Enter the number of seconds of ring time (0 to 15 seconds) after which the phones using this CHP table is automatically answered.

HFT - Auto Answer Notification Tone

(N)one, (B)arge-in tone, (Z)ip tone, (ZZ) Zip Zip tone

Enter the tone heard when the Auto Answer feature is used.

Use Hands-Free Auto Answer Table 72. Use Hands-Free Auto Answer


ITE - All

Feature Button = Activated or Inactivated ITE 760 ITE 780 Feature Key

M M


252 Aastra– 2512-004

Hold This feature allows the user to put a call on hold from the conversational state. Three types of hold are supported:

• Call Hold - A user hears dial tone after placing a call on hold and can then place another call on the same line.

• Normal Hold - A user hears silence (sometimes called High and Dry) after placing a call on hold. The user can then press a line select button to place another call or use other station features.

• Exclusive Hold - Exclusive Hold can be helpful when a directory number appears at more than one station. When a user places a call on hold, only the user who placed the call on hold can retrieve it. A user with the same directory number on a different station is not able to retrieve the call.

The database can be configured to allow use of the following enhancements to the Hold feature:

• Automatic Hold - Allows the user to automatically place a call on hold when a line select is pressed to retrieve a call on another line.

• Station Timed Hold - Allows a held call to revert, after the period of time specified for the User Group, to the line that placed it on hold. This prevents a caller from being on hold indefinitely.

• Music on Hold - Defines the music source for hold when the feature is allowed.

The following lists the database tables and parameters that affect the Hold feature:

Database Requirements for Hold

Table 73. Database Requirements for Hold


CLOS

MUS – Receive Music On Hold

Yes/No Determines if a line with this class of service, when placed on HOLD, hears audio, based on the HLD parameter of the line that placed this call on HOLD.

There is no parameter that can prevent a call from being placed on HOLD.

HLD – Hold Type • A – Hold without music • M – Hold with Calling

Party’s music source • I – Hold with Initiator’s

music source • N – Not Allowed

This parameter allows or disallows the HOLD feature and determines the audio source for the party placed on hold, if any.

BTNS

MM


Aastra – 2512-004 253



HOLD For an ITE device, the station requires a HOLD button on the template for use of the feature. For an STE device, the feature code *4 is used for the HOLD feature.

HTP – Hold Type • C – Call Hold • N – Normal Hold

“Call” Hold returns dial tone on the same line once a call is placed on hold. “Normal” hold returns “high-n-dry (silence).

Call Hold cannot be used for stations with the AUTOHOLD feature enabled. Likewise, AUTOHOLD cannot be used on stations where the button template specifies a hold type of “Call Hold”

FONE

AHL – Automatic Hold

Yes/No If set to “YES” when an additional line button is pressed on an ITE, the call on the original line is automatically placed on hold. If set to “NO”, the original call is dropped.

Automatic Hold cannot be turned on if the button template defines the Hold Type (HTP) as “Call Hold”.

UGRP/CHP

STH – Station Timed Hold

0-127 min This parameter determines how long a call can remain on HOLD before ringing the line that placed the call on hold. Setting a “0” allows a call to remain on HOLD indefinitely.

Hold Feature Button The Hold feature is invoked by pressing a feature button when a user accepts a waiting call.

When used with Call Waiting, Hold functions differently, depending on the Hold Type set for the button template (Normal Hold or Call Hold.)

M M


254 Aastra– 2512-004

Add a Hold Button and Create the Hold Type

Step Action Display

1. Type BTNS and press Enter. SELECT COMMAND => BTNS



4. Type the number of the button template to be modified, and press Enter.


5. Type ? and press Enter for a display of valid responses.

Specify BTNS Field to Modify or - or ?....... => ?

- ...ALL BTN...BUTTON CTO...CALL TERMINATION HTP...HOLD TYPE IRS...RE-SELECT TTL...TITLE IDENTIFIER FOR TEMPLATE

6. Type BTN and press Enter. Specify BTNS Field to Modify or - or ?...... => BTN

7. Type the number of the button to configure with HOLD, and press Enter.

BUTTON NUMBER TO MODIFY: Return=END........ => 5

8. Type HOLD and press Enter to assign HOLD to the button.

BTN-5 TYPE: S=Sel; U=Unas; Feature or ?..U => HOLD

9. Type HTP and press Enter to select the hold type to be used.

Specify BTNS Field to Modify or - or ?..... => HTP

10. Type C and press Enter for Call Hold, which allows the user to receive dial tone after pressing.

HOLD TYPE: N=NORMAL; C=CALL...............N => C

11. Type CTO and press Enter to set the call termination for the line.

High-N-Dry call termination (H) requires users to press the switch hook to get dial tone.

Specify BTNS Field to Modify or - or ?..... => CTO

12. Assign what happens at Call Termination by entering one of the following: • Type P and press Enter if dial

tone is returned on the prime line (even if the call is placed on a different line).

• Accept the default (H) by pressing Enter for no return dial tone.

• Type R and press Enter if dial

CALL TERMINATION: P=PRESELECT; H=HIGH-N-DRY;

R=REORGINATION...........................H => P

MM


Aastra – 2512-004 255

Step Action Display tone is returned to the same line on which the call originated.

13. Press Enter. Specify BTNS Field to Modify or - or ?...... =>



BTN....1.....FEATURE.....LAST NUMBER REDIAL BTN....2.....FEATURE.....CALL TRANSFER BTN....3.....FEATURE.....CONFERENCE BTN....4.....FEATURE.....CALLBACK BTN....5.....FEATURE.....HOLD . . . BTN...11.....FEATURE.....CALL FORWARD HTP...HOLD TYPE.................................CALL ***...HOLD RETRIEVE........................ORIGINATE CTO...CALL TERMINATION.....................PRESELECT IRS...RE-SELECT..................................YES


information in the database. • Type N and press Enter to



Configure Timed Hold

Step Action Display

1. Type UGRP, and press Enter. SELECT COMMAND => UGRP


3. Type M and press Enter. UPDT MODE: C-Create,M-Modify,D-Delete ....... => M


USER GROUP NUMBER (1-128) OR ?............... => 56

5. Type CHP and press Enter. SELECT SUBCOMMAND or ?....................... => CHP

6. Type STH and press Enter to set the Station Timed Hold field.

SPECIFY FIELD TO MODIFY or "-" for ALL....... => STH

7. Type the number of minutes until an on-hold call returns to the user who placed it on hold, and press Enter.

STATION TIMED HOLD (0-127 MINUTES) .......... => 8

8. Press Enter. SPECIFY FIELD TO MODIFY or "-" for ALL....... =>


. . .

DOES UPDATE MODIFY? =>

10. Verify the CHP entries. • Type Y and press Enter to save


M M


256 Aastra– 2512-004

Step Action Display CHP information in the database.


Assign Normal Hold to an ITE Port Assign a button template that includes a Normal Hold Button to the phone. Remember that the Hold Type set for the template applies to all lines on a multiple line ITE, and be sure to confirm that Line Preselect is set for Prime Line use.

Assign Automatic Hold to an ITE Port To assign the Auto Hold feature to an ITE as you build the phone in the database:

Step Action Display



3. Type C and press Enter. UPDT MODE: C-Create M-Modify D-Delete.. => M

4. Type the number of the port to be configured, and press Enter.

ENTER PORT NUMBER, LOCATION, or ?...... => 1.1.3.2

PORT TYPE....................ITE

5. Type AHL and press Enter to access the Automatic Hold field.

Specify ITE/STE Field to Modify or - or ?.. => AHL

6. Type Y and press Enter to enable the station user to automatically place a call on hold by pressing a line select button.

AUTOMATIC HOLD: Y=YES; N=NO...............N => Y

7. Press Enter. Specify ITE/STE Field to Modify or - or ?... =>


display is not needed. • Type D and press Enter to

display the station definition, including a list of features, and assigned line select buttons.






MM


Aastra – 2512-004 257

Step Action Display ***...STATION....................PORT 01.01.3.02

***...STATION EQUIPMENT TYPE..........ITE BTP...BUTTON TEMPLATE NUMBER..........2 DND...DO NOT DISTURB ALLOWED..........YES DNS...DO NOT DISTURB STATUS...........INACTIVE VMC...InteMail MESSAGE DESK OPERATOR..NO AND...ALPHANUMERIC DISPLAY............LCD ADP...DESTINATION DISPLAY PREFERRED...YES AHL...AUTOMATIC HOLD..................YES HRC...SWITCHHOOK RINGER CUTOFF........NO ADD...ADT ANALOG SIDE DTMF DIALING....NO LPR...LINE PRESELECT TYPE.............PRIME & RING . . . DOES UPDATE VERIFY?


FONE information in the database.



Use Hold Table 74. Use Hold

Phone Type Use

ITE – All

Feature Button = Call on Hold

= Return to Held Party

= Switch between Parties STE

+ = Call on Hold


+ = Switch between parties ITE4

+ = Call on Hold


+ = Switch between parties

M M


258 Aastra– 2512-004

Phone Type Use

There are 3 ways to put a call on hold:

= The “R” key

= The Hold softkey

- Optional Feature Key

ITE760 ITE780

= Call on Hold


= Switch between Parties

Exclusive Hold Feature Button A directory number can be assigned to up to 32 different stations. When Exclusive Hold is used to place a call on hold, only the user who originally put the call on hold can retrieve it. You can add an Exclusive Hold feature button to the button template for stations that share a directory number to allow access to the feature.

Exclusive Hold is a feature, not a hold type. It cannot be invoked by dialing the Hold feature code, or be used at STE stations.

Database Requirements for Exclusive Hold

The requirements are the same as for the Hold feature, but the Exclusive Hold feature button must be added.

Table 75. Database Requirements for Exclusive Hold


CLOS

MUS – Receive Music On Hold

Yes/No Determines if a line with this class of service, when placed on HOLD, hears audio, based on the HLD parameter of the line that placed this call on HOLD.

There is no parameter that can prevent a call from being placed on HOLD.

HLD – Hold Type • A – Hold without music

• M – Hold with Calling Party’s music source

This parameter allows or disallows the HOLD feature and determines the audio source for the party placed on hold, if any.

MM


Aastra – 2512-004 259


• I – Hold with Initiator’s music source

• N – Not Allowed BTNS

HOLD For an ITE device, the station requires a HOLD button on the template for use of the feature. For an STE device, the feature code *4 is used for the HOLD feature.

BTN – Button

Exclusive Hold (EXHL)

If exclusive hold is required, the button template for the station must have an Exclusive Hold feature button assigned in the template.

HTP – Hold Type • C – Call Hold • N – Normal Hold

“Call” Hold returns dial tone on the same line once a call is placed on hold. “Normal” hold returns “high-n-dry (silence).

Call Hold cannot be used for stations with the AUTOHOLD feature enabled. Likewise, AUTOHOLD cannot be used on stations where the button template specifies a hold type of “Call Hold”

FONE

AHL – Automatic Hold

Yes/No If set to “YES” when an additional line button is pressed on an ITE, the call on the original line is automatically placed on hold. If set to “NO”, the original call is dropped.

Automatic Hold cannot be turned on if the button template defines the Hold Type (HTP) as “Call Hold”.

UGRP/CHP

STH – Station Timed Hold

0-127 min This parameter determines how long a call can remain on HOLD before ringing the line that placed the call on hold. Setting a “0” allows a call to remain on HOLD indefinitely.

M M


260 Aastra– 2512-004

Last Number Redial Last Number Redial redials the last outside number dialed by pressing the Redial feature button.

Database Requirements for Last Number Redial

Table 76. Database Requirements for Last Number Redial


CLOS

LNR – Last Number Redial

Yes/No Allows use of the Last Number Redial feature.

BTNS

LNRD For an ITE, the button template should have a Last Number Redial button. On an STE, the feature code #9 dials the last outside number dialed from the station.

This feature code also works on an ITE station that does not have a LNRD button.


DISP The Display button is required to enable the ability to view (without dialing) the last number dialed.

Use Last Number Redial Table 77. Use Last Number Redial


ITE All

Feature Button = Last External Number Dialed is Redialed

+ Feature Buttons = Display the Number

From dial tone - = Last External Number Dialed is redialed ITE760 ITE780 Or Feature Key = Last External Number Dialed

is redialed

+ = Display the Number

MM


Aastra – 2512-004 261


From dial tone - = Last External Number Dialed is redialed ITE4 and STE

From dial tone - = Last External Number Dialed is redialed

Offhook Alert The Station Off-Hook Alert feature alerts a destination station programmed in the system database that a specially marked station has:

• Remained off-hook for a predetermined period of time without digits being dialed. • Remained off-hook after dialing an incomplete or invalid dialing plan. • Remained off-hook after receiving reorder tone.

OffHook Alert is an option often used in hospitals or other areas where immediate notification is essential when a phone has been offhook for a certain length of time. When the feature is used by a hospital, the alerting phone is located within reach of a patient. The destination is normally a monitoring Nurses station. If the patient has difficulty or is in trouble, the patient can remove or even knock the handset off hook. After a short time (maximum 15 seconds) the Nurses station rings.

If the nurses' phone has a display, the room number shows indicating the location where the alert has originated. Alerts are also recorded in the Call Detail Recording (CDR) records for future administrative use.

The OffHook Alert feature offers several audible alert options and can work with the Directory Lookup System to provide display information.

Database Requirements for Offhook Alert Table 78. Database Requirements for Offhook Alert


UGRP/CHP

A1T - Off Hook Alert Time

Time in seconds. Enter the number of seconds (1 to 15) the phone is off hook before the alert activates.

AFT - Off Hook Alert Call Forward – No Answer

Time in Seconds Enter the number of seconds (1 to 60) the alert number is attempted before the call is forwarded.

ART - Off Hook Alert Audible Signal

• I for Inside ring • O for Outside ring • F for Feature ring • C for Continuous ring

Assign the type of audible ring the alert will activate at the alerted station.

SPAR

OAR - Log Initial Alert Yes/No Enter Y for Yes if you have purchased station-

M M


262 Aastra– 2512-004

Field Option Description Calls to-station Call Detailed Recording and want it to

log the occurrence of each initial alert call.

LINE

Name (name/number directory)

Text The title of the voice line must include information pertaining to this feature. For example, in a hospital situation, Room 201A.

CFN - Call Forward No Answer

Directory Number Enter the directory number where the alert can be directed in the case that the original alert directory number (Usually the number assigned for a normal Call Forward/No Answer feature).

OHA Off Hook Alert Destination Enter the voice line to call if this handset remains off-hook for a 1 to 60 second period of time.

Privacy and Privacy Release All PointSpan stations with appearances of the same line have complete privacy on that line. No other stations can enter the conversation. This prevents accidental interruptions while in conversation. However, once the call has been put on hold, other stations may retrieve the call unless the Exclusive Hold feature is specified.

Privacy Release and Privacy control whether voice lines installed at more than one station permit all users to participate in conversations on the shared line. A station can have either a Privacy (PRVY) button or a Privacy Release (PVRL) button, but never both buttons. The Privacy and Privacy Release buttons operate as follows:

• Privacy Release - A user presses the Privacy Release button; the Privacy Release lamp lights at all stations that include the line. When the lamp is on, the station is in Privacy Release mode, and other users with the same voice line can go off hook to join a conversation on the shared line. If two shared lines are in conversation, both must turn off Privacy Release to have a truly private conversation.

• Privacy - The Privacy button operation is the exact opposite of the Privacy Release button operation. A user presses the Privacy button; the Privacy lamp lights at all stations that include the line. When the lamp is on, the station is in Privacy mode, and other users with the same voice line hear silence if they go off hook. They cannot join a conversation on the shared line.

The LINE command includes a field for configuring a voice line with an initial state of constant Privacy or constant Privacy Release. If either the Privacy (PRVY) or Privacy Release (PVRL) feature button is included at a station, the user can press the button to enter the desired mode. Modify the station button template to include PRVY and PVRL feature buttons using the procedure described at the beginning of the chapter.

MM


Aastra – 2512-004 263

Database Requirements for Privacy Release and Privacy Table 79.Database Requirements for Privacy Release and Privacy


SPAR

PRM Yes/No Set to Yes to allow silent monitoring of voice lines in Privacy Release mode.

BTNS

PRVY Privacy Button BTN – Feature Buttons PVRL Privacy Release Button

LINE

APR-Automatic Privacy Release

Yes/No • Y = Assigns automatic Privacy Release to this line. Allows automatic privacy release without a Privacy Release button requirement. When the user picks up on the line select button, the feature is invoked.

• N = The feature must be activated by pressing the PVRL feature button on the phone.

Privacy Release Privacy Release can join up to six parties with the same extension to an existing call. Use one of the two privacy release methods to enable the feature:

• Normal - Allows up to six stations with the same directory number to join the initial party in conversation by pressing the Privacy Release (PVRL) feature button on the ITE. Modify the station button template to include a PVRL feature button using the procedure described at the beginning of the chapter.

• Automatic (constant) - Allows a maximum of six stations with the same directory number to join the initial party in conversation by going off hook on the line.

• (No feature button is required to invoke privacy release.)

This feature cannot be activated when the original call is a three-way transfer or a regular conference call. The privacy release feature is implemented via conference bridges. If the feature is being activated for more than a few users, you may need to install additional conference bridge cards in the system.

M M


264 Aastra– 2512-004

Modify Auto or Normal Privacy Release

You can configure a voice line to enable users that share a directory number to automatically (without pressing a feature button) join a conversation in progress on the shared voice line.

Step Action Display





DIRECTORY NUMBER or ?................... => 5018

5. Type the user group number for the directory number, and press Enter.

USER GROUP.............................. => 1


6. Type APR and press Enter to set the Automatic Privacy Release field.

• When automatic privacy release is

available, users of the shared line can enter conversations automatically by selecting the line.

• When automatic privacy release is not allowed, the user needs to press the PRVL feature button before the other users can enter the conversation.

Specify VLIN Field to Modify or - or ?.... => APR

7. Select automatic privacy release. • Type Y and press Enter to allow

automatic entry into shared line conversations.

• Type N and press Enter if the PRVL feature button must be pressed to allow entry of other users into conversations.

AUTOMATIC PRIVACY RELEASE: Y=YES; N=NO.....=> Y

8. Press Enter. Specify VLIN Field to Modify or - or ?....... =>


DRN...DIRECTORY NUMBER...................5018 UGP...USER GROUP NUMBER..................1 CLOS...CLASS OF SERVICE...................1 CPG...CALL PICKUP GROUP NUMBER...........0 ACD...ACD PILOT NUMBER...................NONE HUN...HUNT PILOT NUMBER..................NONE OAM...OAI ASSOCIATED MEMBER..............NO APR...AUTOMATIC PRIVACY RELEASE..........YES CAD...100 NUM ABBREVIATED DIALING........YES DIA...STATION DIAGNOSTIC ALLOWED.........NO . . . DOES UPDATE VERIFY ? =>

MM


Aastra – 2512-004 265

Step Action Display



responses.


Queuing - Callback This feature can be used when an outside call cannot be completed because there are no outbound trunks available. A Callback Queue Limit (total calls that can be queued) is associated with each callback. If no trunk line becomes available, or if the user does not answer the system ring within the established time limit, the system cancels the call from the queue.

Callback Queue Functionality The switch queues the calls it cannot complete, up to five calls per voice line.

Table 80. Call Back Queue Functionality

Function

1. There is no trunk available for the outbound call. The user hears “Depress Callback to queue call.”

2. The user presses the CLBK feature button and hears the callback queue number assigned to this call.

3. When an outgoing trunk becomes available, the system sends a priority ring (three short rings).

4. The user answers and remains on the line. The queued call is connected automatically.

Database Requirements for Callback Queueing Table 81. Database Requirements for Callback Queueing


CLOS

CBQ - Callback Queue Bypass

Yes/No Choose Yes (Y) to activate Callback Queue.

UGRP

CBT - Callback Queue Delay

Time in minutes Enter the number of minutes to wait between each callback attempt (1-15). Using the Callback Queue in the Route table, the switch notifies the user with a priority ring if a line is

M M


266 Aastra– 2512-004

Field Option Description available X number of times every X number of minutes.

MCA - Maximum Callback Attempts

1-15 Attempts Enter the number of times the system attempts to notify a user when a queued line is available. 1 to 15 attempts is possible.

BTNS


CLBK The CLBK button must be on the button template used.

ROUT

CBQ – Callback Queue

Add the step Add the CBQ step to the route guides involved.

Assign UGRP/CHP Parameters

Step Action Display




4. Type the user group number associated with the directory number to be affected, and press Enter.

USER GROUP NUMBER (1- 63) OR ?........... => 1

5. Type CHP and press Enter. SELECT SUBCOMMAND or ? => CHP

6. Type CBT and press Enter to modify the Callback Queue Delay field.

SPECIFY FIELD TO MODIFY or - or ?......... => CBT

7. Type the number of minutes you want the switch to wait between Callback attempts, and press Enter.

CALLBACK QUEUE DELAY (1-15 minutes)......5 => 3

8. Type MCA to modify the Maximum Callback Attempts field, and press Enter.

SPECIFY FIELD TO MODIFY or - or ?......... => MCA

9. Type the maximum number of callback attempts (1 to 15) the switch will perform before abandoning callback, and press Enter.

MAXIMUM CALLBACK ATTEMPTS................5 => 10

10. Press Enter. SPECIFY FIELD TO MODIFY or - or ?......... =>


** CALL HANDLING PARAMETERS FOR USER GROUP # 1

DIG...STATION DIAGNOSTICS ALLOWED...........YES DND...DO NOT DISTURB TREATMENT..............DISTINCT NIT...NORMAL INTERDIGIT TIMEOUT (seconds)...5 FIT...FAST INTERDIGIT TIMEOUT (seconds).....15 CPT...CALL PARK REVERSION TIME (minutes)....1 PRD...CALL PARK RETURN DESTINATION..........ATDC TRT...TRANSFER RETURN TIME (seconds)........10

MM


Aastra – 2512-004 267

Step Action Display TRD...TRANSFER RETURN DESTINATION...........ATDC . . . CBT...CALLBACK QUEUE DELAY (minutes)........3 MCA...MAXIMUM CALLBACK ATTEMPTS.............10 . . . ORT...OAI RING TIMEOUT.......................15 CFL...CALL FORWARD BZ/NA LOOK AHEAD..........NO MNT...MONITOR NOTIFICATION TONE INTERVAL.....30 ACH...AUTOMATIC CONFERENCE WITH HELD PARTY...NO FLC...FLUTTER LINE LAMP ON CONFERENCE HOLD...NO ACC...AUTO CANCEL HELD CONFERENCE.......YES CAH...CALL ACCEPT WITH HELD PARTY.......YES CWR...CALL WAIT RING THROUGH............NO A1T...OFFHOOK ALERT TIME (seconds)......15 AFT...OFFHOOK ALERT CFNA TIME (seconds).15 ART...OFFHOOK ALERT AUDIBLE SIGNAL......INSIDE RING

12. Verify the CHP entries. • Type Y and press Enter to save CHP


responses.


Add the Callback Queue Step to the Route Guide Insert the Callback Queue step just after the trunk group step and add the number of minutes to queue. Callback Queueing then applies to that trunk group.

Step Action Display

1. Type ROUT and press Enter. SELECT COMMAND => ROUT



4. Type the route guide number to be modified, and press Enter.

ROUTE GUIDE # or ?.......................... => 1

5. Review the displayed Route Guide steps so that you can determine where to place changes.

*** ROUTE GUIDE # 1 06/11/00 10:39:38

1 TRUNK INSERT 1 FROM NNP FILE 2 TRUNK GROUP 1 -- FRL: 0 -- PREFIX DIGIT STRING# 1 3 BUSYOUT

6. Type I and press Enter to insert a step into the route guide.

In this example, the new step is inserted before the third step.

SPECIFY UPDATE MODE: I=INSERT; R=REPLACE;

D=DELETE; T=TITLE; RETURN=END.............. => I

7. Type the number of the route guide step that the new step precedes, and press Enter.

SPECIFY CHOICE #............................. => 3

8. Type ? and press Enter to view the valid CHOICE TYPE OR ? ............................ => ?

M M


268 Aastra– 2512-004

Step Action Display route guide steps. GRP.....GROUP (TRUNK, DATA, MODEM, RSPG, OR LDIU)

CST.....CLOST PER MINUTE STQ.....SHORT TERM QUEUE OVF.....OVERFLOW NNP.....TRUNK CHOICE (NNP INSERT) CBQ.....CALLBACK QUEUE ATC.....ROUTE TO ATTENDANT RGC.....ROUTE GUIDE CHAIN CPN.....CALLING PARTY NUMBER BAL.....BALANCED ROUTE GUIDE

9. Type CBQ and press Enter to insert a Callback Queue step.

Busyout is heard if no outgoing trunk becomes available within 10 minutes.

CHOICE TYPE OR ? ........................ => CBQ

10. Type the maximum time in minutes that calls remain in queue before proceeding to the next step in the route guide, and press Enter.

CALLBACK QUEUE (Minutes)................. => 10

11. Review the route guide display. *** ROUTE GUIDE # 1 06/11/00 10:40:38

1 TRUNK INSERT 1 FROM NNP FILE 2 TRUNK GROUP 1--uAL: 0 -- PREFIX DIGIT STRING # 1 3 CALLBACK QUEUE FOR 10 MINUTES 4 BUSYOUT


D=DELETE; T=TITLE; RETURN=END............ =>

12. Press Enter to end route guide modification.

SPECIFY UPDATE MODE: I=INSERT; R=REPLACE; D=DELETE; T=TITLE; RETURN=END............ =>

. . .

DOES UPDATE VERIFY?

13. Verify the ROUT entries. • Type Y and press Enter to save

ROUT information in the database. • Type N and press Enter to abandon

all responses.


Cancel a Callback

Function Action

Press to view the Callback number.

Cancel a Callback before the system announces the number

Press while the number is displayed to

MM


Aastra – 2512-004 269

Function Action cancel the Callback.

Cancel a Callback after the system announces the number

Hang up before the call is placed.

Queuing – Short Term Short Term Queuing (also referred to as "on line" queuing) allows a user to remain off-hook and wait in queue a specified number of seconds for a busy outgoing trunk line to become available. This type of queue differs from Callback Queuing in that the user waits for the trunk while offhook. There is no feature button and there are no announcements.

If an outgoing line becomes busy within the number of seconds specified in the Short Term Queue (STQ) event in the route guide, the system automatically places the call. When the system encounters a Short Term queuing event, all trunk groups referenced previously in the route guide are queued.

Short Term Queue Functionality The switch queues the calls it cannot complete, up to five calls per voice line.

Table 82.Short Term Queue Functionality

Function

1. There is no trunk available for the outbound call. The user hears “All Lines Busy, please hold.”

2. There is no feature button. The user stays offhook and waits for the system to connect to an available trunk.

3. When an outgoing trunk becomes available, the system automatically places the call.

Database Requirements for Short Term Queue Table 83. Short Term Queuing Parameters in CLOS


CLOS

STQ - On Line Queue Bypass

Yes/No Answer Yes to enable short term queueing.

STQ - Queue Priority 0-3 The priority for this line when it waits in queue for an outside trunk.

ROUT

STQ – Short Term Step + Number of Add the Short Term Queueing step to the route guide after the

M M


270 Aastra– 2512-004

Parameter Option Description Queue seconds to queue Trunk Group step, plus the number of seconds to queue.

Add the Short Term Queue Step to the Route Guide Insert the Short Term Queue step after the trunk group step and add the number of seconds to queue. Short Term Queueing then applies to that trunk group.

Step Action Display

1. Type ROUT and press Enter. SELECT COMMAND => ROUT



4. Type the route guide number to be modified, and press Enter.

ROUTE GUIDE # or ?.......................... => 1

5. Review the displayed Route Guide steps to determine where to place changes.

*** ROUTE GUIDE # 1 06/11/00 10:39:38

1 TRUNK INSERT 1 FROM NNP FILE 2 TRUNK GROUP 1 -- FRL: 0 -- PREFIX DIGIT STRING# 1 3 BUSYOUT

6. Type I and press Enter to insert a step into the route guide.


D=DELETE; T=TITLE; RETURN=END.............. => I

7. Type the step number that the new step precedes, and press Enter.

SPECIFY CHOICE #........................... => 3

8. Type STQ and press Enter to insert a Short Term Queue step.

CHOICE TYPE OR ? .......................... => STQ

9. Type the number of seconds to queue and press Enter.

QUEUE (Seconds)............................ => 120

10. Review the route guide display. *** ROUTE GUIDE # 1 06/11/00 10:40:38

1 TRUNK INSERT 1 FROM NNP FILE 2 TRUNK GROUP 1 -- FRL: 0 -- PREFIX DIGIT STRING # 1 3 QUEUE FOR 120 SECONDS 4 BUSYOUT


D=DELETE; T=TITLE; RETURN=END............ =>

11. Press Enter to end route guide modification.

SPECIFY UPDATE MODE: I=INSERT; R=REPLACE; D=DELETE; T=TITLE; RETURN=END............ =>

. . .

DOES UPDATE VERIFY?

12. Verify the ROUT entries. • Type Y and press Enter to save

ROUT information in the database. • Type N and press Enter to abandon

all responses.


MM


Aastra – 2512-004 271

Satellite Directory Numbers Connections between switches, voicemail systems, etc. use trunks. Users can access them with internal directory numbers called Satellite Directory Numbers. Satellite Directory Numbers are created and maintained using the DIRN command. See Chapter 6.

Silent Monitor Any Line The Silent Monitor Any Line feature allows any voice line to silently monitor any other voice line on the system. All lines are assigned a priority from 0-7 in CLOS, with seven being the highest priority. The priority determines which lines may monitor others. To monitor, a station must have a higher priority than the station it is monitoring.

Silent Monitor/Remote Silent Monitor • The Silent Monitor feature allows the user to monitor calls. • Remote Silent Monitor feature allows off-premise users to monitor telephone

conversations on the switch. An access code must be entered to use Remote Silent Monitor to prevent unauthorized use.

Monitor Operation The user presses the Monitor button and dials the directory number of the line to be monitored. The following capabilities apply to the Monitor feature:

• If the station includes a line select button for a line to be monitored, the monitoring party can press the line select instead of dialing the number.

• If the database is configured to support toggling between monitor modes, the monitoring user can dial the toggle character, (* − asterisk) to switch between the two supported modes.

• A ZIP-ZIP tone signals that the mode toggle is accepted. Both the monitoring and the monitored parties hear this tone when Split Mode is active. All parties hear the tone in Silent Monitor Mode (active).

• An STE, a remote telephone, or Spectralink phone can access the remote monitoring feature if the switch is configured to support it.

• Timed or unlimited monitoring from attendant consoles is supported. To configure either feature, set the TUM field under SPAR Updatable Parameters.

Monitor Types Also see the ACD Database Administration/Application Guide, 591-2371-nnn for more information.

The following are monitor types:

• Silent Monitor - Allows monitoring of a two-party call without being heard by either party.

M M


272 Aastra– 2512-004

• Split Monitor - Allows the monitoring party to speak privately with the user being monitored.

• Conference Monitor - Allows monitoring of calls involving more than two parties.

Configure the Monitor Feature The database can be configured to allow calls to be monitored only from the start or to allow monitoring parties to toggle between monitoring modes.

Database Requirements for Monitor

Table 84. Database Requirements for Monitor


CLOS

For Monitor:

TSM - Silent Monitor Option

• SA = Silent to Conference • PA = Split to Conference • SP = Silent to Split

Allows split monitor operation

ATM - Monitoring Priority

• 1-7 • 0 = Not Allowed

Provides a monitor priority number

For Monitor Toggle: MMT - Allow Trunk Silent Monitor Toggle

• NO -- None. • SC -- Silent to Conference. • PA -- Split to Conference. • SP -- Silent to Split.

A code indicating the type of toggle allowed between monitoring modes: Silent Monitor allows monitoring of a two-party call without being heard by either party. Split Monitor allows the monitoring party to speak privately with the user being monitored. Conference Monitor allows monitoring of calls involving more than two parties.

MIT - Play Monitor Initiated Tone

Yes/No If set to Yes, a tone indicates that a conversation is being monitored. The tone is required in some states.

ABM - Monitored Priority

• 1-7 • 0 = Not allowed

Enter a priority number for users of this class of service.

UGRP/CHP

MNT - Monitoring Notification Tone Interval

10 to 60 seconds The number of seconds between monitor warning tones. If no tone is needed, enter N for No Tone.

Monitor tone is required in some states.

SPAR

MM


Aastra – 2512-004 273


PRM - Privacy Release Monitor

Yes/No Establishes that a voice line can be monitored without being blocked through the Privacy Release feature.

MSC - Monitor at Start of Call

Yes/No Limits monitoring to the beginning of a call.

BTNS


MNTR The button to add to the template.

Configure Remote Silent Monitor In addition to the command fields above, set the following fields to configure Remote Silent Monitor.

Database Requirements for Remote Silent Monitor

Table 85. Additional Database Requirements for Remote Silent Monitor


GRPS

SAC Trunk Group System Access Code

A system access code must be specified for the trunk. A ZIP tone indicates that the code is accepted and that the user can enter the authorization code that permits access to the inside (on-switch) dial tone.

NFIT

NFIT - Numeric Feature Code Command

Create a new feature code

A Numeric Feature Interpret Code must be specified to support remote monitoring. The monitoring user must dial the feature code to activate monitoring. A ZIP-ZIP tone confirms that the switch accepts the feature code and is waiting for the directory number of the line to be monitored.

Numeric Feature Interpret Table (NFIT) Command The Numeric Feature Interpret Table (NFIT) command is used to add, change, remove, or display the numeric feature codes. The user can dial the NFIT codes to access station-level system features without using a feature button. The FDD table must contain a Numeric Feature Code (NMFT) access level for the user group wishing to access these feature codes.

M M


274 Aastra– 2512-004

Update a Numeric Feature Code

Step Action Display

1. Type NFIT and press Enter. SELECT COMMAND => NFIT


In the following example, the string A,57,CLPD means: Add code 57 for accessing the Call Pickup - Directed feature.

Enter strings in the following three-part format separated by commas: • A letter to indicate the action

being performed: A to Add a code, C to change a Code, R to remove a Code, and D to display a Code.

• A number to indicate the feature code number users will dial to access the feature.

• Four letters for the feature mnemonic. Use CLPD for Call Pickup Directed.

SELECT MODE: PRINT, DISPLAY, UPDATE=> U

3. Enter a string to describe the numeric feature interpret code, and press Enter.

Type:A=Add;C=Chg;R=Rem;D=Dsp;Rtn;or ?=>A,57,CLPD

4. Repeat step 3 for each update.

5. Press Enter to end prompting. Type:A=Add;C=Chg:R=Rem;D=Dsp; Rtn;or?=>

6. Verify the changes. *** VERIFY/DISPLAY ***

** Numeric-Feature Interpret Table 06/21/00 9:35:22 Dialed Digits Feature

57....................Call Pickup-Directed

7. • Type Y and press Enter to save NFIT information in the database.



MM


Aastra – 2512-004 275

Station Hold Return The Station Hold Return feature prevents calls from being held for extensive or unreasonable periods of time. Held calls are allowed to ring the station holding the call after a pre-defined period of time.

Database Requirements for Station Hold Return Table 86. Database Requirements for Station Hold Return


UGRP/CHP

STH – Station Hold Return

0-127 Minutes If a user leaves a call on hold beyond the selected time, the call rings the station with a three-ring priority ring.

Transfer Camp-On The Transfer Camp-On feature allows a user to transfer a call to a directory number that is busy. The transferred call remains on hold at the busy station until the called party hears a call waiting tone or an ITE line select lamp flashes. When the called party hangs up, the camped call automatically rings the called party. If the call remains on hold for the predetermined amount of time, it returns to the transferring party. An unlimited number of calls can be camped-on to a single line. To set up Transfer Camp-on, see the section below on Transfer/3-Way Conference.

Transfer/3-Way Conference The Transfer feature allows the user to transfer a call received to another voice line. The 3-Way Conference feature can be used with transfer; it permits the transferring user to join the conversation as the third in a conference. The user activates either the transfer or the three-party conference feature by pressing the Transfer/3-Way (TRSF) feature button.

Database Requirements for Transfer and Camp-on Table 87. Database Requirements for Transfer and Camp-on


CLOS

MUT – Receive Music On Transfer

Yes/No Determines if a line with this class of service, when being transferred, hears music on hold audio, based on the XFA parameter of the line that transferred the call.

XFA – Transfer Type • NA – Not Allowed • A – Allowed – No

Music • M – Allowed,

Transferred Party’s

Allows a line with this class of service to transfer a call to another internal station. “NA” disallows the Transfer feature for this class of service. Specifies music on hold source.

M M


276 Aastra– 2512-004

Field Option Description music

• I – Allowed, Transfer Initiator’s music

DXL – XFER/Conf - Local

Yes/No Allows a line to transfer a call to a local telephone number. The class of service must also allow local calls (Parameter OLO) and XFA must allow the Transfer feature.

DXO – XFER/Conf - DDD

Yes/No Allows a line to transfer a call to a long distance toll number (DDD). The class of service must also allow toll calls (Parameter TOL) and XFA must allow the Transfer feature.

TTT – Trunk To Trunk Transfer Allowed

Yes/No Specifies if a station can transfer an outside call to another outside number. It is possible with this option set to “YES” to have a call going on in the switch through trunk facilities without an internal station on the call.

CMP – Transfer Camp On

Yes/No Allows a line with this class of service to transfer calls to a Busy line. The transferred call is placed on hold (or call waiting).

BTNS

BTN – Button TRSF For an ITE, the button template must have a transfer (TRSF) button. For a STE, a feature code (*1) is normally used to do an announced call transfer.

UGRP/CHP

TRT – Transfer Return Time

1-127 Seconds Defines how long a transferred call can remain at an unanswered or busy station before forwarding to the Transfer Return Destination (TRD) If a call is transferred to a busy line, the call forward busy action may be taken before this timer value expires.

TRD – Transfer Return Destination

• A – ATDC • L – Transferring

Line

Determines where a call is sent when the Transfer Return Time expires without the transferred call being answered. It can return the call to an attendant console (A) or back to the original line that transferred the call.

Voicemail Voicemail allows switch users to receive voice messages when they are unable to answer the phone. There are two methods of accessing voicemail:

• Automatic Sign-On - When you check messages from your own phone using a Voicemail button for access.

• Manual Sign-On - When you check messages from any phone external to the switch or a phone internal to the switch that does not have a Voicemail button for access.

MM


Aastra – 2512-004 277

Database Requirements for Voicemail Table 88. Database Requirements for Voicemail


UGRP/UGP

IMD Number The direct call Satellite Directory Group directory number that provides connectivity between the switch and the voicemail system.

IMC Number Provides the voicemail message center SDGP number. IUG – Voicemail lamp message user group list

S A R L U

Voicemail lamp message user group list S = Show the current user group A =-Add a user group to the list R = Remove a user group from the list L = Limit to OWN user group only U – Use all user groups

CLOS

IMA – Voicemail Call Allowed

Yes/No Yes (Y)

IAS – Voicemail Auto Sign-on

Yes/No Yes (Y)

BTNS

VMXD Allows direct access to the voicemail system. BTN – Feature Button VMXM Provides access to a voicemail system that

forwards messages to a voicemail Message Center/ Desk.

LINE

VID 8 Digits Maximum The Voicemail ID number, usually the voice line number.

FONE

VMC – Message Desk Operator

Yes/No Select Yes if this phone will be a message desk operator.

MWI – Message Waiting Indicator

Yes/No Select Yes to have the line lamp indicate a voicemail message is waiting to be read.

M M


278 Aastra– 2512-004

Assign Voicemail on the Phone

Step Action Display


2. Type U and press Enter. SELECT MODE: PRINT, DISPLAY, UPDATE.... => U


4. Type the port number to be modified. ENTER PORT NUMBER, LOCATION, or ?....... => 1.1.3.2

PORT TYPE....................ITE

5. Type BTP and press Enter. Specify ITE /STE Field to Modify or - or ?. => BTP

6. Type the button template number, and press Enter.

BUTTON TEMPLATE NUMBER: 0=INDEX..........2 => 1

7. Type BTN and press Enter to modify the button field.

Specify ITE /STE Field to Modify or - or ?. => BTN


8-UNAS 9-PRIME LINE UNAS

8. Type A and press Enter to assign a line select button.

Button Option: A, M, R, -, ? or Return=End.. => A

9. Type the number of an unassigned button, and press Enter.


10. Type V and press Enter to indicate that the line type is a voice line.

ENTER LINE TYPE OR ?..................V => V

11. Type the directory and user group numbers for the prime line accessed by the line select button, and press Enter.

VOICE LINE DIRECTORY NUMBER or ?....... => 5019,1 . . .

12. Select the Voicemail feature button lamp function. • Type Y and press Enter to have

the Voicemail feature button lamp indicator flutter when messages are waiting.

• Type N and press Enter to disable the indicator.



8-VLIN- 5017/1 9-HOT- 5019/1 Button Option: A, M, R, -, ? or Return=End.. =>




the station definition, including a

VERIFY DISPLAY FORMAT: (N)one; (D)etailed; (P)icture; (B)oth..B =>

MM


Aastra – 2512-004 279

Step Action Display list of features, and assigned line select buttons.




***...STATION......................PORT 01.01.3.03 ***...STATION EQUIPMENT TYPE.......ITE BTP...BUTTON TEMPLATE NUMBER.......1 . . . VMC...InteMail MESSAGE DESK OPERATOR..........NO . . . BUTTON TYPE LINE/FEATURE ID

1.....FEATURE.......CALL TRANSFER 2.....FEATURE.......CONFERENCE . . . 8.PL...VOICE LINE...DRN:5019 - UGP:1...RING Mail-MSG DISP9.....UNASSIGNED.. 10.....FEATURE......InteMail - DIRECT ACCESS . . . DOES UPDATE VERIFY ? =>


FONE information in the database. • Type N and press Enter to



Assign Voicemail Lamp Indicator

Step Action Display


2. Type U and press Enter. SELECT MODE: PRINT, DISPLAY, UPDATE.... => U


4. Type the port number to be modified. ENTER PORT NUMBER, LOCATION, or ?....... => 1.1.3.2 PORT TYPE....................ITE

5. Type BTP and press Enter. Specify ITE /STE Field to Modify or - or ?. => BTP

6. Type the button template number, and press Enter.

BUTTON TEMPLATE NUMBER: 0=INDEX..........2 => 1

7. Type the number of an unassigned button for the Prime Line Preselect, and press Enter.

PRIME LINE PRESELECT BUTTON #.............. => 9

8. Type VMC and press Enter to access the Message Desk Operator field.

Specify ITE /STE Field to Modify or - or ?. => VMC

M M


280 Aastra– 2512-004

Step Action Display

9. Identify the station as a message desk. • Type Y and press Enter if this

station is a Message Desk. • Type N and press Enter if this

station is not a Message Desk.

InteMail MSG DESK OPERATOR: Y=Yes; N=No... => N

10. Type BTN and press Enter to modify the button field.

Specify ITE /STE Field to Modify or - or ?. => BTN LINE SELECT (Button #-Type-Number/Group): 8-UNAS 9-PRIME LINE UNAS

11. Type A and press Enter to assign a line select button.

Button Option: A, M, R, -, ? or Return=End.. => A

12. Type the number of an unassigned button, and press Enter.


13. Type V and press Enter to indicate that the line type is a voice line.

ENTER LINE TYPE OR ?..................V => V

14. Type the directory and user group numbers for the prime line accessed by the line select button, and press Enter.

VOICE LINE DIRECTORY NUMBER or ?....... => 5019,1

15. Select the Voicemail feature button lamp function. • Type Y and press Enter to have

the Voicemail feature button lamp indicator flutter when messages are waiting.

• Type N and press Enter to disable the indicator.



8-VLIN- 5017/1 9-HOT- 5019/1










19. Review the Display. *** VERIFY DISPLAY ***

***...STATION......................PORT 01.01.3.03

MM


Aastra – 2512-004 281

Step Action Display ***...STATION EQUIPMENT TYPE.......ITE BTP...BUTTON TEMPLATE NUMBER.......1 . . . VMC...InteMail MESSAGE DESK OPERATOR..........NO . . . BUTTON TYPE LINE/FEATURE ID

1.....FEATURE.......CALL TRANSFER 2.....FEATURE.......CONFERENCE . . . 8.....UNASSIGNED.. 9.PL..VOICE LINE..DRN:5019 - UGP:1..RING Mail-MSG 10.....FEATURE......InteMail - DIRECT ACCESS . . . DOES UPDATE VERIFY? =>

20. Verify the entries. • Type Y and press Enter to save. • Type N and press Enter to



Assign a Voicemail ID A specific Voicemail ID must be assigned to allow the use of Automatic Sign-On for a voice mail user. The ID associates the user with the voice mailbox where the user messages are stored. The ID is usually the directory number.

Step Action Display


2. Type U and press Enter. SELECT MODE: PRINT, DISPLAY, UPDATE, LOGGING => U

3. Type M and press Enter. UPDT MODE: C-Create M-Modify D-Delete P-Copy. => M

4. Type the directory number for the line, and press Enter.

DIRECTORY NUMBER or ?..................... => 5018

5. Type the user group number for the directory number, and press Enter.

USER GROUP................................... => 1

6. Type VID and press Enter to access the Voicemail ID field.

The Voicemail ID number can be dialed from any location or phone to access the appropriate voice mailbox on the switch.


Specify VLIN Field to Modify or - or ?... => VID

7. Type a Voicemail ID number of 1 to 8 digits, and press Enter.

InteMail ID FOR VOICE LINE

8 digits MAX...........................N => 5432

M M


282 Aastra– 2512-004

Step Action Display

Incoming call messages are forwarded to this satellite directory number.

8. Type the directory number for voicemail, and press Enter.

CALL FORWARD ALL: N=INACTIVE OR ?

24 digits MAX..........................N => 2345

9. Press Enter. Specify VLIN Field to Modify or - or ?... =>


DRN...DIRECTORY NUMBER...................5018 UGP...USER GROUP NUMBER..................1 CLOS...CLASS OF SERVICE...................1 CPG...CALL PICKUP GROUP NUMBER...........0 ACD...ACD PILOT NUMBER...................NONE HUN...HUNT PILOT NUMBER..................NONE OAM...OAI ASSOCIATED MEMBER..............NO APR...AUTOMATIC PRIVACY RELEASE..........NO CAD...100 NUM ABBREVIATED DIALING........YES DIA...STATION DIAGNOSTIC ALLOWED.........NO FIE...CALL FORWARD - INTERNAL/EXTERNAL...NO CFN...CALL FORWARD - NO ANSWER...........3425 CFB...CALL FORWARD - BUSY................3425 CFA...CALL FORWARD - ALL.................3425 HOT...HOT LINE DIRECTORY NUMBER..........INACTIVE OHA...OFFHOOK ALERT DESTINATION NUMBER...INACTIVE TOD...TIME OF DAY RESTRICTIONS...........NO VID...InteMail ID FOR VOICE LINE.........1234 CNC...NATIONAL CALLING PARTY # CONTENTS..NONE

STATION TYPE BUTTON RING OPTION


LINE information in the database.



Assign Voicemail Features in the User Group The User Group command (UGRP/UGP) is modified when assigning the Voicemail Direct and Voicemail Message Center Satellite Directory Group (SDGP) Numbers to it.

Step Action Display




4. Type the user group number and press <Enter>.


5. Type UGP and press Enter to access SELECT SUBCOMMAND or ? . . . . . . . . . . => UGP

MM


Aastra – 2512-004 283

Step Action Display the User Group Parameters.

6. Type ? and press Enter to list all modifiable UGP fields.

SPECIFY FIELD TO MODIFY or "-" or ?. . . . => ?

MOH. . .MUSIC ON HOLD PORT NUMBER IMD. . .InteMail DIRECT CALL SDGP NUMBER IMC. . .InteMail MESSAGE CENTER SDGP NUMBER AGN. . .ATTENDANT GROUP NUMBER IAG. . .INTERCEPT ATTENDANT GROUP PCG. . .PARK CHANNEL GROUP NUMBER HNP. . .HOME NPA NUMBER HNC. . .HOME NNP NUMBER LOC. . .LOCAL/LOCAL-TOLL ROUTING ILC. . .INTER-LATA CARRIER CODE CRD. . .CALL RECORDING DIGITS ALL. . .ALL FIELDS SPECIFY FIELD TO MODIFY or "-"or ?...... =>

7. Type IMD and press Enter to change the Voicemail Direct SDGP Number.

SPECIFY FIELD TO MODIFY or "-"or ?...... => IMD

8. Type the Satellite Directory Group number that provides connectivity between the host switch and the voice mail system, and press Enter.

InteMail DIRECT CALL SDGP: N=None...... => 250

9. Type IMC and press Enter to modify the Voicemail Message Center Satellite Directory Group Number.

SPECIFY FIELD TO MODIFY or "-" or ?..... => IMC

10. Type N and press Enter. InteMail MESSAGE CENTER SDGP: N=None...... =>

11. Press Enter. SPECIFY FIELD TO MODIFY or "-" or ?..... =>



UGRP information in the database.



Assign Voicemail Call Handling Parameters

Step Action Display






M M


284 Aastra– 2512-004

Step Action Display

5. Type CHP and press Enter. SELECT SUBCOMMAND or ? . . . . . . . . . . => CHP

6. Type IMD and press Enter to modify the main Voicemail Directory Number.

SPECIFY FIELD TO MODIFY or "ALL" or ?. . . => IMD

7. Type the directory number that users dial to access the Voicemail system, and press Enter.

InteMail DIRECTORY NUMBER: N=None . . . . => 3425

8. Press Enter. SPECIFY FIELD TO MODIFY or "ALL" or ?. . . =>


** CALL HANDLING PARAMETERS USER GRP #1 12/22/00

DIG. . .STATION DIAGNOSTICS ALLOWED . . . . . .YES DND. . .DO NOT DISTURB TREATMENT . . . . . . .BUSY NIT. . .NORMAL INTERDIGIT TIMEOUT (seconds). . .10 FIT. . .FAST INTERDIGIT TIMEOUT (seconds) . . . .5 CPT. . .CALL PARK REVERSION TIME (minutes). . . .3 PRD. . .CALL PARK RETURN DESTINATION . . . . .LINE . . . IMD. . .INTEMAIL DIRECTORY NUMBER............3425


** USER GRP PARAMETERS FOR USER GROUP #1 12/22/00

MOH. . .MUSIC ON HOLD PORT NUMBER . . . . .NONE HUG. . .HOME USER GROUP NUMBER. . . . . . .NONE IMD. . .InteMail DIRECT CALL SDGP NUMBER . . .250 IMC. . .InteMail MESSAGE CENTER SDGP NUMBER .NONE AGN. . ATTENDANT GROUP NUMBER. . . . . . . .120 IAG. . .INTERCEPT ATTENDANT GROUP. . . . . .120 PCG. . .PARK CHANNEL GROUP NUMBER. . . . . .14 HNP. . .HOME NPA NUMBER. . . . . . . . . . .214 HNC. . .HOME NNP NUMBER. . . . . . . . . . .233 LOC. . .LOCAL/LOCAL-TOLL ROUTING. . . . .NORMAL ILC. . .INTER-LATA CARRIER CODE . . . . . .NONE CRD. . .CALL RECORDING DIRECTORY NUMBER . .NONE


CHP information in the database.



MM


Aastra – 2512-004 285

Use Voicemail Table 89. Use Voicemail

Phone Type Procedures

ITE – All

Feature Button = Dials the Voicemail number.

From dial tone - = Dials the Voicemail number. ITE4 and STE

From dial tone - = Dials the Voicemail number. ITE760 ITE780 Feature Key = Dials the Voicemail number.

Or

= Dials the Voicemail number.

From dial tone - = Dials the Voicemail number.

M M


286 Aastra– 2512-004

MM


Aastra – 2512-004 287

Chapter 16 Other Station Features

Overview This chapter provides information on other features.

Feature Feature

Analog Caller ID Facility Announce Messages Direct Trunk Termination Leveling Command Display Line Pre-select Date and Time Display Malicious Call Trace Internal and External Call Display Multiple Appearance Directory Numbers IMSG – Incoming Message Machine/Keyboard Dialing and Mnemonic Dialing Call Cost Display in Route Guide NFIT Emergency Call Handling

Analog Caller ID The Analog Caller ID feature provides the date, time, and the calling party number to a destination STE station on the PointSpan system. The calling party number is either a directory number, a seven digit National Numbering Plan (NNP) number, or the number provided by the public network. This feature is a purchasable option.

The caller number is transmitted only when the destination STE station is in an idle on-hook condition. This feature does not support Call Waiting Caller ID. For the caller number to be transmitted, the STE station must be enabled for Type I Caller Number Delivery in the PointSpan database.

To enable this feature, refer to the Pointspan System Database Administration manual (2513-nnn) for the following:

• Create an FSK group (FSKG) using the GRPS command. • Assign the FSK group to the appropriate partition under the SPAR command

• Create an IVC card with the FSK application using the CARD command and assign all circuits on the card to the appropriate FSK group.

FONE Command

For each STE station using this feature, enable the CID field (Analog Caller ID prompt) using the FONE command.

M M

Chapter 16, Other Station Features

288 Aastra– 2512-004

Direct Trunk Termination Direct trunk terminations are provided by Direct Central Office (CO) Lines. This line type provides a private (direct) connection from a local ITE or STE station to the CO over a private line trunk group. Although the connection is made by the local PBX, stations connected over these lines are not switched locally and hear dial tone from the Central Office. These lines do not have a directory numbers and so calls cannot be made to them.

Dedicated CO lines are usually assigned to a second line select button on an ITE. Some typical applications for a Dedicated CO line type are an executive private line or a fax machine assigned to a STE port.

See Chapter 11 for more information on Dedicated CO line setup.

Display The Display feature is used on ITE display phones in conjunction with other features, such as Abbreviated Dial, to display call information on the station’s LCD display. The button template must include a DSPL button.

The ITE-12SD phones are equipped with a 40-character alphanumeric display. The ITE-30SD phones are equipped with an 80-character alphanumeric display.

Date and Time Display The current date and time can be displayed at the bottom of the screen. The date is displayed at the bottom left. The time is displayed at the bottom right, except when used as the Event Time.

Table 90. ITE Date and Time Display Feature




C is the only available choice at this time.

Enter the type of display this device is to have. • N for No display • E for LED (Light Emitting Diode)

display • C for LCD (Liquid Crystal) display


MM


Aastra – 2512-004 289

Internal Call Display The name associated with the directory number from a caller internal to the switch can appear on a display phone. The requirement is that the caller’s name was previously built into the Directory Lookup System (DLS) database.

Use the DRUP command to enter a user's name (last name first, separated by a comma) in field 2 of the DLS database. For example: "Doe, John".

External Call Display When receiving external calls (incoming), the display reads "OUTSIDE FOR" followed by the receiver's directory number or name. When placing an external call (outgoing), the display shows the number dialed. When the call is answered, a timing event begins in the upper right-hand corner of the display. This provides the call duration, and (when the call is ended) it shows the total time of the call for approximately five seconds.

Incoming Message (IMSG) To provide a display for trunk circuits, you must create an Incoming Message (IMSG), and assign it to a Trunk Group (GRPS/TGRP).

Table 91. ITE Incoming Message (IMSG) Display Feature


IMSG

Message to Display Enter a message to display when an external call comes in over a specific trunk group. For example: "FX FROM DALLAS"

GRPS

ICM Incoming Call Message Number

Enter an appropriate message number corresponding to an incoming message created under the IMSG command.

UGRP/CHP

CCD Call Cost Display Active

Enter Y to display the call elapsed time and cost of the call as it progresses. The Call Cost feature must be in the route guide tables in order for the cost to be displayed.

Call Cost Display in Route Guide No user action is required for displaying call cost at a station. To display call cost, a call cost value must be provided in the route guide used for an outside call.

M M


290 Aastra– 2512-004

Table 92. ITE Call Cost Display Feature


Specify Update Mode Enter I for Insert Specify Choice Number Enter the number of the step in the route guide

this cost event occurs. Choice Type Enter CST for call cost. Cost Enter a number signifying the cents-per-minute it

costs to make a call on the trunk designated in the route Guide.

CCD Call Cost Display Active

Set the CCD field in UGRP/CHP to allow the display of elapsed time, even if no call cost event is included in the route guide Enter Y for Yes to allow the Call Cost Display feature.

Feature Display See Chapter 15 for more information on displaying individual features on the phone.

Emergency Call Handling See Pointspan System Database Administration, 591-2513-nnn, for procedures to set up the system database for E911.

E911 Physical Address Resolution Many E911 systems need the capability to resolve the physical location of E911 callers. Some states legally require that E911 systems provide this capability. E911 systems, however, cannot rely on a directory number (DIRN) to resolve the physical address for an E911 call, because a DIRN may appear on two or more phones in different locations.

This feature physically locates E911 callers for a Public Safety Answering Point (PSAP) attendant. An Emergency-Associated Calling (EAC) party number is provided for each E911 caller. The CPN maps calls directly to a station port. When a Public Safety Answering Point (PSAP) attendant receives an E911 call, the E911 Automatic Location Identification (ALI) feature uses the CPN to retrieve caller information from a separate database.

The E911 caller’s address and related information are displayed on the PSAP attendant console when the attendant answers the call.

MM


Aastra – 2512-004 291

Enable and Manage E911 Physical Address Resolution To enable and manage the E911 Physical Address Resolution feature:

• Assign Emergency Associated CPN (EAC) values for designated station ports; see “Assigning Emergency Associated Calling Party Numbers” for detailed procedures.

• As required by law, ensure that each EAC is a dialable number. • Ensure that the E911 system reaches the correct number when dialing back. A

standard CPN is a Direct Inward Dialing (DID) number, which an E911 system can dial back to reach the caller. If several calling stations share this directory number, the CPN may not match the caller’s unique directory number. Ensure that each EAC is assigned to only one station.

• Whenever you delete a station, delete any EAC for that station. • Whenever you move a station, update any EAC for that station. • Ensure that your Automatic Location Information (ALI) database and your EAC

values match. Each EAC value should obtain correct ALI information for calling parties.

• Whenever you add or remove a DIRN, ensure that you change any EAC for that DIRN.

• As required by law, ensure that your EAC values allow you to reach each Work-at-Home agent after he or she dials an emergency number. You can reach a home agent with an active session in an idle state by dialing the DID number with the Home Station extension number (office area code + office exchange + extension). You can reach a home agent without an active session by dialing either a home number or a number for an alternative phone to which the agent has access.

Assign an Emergency Associated Calling Party Number to a Station

Step Action Display

1. At the ASP main command prompt, type FONE and press Enter.



3. Type M and press Enter. UPDT MODE: C-Create M-Modify D-Delete...=> M

4. Select the switch location were the station is attached. • Type the port number in the format

shown at right, and press Enter. • Type the location number in the format

shown at right, and press Enter. • Type ? and press Enter to display port

number and location formatting instructions.

ENTER LOCATION or ?.......................... => ?


.. => x Any specific location

.. => x-y Any range of locations

.. => - All

where a Location is:

.. => ww Specific Cabinet

.. => ww.xx Specific Shelf

.. => ww.xx.y Specific Slot

.. => ww.xx.y.zz Specific location

M M


292 Aastra– 2512-004

Step Action Display

5. Type EAC and press Enter. Specify ITE /STE Field to Modify or - or ?... => ?

- ..ALL

ADD..ADT ANALOG SIDE DTMF DIALING AHL..AUTOMATIC HOLD AND..ALPHANUMERIC DISPLAY BTN..LINE SELECT BUTTONS BTP..BUTTON TEMPLATE DLN..DATA LINE DND..DO NOT DISTURB ALLOWED DNS..DO NOT DISTURB ACTIVE/INACTIVE STATUS DPT..DTMF PASSTHROUGH TIMING INDEX EAC..EMERGENCY ASSOCIATED CALLING PARTY NUMBER HRC..SWITCHHOOK RINGER CUTOFF LPR..LINE PRESELECT TYPE OAM..OAI ASSOCIATED MEMBER PLB..PRIME LINE BUTTON # SPK..ITE = STANDARD, ITES = W/ INTGR SPKR SUG..STATION USER GROUP VMC..InteMail MESSAGE DESK OPERATOR VRM..*** REMOVE ALL VOICE LINES ***

6. • Type an emergency calling party number of up to 10 digits and press Enter.

OR • Type N (for none) and press Enter.

EMERGENCY CALLING PARTY NBR OR ?............. => ?

Enter an emergency Calling Party Number. 10 digits number, in the format XXXXXXXXXX, or N =none


display is not needed. • Type D and press Enter to display the

station definition, including a list of features, and assigned line select buttons.


• Accept the default (B) to display the list and the picture by pressing Enter.





responses.

DOES UPDATE VERIFY ? =

MM


Aastra – 2512-004 293

Facility Announcement Message A Facility Announcement Message allows the switch to provide information about telephone number changes on the switch. Use the feature to construct a message that informs the calling party that a destination number has changed and provides the new number.

Annunciator Message numbers 1 through 31 are used by the switch; you can create messages as numbers 32 through the system limit for your switching system.

Annunciator Message Assignment The AMSG command is used to create the Annunciator Messages. These messages are pronounced by a Voice Response Unit connected to the switch at the appropriate times. Enter any combination of word/phrase codes to build the appropriate message. Use the format: P/xx; D/xx; Words where:

• P/xx is used if a pause is required between words; xx is the number of tenths of seconds between words.

• D/xx is used if the directory number dialed is repeated or a number assignment from the vacant number intercept directory is pronounced.

• Entering a question mark (?) at the Word Type prompt provides you with the available word/phrase codes.

Refer to Annunciator Message Creation for more information.

DIRN Modifications The following DIRN command parameters affect Facility Announcement Messages. Select Command => DIRN

UPDT Mode:. . => U/C (Create) New Directory #: _____________

Table 93. Facility Announcement Message Parameters


Directory Type Enter VACN for vacant number. Create Vacant Directory Enter Y for Yes.

DXD Directory Number Expiration Date

Enter the date the new number should stop being announced and the old one should not be valid in the date format: MM/ DD/YY.

IDN Internal Directory Number Enter the vacant directory number extension only. IMG Internal Annunciator Message Enter the number assigned to the message to be played for calls

originated internal to the switch. ITR Internal End Treatment Establish what happens to the caller after hearing the vacant

M M


294 Aastra– 2512-004

Field Description Requirement number message by entering: • R if the caller hears reorder. • T if the call terminates immediately (high-n-dry). • A if the caller is routed to the attendant. • D if the switch dials using the new directory number to

place the call. EDN External Directory Number Enter a 7- to 10-digit number that could be dialed to access this

new number from the public network. EMG External Annunciator Message # Enter the number of the message created for externally

originated calls. ETR External End Treatment Same as ITR field only for external originated.

Leveling Command The LEVL command can be used to customize access to the CLOS, LINE, FONE, GRPS, and SPAR commands by user password level. Use LEVL to restrict command access in any of the following ways:

• Limit the prompts displayed under a command. Prompts can be limited by Update Mode (Create, Modify, or Display) and by the user password level (1 to 3).

• Define default values to be used for lower level prompts in Update Modes. • Specify the fields that use default values. • Specify the fields that permit user inputs.

Three levels of passwords can be created in the database. The password level, 1 to 3, determines the user's level of access at sign-on.

Level 3 passwords are created by Aastra Intecom personnel. This level allows the highest level of system interaction and has the fewest default values. Level 2 allows less system interaction and includes more pre-assigned values for fields; this level should be assigned to passwords used by knowledgeable administrators. Level 1 allows the least system interaction and includes the most pre-assigned values; this level should be assigned to passwords used by beginning administrators or those who require only limited command access.

MM


Aastra – 2512-004 295

Display Levels The following example of the Display Mode of the LEVL command shows the parameters, default values, levels, and modes that can be affected by the command.

Step Action Display

1. Type LEVL and press Enter. SELECT COMMAND => LEVL

2. Type D to display LEVL information.

SELECT MODE: PRINT, DISPLAY, UPDATE, ASSIGN, STATUS => D

3. Enter the command for which you want to view LEVL information. • Type LINE and press Enter

to level LINE command prompts.

• Type FONE and press Enter to level FONE command prompts.

• Type CLOS and press Enter to level CLOS command prompts.

• Type GRPS and press Enter to level GRPS command prompts.

• Type SPAR and press Enter to level SPAR command prompts.

COMMAND MNEMONIC: OR RETURN=end.................=> LINE

4. Type “–“ to provide all prompts for each parameter, or enter the specific field to be leveled.

SELECT PARAMETER NAME or ALL or RETURN = end...=> - LEVELING INFORMATION: LINE / 03/12/00 12:12:09

CLOS...CLASS OF SERVICE.........................100 CLOS LVL1 = D LVL2 = M LVL3 =CMD

CPG...CALL PICKUP GROUP NUMBER...............0 CPG LVL1 = D LVL2 = M LVL3 =CMD

TYP...CALL PICKUP TYPE.......................B TYP LVL1 = D LVL2 = M LVL3 =CMD

APR...AUTOMATIC PRIVACY RELEASE..............NO APR LVL1 = D LVL2 = M LVL3 =CMD

CAD...100 NUMBER ABBREVIATED DIALING..........NO CAD LVL1 = D LVL2 = M LVL3 =CMD

DIA...STATION DIAGNOSTICS ALLOWED............NO DIA LVL1 = D LVL2 = M LVL3 =CMD

FIE...CALL FORWARD -- INTERNAL/EXTERNAL.......NO FIE LVL1 = D LVL2 = M LVL3 =CMD

CFN...CALL FORWARD -- NO ANSWER..................INACTIVE CFN LVL1 = D LVL2 = M LVL3 =CMD

CFB...CALL FORWARD -- BUSY..................INACTIVE CFB LVL1 = D LVL2 = M LVL3 =CMD

M M


296 Aastra– 2512-004

Step Action Display FBI...CFB FOR INTERNAL CALLER....................INACTIVE FBI LVL1 = D LVL2 = M LVL3 =CMD

BAI...INTERNAL CALL BUSY TREATMENT................DELAYED BAI LVL1 = D LVL2 = M LVL3 =CMD

FBE...CFB FOR EXTERNAL CALLER....................INACTIVE FBE LVL1 = D LVL2 = M LVL3 =CMD

BAE...EXTERNAL CALLER BUSY TREATMENT...............DELAYED BAE LVL1 = D LVL2 = M LVL3 = CMD

TOD...TIME OF DAY RESTRICTIONS...................NO TOD LVL1 = D LVL2 = M LVL3 = CMD

VID...InteMail ID FOR VOICE LINE..................INACTIVE VID LVL1 = D LVL2 = M LVL3 = CMD

FNA...CALL FORWARD NUMBER A......................INACTIVE FNA LVL1 = D LVL2 = M LVL3 =CMD

FNB...CALL FORWARD NUMBER B.......................INACTIVE FNB LVL1 = D LVL2 = M LVL3 =CMD

FNI...CFW FOR INTERNAL CALLER....................INACTIVE FNI LVL1 = D LVL2 = M LVL3 =CMD

FNE...CFW FOR EXTERNAL CALLER...................INACTIVE FNE LVL1 = D LVL2 = M LVL3 =CMD

HUN...HUNT PILOT NUMBER............NO PROGRAMMABLE DEFAULT HUN LVL1 = D LVL2 = M LVL3 =CMD

. . .

Define LEVL Access Levels To display the LEVL command:

Step Action Display

1. Type LEVL and press Enter. SELECT COMMAND => LEVL

2. Select a mode. • Type P and press Enter to print

LEVL information. • Type D and press Enter to

display LEVL information. • Type U and press Enter to

update LEVL information. • Type A and press Enter to

Assign Levels. • Type S and press Enter to view

status.

SELECT MODE: PRINT, DISPLAY, UPDATE, ASSIGN, STATUS => U

3. Select a command. • Type LINE and press Enter to

level LINE command prompts.

COMMAND MNEMONIC: OR RETURN=end.................=> LINE

MM


Aastra – 2512-004 297

Step Action Display

• Type FONE and press Enter to level FONE command prompts.

• Type CLOS and press Enter to level CLOS command prompts.

• Type GRPS and press Enter to level GRPS command prompts.

• Type SPAR and press Enter to level SPAR command prompts.

• If CLOS or GRPS is selected as

the previous response, the next prompt displays.

• The command sub-function type has a separate set of default values and each type must be leveled individually.

4. Type the command sub-function, and press Enter.

COMMAND SUBFUNCTION MNEMONIC......................=>

Trunk Group Type:

UNV – Universal DID - Direct Inward Dial DISA - Direct Incoming System Access TERM - Terminated DDCO OUTG - Ground Start 4WEM - 4-Wire E&M MAIL - InteMail System Trunks PAGE - Paging System Trunks ANCM - Announcement System Trunks ATDC - Incoming, to Attendant

5. Type “–“ and press Enter to provide all prompts for each parameter, or enter the specific field to be leveled.

If ALL is the response to the previous prompt, prompts will appear for the fields to be leveled.

SELECT PARAMETER NAME or - or RETURN = end...=> -

6. Type the Class of Service number, and press Enter.

CLASS OF SERVICE.......... .........................=> 100

7. Type a letter to indicate the prompts to which level 1 users are permitted to respond, and press Enter: • Type C and press Enter to allow

a response to be assigned in Create Mode.

• Type M and press Enter to allow a response to be assigned in Modify Mode.

CLOS LEVEL 1 CONTROL INFORMATION..........CMD=>

M M


298 Aastra– 2512-004

Step Action Display

• Type D and press Enter to include the Display of the prompt when a Verify/Display Message is shown.

8. Type a letter to indicate the prompts to which level 2 users are permitted to respond, and press Enter: • Type C and press Enter to allow

a response to be assigned in Create Mode.

• Type M and press Enter to allow a response to be assigned in Modify Mode.

• Type D and press Enter to include the Display of the prompt when a Verify/Display Message is shown.

CLOS LEVEL 2 CONTROL INFORMATION..........CMD=>

Change Password Levels You can use the Assign mode of the LEVL command to change the level of the current password, as shown in the following example. SELECT COMMAND => LEVL SELECT MODE: PRINT, DISPLAY, UPDATE, ASSIGN, STATUS => A LEVEL NUMBER: (M)ax or 1 or 2 or 3.................2 => 1 SELECT MODE: PRINT, DISPLAY, UPDATE, ASSIGN, STATUS => D *** CURRENT "LEVEL" = 1/ MAXIMUM "LEVEL" = 3

The current password level (shown as the default value in the second prompt) is changed from 2 to 1.

Line Preselect If an ITE is configured for more than one directory number, automatic line preselect is available with the following options:

• No Line Preselect - Lines must be physically selected with a line select button. • Prime Line Preselect - Going off-hook selects the prime line (as if a line select

button was pressed). • Ringing Line Preselect - Going off-hook selects a ringing line (as if a ringing-line

select button was pressed). • Prime/Ringing Line Preselect - Going off-hook selects either a prime line or a

ringing line. The line is selected as if a predefined line-select or first-ringing-line select button (if any) was pressed.

• Idle Line Preselect - An off-hook station connects to the first idle line. • Last Line Preselect - An off-hook station connects to the most recently used line.

MM


Aastra – 2512-004 299

• Ringing/Idle Line Preselect - An off-hook station connects to the first idle line unless a line is ringing. If a line is ringing, an off-hook selects the first ringing line.

Table 94. FONE Preselect Settings

Line Preselect Type Placing a Call Line Selected

Receiving Call Line Selected

(P) Prime Line Prime Line Manual (other than Prime Line) (R) Ringing Line Manual Ringing Line (if in preselect group) (I) Idle Line Any Idle Line Manual (L) Last Line Last Used Line Manual (N) No Line Manual Manual (PR) Prime Line Prime Line Ringing Line (if in preselect group) (RI) Ringing Line Any Idle Line Ringing Line (if in preselect group) Manual - User must press a line button to select the line.

Malicious Call Trace The Malicious Call Trace capability allows a user to record “in progress” malicious calls to aid in the identification of the caller. The user can record the connection information in the Call Detail Recording (CDR) file and flag it as a malicious call.

The user must have a Call Mark button an ITE station (in the button template). When pressed, it sends an alarm to the system console. The User Group call handling parameters table must be set up to allow CDR records to be logged for malicious calls. Refer to the System Database Procedures manual for User Group features.

Modify the station button template to include a call mark (MARK) feature button using the procedure described at the beginning of the chapter.

Multiple Appearance Directory Numbers A directory number can appear on up to 32 stations.

Machine/Keyboard Dialing and Mnemonic Dialing Machine/Keyboard Dialing (MKD) is a purchasable option which allows a user to establish a data connection automatically, from a data processing machine (such as a personal computer) or manually, by dialing a terminal keyboard. A related feature, Mnemonic Dialing allows users to dial a meaningful string of characters to connect to a specific voice line or data device. The switch can translate up to 22 ASCII characters into a numeric dialing plan format. The string is translated into the digit sequence to be dialed.

The Machine/Keyboard Dialing feature can optionally require the user to enter a password during MKD directory number or MKD mnemonic dialing. The user's response to the password prompt is validated against the Name/Number directory password field. MKD passwords can be from 1 to 8 characters long; the password field must be formatted in the Name/Number directory.

M M


300 Aastra– 2512-004

The Directory Lookup System (DLS) is required if Mnemonic Dialing is used or if an optional password is specified for Machine/Keyboard Dialing.

Set Up Machine/Keyboard Dialing Passwords If the Machine/Keyboard Dialing option is included in the switch configuration, you can set up MKD with passwords by using the following commands:

Table 95. Setting Up Machine/Keyboard Dialing Passwords

Field Description

SPAR The PSW field under SPAR Updatable System Parameters allows the use of MKD passwords and specifies the Name/Number Directory password field.

CLOS The PSW field of CLOS allows a particular directory number to access the MKD password feature.

DRUP The Directory Update command can be used to format an MKD password field in the Name/Number Directory. See Chapter 16.

SPAR Updatable System Parameters

System Parameters prompt for the Name/Number directory field which contains the password. SELECT COMMAND => SPAR SELECT MODE: PRINT, DISPLAY, UPDATE, TITLES => D ENTER DISPLAY TYPE or? ..................... => ?

F...FEATURE AVAILABILITY P...PHYSICAL PARTITION R...SYSTEM RESOURCES S...SYSTEM PARAMETERS U...UPDATABLE SYSTEM PARAMETERS

ENTER DISPLAY TYPE or ? ..................... => U SPECIFY SYSTEM PARAMETER TO MODIFY........... => PSW PASSWORD NAME/NUMBER FIELD................... => 5 SPECIFY SYSTEM PARAMETER TO MODIFY........... =>

*** VERIFY DISPLAY ***

*** UPDATABLE SYSTEM PARAMETERS

...

PSW...PASSWORD NAME/NUMBER FIELD.............5

Class of Service Field

The optional password for MKD dialing can be used only if the feature is allowed in the CLOS for the affected directory number. You can modify a CLOS to allow password use as shown in the following example. SELECT COMMAND => CLOS SELECT MODE: PRINT, DISPLAY, UPDATE => U UPDT MODE: C-Create M-Modify D-Delete P-Copy. => M

MM


Aastra – 2512-004 301

CLASS OF SERVICE............................. => 1 Specify CLOS Field to Modify or ALL or ?..... => ?

PSW...MKO PASSWORD

Specify VLIN Field to Modify or ALL or ?..... => PSW MKO PASSWORD REQUIRED or ?................... => ?

N...NO PASSWORD M...MNEMONIC DIALING D...DIRECTORY NUMBER DIALING B...MNEMONIC AND NUMBER DIALING

MKO PASSWORD REQUIRED or ?................... => B Specify CLOS Field to Modify or ALL or ?..... =>


...

PSW...MKO PASSWORD REQUIRED................MNEMONIC & NUMBER

Numeric Feature Interpretation Table (NFIT) Command The Numeric Feature Interpretation Table (NFIT) command is used to add, change, remove, or display the feature codes in a Numeric Feature Interpret Table (NFIT). Users dial the NFIT codes to access station-level system features. The FDD table must contain a Numeric Feature Code (NMFT) access level for the user group wishing to access these feature codes.

Update a Numeric Feature Code The Numeric Feature Code (NFIT) allows a call feature to be assigned to a station with no pre-assigned feature button. A number is assigned to the desired feature which is accessed through the keypad.

Step Action Result

1. Type NFIT and press Enter. SELECT COMMAND => NFIT


In the following example, the string A,57,CLPD means: Add code 57 for accessing the Call Pickup - Directed feature.

Enter strings in the following three-part format separated by commas: • A letter to indicate the action

being performed: A to Add a code, C to change a Code, R to remove a Code, and D to display a Code.

SELECT MODE: PRINT, DISPLAY, UPDATE=> U

M M


302 Aastra– 2512-004

Step Action Result

• A number to indicate the feature code number users will dial to access the feature.

• Four letters for the feature mnemonic. Use CLPD for Call Pickup Directed.

3. Enter a string to describe the numeric feature interpret code, and press Enter.

Type:A=Add;C=Chg;R=Rem;D=Dsp;Rtn;or ?=>A,57,CLPD

4. Repeat step 3 for each update.

5. Press Enter to end prompting. Type:A=Add;C=Chg:R=Rem;D=Dsp; Rtn;or?=>

6. Verify the changes. *** VERIFY/DISPLAY ***

** Numeric-Feature Interpret Table 06/21/00 9:35:22

Dialed Digits Feature

57....................Call Pickup-Directed

7. • Type Y and press Enter to save NFIT information in the database.



MM


Aastra – 2512-004 303

Chapter 17 Directory System

Overview The Pointspan directories store switch user, equipment, and security information. The directories are:

• Name/Number - The Name/Number Directory stores names of the voice and data users and the directory numbers each is assigned. Each record contains 19 data fields for storing various types of user information, such as ID and department.

• Authorization Code - The Authorization Code Directory is used to store authorization codes and implement restrictions to dialing specific call types. The switch uses the codes stored in this directory to check the accuracy of codes dialed by users. Each record contains 8 data fields used to identify the users or groups of users to which auth codes are assigned.

• Wiring - The Wiring Directory is used to associate a user name, location, port number, instrument type, and cable plan with each piece of equipment on a switch. It has 15 fixed-length fields.

• Spares - The Spares Directory is used to keep track of details about unused parts on the switch. It has 9 fixed-length fields.

The following additional directories can be set up and maintained using ASP commands:

• Agent Identification (AGID) - The Agent Identification command assigns ID numbers and passwords to ACD agents.

• Vacant Number Intercept Directory (VAUP) - The Vacant Number Intercept Directory is used to store information related to directory numbers that are no longer available because of phone number or personnel changes or both. This directory is maintained using the VAUP command and is a purchasable option.

Name/Number Directory The Name/Number Directory associates user names and other information with the related directory numbers. The Name/Number Directory is primarily used by attendants when looking up directory numbers assigned to individuals or departments.

Name/Number Directory Options Two Name/Number Directory options are available, Basic and Deluxe.

M M

Chapter 17, Directory System

304 Aastra– 2512-004

Basic

The Basic option provides the following features:

• The Basic directory fits most user needs. A total of 20 fields are allowed for each entry record.

• The directory includes four pre-assigned fields that work with the switch display capabilities (used with Call Detail Records, Attendant Statistic Reports, ACD Agent Reports, the Attendant Console display, and the ITE display.)

• 16 additional pre-assigned fields of fixed character length and format. The user designates field content and title.

• The directory includes search fields (designated by **). Search fields cannot be changed.

Deluxe

The Deluxe option can be customized and provides these features:

• The first four fields are pre-assigned and used for switching system display capabilities.

• The remaining 16 fields can be defined with up to 31 characters each. • Six of the eight search fields (**) are assignable.

ASP Commands Used The following commands are used to maintain the Name/Number directory.

• DRUP – Used to create the Name/Number directory. • DRLK – Used for Name/Number lookup.

ASP Access The Name/Number Directory allows multiple ASPs to access the system directory information. Each ASP entry is password protected, allowing display only, or display and update capability.

Typical Fields Table 96. Typical Fields for a Name/Number Directory

Name Emergency Contact Extension Name & No. (Multiple) UGRP Status Location Employee No. Office Phone Number Mailing List No. Cost Center Company Name Department Social Security No.

MM


Aastra – 2512-004 305

Title Phone Equipment Home Phone Number Phone Equipment Cost Address (City, State, and Zip)

Basic Name/Number Directory Format The following table represents the Basic Name/Number Directory fields. The character lengths and field types are pre-assigned for all fields and cannot be changed. Fields 0 to 3 are used for display capabilities and should not be altered. Fields 4 to 7 can be re-titled by an administrator; however, the title cannot exceed the pre-assigned character length. Fields 8 to 19 are assigned by the administrator.

Search Field # Fixed Title Length Field Type

** 0 Name Key = 26 --------- ** 1 DIRN 5 Numeric 2 UGRP 4 Numeric 3 Directory Name 31 Alpha Numeric 4 Alpha/Number

Display 1 Alpha Numeric

** 5 Location 15 Alpha Numeric ** 6 Department 24 Alpha Numeric 7 Number 10 Numeric 8 EQ CST 6 Alpha Numeric ** 9 Optional 12 Alpha Numeric ** 10 Optional 12 Alpha Numeric ** 11 Optional 8 Numeric ** 12 Optional 8 Numeric 13 Optional 10 Numeric 14 Optional 10 Numeric 15 Optional 10 Alphanumeric 16 Optional 8 Alpha Numeric 17 Optional 8 Numeric 18 Optional 8 Numeric 19 Optional 8 Numeric 20 Optional 4 Numeric

• ** Designates a search field. • Name Key is derived from the Directory Name field.

M M


306 Aastra– 2512-004

Deluxe Name/Number Directory Format

Search Field

Field Number

Field title Field Length Field Type

** 0 Name 26 --------- ** 1 Extension 5 Numeric 2 Directory Name 31 Alphanumeric 3 Alphanumeric

Display 1 Alphanumeric

** 4 ** 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19

• **Designates a search field. • Name Key is derived from the Directory Name field.

Create the Basic Name/Number Directory Table 97. Steps to Create the Basic Name/Number Directory

Step Action Parameters to Define

1. Define Formats • Field titles (DRUP/Format/Titles) • Print and display formats

(DRUP/Format/Format)

MM


Aastra – 2512-004 307

Step Action Parameters to Define

• Class Level of access (DRUP/Format/Class) • Screen display options

(DRUP/Format/Options)

2. Build the Directory • Input Records (DRUP/Update/Create)

3. Maintain the Directory • Modify Records (DRUP/Update/Modify) • Delete Records (DRUP/Update/Delete) • Multiple modifications

(DRUP/Update/Batch)

4. Print Records • Print Records (DRUP/Print)

5. Display the Name/Number Directory

• Display Directory (DRLK)

Define the Format The formats determine who can access and view the Directory. They also define the data stored in each field of a record.

Assign Field Titles

After gathering user information to be stored in the fields of the Name/Number Directory, you can use the Format mode of the DRUP command to assign field titles.


1. At the ASP Select Command prompt: Enter DRUP and press Enter.

SELECT COMMAND => DRUP

2. Enter F to assign titles, formats, class of access or screen options.

SELECT MODE: PRINT, DISPLAY, UPDATE, FORMAT, SAVE, RESTORE => F

3. Enter T to assign a title field. UPDATE: T=Titles; F=Formats; C=Classes; O=Options; or ?...F => T

4. Enter a ? to display all fields. Enter xx where xx = FLD number to add or change a title, enter the field number and type the desired title. Enter xx where xx= FLD number to delete an existing title, press the bar space and return.

TITLE FIELD NUMBER: 0-19; Return=END; or ?...

=> ?

Return = none or no more

* = Restart; or @ = Abort.

FLD 0: NAME_KEY__________________ FLD 01: DIRN_ FLD 02: UGRP FLD 03: DIRECTORY_NAME_________________ FLD 04: ALPHA/NUMBER_DISPLAY FLD 05: LOCATION_______ FLD 06: DEPARTMENT______________ FLD 07: NUMBER____ FLD 08: EQ_CST FLD 09: ____________ LD 10: ____________ FLD 11: ________

M M


308 Aastra– 2512-004

Step Action ASP Display FLD 12: ________ FLD 13: __________ FLD 14: __________ FLD 15: __________ FLD 16: ________ FLD 17: ________ FLD 18: ________ FLD 19: ________ FLD 20: ____

TITLE FIELD NUMBER: 0-19; Return=END; or ?... => 12

FLD 12: __________ => SS Num.

TITLE FIELD NUMBER: 0-19; Return=END; or ?... =>

**

* FIELD TITLES

**

FLD 0: NAME_KEY__________________ FLD 01: DIRN_ FLD 02: UGRP . . FLD 12: SS_NUM__ . . DOES UPDATE VERIFY ? => y

5. Press Enter to update database.



Create Formats

The following is an example of a format being assigned. A format directly affects what the user sees when scrolling through information in the DRLK command. SELECT COMMAND => drup

SELECT MODE: PRINT, DISPLAY, UPDATE, FORMAT, SAVE, RESTORE => f

UPDATE: T-Titles; F-Format; C-Classes; O-Options; or ?..F => f

FORMAT NUMBER: 0-24; return=END; or ?=DISPLAY => ?

FORMAT 01: NAME KEY DIRN

Return in response to:

COLUMN 001 FIELD NUMBER..=>

prompt will cause format to be DELETED

FORMAT NUMBER: 0-24; return=END; or ?=DISPLAY => 0.COLUMN 001 FIELD

NUMBER: 0-19; Return=DEL; or ?.. => ?

FLD 0: NAME_KEY__________________ FLD 01: DIRN_ FLD 02: UGRP FLD 03: DIRECTORY_NAME_________________ FLD 04: ALPHA/NUMBER_DISPLAY FLD 05: LOCATION_______

MM


Aastra – 2512-004 309

FLD 06: DEPARTMENT______________ FLD 07: NUMBER____ FLD 08: EQ_CST FLD 09: ____________ FLD 10: ____________ FLD 11: ________ FLD 12: ________ FLD 13: __________ FLD 14: __________ FLD 15: __________ FLD 16: ________ FLD 17: ________ FLD 18: ________ FLD 19: ________ FLD 20: ____

COLUMN 001 FIELD NUMBER: 0-19; Return=DEL; or ?.. => 2

FIELD DISPLAY LENGTH: Return=31; or ?........ =>

NEXT HYPHEN POSITION: RETURN=none; 0-30; or ? =>

COLUMN 033 FIELD NUMBER: 0-19; Return=END; or ?.. => 1








NEXT HYPHEN POSITION: RETURN=none; 0-09; or ? => ?

Up to 4 hyphens may be inserted in the field;

specified as the number of characters from the

previous hyphen. Hyphen positions are counted

from left to right for character fields or

from right to left for numeric fields.

NEXT HYPHEN POSITION: RETURN=none; 0-09; or ? => 4

NEXT HYPHEN POSITION: RETURN=none; 0-05; or ? => 2


COLUMN 077 FIELD NUMBER: 0-19; Return=END; or ?.. =>


1 2 3 4 5 6 6

COLUMN # 1 0 0 0 0 0 0 6

FORMAT 00: DIRECTORY_NAME_________________ DIRN_

DEPARTMENT______________ SS_

6 7

7 0

NUM._____

********************** NOTE ***********************

M M


310 Aastra– 2512-004

WHEN FORMAT IS USED, PROPORTIONAL SPACING MAY

CAUSE ADDITIONAL SPACE BETWEEN COLUMNS

*****************************************************

DOES UPDATE VERIFY ? => y


Display and Print Formats

The Directory Lookup System supports up to 25 different formats for display and print.

Use the following procedure to update display and print formats for the Name/Number directory.




2. Enter F for the Format Mode. SELECT MODE: PRINT, DISPLAY, UPDATE, FORMAT, SAVE, RESTORE => F

3. Enter F again to update Formats for the DLS.

UPDATE: T=Titles; F=Formats; C=Classes;

O=Options; or ?...F => F

4. • Enter the format number to change.

Or • Enter ? to display all formats.

FORMAT NUMBER: 0-24; return=END; or ?=DISPLAY =>

5. • Enter the number of the field to begin at column 1.

Or • Enter ? to display all field

numbers and their titles.

A "column" is a character on a page. Each page can be up to 132 characters (columns) wide. The ASP displays 80-character lines.

COLUMN 001 FIELD NUMBER: 0-19; Return=DEL; or ?.. =>

6. • Enter the length of the field to be displayed

Or • Enter ? to display the help text Or • Enter the maximum number of

characters allowed in the chosen field.

FIELD DISPLAY LENGTH: Return=nn; or ?........ =>

MM


Aastra – 2512-004 311


Pressing the Enter key automatically defaults to the maximum number allowed for the specified field.

• Less than the full field may be

displayed. • Characters are dropped from

the right for ASCII or from the left for numeric.

• Field titles may also be truncated.

• Each field has a maximum number of characters.

7. Each field has a maximum of four hyphens. The location of each hyphen is determined by the beginning character of the field or by the number of characters from the last hyphen. In alphanumeric fields, hyphen position count is from left to right. In numeric fields, the count is from right to left. If no hyphens are required, press Enter.

NEXT HYPHEN POSITION: RETURN=none; n-nn; or ? =>

8. Once Column 001 Field Number has been defined, this query is displayed allowing additional fields to be included in the format. After the last field of information has been added to the format, press Enter when this prompt is displayed.

COLUMN XXX FIELD NUMBER: 0-19; Return=END; or ?..=>

9. Enter Y to update the database. DOES UPDATE VERIFY ? =>

After a format has been created, it cannot be modified. You can, however, delete the format and reassign format details.

M M


312 Aastra– 2512-004

Delete an Existing Format

To delete an existing format, press Return at the COLUMN 001 FIELD NUMBER prompt.

Field Access Levels Each field of information can be assigned a class number (access level). Four levels (1-4) can be assigned to each field. Perform the following procedure to format password classes.




2. Enter F to assign the password access class fields.

SELECT MODE: PRINT, DISPLAY, UPDATE, FORMAT, SAVE, RESTORE => F

3. Enter C for classes. UPDATE: T-Titles; F-Format; C-Classes; Options; or ?F => C

4. • Enter the number of the field to be class marked.

Or • Enter ? to display all fields.

FIELD NUMBER: 0-19; Return=END; or ?......... => ?

5. Enter the access class for the field in Step 4.

ALLOWED CLASSES: 1,2,3,4; A=All; Space=none. =>

Authorization Code Directory The Authorization Code Directory provides maintenance of authorization codes. Auth codes can be used to restrict system access. Use of auth codes is optional, but when implemented, users can be required to dial a code to gain access to system services such as long distance dialing. Auth codes are implemented to perform the following:

• Restrict access to the switch • Restrict or enhance user capabilities once the user gains access to the switch • Identify users for billing purposes • Specify the portion of the routing data base to be used for a user's call.

This directory associates class of service, user group number, authorization code class, class extension, any comment (associated name or department, e.g.,) and an authorization code with an end user. The character length and type are fixed for all fields and cannot be modified. Only field titles can be changed. Directory fields are shown in Table 99.

MM


Aastra – 2512-004 313

Table 98. Authorization Code Directory Fixed Fields

SF FLD# Field Title Length Field Type Description

** 00 Code Key 14 Numeric The Code Key entry permits entry or the one through nine-digit authorization code to identify the user whose name is entered in field number 7. When provided in other system tables, this number is recorded by CDR to show user activity. This number is validated by the system before permitting the user to access a particular service.

The CLOS field, AUL limits the auth code to nine-digits. The 10-character field is required for systems operating with the Equal Access Feature option.

** 01 CLOS 4 Numeric The CLOS entry permits the assignment of another set of services to a user after the auth code is validated). This entry overrides the original CLOS assigned to the station from which a call is originated. This characteristic permits a user to dial an Auth Code from any telephone in the same User Group and access services not ordinarily permitted to that station. If no CLOS is entered, the originators CLOS is used.

** 02 UGRP 4 Numeric A four-character field that specifies the routing database the user will access for calls. Although the UGRP entered here can be the same as the UGRP originally assigned, a different UGRP can be assigned via this field to restrict or enhance user access to other dialing plan levels. If this field is left blank the originators UGRP is used.

03 C 1 Alphanumeric The C (class) entry is a one-character, alpha numeric field that is used to restrict the validation of the Auth Code when processing trunk calls or to restrict access to a voice line (college dormitory or security applications). Valid entries in this field listed in the Table 99.

M M


314 Aastra– 2512-004

SF FLD# Field Title Length Field Type Description

04 Ext 4 Numeric The EXT (Class Extension) field, up to four numeric characters, specifies additional information relative to the entry in the Class Field 3. Valid input is listed in Table 100.

05 4 Numeric This is a spare 4-character numeric field. It is reserved for future expansion of the Authorization Code database.

This field must remain empty.

06 SPARE (or DIRN)

8 Numeric When the entry in field 3 is D (directory number access restriction), this entry must be the voice or data-line directory number where access is being restricted. If field 3 is not D, this is another spare field and must be left empty.

** 07 Name 29 Alphanumeric The Name field is an alpha numeric search field. It is a search field and can be used to locate the Auth Code associated with the identification information entered in this field.

08 Auth Code 14 Numeric This is a display field that displays the Code Key entry of field 0.

• Designates a search field. • Name Key is derived from the Directory Name field.

Valid C Entries (Field 3)

Table 99. Valid C (Class) Entries

Code Description Explanation

G Global Authorization Code is always valid for TGRA (Trunk Group Relative Authorization) purposes.

B Blocked Authorization Code is invalid. A customer-defined Reason Code number can be supplied in the Class EXTENSION field 4.

R Recently Disallowed Authorization Code is recently denied. A customer-defined Reason Code number can be supplied in the Class EXTENSION field 4.

MM


Aastra – 2512-004 315

Code Description Explanation

S Single Trunk Group Authorization Code is valid only for the trunk group specified in the Class EXTENSION field 4.

M Multiple Trunk Group Authorization Code is valid only for the trunk groups listed in the TGRA table, as specified in Class EXTENSION field 4.

D VLIN Restriction Authorization Code is valid only when dialed from the associated voice or data line.

Valid Class Extension Entries (Field 4)

Table 100. Valid EXT (Class Extension) Entries

If field 3 is: Then field 4 is:

G Not Required B Customer Reason Code R Customer Date/ Reason Code S Trunk Group Number M TGRA Entry Number D Not Required (a directory number is required in field 6)

The Trunk Group filed authorization code has NOT been expanded and remains at 9 digits or less. If the user enters more than the previous 9 digits used by auth codes, an extended CDR record is used to store the expanded authorization code digits. This can reduce the number of CDR records the system can store.

Authorization Code Administration The Authorization Code database is accessed with the following commands:

• ACUP - used to format, display, print, or update the Auth Code directory. • ACLK - used for Auth Code display.

The following steps maintain the Authorization Code directory.

Step Action

1. Define directory Format Parameters

• Create or modify titles (ACUP/Format/Titles) • Print and display formats (ACUP/Format/Format)

2. Create the directory • Input Records (ACUP/Update/Create)

3. Maintain the directory • Modify Records (ACUP/Update/Modify) • Delete Records (ACUP/Update/Delete)

M M


316 Aastra– 2512-004

Step Action

• Multiple modifications (ACUP/Update/Batch)

4. Print Records • Print Records (ACUP/Print)

5. Display Records • Display Directory (ACLK)

Create the Authorization Code Directory Use the ACUP command to enter information in each field. Maintenance of this directory is the same as the Name/Number directory.

SELECT COMMAND => ACUP

SELECT MODE: DISPLAY,UPDATE,FORMAT => U

MODE: M-modify; C-create; D-delete; B-batch.. => C

KEY: AUTH CODE........................... => 8967

FLD 01: CLOS...................................... => 2 FLD 02: UGRP...................................... => 3 FLD 03: C............................................. => G FLD 04: EXT........................................ => D FLD 05: MCL#...................................... => FLD 06: DIRN...................................... => 2342 FLD 07: NAME.................................... => TRAINING

***

** KEY: CODE KEY. 8967

***

FLD 01: CLOS..... 2 FLD 02: UGRP..... 3 FLD 03: C........ G FLD 04: EXT...... D FLD 05: MCL#..... FLD 06: DIRN..... 2342 FLD 07: NAME..... TRAINING FLD 08: AUTH CODE 8967


** UPDATE COMPLETE

KEY: AUTH CODE........................... => @

Search the Auth Code Directory Use the ACLK command to search for information in the Auth Code Directory. The information shown depends on the display format chosen under the Format section of ACUP. SELECT COMMAND => ACLK

DISPLAY FORMAT: 0-n; Return; or ?.......................... => ?

FORMAT 00:NAME AUTH CODE CLOS DIRN

DISPLAY FORMAT: 0-n; Return; or ?.......................... => 0

MM


Aastra – 2512-004 317

SEARCH FIELD: 0-n; Return; or ?............................ => 7

KEY . . NAME; +n; -n or ? ............................... =>

NAME AUTH CODE CLOS DIRN INSTRUCTOR 7777 2 TRAINING 8967 2 2342 STUDENT 2728 2 STUDENT 2222 2 STUDENT 3333 2 STUDENT 4444 2 STUDENT 5555 2 STUDENT 6666 2

KEY . . NAME; +n; -n or ? ........................ => @

ASP Commands Referencing Auth Code Directory Data The ASP commands in the following tables include fields that access data from the Authorization Code Directory.

Table 101. Commands Using Auth Code Data


CLOS

OVA Variable Authorization Code Level Determines whether or not an authorization code dialing level is allowed.

AUT Authorization Code Placement Determines auth. code dialing position as prefix, postfix, conditional postfix (prefix = placed before the destination number; postfix = placed after).

AUL Authorization Code Length Determines the number of digits required for an auth. code, whether it is Group Auth. Code (GAC) or a dialing level auth. code.

AUR Authorization Code Restriction Indicates whether or not an auth. code has day, date, and time authorization restrictions (ATTR -Auth/Trunk Time Restrictions).

ATT Auth/Trunk Treatment Indicates the initial type of AUR restriction for auth. codes (if applicable).

UGRP

SAV Validate Authorization Codes Indicates whether or not auth. codes are to be validated on a user group basis (includes GAC Auth. Codes).

NAC Night Service Only Authorization Codes

Indicates whether or not auth. codes are required (collected) only when the Attendant Console (ATDC) is in night service (does not include GAC auth. codes).

FDD Select Subcommand First Digit Disposition: to allow authorization codes to part of the dial plan.

TDD Select Subcommand Two Digit Disposition: to allow authorization codes to part of the dial plan.

APA Trunk Group Authorization Type Indicates whether or not a trunk group has appended/filed authorization code.

M M


318 Aastra– 2512-004


AUT Appended Trunk Authorization Digits

Indicates filed/appended authorization code digits (if applicable).

GAC Group Auth. Code Required for Trunks

Determines whether or not an inbound trunk group must dial a group authorization code.

VAC Validate Trunk Group Auth. Code Indicates whether or not the filed/appended authorization code is to be verified.

AAU Appended Auth. Code to CDR Indicates whether or not the appended portion of an auth. code is to be included in a CDR record.

PVA Pre-validate Authorization Code Indicates whether or not an auth. code is to be validated normally (after all digits are dialed) or immediately (after a prefix authorization code so it may be used to affect subsequent dialing).

RAA Reset Authorization Code Allowed Permits a user to "reset" a dialed number (tell the switch a dialing error was made and the user wishes to start dialing all over again). When PVA is "Yes" and a trunk resets the dialed number after the auth. code has been verified (pass or fail), this field indicates whether or not it is legal for the user to specifically re-dial the auth. code. This is also intended as a security measure.

LVL Predefined Level Code Indicate a predefined dialing level for the trunk group, if one is to be defined. If not, trunks in the group must dial an access code to select a dialing level.

TNE Tone Table Entry Number An index that is used (unless it is "None") to indicate any special tones to be used for dialing after a level has been selected on this trunk group. The TONE command is used to manipulate the data base for TNE.

Wiring Directory The Wiring Directory is used to record the following fields for each piece of equipment connected to the switch:

• Name • Location • Port Number • Instrument Type • Cable Plan

All fields in the directory are fixed in length and type. The fields are not modifiable, but modifications can be made to those that work within the standard field definitions. Fields not needed on a given site can be ignored. Fields not needed for the standard function can be used for another function and renamed via the WIUP/Title subcommand.

MM


Aastra – 2512-004 319

Field Titles The following table describes each field of the Wiring Directory.

Table 102. Wiring Fixed Fields

SF FLD# FIELD TITLE LENGTH FIELD TYPE

** 0 Location 15 Alphanumeric ** 1 Port 5 Alphanumeric ** 2 Type 3 Alphanumeric 3 Description 20 Alphanumeric 4 MDF 6 Alphanumeric ** 5 CBL-A 6 Numeric 6 IDF-A 5 Alphanumeric ** 7 CBL-B 6 Numeric 8 IDF-B 5 Alphanumeric ** 9 CBL-C 6 Numeric 10 IDF-C 5 Alphanumeric ** 11 CBL-D 6 Numeric 12 IDF-D 5 Alphanumeric 13 CBL-E 6 Numeric 14 IDF-E 5 Alphanumeric

** Identifies Search Fields (SF).

Type of Information Stored The following fields are supported in the Wiring Directory.

Table 103. Wiring Directory Field Descriptions

Field Title Field Description

Location Floor plan grid identifier. The identifier must be unique. No duplicates.

Port Switch port number to which the device is connected. Type Type of device (e.g., STE, I12, I30, LS, GS, etc.). Description This field may be used for a description (e.g., the "Name" associated

with the telephone instrument).

M M


320 Aastra– 2512-004


MDF Punch Down Location of the "house-side" of the Main Distribution Frame.

CBL - (A-E) Identifies the cable numbers. IDF - (A-E) Identifies the Punch Down at the Intermediate Distribution Frame.

Create the Wiring Directory Use the WIUP command to enter information in each field. Maintenance of this directory is the same as the Name/Number directory.

SELECT COMMAND => WIUP

SELECT MODE: DISPLAY,UPDATE,FORMAT,SAVE, RESTORE => U


KEY: LOCATION............................. => CONF. B

FLD 01: PORT.................................. => 1.2.10.2 FLD 02: TYP........................................ => STE FLD 03: DESCRIPTION........................ => Conf. Room. B FLD 04: MDF....................................... => 1 FLD 05: CBL-A.................................... => 3001 FLD 06: IDF-A...................................... => A FLD 07: CBL-B..................................... => FLD 08: IDF-B...................................... => FLD 09: CBL-C.................................... => FLD 10: IDF-C..................................... => FLD 11: CBL-D.................................... => FLD 12: IDF-D..................................... => FLD 13: CBL-E.................................... => FLD 14: IDF-E..................................... =>

*** KEY: LOCATION. . . CONF B

***

FLD 00: LOCATION..... CONF B FLD 01: PORT..... 1.2.10.2 FLD 02: TYPE..... STE FLD 03: DESCRIPTION..... Conf. Room B FLD 04: MDF...... 1 FLD 05: CBL-A..... 300 FLD 06: IDF-A..... A FLD 07: CBL-B..... FLD 08: IDF-B..... FLD 09: CBL-C..... FLD 10: IDF-C..... FLD 11: CBL-D..... FLD 12: IDF-D..... FLD 13: CBL-E..... FLD 14: IDF-E.....


** UPDATE COMPLETE

KEY: LOCATION............................. => @

MM


Aastra – 2512-004 321

Search the Wiring Directory Use the WILK command to search for information in the Wiring Directory. The information shown depends on the display format chosen under the Format section of WIUP. SELECT COMMAND => WILK

DISPLAY FORMAT: 0-n; Return; or ?............................=> ?

FORMAT 00:PORT LOCATION CBL-A FORMAT 01:PORT LOCATION MDF CBL-A IDF-A

DISPLAY FORMAT: 0-n; Return; or ?.........................=> 1

SEARCH FIELD: 0-n; Return; or ?.......................... => 2

KEY . . TYP; +n; -n or ? .......................... => STE

PORT LOCATION MDF CBL-A IDF-A

1.2.10.2 CONF B 1 3001 A

KEY . . TYP; +n; -n or ?

.......................................... => @

Spares Directory The Spares directory is used in tracking and reporting on spare switching system parts. All fields are fixed in length and cannot be modified. The Spares directory fields 0-4 designate the part serial number, total number of the part, the number of spares on hand, the number of parts in repair, and the part or card type. The remaining fields (5-8) are extra fields and have no specific function intended. Fields "0" and "4" are also designated as search fields (SF). A field title can be altered to suit specific needs.

Fixed Field Titles in the Spares Directory Table 104. Spares Fixed Fields

SF FLD# Field Title Length Field Type

** 0 Serial NO-RV 2 Numeric 1 Total 6 Numeric 2 # SPR 4 Numeric 3 # RPR 4 Numeric ** 4 Card Type 12 Alphanumeric 5 Spare 6 Numeric 6 Spare 6 Numeric 7 Spare 6 Numeric 8 Spare 4 Numeric

M M


322 Aastra– 2512-004

SF FLD# Field Title Length Field Type

** Identifies Search Fields.

Type of Information Stored Table 105. Spares Directory Field Descriptions


Serial NO-RV Identifies the serial number-revision for the part. Total Identifies the total number of parts. # SPR Identifies the number of spare parts. # RPR Identifies the number of parts in repair. Card Type Identifies the part or card type.

Create the Spares Directory Use the SPUP command to enter information in each field. Maintenance of this directory is the same as the Name/Number directory. SELECT COMMAND => SPUP

SELECT MODE: DISPLAY,UPDATE,FORMAT,SAVE, RESTORE => U


KEY: SERIAL NO-RV.........................=> 5902147001

FLD 01: TOTAL.................................... => 15 FLD 02: # SPR....................................... => 10 FLD 03: # RPR...................................... => 0 FLD 04: CARD TYPE........................... => MATRIX FLD 05: .................................. ............ => FLD 06: .............................................. => FLD 07: .............................................. => FLD 08: .............................................. => ***

** KEY: SERIAL NO-RV. . . 5902147001

*** FLD 00: SERIAL NO-RV..... 5902147001 FLD 01: TOTAL..... 15 FLD 02: # SPR..... 10 FLD 03: # RPR..... 0 FLD 04: CARD TYPE...... MATRIX FLD 05: ..... FLD 06: ..... FLD 07: ..... FLD 08: .....


MM


Aastra – 2512-004 323

** UPDATE COMPLETE

KEY: SERIAL NO-RV......................... => @

Search the Spares Directory Use the SPLK command to display information in the Spares directory. The information viewed depends upon the display format chosen under the Format section of the SPUP command. SELECT COMMAND => SPLK

DISPLAY FORMAT: 0-n; Return; or ?............................=> ?

FORMAT 00: SERIAL NO-RV TOTAL #SPR #RPR CARD TYPE

DISPLAY FORMAT: 0-n; Return; or ?...........................=> 0

SEARCH FIELD: 0-n; Return; or ?............................ => 4

KEY . . CARD TYPE; +n; -n or ? .......................... =>

MATRIX

SERIAL NO-RV TOTAL #SPR #RPR CARD TYPE

5902147001 15 9 1 MATRIX

KEY . . CARD TYPE; +n; -n or ? .............................. => @

TTUP — Title Update The TTUP command displays titles for tables in the database. Title entry is optional.

Functions • Print (P): Print table formatting • Display (D): View field names of a specific table. When format is used, proportional

spacing may cause additional space between columns. • Format (F): Change field titles, print/display formats or display options. • Save (S): Store formats to tape or disk. • Restore (R): Returns formats to default settings.

M M


324 Aastra– 2512-004

VAUP Command The VAUP command can display Vacant Directory Number information that may be associated with Facility Announcement Messages. Select Command => VAUP

UPDT Mode:. . => D (Display) Directory #: _____________

Table 106. Display Vacant Directory Number Information

Command Description

VAUP Allows you to display the Vacant Number Directory created under the DIRN command for a specific directory number. You can also update the fields for this event, using the UPDT Mode: of U for Update.

Refer to "Vacant Number Intercept" for more information.

MM


Aastra – 2512-004 325

Chapter 18 Class Services

Anonymous Call Rejection - CLASS Services Anonymous Call Rejection, an incoming call management feature, enables a user to block calls that do not present calling party identification (CPID) name or number. The Anonymous Call Rejection feature requires an IVC card running the "Integrated Voice Services" (IVS) software application to support this CLASS Services feature.

When activated, any callers who have blocked their number from the Caller ID display hear an announcement that the user does not accept anonymous calls. To remedy this result, the user should remove Caller ID blocking and call back. The called party's phone does not ring. All other calls ring through as usual.

Anonymous Call Rejection Feature Operation When users activate Anonymous Call Rejection, all incoming calls with the CPID marked as "PRIVATE" are blocked. The system also speaks a phrase to the anonymous caller when a call is rejected.

Each time an anonymous call is rejected, based on this feature, a CDR record is generated, indicating the call was rejected by this feature. The CDR record for this feature can be displayed under CHI command or through the AR program.

For AR task procedures refer to PointSpan System Operations (2494-nnn).

Activate Anonymous Call Rejection

Step Action Result

1. Lift the handset Hear Dial Tone.

2. Press

Hear "Anonymous calls are now blocked".

3. Hang up The feature is activated.

De-activate Anonymous Call Rejection

Step Action Result

1. Lift the handset. Hear Dial Tone

2. Press

Hear "Anonymous calls are now allowed".

3. Hang up. The feature is activated.

M M

Chapter 18, Class Services

326 Aastra– 2512-004

Anonymous Call Rejection Database Configuration Perform the following procedures to setup the Anonymous Call Rejection CLASS feature:

• Enable feature in CLOS • Display feature availability • Display feature status

For IVS circuit group and phrase group set up, refer to System Database Procedures (2513- NNN) or PointSpan IVC Card Features and Support (2489-NNN).

Enable Anonymous Call Rejection in CLOS

Step Action Display

1. Type CLOS at the main ASP prompt, and press Enter.


2. Type U and press Enter. SELECT MODE:PRINT,DISPLAY,UPDATE,SEARCH,TITLES =>U

3. Type M and press Enter. UPDT MODE:C-Create,M-Modify,D-Delete P-Copy =>M

4. Type the number of the CLOS being modified, and press Enter.

SPECIFY CLASS OF SERVICE #:...... => 1

5. Type ARJ and press Enter to select Anonymous Call Rejection feature.

Specify CLOS Field To Modify or - or ?.... => ARJ

6. Type Y and press Enter to activate the Anonymous Call Rejection feature.

ANONYMOUS CALLER REJECTION:Y=Yes, N=No.Y=> Y

7. Press Enter to end field modification function and proceed to the update Verify/ Display prompt.

SPECIFY FIELD TO MODIFY or - or ?... =>

8. Use verify/ display to show the settings. *** VERIFY/DISPLAY ***

** Class OF SERVICE # 31

04/30/02 12:47:02

TYP...Class OF SERVICE TYPE..UNIVERSAL ACR...ACCESS CODE ROUTING ALLOWED...NO . . ARJ...ANONYMOUS CALLER REJECTION...YES

9. Type Y and press Enter to verify the Anonymous Call Rejection update.



MM


Aastra – 2512-004 327

Display Anonymous Call Rejection Feature Availability

Step Action Display

1. Type SPAR and press Enter. SELECT COMMAND => SPAR

2. Type D and press Enter. SELECT MODE: PRINT, DISPLAY, UPDATE, TITLES => D

3. Type F at the prompt to select feature display and press Enter.

ENTER DISPLAY TYPE or ?..........S => F

4. Display Anonymous Call Rejection feature availability.

FEATURE AVAILABILITY:

DELUXE AUTO CALL DISTRIBUTION......YES ACD CallNet........................NO ACD CDR EVENT......................YES INTEMAIL..........................YES HOTLINE/MEET ME CONFERENCE.........YES MULTIPLE TIME ZONES................YES NAME/NUMBER DIRECTORY..............YES . . DYNAMIC AGENT SIGN-ON CAPABILITY...NO CALL PROGRESS TONE DETECTION.......NO EXPANDED NUMBER OF BUTTONS.........NO WORK AT HOME STATIONS..............YES IVS SERVICES.......................YES LINE CARD COUNTING.................NO ANONYMOUS CALLER REJECTION.........YES ENTER DISPLAY TYPE or ?............S=>

Display Anonymous Call Rejection Feature Status

Step Action Display



3. Enter directory number to display, and press Enter.

DIRECTORY NUMBER.............. => 8001

4. Display Anonymous Call Rejection feature status.

** VOICE LINE DEFINITION

09/03/02 16:36:55

DRN...DIRECTORY NUMBER............8001 UGP...USER GROUP NUMBER..............1 COS...CLASS OF SERVICE...............1 CPG...CALL PICKUP GROUP NUMBER.......0 HNC...HOME NNP NUMBER...........(NONE) AAL...ACD AGENT LINE................NO ***...Anonymous Call Rejection......ON HUN...HUNT PILOT NUMBER...........NONE . . STATION TYPE BUTTON RING OPTION RETURN CONTINUES DISPLAY..... =>

001.2.04.01 ITES 1 RING

END OF DISPLA

M M


328 Aastra– 2512-004

Automatic Recall - CLASS Services Automatic Recall, an incoming call management feature, allows users to automatically recall the last incoming number without knowing the number or the calling party. This feature is sometimes called Automatic Call Return.

To activate this feature dial the initiation code *69. If the recalled number is busy and users want to call the number again, they must dial the initiation code *69 again.

This feature has an available CDR record that supports per use tracking for customers use.

Automatic Recall Two modes of operation exist for Automatic Recall.

Automatic Recall with Confirmation

Automatic Recall With Confirmation - In this mode, the user hears the number that is to be dialed and is asked to confirm. The system informs the user in one of two possible methods:

• The system displays the date, time, and phone number of the last incoming call on the phone if the station is equipped with a display.

• The user hears the spoken date, time, and number of the last incoming call if IVS phrases are configured.

ITE phones can have both modes if the switch has the IVS feature installed with IVS phrases available. STE phones only have IVS-spoken information if IVS is available.

After users receive the information, they are prompted to "OK" the call. The prompt can take one of two forms:

• Press "1" to continue or hang up to abort the call. • A zip tone sound if IVS phrases are unavailable, and press "1" to continue or hang up

to abort the call.

If users are assigned to a partition with a defined IVS group but the system does not find the required phrases and the station is not a display phone, then the feature operates in the mode of Automatic Recall without confirmation.

Automatic Recall without Confirmation

Automatic Recall Without Confirmation - In this mode of operation, users cannot see or hear the return call number. This is for STE phones or ITE phones with no display, with IVS phrases unavailable. The user does not have the option to confirm the feature. The system automatically, calls the last incoming number to the user’s station immediately following the feature activation without waiting for user confirmation.

MM


Aastra – 2512-004 329

Activate Automatic Recall with No IVS

Step Action Result

1. Lift the handset. Receive dial tone

2. Dial *69. Display shows: • Date, time and number of the last incoming number. or • "Private" if the last incoming number is marked as private. or • “Unavailable” if the last incoming number was unavailable, and

play reorder. and Zip tone plays to prompt for confirmation.

3. Press "1" to accept. System plays zip-zip tone then places call. If an auth code is required: • Zip tone plays. • Station displays "Enter Authorization Code".

4. Enter authorization code. System collects and verifies the authorization code. • If the authorization code is valid, system plays zip-zip tone then

places call. • If the authorization code is invalid, station plays re-order.

Activate Automatic Recall with IVS To activate Automatic Recall with confirmation on a display phone that has IVS configured:

Step Action Result

1. Lift the handset. Receive dial tone.

2. Dial *69. System responds: • Date, time and number of the last incoming number. or • "Private" if the last incoming number is marked as private. or • "Last calling number not available" if the last incoming number was

unavailable, and play reorder. and "Please press 1 to complete or hang up to cancel your call" for confirmation. For a display phone, the corresponding information will also be displayed on the phone.

M M


330 Aastra– 2512-004

Step Action Result

3. Press "1" to accept. System responds, "Calling XXXXX" and places the call. If user must furnish an authorization code to place the return call, the system responds: "Please enter the authorization code". For display phone "Enter Authorization Code" is displayed.

4. Enter authorization code.

System collects and verifies the authorization code. • If the authorization code is valid, the station plays "Calling XXXXX"

and places the call. • If the authorization code is invalid, the station plays re-order.

Activate Automatic Recall with No Confirmation

Step Action Result


2. Dial *69. If an auth code is required, then system responds: • "Please enter the authorization code". or • Zip tone is played. For display phone "Enter Authorization Code" is displayed.

3. Enter authorization code. System collects and verifies the authorization code. • If the authorization code is valid, system plays zip-zip tone and

places call. • If the authorization code is invalid, station plays re-order.

Attendant Console does not support the Automatic Recall function.

Automatic Recall Database Configuration Perform the following procedures to setup the Automatic Recall CLASS feature:

• Enable feature in CLOS • Enable Service Authorization Code Validation

For IVS circuit group and phrase group set up, refer to Pointspan System Database Administration (2513-nnn) or PointSpan IVC Card Features and Support (2489-nnn).

MM


Aastra – 2512-004 331

Enable CLASS Service Automatic Recall in CLOS

Step Action Display



3. Type M and press Enter. UPDT MODE:C-Create,M-Modify,D-Delete,P-Copy =>M

4. Type the CLOS number to modify and press Enter.


5. Type AMR and press Enter to select Automatic Recall feature.

Specify CLOS Field To Modify or - or ?.... => AMR

6. Type Y and press Enter to activate the Automatic Recall feature.

AUTOMATIC RECALL: Y=Yes, N=No.....Y => Y

7. Press Enter and proceed to the update Verify/ Display prompt.

Specify CLOS Field To Modify or - or ?....... =>

8. Use Verify/Display to show the new feature setting.


** Class OF SERVICE # 31 04/30/02

12:47:02

TYP...Class OF SERVICE TYPE..UNIVERSAL ACR...ACCESS CODE ROUTING ALLOWED...NO . . AMR...AUTOMATIC CALL RETURN........YES

9. Type Y and press Enter to verify the automatic recall update.



Enable Auth Codes for Automatic Recall in CLOS

Step Action Display




4. Type the CLOS number to modify and press Enter.


5. Type AAR, and press Enter to select Authorization Code for Automatic Recall feature.

Specify CLOS Field To Modify or - or ?.... => AAR

6. Type Y and press Enter to activate the Authorization Code for Automatic Recall feature.

AUTH CODE VALIDATION WITH

AUTOMATIC RECALL: Y=Yes, N=No..........Y => Y

M M


332 Aastra– 2512-004

Step Action Display




04/30/02 12:47:02 TYP...Class OF SERVICE TYPE..UNIVERSAL ACR...ACCESS CODE ROUTING ALLOWED...NO . AAR...AUTH CODE VAL WITH AUTO RECALL...YES




Caller ID Suppression (Block/Unblock) – Class Services Caller ID Suppression, also referred to as Caller ID Block/Unblock, is a CLASS Services feature that allows a user to temporarily block or unblock their name and phone number so that the called party, with Calling Number Delivery, does or does not receive the Caller ID information.

The Caller ID Block or Unblock is a call-by-call feature. So, when the user hangs up, the default found in the users Class of Service parameters for Calling Party Number presentation will be restored.

All of the features in the Caller ID Block/Unblock are applicable to external calling only. The use of Caller ID Block before dialing a directory number does NOT block the caller ID from being displayed to the destination. Caller ID is always presented on station-to-station (internal) calls.

Calling Party ID (CPID) Operation The CLASS Services Feature Caller ID Block/Unblock options follow the same operations to be consistent with the standard local central office way for using CLASS services.

A user who subscribes to the standard local central office CPID service will either display the CPID of the calling party, if CPID is allowed; or display "PRIVATE" or NOT AVAILABLE, if CPID is not allowed on an incoming call.

Implement the PointSpan Class services Calling Number Delivery Block and Unblock on a call-by-call application using *67 and *82. Handle name and number the same. Block or unblock both the name and number.

Requires ISDN NET, software and PRI trunks. Dual DS1 PRI allows name and number.

CPID Feature Control Both digital and analog telephones support this feature. The customer, i.e., University Telecom Department, etc, may wish to control the use of this feature on a DIRN-by-DIRN basis. To do this, the system makes an administrative software package (ASP) command available for the customer option selection on a DIRN-by-DIRN basis via a Class of Service (CLOS).

MM


Aastra – 2512-004 333

This allows Aastra Intecom to have the feature in the base software package and allows the customer's telecom department to control the administration of the feature on an individual directory number basis.

PointSpan systems prior to release 3.0, can allow or not allow CPID on a system basis but it is not controllable by an individual user.

Activate Caller ID Block

The use of the *67 feature code assumes that the customer has selected the CPID allowed, "PUBLIC" default option in CLOS. This is the process to activate the Caller ID Block or Suppression feature for changing the "PUBLIC" (CPID presentation allowed) to "PRIVATE" (CPID presentation not allowed) for that call.

Activate the feature by dialing the *67 code before you place the call to mark this call as "PRIVATE." Although you mark this call as "Private", the other Class features set the CPID Name and Number for use. This feature does not affect 911 calls.

If the user is permitted to perform this feature via Class of Service the Caller ID Block feature activation is allowed. Otherwise, the user is alerted with "reorder tone" if the *67 feature code is used before placing a call.

Step Action Result


2. Dial *67. The feature is activated and user hears dial tone.

3. Dial the number you're calling as usual.

The person you've called will not see your number displayed on their telephone display screen, if they subscribe to their providers CPID service. Instead, the set displays a "P", "Private" or Unavailable Name, Unavailable Number.

The activation sequence in the example above requires the customer to have previously established the Class of Service parameters for the default Calling Party Number presentation desired. In the prior example, Calling Party Number presentation is set in the Class of Service for "presentation allowed" or "PUBLIC". Because this is a call-by-call feature, when the user hangs up, the Calling Party Number presentation default reverts back to the original Class of Service parameter settings "Presentation Not Allowed" or "PRIVATE".

Unblock Caller ID

To establish Caller ID Unblock, users go off hook and activate the feature by dialing the *82 feature code to mark this call as "PUBLIC". Caller ID is always sent for 911calls even if the default is "PRIVATE".

M M


334 Aastra– 2512-004

If the user is permitted to perform this feature via Class of Service the Caller ID Unblock feature activation is allowed. Otherwise, the user is alerted with "reorder tone" if the *82 feature code is used before placing a call.

Step Action Result


2. Dial *82. The feature is unblocked and user hears dial tone.

3. Dial the number you're calling as usual.

The person you've called, if they subscribe to their providers CPID service, can see your number displayed on their telephone display screen.

The activation sequence in the example above requires the customer to have previously established the Class of Service parameters for the default Calling Party Number presentation desired. In the prior example, Calling Party Number presentation is set in the Class of Service for "presentation not allowed" or "Private". Because this is a call-by-call feature, when the user hangs up, the Calling Party Number presentation default reverts back to the original Class of Service parameter settings "presentation not allowed" or "Private".

Caller ID Block/Unblock Database Configuration Perform the following procedures to setup the Caller ID Block/Unblock CLASS feature:

• Establish calling party number presentation defaults for off-net calls in CLOS. • Establish calling party number presentation defaults for on-net calls in CLOS. • Enable calling party number presentation defaults for a specific CLOS to be

overridden on a call-by-call basis.

Establish Calling Party Number Defaults for Off-Net Calls in CLOS

Step Action Display

1. Type CLOS, and press Enter. SELECT COMMAND => CLOS





5. Type SNF and press Enter to select Calling Party Number Presentation feature.

Specify CLOS Field To Modify or - or ?.... => SNF

6. Select desired presentation format for OFFNET: CALLING # PRESENTATION or ? A =>

MM


Aastra – 2512-004 335

Step Action Display Off-Net Calling Party Number (CPN/ANI) data (to the destination switch), and press Enter.

Presentation of calling party number to

destination switch for offnet calling number:

N = Do not send number

R = Send with Presentation Restricted

A = Send with Presentation Allowed

7. Press Enter to end field modification function and proceed to the update Verify/Display prompt.





04/30/02 12:47:02

TYP...Class OF SERVICE TYPE..UNIVERSAL ACR...ACCESS CODE ROUTING ALLOWED...NO . . SNF...OFFNET: CALLING PARTY NUMBER ....PRESENTATION ALLOWED




Establish Calling Party Number Presentation Defaults for On-Net Calls in CLOS

Step Action Display






5. Type SNN and press Enter to select Calling Party Number Presentation feature.

Specify CLOS Field To Modify or - or ?.... => SNN



7. Select desired presentation format for On-Net Calling Party Number (CPN/ANI) data (to the destination switch), and press Enter.

ON-NET: CALLING # PRESENTATION or ? A =>

Presentation of calling party number to

destination switch for offnet calling number:

N = Do not send number

M M


336 Aastra– 2512-004

Step Action Display R = Send with Presentation Restricted

A = Send with Presentation Allowed




04/30/02 12:47:02

TYP...Class OF SERVICE TYPE..UNIVERSAL ACR...ACCESS CODE ROUTING ALLOWED...NO . . SNN...ON-NET: CALLING PARTY NUMBER PRESENTATION ALLOWED




Enable CPID Presentation Defaults to be Overridden on Call-by-Call Basis

Use the following to enable Caller ID Block/Unblock permitting the calling party number presentation defaults for a specific Class of Service to be overridden on a call-by-call basis:

Step Action Display






5. Type CIB and press Enter to select Caller ID Block/ Unblock feature.

Specify CLOS Field To Modify or - or ?.... => CIB

6. Type Y and press Enter to enable overrides on a call-by-call basis.

CALLER ID BLOCK/UNBLOCK: Y=YES; N=No ..Y => Y






04/30/02 12:47:02

TYP...Class OF SERVICE TYPE..UNIVERSAL ACR...ACCESS CODE ROUTING ALLOWED...NO . . CIB...CALLER ID BLOCK/UNBLOCK............YES

MM


Aastra – 2512-004 337

Step Action Display

9. Type Y and press Enter to verify the Caller ID Block/Unblock feature update.



Call Forward - CLASS Services CLASS Service Call Forward, an incoming call management feature, allows users to forward calls to a designated directory number. This feature may be accessed from a remote location, using the Remote Feature Access function.

Call Forward Operation CLASS Service Call Forward feature forwards all calls to a destination number established by the user. To activate and deactivate the Call Forward feature use the following procedures

Activate CLASS Service Call Forward

CLOS setting Call Forward-All (CFA) must be set to Yes.

Step Action Result


2. Dial 72#. Zip tone plays to prompt for the forward destination number.

3. Enter the destination number. Zip-zip tone plays if forward destination number is valid.

If the forward destination number is a toll call or outside the defined calling area, zip tone is played to prompt for authorization code if authorization code is required.

4. Enter authorization code if destination number is a toll call or outside the defined calling area as defined by CLOS and dial level.

Zip-zip tone plays if authorization code is valid.

If authorization is invalid, the system plays re-order.

Deactivate CLASS Service Call Forward

Step Action Result

1. Lift the handset Receive dial tone.

2. Dial 73#. Zip-zip tone plays and the feature is deactivated.

M M


338 Aastra– 2512-004

Remote Feature Access - CLASS Services CLASS Service Remote Feature Access allows the user to access certain CLASS Service features remotely from a line or a trunk, other than the assigned phone. The CLASS Service features that can be accessed are:

• Call Forward (72#, 73#) • Anonymous Call Rejection (*77, *87) • Selective Call Forward (*63)

To gain access to the CLASS Service features remotely, the user dials a Feature Directory Number. Then users are prompted to enter the directory number of the desired line and the PIN. Progress tones or voice prompts direct the user through the activation and deactivation process.

If voice prompts are desired, the Remote Feature Access requires an IVC card running the "Integrated Voice Services" (IVS) software application.

Each time Remote Feature Access is used, a CDR record is generated. The CDR record for this feature can be displayed under CHI command or through the AR program.

For AR task procedures refer to PointSpan System Operations (2494-nnn

Remote Feature Access Operation To activate the CLASS Service Remote Feature Access through a feature directory number, create a Feature Directory number for the CLASS Service Remote Feature Access under the DIRN command. The Remote Access feature is enabled in the Class of Service command.

Activate Remote Feature Access with No IVS

Step Action Result

1. Lift the handset. Hear dial tone.

2. Dial the Remote Feature Access directory number. Zip tone plays to prompt the user to enter the directory number.

3. Enter the directory number. Zip tone plays to prompt the user to enter the PIN.

4. Enter the PIN.

If combination DIRN and PIN are incorrect, the system plays re-order and DIRN and PIN may be re-entered.

The system collects and verifies the PIN and zip-zip tone plays.

5. Enter desired feature code for: • Call Forward (72#, 73#)

If the feature code is invalid, the system plays re-order.

MM


Aastra – 2512-004 339

Step Action Result

• Anonymous Call Rejection (*77, *87) • Selective Call Forward (*63)

6. Follow the required procedure to activate or deactivate the selected feature.

Selected feature is activated or deactivated.

Activate Remote Feature Access with IVS

Step Action Result

1. Lift the handset. Hear dial tone.

2. Dial the Remote Feature Access directory number. "Please enter Directory Number" plays.

3. Enter the directory number. "Please enter the Personal Identification Number" plays.

4. Enter the PIN.

If combination DIRN and PIN are incorrectly entered 3 times, the system plays "The directory number or the Personal Identification Number you have entered is invalid. Please re-enter the Directory number" then plays re-order.

The system collects and verifies the PIN and "Please enter the feature code" plays.

5. Enter desired feature code for: • Call Forward (72#, 73#). • Anonymous Call Rejection (*77, *87). • Selective Call Forward (*63).

If the feature code is invalid, the system plays "You have entered the invalid feature code".

6. Follow the required procedure to activate or deactivate the selected feature.

Selected feature is activated/deactivated.

Remote Feature Access Database Configuration Perform the following procedures to setup the Call Forward Remote Access CLASS feature:

• Enable feature in CLOS • Create feature directory number • Define PIN number length • Assign PIN number • Display feature availability

M M


340 Aastra– 2512-004

For IVS circuit group and phrase group set up, refer to System Database Procedures (2513-nnn) or PointSpan IVC Card Features and Support (2489-nnn).

Enable CLASS Service Remote Feature Access in CLOS

Step Action Display

1. From the ASP, type CLOS and press Enter.






5. Type RMF and press Enter to modify Remote Feature Access feature.

Specify CLOS Field To Modify or - or ?.... => RMF

6. Type Y and press Enter to activate the Remote Feature Access feature.

REMOTE FEATURE ACCESS: Y=Yes, N=No....Y =>Y

7. Press Enter to end field modification function and proceed to the update Verify/ Display prompt.


8. Verify the display. *** VERIFY/DISPLAY ***

** Class OF SERVICE # 31 04/30/02

12:47:02

TYP...Class OF SERVICE TYPE..............UNIVERSAL RMF...REMOTE FEATURE ACCESS............YES

9. Type Y and press Enter to verify the Remote Feature Access update.



Create Feature Directory Number for CLASS Service Remote Feature Access

Step Action Display



MM


Aastra – 2512-004 341

Step Action Display

3. Type C, to create a new DIRN, and press Enter.

UPDT MODE:C-Create,M-Modify,D-Delete,P-Copy =>C

4. Enter the desired feature directory number, and press Enter.

DIRECTORY NUMBER or ?............. => 2425

5. Enter the desired user group number, and press Enter.

USER GROUP........................... => 1

6. Type FDRN to create a new feature directory number type, and press Enter.

ENTER DIRECTORY TYPE: OR ?........ => FDRN

***...DIRECTORY NUMBER..................2425

7. Type RFAC to select Remote Feature Access feature type, and press Enter.

FEATURE or ?....................... => RFAC

8. Verify the setting. *** VERIFY/DISPLAY ***

***...DIRECTORY NUMBER..................2425 UGP...USER GROUP NUMBER..................1 FEA...FEATURE .......Remote Feature Access

9. Type Y and press Enter to verify the update.



Display Remote Feature Access Availability

Step Action Display

1. From the ASP, type SPAR and press Enter.

SELECT COMMAND => SPAR


3. Type F to select feature display and press Enter.


4. Display the feature availability. FEATURE AVAILABILITY:

DELUXE AUTO CALL DISTRIBUTION......YES ACD CallNet........................NO ACD CDR EVENT......................YES INTEMAIL...........................YES HOTLINE/MEET ME CONFERENCE.........YES MULTIPLE TIME ZONES................YES NAME/NUMBER DIRECTORY..............YES . . DYNAMIC AGENT SIGN-ON CAPABILITY...NO CALL PROGRESS TONE DETECTION.......NO EXPANDED NUMBER OF BUTTONS.........NO WORK AT HOME STATIONS..............YES IVS SERVICES.......................YES LINE CARD COUNTING.................NO REMOTE ACCESS...................YES

ENTER DISPLAY TYPE or ?................S =>

M M


342 Aastra– 2512-004

Define PIN Length for CLASS Service Remote Access

Step Action Display

1. From the ASP, type UGRP and press Enter.

SELECT COMMAND => UGRP



4. Specify the desired user group number and press Enter.

USER GROUP NUMBER (1-1000) OR ?... => 1

5. Type CHP and press <Enter>. SELECT SUBCOMMAND or ? => CHP

6. Type PIN to select Remote Access PIN Length feature to modify, and press Enter.

SPECIFY FIELD TO MODIFY or - or ? =>PIN

7. Enter desired PIN number length, and press Enter.

REMOTE ACCESS MAX PIN LENGTH (MAX 8)..8 => 6

8. Press Enter and proceed to the update Verify/Display prompt.

SPECIFY FIELD TO MODIFY or - or ?........ =>

9. Verify the settings. *** VERIFY/DISPLAY ***

** CALL HANDLING PARAMETERS FOR USER GROUP # 1

07/26/02 09:58:01

DIG...STATION DIAGNOSTICS ALLOWED......YES DND...DO NOT DISTURB TREATMENT........BUSY CPT...CALL PARK REVERSION TIME (minutes). ..5 . . PIN. REMOTE ACCESS MAX PIN LENGTH(digits).6 . . . RETURN CONTINUES DISPLAY..... =>

10. Type Y and press Enter to verify the PIN number length update.



Assign Personal Identification Numbers (PIN) for Lines

Step Action Display

1. At the ASP, type LINE and press Enter.

SELECT COMMAND => LINE



MM


Aastra – 2512-004 343

Step Action Display

4. Enter directory number to modify, and press Enter.

DIRECTORY NUMBER.............. => 8001

5. Type PIN and press Enter. Specify VLIN field to Modify or - or ?... => PIN

6. Enter the PIN number and press Enter.

PERSONAL IDENTIFICATION NUMBER..... => 9678

7. Press Enter to display voice line field update.

Specify VLIN field to Modify or - or ?.. =>

8. Display PIN number Assignment.

** VOICE LINE DEFINITION 09/03/02 16:36:55

DRN...DIRECTORY NUMBER..................8001 UGP...USER GROUP NUMBER..................1 COS...CLASS OF SERVICE...................1 CPG...CALL PICKUP GROUP NUMBER...........0 HNC...HOME NNP NUMBER...............(NONE) . . PIN...PERSONAL IDENTIFICATION NUMBER....9678 . . CNC...NATIONAL CALLING PARTY # CONTENTS..NONE STATION TYPE BUTTON RING OPTION RETURN CONTINUES DISPLAY..... => 001.2.04.01 ITES 1 RING END OF DISPLAY

9. Type Y and press Enter to verify the PIN number length update.



Selective Call Forward - CLASS Services Selective Call Forwarding (SCF), an incoming call management feature, allows users to define a special list of telephone numbers and a forward destination. The system forwards incoming calls, with phone numbers on the list, to the remote directory destination. All other calls receive normal treatment. The selective call forward list allows up to 10 numbers.

SCF may be accessed at the users phone or using Remote Feature Access. The PointSpan system has several other call forward services available such as:

• Call Forward All • Call Forward Busy • Call Forward No Answer

When you activate Selective Call Forward for a voice line it takes precedence over all other call forward services.

M M


344 Aastra– 2512-004

Selective Call Forward Feature Operation Selective Call Forward support exists on both digital and analog telephones. SCF access is on a per voice line basis. Users access SCF for a voice line in two ways:

• Go off-hook on the desired voice line and dial *63. • Dial a "Remote Access" feature directory number and enter the directory number,

PIN, and then dial the *63 feature code.

SCF allows users to forward incoming calls from specific numbers to a destination specified for SCF. Users can store a maximum of ten numbers in the SCF list per directory number. Each number in the list can be a maximum of 10 digits in length.

Receive a Call with SCF Active When a call arrives at a voice line that has SCF activated, the PointSpan system acquires the number of the calling party and compares it to the SCF list for the destination voice line.

• If the calling party's number does not appear in the SCF list for the destination voice line, the call terminates at the destination voice line. In other words, the normal ringing process, call waiting process, and/or other call forwarding services occur).

• If the calling party's number does appear in the SCF list for the destination voice line, the destination station receives a "reminder ring" (one short ring) and the call immediately forwards to the SCF destination specified by the users when they activated SCF. Users cannot answer the call at the forwarding station when SCF is active.

Access Selective Call Forward

Step Action Result


2. Dial *63. Hear: • “Selective Call Forwarding is on/off" • "There are X entries in your list" • "Your calls will be forwarded to XXXXX" • "If this number is correct press 1" • "If this number is not correct press 0 to change it"

3. Press 1 to continue access. Hear: • "To hear the entries on your list, press 1" • "To turn on/off selective call forwarding, press 3" • "To add an entry to your list, press the pound key" • "To remove an entry from your list, press the star key" • "To hear this menu again, press zero"

MM


Aastra – 2512-004 345

Change Your Forward-to Number

Step Action Result

1. Lift the handset. Dial tone received. Hear Dial Tone.

2. Dial *63. Hear: • “Selective Call Forwarding is on/off" • "There are X entries in your list" • "Your calls will be forwarded to XXXXX" • "If this number is correct press 1" • "If this number is not correct press 0 to change it"

3. Press 0 to change your forward-to number.

Hear: "Please dial the number to which you want your calls forwarded followed by the pound key."

4. Dial forward-to number.

If an incorrect digit is entered, the user can press the Star key to clear the dialed digits. The user is then returned to the main menu.

5. Press # key. Hear: "Your calls will be forwarded to XXXXX." • "If this number is correct press 1" • "If this number is not correct press 0 to change it"

6. Press 1 to accept new forward-to number.

Hear: • "To hear the entries on your list, press 1" • "To turn on/off selective call forwarding, press 3" • "To add an entry to your list, press the pound key" • "To remove an entry from your list, press the star key" • "To hear this menu again, press zero"

Hear the Entries on Your List

Step Action Result

1. Lift the handset. Hear Dial Tone.

2. Dial *63. Hear: • “Selective Call Forwarding is on/off" • "There are X entries in your list" • "Your calls will be forwarded to XXXXX"

M M


346 Aastra– 2512-004

Step Action Result

• "If this number is correct press 1" • "If this number is not correct press 0 to change it"

3. Press 1 to accept forward-to number.

Hear: • "To hear the entries on your list, press 1" • "To turn on/off selective call forwarding, press 3" • "To add an entry to your list, press the pound key" • "To remove an entry from your list, press the star key" • "To hear this menu again, press zero"

4. Press 1 to hear the entries on your list.

Hear: • "There are no entries on your list." or • "There are X entries on your list." • "The first entry on your list is XXXXX" • "Next, XXXXX" • "Next, XXXXX"

5. Repeats until list is complete Main Menu plays

Activate Selective Call Forward

Step Action Result


2. Dial *63. Hear: • “Selective Call Forwarding is off" • "There are X entries in your list" • "To hear the entries on your list, press 1" • "To turn on selective call forwarding, press 3" • "To add an entry to your list, press the pound key" • "To remove an entry from your list, press the star key" • "To hear this menu again, press zero"

3. Press 3 to turn on selective call forwarding.

Hear: • "Your calls will be forwarded to XXXXX" • "If this number is correct press 1" • "If this number is not correct press 0 to change it"

4. Press 1 to accept new forward-to number.

Hear: • "Selective Call Forwarding is on • "To hear the entries on your list, press 1" • "To turn on/off selective call forwarding, press 3"

MM


Aastra – 2512-004 347

Step Action Result

• "To add an entry to your list, press the pound key" • "To remove an entry from your list, press the star key" • "To hear this menu again, press zero"

Deactivate Selective Call Forward

Step Action Result


2. Dial *63. Hear: • “Selective Call Forwarding is on" • "There are X entries in your list" • "Your calls will be forwarded to XXXXX" • "If this number is correct press 1" • "If this number is not correct press 0 to change it"

3. Press 1 to accept forward-to number.

Hear: • "To hear the entries on your list, press 1" • "To turn off selective call forwarding, press 3" • "To add an entry to your list, press the pound key" • "To remove an entry from your list, press the star key" • "To hear this menu again, press zero"

4. Press 3 to turn off selective call forwarding.

Hear: • "Selective Call Forwarding is off" • "To hear the entries on your list, press 1" • "To turn on selective call forwarding, press 3" • "To add an entry to your list, press the pound key" • "To remove an entry from your list, press the star key" • "To hear this menu again, press zero"

Add an Entry on Your List

Step Action Result


2. Dial *63. Hear: • “Selective Call Forwarding is on/off" • "There are X entries in your list" • "Your calls will be forwarded to XXXXX"

M M


348 Aastra– 2512-004

Step Action Result

• "If this number is correct press 1" • "If this number is not correct press 0 to change it"


4. Press # key to add an entry to your list. Hear: • "Dial the number to be added, followed by the pound

key" • "To add the previous caller to your list press 01

followed by the pound key

5. Dial new entry number.

If an incorrect digit is entered, the user can press the * key to clear the dialed digits. The user is then returned to the main menu.

6. Press #. Hear: "The number you have added is XXXX" And the Menu replays

7. Dial 01 to add the number of the previous caller.

8. Press #. Hear: "The number you have added is XXXX" and the Menu replays

Remove an Entry from Your List

Step Action Result


2. Dial *63. Hear: • “Selective Call Forwarding is on/off" • "There are X entries in your list" • "Your calls will be forwarded to XXXXX" • "If this number is correct press 1"

MM


Aastra – 2512-004 349

Step Action Result

• "If this number is not correct press 0 to change it"


4. Press * to remove an entry from your list.

Hear: • "Dial the number to be removed followed by the pound key" • "To remove the number of the previous caller, dial 01

followed by the pound key" • "To remove all entries from the list, dial 08 followed by the

pound key" • "To remove all private entries from the list, dial 09 followed

by the pound key"

5. Dial the number to be removed.

If an incorrect digit is entered, the user can press the * key to clear the dialed digits. The user is then returned to the main menu.

6. Press #. Hear: "The number you have removed is XXXX" And the Menu replays.

7. Dial 01 to remove the number of the previous caller.

8. Press #. Hear: "The number you have removed is XXXX" And the Menu replays.

9. Dial 08 to remove all entries. Hear: "There are no entries on your list" And the Menu replays.

10. Press #. Hear: "There are no entries on your list" And the Menu replays.

11. Dial 09 to remove all private entries.

12. Press #. Hear:

M M


350 Aastra– 2512-004

Step Action Result

"The number you have removed is XXXX" And the Menu replays.

Selective Call Forward Database Configuration The following procedures set up the SCF CLASS feature:

• Enable feature in CLOS • Display feature availability

For IVS circuit group and phrase group set up, refer to System Database Administration (2513-nnn) or PointSpan IVC Card Features and Support (2489-nnn).

Enable Service Selective Call Forward in CLOS

Step Action Display



3. Type M and press Enter. UPDT MODE:C-Create,M-Modify,D-Delete,P-Copy => M



5. Type SCF and press Enter to modify Selective Call Forwarding feature.

Specify CLOS Field To Modify or - or ?.... => SCF

6. Type Y and press Enter to activate the Selective Call Forwarding feature.

SELECTIVE CALL FORWARDING: Y=YES; N=NO.Y => Y



8. Verify the new feature setting. *** VERIFY/DISPLAY ***

** Class OF SERVICE # 31 04/30/02 12:47:02

TYP...Class OF SERVICE TYPE..............UNIVERSAL SCF...SELECTIVE CALL FORWARDING ALLOWED...YES

9. Type Y and press Enter to verify. DOES UPDATE VERIFY ? => y


MM


Aastra – 2512-004 351

Display SCF Availability for a Partition

Step Action Display

1. Type SPAR and press Enter. SELECT COMMAND => SPAR


3. Type F at the prompt to select feature display and press Enter.


4. Display Selective Call Forwarding feature availability.

FEATURE AVAILABILITY:

DELUXE AUTO CALL DISTRIBUTION......YES ACD CallNet........................NO ACD CDR EVENT......................YES INTEMAIL..........................YES HOTLINE/MEET ME CONFERENCE.........YES MULTIPLE TIME ZONES................YES NAME/NUMBER DIRECTORY.............YES .

.

DYNAMIC AGENT SIGN-ON CAPABILITY...NO CALL PROGRESS TONE DETECTION.......NO EXPANDED NUMBER OF BUTTONS.........NO WORK AT HOME STATIONS..............YES IVS SERVICES......................YES LINE CARD COUNTING.................NO SELECTIVE CALL FORWARD............YES ENTER DISPLAY TYPE or ?............S=>

M M


352 Aastra– 2512-004

MM


Aastra – 2512-004 353

Appendix I Feature Codes

ITE4 Feature Codes

With Access Button

Stan

dard

Fea

ture

Cod

es U

sing

the

Acc

ess

But

ton

Without Access Button

Feature Action

Stan

dard

Fea

ture

Cod

es fr

om D

ial T

one Abbreviated Dial

Access the following features from dial tone without using the Access button.

Press

Return a Callback Press

Press Call Pickup

Do Not Disturb On Press

Do Not Disturb Off Press

Call Forward On

Call Forward Off

Press

Last Number Redial Press

Voice Mail Press

+ Number

Press

+ Number

M M

Index

354 Aastra– 2512-004

STE Feature Codes

With Switchhook or Tap Button

Stan

dard

Fea

ture

Cod

es U

sing

the

Switc

hhoo

k or

Tap

But

ton

From Dial Tone

Feature Action

Stan

dard

Fea

ture

Cod

es fr

om D

ial T

one Abbreviated Dial

Access the following features from dial tone without using the Switchhook or Tap button.

Press

Return a Callback Press

Press Call Pickup

Do Not Disturb On Press

Do Not Disturb Off Press

Call Forward On

Call Forward Off

Press

Last Number Redial Press

Voice Mail Press

+ Number

Press

+ Number

proprietary and contents section - miteledocs.mitel.com/ug/aastra/techdocs/pointspan/251204.pdf ·...

Documents